For any assistance with regard to our product, please contact

VIN:
MODEL:
OWNER
NAME &
ADDRESS
VARIANT:
COLOUR:
ENGINE NO.:
CONTACT NO.
KEY NO.:
E-mail ID:
INVOICE DATE:
ODOMETER READING
KM
REGISTRATION NO.:
SELLING
DEALER NAME
& CODE
BATTERY MAKE:
DEALER
SHOWROOM
ADDRESS &
CONTACT NO.
(STAMP)
BATTERY NO.:
BATTERY BATCH
TYRE
MAKE
BATCH CODE
Front Right
Front Left
Rear Right
CONTACT NO.
FOR SERVICE
APPOINTMENT
& SUPPORT
Rear Left
Spare
For any assistance with regard to our product, please contact General Manager/Works Manager at any of our authorised Maruti Suzuki Nexa
dealer / authorised Maruti Suzuki Workshop. For additional enquiry you may contact our Regional Office or Service Department. The
addresses and phone numbers are given in Service Network section of this Manual / Service Network booklet.
OCKPVGPCPEG"UGTXKEG"TGEQTFU
DATE OF
SERVICE
KIND OF
SERVICE
MILEAGE
(KM)
DESCRIPTION OF JOB
F: .... FREE SERVICE, P:.... PAID SERVICE, W:.... WARRANTY JOB, A:.... ACCIDENTAL JOB
NAME OF SERVICING WORKSHOP
JOB CARD NO.
MECHANICS
SIGNATURE
(CUSTOMER’S COPY)
(1,000 KM or 1 MONTH)
WHICHEVER COMES FIRST
JOB MARK: √ : Checked OK, A: Adjust, C: Clean, R: Replace or Change, L: Lubricate, T: Tighten,
O: Rotate, I: Inspect and correct or replace if necessary
(DEALER’S COPY)
(1,000 KM or 1 MONTH)
Please see overleaf for special instructions
Model Code*
(1) Engine Coolant (Level, Leakage)
(2) Engine Oil (Level, Leakage)
(3) Cooling System Hoses & Connections
(Leakage, Damage)
(1) Fuel Filter (Leakage) (Petrol)
(2) Fuel Filter - Water Draining (Diesel)
(1) Struts / Shock Absorbers (Leakage, Damage)
(2) Rear spring (Damage)
Chassis No. :
Engine No. :
(1) Steering wheel (Play)
(2) All Rods & Arms (Loose, Damage, Wear)
(3) Tilt/Telescopic (if equipped) Steering (Operation)
Mileage
Date of Invoice
Date of Inspection
(1) Clutch Pedal (Play) (Petrol)
(2) Clutch Fluid (Level, Leakage)
(3) Clutch Slipping (Dragging, Damage)
(4) Manual Transmission Oil (Level, Leakage)
(5) Gear Shifter (Operation)
(6) Drive Shaft Noise
(1) Brake Fluid (Level, Leakage)
(2) Brake Pedal (Pedal to Carpet Clearance)
(3) Parking Brake Lever & Cable (Play, Damage)
(4) Brake Hoses & Pipes (Leakage, Damage)
(5) Master Cylinder, Wheel Cylinder & Caliper
Piston (Leakage, Damage)
(1) Tyres (Air pressure, Abnormal wear, Damage)
(2) Wheels (Damage)
(3) Front / Rear Wheel Bearings (Loose, Damage)
(1) Battery-Electrolyte (Level, Leakage) & Voltage
(2) Lighting System / Horn (Operation)
(3) Wiper (Operation)
(1) All Latches, Hinges & Locks / Central
Locking (Operation)
HEATING AND AIR-CONDITIONING
(1) Drive belt (Tension)
(2) Check Functioning of Recirculating Flap
(3) Check all Hose Joints & Mounting Bolts
(4) A/C Filter Element (Inspect)(if equipped)
Registration No.
Service Dealer Code
Customer Name
Address (Please write complete address)
(1) Operation of Brakes, Clutch, Gear
Shifting & Speedometer
(2) Body & Chassis noise
Mechanic’s Signature
COST OF MATERIALS AND CONSUMABLES TO BE BORNE BY CUSTOMER
* Model Code: Baleno (Petrol) : A1K412
Baleno RS (Petrol) : A1K310
Baleno (Diesel) : A1K413D
Service Manager’s Signature
Customer’s Signature
Model Code*
Chassis No. :
Engine No. :
Mileage
Date of Invoice
Date of Inspection
Registration No.
Service Dealer Code
Customer Name
Address (Please write complete address)
For Servicing Dealer
Mechanic’s Signature
Service Manager’s Signature
Customer’s Signature
(CUSTOMER’S COPY)
(5,000 KM or 6 MONTHS)
WHICHEVER COMES FIRST
JOB MARK: √ : Checked OK, A: Adjust, C: Clean, R: Replace or Change, L: Lubricate, T: Tighten,
O: Rotate, I: Inspect and correct or replace if necessary
(DEALER’S COPY)
(5,000 KM or 6 MONTHS)
Please see overleaf for special instructions
Model Code*
(1) Engine Coolant (Level, Leakage)
(2) Engine Oil (Level, Leakage)
(3) Cooling System Hoses & Connections
(Leakage, Damage)
(4) Exhaust System (Noise, Leakage)
(5) PCV System (Hoses, Connections, Value)(Petrol)
(1) Air Cleaner Filter Element (Clean) (Petrol)
(2) Fuel Filter, Fuel Tank cap, Fuel Lines and
Connection (Leakage)
(3) Fuel Filter - Water Draining (Diesel)
(1) Clutch Pedal (Play) (Petrol)
(2) Clutch Fluid (Level, Leakage)
(3) Clutch Slipping (Dragging, Damage)
(4) Manual Transmission Oil (Level, Leakage)
(5) Gear Shifter (Operation)
(6) Drive shaft Noise & Boots (Damage)
(1) Brake Fluid (Level, Leakage)
(2) Brake Pedal (Pedal to Carpet Clearance)
(3) Parking Brake Lever & Cable (Play, Damage)
(4) Brake Disc & Pads (Inspect)
(5) Brake Hoses & Pipes (Leakage, Damage)
(6) Master Cylinder, Wheel Cylinder & Caliper
Piston (Leakage, Damage)
(1) Tyres (Air pressure, Abnormal Wear, Rotation)
(2) Wheels (Damage)
(3) Front / Rear Wheel Bearing (Loose, Damage)
(1) Struts/Shock Absorbers (Leakage, Damage)
(2) Suspension Arms, Knuckle, Rear Spring
(Damage, Loose)
(3) All nuts & Bolts (Tighten)
Chassis No. :
Engine No. :
Mileage
(1) Steering Wheel (Play)
(2) All Rods & Arms (Loose, Damage, Wear)
(3) Tilt/Telescopic (if equipped) Steering (Operation)
(1) Battery-Electrolyte (Level, Leakage) & Voltage
(2) Lighting System/Horn (Operation)
(3) Wiring Harness Connections (Loose, Damage)
(4) AUX USB / Accessory Socket (Operation)
(5) Wiper (Operation)
Date of Invoice
Date of Inspection
Registration No.
Service Dealer Code
(1) All Latches, Hinges & Locks/Central Locking
(Operation & Lubrication)
(2) All Chassis Nuts & Bolts (Inspect)
HEATING AND AIR-CONDITIONING
(1) Drive Belt (Tension, Damage)
(2) Check Functioning of Recirculating Flap
(3) Check all Hose Joints & Mounting Bolts
(4) Compressor Mounting Bolts (Tighten)
(5) Clean Condenser with Low Pressure Water
(6) A/C Filter Element (Inspect) (if equipped)
Mechanic’s Signature
Service Manager’s Signature
(1) Operation of Brakes, Clutch, Gear
Shifting & Speedometer
(2) Body & Chassis noise
COST OF MATERIALS AND CONSUMABLES TO BE BORNE BY CUSTOMER
Customer’s Signature
* Model Code: Baleno (Petrol) : A1K412
Baleno RS (Petrol) : A1K310
Baleno (Diesel) : A1K413D
Model Code*
Chassis No. :
Engine No. :
Mileage
Date of Invoice
Date of Inspection
Registration No.
Service Dealer Code
For Servicing Dealer
Mechanic’s Signature
Service Manager’s Signature
Customer’s Signature
(CUSTOMER’S COPY)
(10,000 KM or 12 MONTHS)
WHICHEVER COMES FIRST
JOB MARK: √ : Checked OK, A: Adjust, C: Clean, R: Replace or Change, L: Lubricate, T: Tighten,
O: Rotate, I: Inspect and correct or replace if necessary
(DEALER’S COPY) (10,000 KM or 12 MONTHS)
Please see overleaf for special instructions
Model Code*
(1) Engine Coolant (Level, Leakage)
(2) Cooling System Hoses & Connections
(Leakage, Damage)
(3) Engine Oil, Oil Filter & Drain Plug
Gasket (Replace)
(4) Engine Mounting & Manifold Fixing
(Loose, Damage etc.)
(1) Air Cleaner Filter Element (Clean)
(2) Fuel Filter (Leakage) (Petrol)
(3) Fuel Filter - Water Draining (Diesel)
(4) Fuel Injector (Inspection)(Petrol - K10C)
(1) Clutch Pedal (Play) (Petrol)
(2) Clutch Fluid (Level, Leakage)
(3) Clutch Slipping (Dragging, Damage)
(4) Manual Transmission Oil (Level, Leakage)
(5) Gear Shifter (Operation)
(6) Drive Shaft Noise & Boots (Damage)
(1) Brake Fluid (Level, Leakage)
(2) Brake Pedal (Pedal to Carpet Clearance)
(3) Parking Brake Lever & Cable (Play, Damage)
(4) Brake Disc & Pads (Inspect)
(5) Brake Hoses & Pipes (Leakage, Damage)
(6) Brake Drums & Shoes (Inspect)
(7) Master Cylinder, Wheel Cylinder & Caliper
Piston (Leakage, Damage)
(1) Tyres (Air pressure, Abnormal wear, Rotation)
(2) Wheels (Damage)
(3) Front / Rear Wheel Bearing (Loose, Damage)
(1) Struts/Shock Absorbers (Leakage, Damage)
(2) Suspension Arms, Knuckle, Rear Spring
(Damage, Loose)
(3) All Nuts & Bolts (Tighten)
Chassis No. :
Engine No. :
Mileage
(1) Steering Wheel (Play)
(2) All Rods & Arms (Loose, Damage, Wear)
(3) Tilt/Telescopic (if equipped) Steering (Operation)
(1) Battery-Electrolyte (Level, Leakage) & Voltage
(2) Lighting System/Horn (Operation)
(3) Wiring Harness Connections (Loose, Damage)
(4) AUX USB / Accessory Socket (Operation)
(5) Wiper (Operation)
Date of Invoice
Date of Inspection
Registration No.
Service Dealer Code
(1) All Latches, Hinges & Locks/Central Locking
(Operation & Lubrication)
(2) All Chassis Nuts & Bolts (Tighten)
HEATING AND AIR-CONDITIONING
(1) Drive Belt (Tension, Damage)
(2) Check Functioning of Recirculating Flap
(3) Check all Hose Joints & Mounting Bolts
(4) Compressor Mounting Bolts (Tighten)
(5) Clean Condenser with Low Pressure Water
(6) A/C Filter Element (Inspect) (if equipped)
(7) Check Belt For Frayed Edges
Mechanic’s Signature
Service Manager’s Signature
(1) Operation of Brakes, Clutch, Gear
Shifting & Speedometer
(2) Body & Chassis Noise
COST OF MATERIALS AND CONSUMABLES TO BE BORNE BY CUSTOMER
Customer’s Signature
* Model Code: Baleno (Petrol) : A1K412
Baleno RS (Petrol) : A1K310
Baleno (Diesel) : A1K413D
Model Code*
Chassis No. :
Engine No. :
Mileage
Date of Invoice
Date of Inspection
Registration No.
Service Dealer Code
For Servicing Dealer
Mechanic’s Signature
Service Manager’s Signature
Customer’s Signature
FOREWORD
This manual is an essential part of your
vehicle and should remain with the vehicle
when resold or otherwise transferred to a
new owner or operator. Please read this
manual carefully before operating your
new MARUTI SUZUKI and review the
manual from time to time. It contains
important information on safety, operation
and maintenance. You are invited to avail
the three Free Inspection Services as
described in the manual. Three free
inspection coupons are attached to this
manual. Please show this manual to your
dealer while you take your MARUTI
SUZUKI for any Service.
To prolong the life of your vehicle and
reduce maintenance cost, the periodic
maintenance must be carried out according to “PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULE” described in “INSPECTION
AND MAINTENANCE” section of this manual. It is essential for preventing trouble
and accidents to ensure your satisfaction
and safety.
Daily inspection and care as per “DAILY
INSPECTION CHECKLIST” described in
the “INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE”
section of this manual is essential for prolonging the life of the vehicle and for safe
driving.
MARUTI SUZUKI INDIA LIMITED believes
in conservation and protection of Earth’s
natural resources.
To that end, we encourage every vehicle
owner to recycle, trade-in or properly dispose of, as appropriate, used Engine Oil,
coolant and other fluids, batteries and
tyres etc.
MARUTI SUZUKI INDIA LIMITED
All information in this manual is based
on the latest product information available at the time of publication. Due to
improvements or other changes, there
may be discrepancies between information in this manual and your vehicle.
MARUTI
SUZUKI
INDIA
LIMITED
reserves the right to make production
changes at any time, without notice and
without incurring any obligation to
make the same or similar changes to
vehicles previously built or sold.
This vehicle may not comply with standards or regulations of other countries.
Before attempting to register this vehicle in any other country, check all applicable regulations and make any necessary modifications.
1
68PH0-74E
IMPORTANT
MODIFICATION
ING
WARNING/
CAUTION/NOTICE/
NOTE
Please read this manual and follow its
instructions carefully. To emphasize special information, the symbol and the words
WARNING, CAUTION, NOTICE and
NOTE have special meanings. Pay particular attention to messages highlighted by
these signal words:
WARNING
WARNING
Indicates a potential hazard that
could result in death or serious
injury.
CAUTION
Indicates a potential hazard that
could result in minor or moderate
injury.
NOTICE
Indicates a potential hazard that
could result in vehicle damage.
NOTE:
Indicates special information to make
maintenance easier or instructions clearer.
WARN-
75F135
The circle with a slash in this manual
means “Don’t do this” or “Don’t let this happen”.
Do not modify your vehicle. Modification could adversely affect safety,
handling, performance, or durability
and may violate governmental regulations. In addition, damage or performance problems resulting from
modification may not be covered
under warranty.
NOTICE
Improper installation of mobile communication equipment such as cellular telephones, CB (Citizen’s Band)
radios or any other wireless transmitters may cause electronic interference with your vehicle’s ignition
system, resulting in vehicle performance problems. Consult your MARUTI SUZUKI dealer or qualified
service technician for advice.
NOTICE
Severe damage may be caused by
the use of either poor quality fuel
and/or lubricants not recommended
by MARUTI SUZUKI.
2
68PH0-74E
WARRANTY POLICY
(4) Limitation:
This warranty shall not apply to:
Maruti Suzuki India Limited (hereinafter called “Maruti Suzuki”),
warrants that each new Maruti Suzuki vehicle distributed in India
by Maruti Suzuki and sold by an authorised Maruti Suzuki NEXA
dealer will be free, under normal use and service, from any
defects in material and workmanship at the time of manufacture
SUBJECT TO THE FOLLOWING TERMS AND CONDITIONS:
(1) Qualification:
To qualify for this warranty:
The Maruti Suzuki vehicle must be delivered by authorised Maruti
Suzuki NEXA dealer and serviced by authorised Maruti Suzuki
workshop.
(2) Term:
The term of the warranty shall be twenty-four (24) months or
40,000 kilometers (whichever occurs first) from the date of
invoice to the first owner.
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(3) Maruti Suzuki Warranty Obligation:
If any defect(s) should be found in a Maruti Suzuki vehicle within
the term stipulated above, Maruti Suzuki’s only obligation is to
repair or replace at its sole discretion any part shown to be defective, with a new part or the equivalent at no cost to the owner for
parts or labour, when Maruti Suzuki acknowledges that such a
defect is attributable to faulty material or workmanship at the time
of manufacture. The owner is responsible for any repair or replacements which are not covered by this warranty.
(g)
(h)
(i)
(j)
(k)
Normal maintenance service required other than the three
free services, including without limitation, oil and fluid
changes, headlight aiming, fastener retightening, wheel balancing, wheel alignment and tyre rotation, cleaning of injectors, adjustments of carburettor, ignition timing, clutch and
valve clearance.
The replacement of normal wear parts including without limitation, bulbs, tyres and tubes, spark plugs, belts, hoses, filters, wiper blades, brushes, contact points, fuses, clutch
disc, brake shoes, brake pads, cable and all rubber parts
(except oil seal and glass run).
Any vehicle which has been used for competition or racing.
Any repairs or replacement required as a result of accidents
or collision.
Any defects caused by misuse, negligence, abnormal use or
insufficient care.
Any vehicle which has been modified or altered, including
without limitation, the installation of performance accessories.
Any vehicle on which parts or accessories not approved by
Maruti Suzuki have been used.
Any vehicle which has not been operated in accordance with
the operating instructions in this Owner’s Manual and Service Booklet.
Any vehicle which has not received, during the warranty term,
the service inspections prescribed in this Owner’s Manual
and Service Booklet.
Any vehicle which has been assembled, disassembled,
adjusted or repaired by other than authorised Maruti Suzuki
workshop.
Any vehicle which has been used for purposes other than
what it was designed for.
3
68PH0-74E
(l)
(m)
(n)
(o)
(p)
(q)
Any damage or deterioration caused by industrial pollution
and bird droppings.
Insignificant defects which do not affect the function of the
vehicle including without limitation, sound, vibration and fluid
seep.
Any natural wear and tear including without limitation, ageing
etc.
Installation and usage of domestic LPG gas/LPG Cylinder.
V-belts, hoses and gas leaks.
Any vehicle retrofitted with LPG/CNG kits.
(5) Extent of Warranty:
This warranty is the entire written warranty given by Maruti Suzuki
for Maruti Suzuki vehicles and no dealer or its or his agent or
employee is authorised to extend or enlarge this warranty and no
dealer or its or his agent or employee is authorised to make any
oral warranty on Maruti Suzuki’s behalf.
Maruti Suzuki reserves the right to add any improvements or
change the design of any model at any time with no obligation to
make the same changes on units previously sold.
(6) Warranty Service:
– Make certain that the authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop
has certified the work on the “Maintenance Service Record”
page in the “Owner’s Manual and Service Booklet and
– Present the Maruti Suzuki “Owner’s Manual and Service
Booklet to the authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop whenever
requesting service inspections or warranty service.
If the “Owner’s Manual and Service Booklet” should be lost or
destroyed the owner should consult the authorised Maruti Suzuki
workshop from whom the vehicle was purchased for instructions
concerning replacement of the “Owner’s Manual and Service
Booklet”.
(8) Disclaimer of Consequential Damage:
Maruti Suzuki assumes no responsibility for loss of vehicle, loss of
time, inconvenience or any other indirect incidental or consequential damage resulting from the vehicle not being available to the
owner because of any defect covered by this warranty.
(9) Change of Owner
Even if ownership of the vehicle changes, the remaining warranty
period is effective for the new owner.
To obtain warranty service, the complete vehicle must be presented at the owner’s expenses to any authorised Maruti Suzuki
workshop.
(7) Owner’s Warranty Responsibilities:
It is responsibility of each owner to:
– Have performed, at his own expenses, by an authorised
Maruti Suzuki workshop all the service inspections specified
in the Maruti Suzuki “Owner’s Manual and Service Booklet
and maintain adequate proof that such service inspections
have been performed.
4
68PH0-74E
EMISSION WARRANTY POLICY
Maruti Suzuki offers the Emission Warranty on all Maruti Suzuki
vehicles (apart from the Regular Warranty and will run parallel to
the regular product warranty) only in four metropolitan cities (New
Delhi, Kolkata, Mumbai and Chennai) with effect from July 1st,
2001.
Terms:
The Emission Warranty will be applicable for 80,000 kms or 3
years (Whichever comes earlier) from the date of invoice to the
first owner. The remaining warranty terms will be valid in case of
any change in ownership provided the production of all valid documents.
Conditions:
1. Under Emission Warranty, Warranty claims will be admitted for
a prima-facie examination, in case vehicle fails to meet the
Emission Standard as specified in sub rule (2) of rule no. 115
of Central Motor Vehicles Rules (CMVR), 1989.
2. The warranty claims will only be accepted after examination
carried out by Maruti Suzuki or authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop which leads to firm conclusions that the
a) Original settings have not been tampered in any case.
b) Part (as given in Annexure - A) has a manufacturing defect.
c) Vehicle is unable to meet the Emission Standards (as given
in 1.), inspite of the vehicle having been maintained and
used in accordance with the instructions as specified in
Owner’s Manual and Service Booklet and the used fuel and
different oils (Engine oil, Transmission oil, Brake oil etc.) are
also as per specification.
3. The method of examination for deciding the warranty of the
parts will be at the sole discretion of Maruti Suzuki and authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop and results of the examination
will be final and binding. If after examination, the warrantable
condition is not established, Maruti Suzuki and authorised
Maruti Suzuki workshop has the right to charge all, or part of
the cost of such examination.
4. Under Emission Warranty, the parts (as given in Annexure - A)
will be changed free of cost, but the consumables will be
charged as per actual.
5. If the part covered under Emission Warranty or the associated
parts, are not independently replaceable, on account of these
being integral parts of a complete assembly, Maruti Suzuki and
authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop will have the sole discretion to replace either the entire assembly or by using some of
the parts of the system through suitable repairs or modifications.
6. Any consequential repairs or replacement of parts which may
be found necessary to establish compliance of Emission Warranty, will not be considered under warranty, unless the same is
under product warranty. The consumable will be charged as
per actual under such repair or replacement.
7. Maruti Suzuki will not be responsible for the cost of transportation of the vehicle to the nearest authorised Maruti Suzuki
workshop or any loss due to non-availability of the vehicle
during the period of lodging of a warranty claim and examination and/or repair by Maruti Suzuki workshop.
8. Maruti Suzuki will not be responsible for any penalty that may
be charged by statutory authorities on account of failure to
comply with the EMISSION STANDARDS.
9. Emission Warranty will not be affected by the change of owner,
provided all the documents are available.
5
68PH0-74E
10. All maintenance actions (as specified in the Owner’s Manual
and Service Booklet) need to be followed and recorded in the
manual for emission warranty.
11. The customer needs to produce the PUC (Pollution Under
Control) certificate valid for the period preceding the test
during which the failure is discovered. The receipts (for the
maintenance of the vehicle as per specification in Owner’s
Manual and Service Booklet from the date of original purchase of the vehicle) will also be required.
Conditions under which the Emission Warranty is not
APPLICABLE
1. In the absence of valid PUC certificate.
2. Vehicle not serviced from authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop
as per the schedule specified in the Owner’s Manual.
3. Vehicle subjected to abnormal use (accident, motor race, rallies or for the purpose of establishing the records etc).
4. Use of non MGP (Maruti Genuine Part).
5. Vehicle that has been tampered with.
6. Tampering with odometer so that the actual kilometer reading
cannot be determined.
7. Use of adulterated fuel and/or unspecified oils (Engine oil,
Transmission oil and Brake oil etc).
Annexure - A
List of parts covered under Emission Warranty
1. Fuel Injection Assembly, Pressure Regulator, Throttle Body
Assembly.
2. Electronic Control Module (ECM).
3. Intake Manifold.
4. EGR valve.
5. Ignition Coil.
6. Canister Assembly.
7. Vapour Liquid Seperator.
8. Fuel Tank and Filler Cap.
9. PCV (Positive Crankcase Ventilation) Valve.
10. Oil Filler Cap.
11. Catalytic Convertor.
12. Exhaust Manifold.
13. All Fuel Injection System related Sensors.
14. High Pressure Fuel Pump.
15. Glow Plug.
16. Glow Plug Controller.
6
68PH0-74E
TABLE OF CONTENTS
FUEL RECOMMENDATION
1
BEFORE DRIVING
2
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE
3
DRIVING TIPS
4
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
5
VEHICLE LOADING AND TOWING
6
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
7
EMERGENCY SERVICE
8
APPEARANCE CARE
9
GENERAL INFORMATION
10
SPECIFICATIONS
11
SERVICE NETWORK
12
76MH1-74E
FUEL RECOMMENDATION
FUEL RECOMMENDATION
S
1
Fuel Recommendation ........................................................ 1-1
68PH0-74E
FUEL RECOMMENDATION
Fuel Recommendation
Petrol Engine
You must use unleaded petrol with an
octane number (RON) of 91 or higher.
Petrol/Ethanol blends
Blends of unleaded petrol and ethanol
(grain alcohol), also known as gasohol, are
commercially available in some areas.
Blends of this type may be used in your
vehicle if they are no more than 10% ethanol. Make sure this petrol-ethanol blend
has octane ratings no lower than those
recommended for petrol.
Petrol/Methanol blends
Blends of unleaded petrol and methanol
(wood alcohol) are also commercially
available in some areas. DO NOT USE
fuels containing more than 5% methanol
under any circumstances. Fuel system
damage or vehicle performance problems
resulting from the use of such fuels are not
the responsibility of MARUTI SUZUKI and
may not be covered under the New Vehicle
Warranty.
Fuels containing 5% or less methanol may
be suitable for use in your vehicle if they
contain cosolvents and corrosion inhibitors.
NOTE:
If you are not satisfied with the driveability
or fuel economy of your vehicle when you
are using a petrol/alcohol blend, you
should switch back to unleaded petrol containing no alcohol.
NOTICE
The fuel tank has an air space to
allow for fuel expansion in hot
weather. If you continue to add fuel
after the filler nozzle has automatically shut off or an initial blowback
occurs, the air chamber will become
full. Exposure to heat when fully
fuelled in this manner will result in
leakage due to fuel expansion. To
prevent such fuel leakage, stop filling
after the filler nozzle has automatically shut off, or when using an alternative non-automatic system, initial
vent blowback occurs.
NOTICE
Be careful not to spill fuel containing
alcohol while refueling. If fuel is
spilled on the vehicle body, wipe it up
immediately. Fuels containing alcohol can cause paint damage, which is
not covered under the New Vehicle
Warranty.
1-1
68PH0-74E
FUEL RECOMMENDATION
Diesel Engine
You must use diesel fuel with Cetane Number (CN) higher than 51 and sulfur content
less than 50 ppm (parts per million).
MARUTI SUZUKI recommends to use the
diesel fuel conformable to EN590. Do not
use marine diesel fuel, heating oils and so
forth.
NOTICE
NOTICE
Be careful not to spill fuel containing
alcohol while refueling. If fuel is
spilled on the vehicle body, wipe it up
immediately. Fuels containing alcohol can cause paint damage, which is
not covered under the New Vehicle
Warranty.
The fuel tank has an air space to
allow for fuel expansion in hot
weather. If you continue to add fuel
after the filler nozzle has automatically shut off or an initial blowback
occurs, the air chamber will become
full. Exposure to heat when fully
fuelled in this manner will result in
leakage due to fuel expansion. To
prevent such fuel leakage, stop filling
after the filler nozzle has automatically shut off, or when using an alternative non-automatic system, initial
vent blowback occurs.
1-2
68PH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING
BEFORE DRIVING
Keys ......................................................................................2-1
Door Locks ...........................................................................2-2
Keyless Push Start System Remote Controller/
Keyless Entry System Transmitter (If equipped) ..............2-5
Security System (If equipped) ............................................2-14
Windows ...............................................................................2-16
Mirrors ..................................................................................2-19
Front Seats ...........................................................................2-21
Rear Seats ............................................................................2-23
Seat Belts and Child Restraint Systems ............................2-25
Child Restraint System For India.........................................2-39
Supplemental Restraint System (Air bags) .......................2-42
Instrument Cluster (Type A) (If equipped) ........................ 2-49
Speedometer ....................................................................... 2-50 2
Fuel Gauge ........................................................................... 2-50
Brightness Control .............................................................. 2-51
Information Display ............................................................. 2-51
Instrument Cluster (Type B) (If equipped) ........................ 2-58
Speedometer ....................................................................... 2-59
Tachometer .......................................................................... 2-59
Fuel Gauge ........................................................................... 2-59
Temperature Gauge ............................................................ 2-60
Brightness Control .............................................................. 2-60
Information Display ............................................................. 2-61
Instrument Cluster (Type C) (If equipped) ........................ 2-68
Speedometer ....................................................................... 2-69
Tachometer .......................................................................... 2-69
Fuel Gauge ........................................................................... 2-69
Temperature Gauge ............................................................ 2-70
Brightness Control .............................................................. 2-70
Information Display ............................................................. 2-71
Warning and Indicator Lights ............................................ 2-90
Lighting Control Lever ........................................................ 2-96
Headlight Leveling Switch ................................................ 2-101
Turn Signal Control Lever ................................................ 2-102
Hazard Warning Switch ..................................................... 2-103
Windshield Wiper and Washer Lever ............................... 2-103
Tilt/Telescoping (If equipped) Steering Lock Lever ......... 2-105
Horn .................................................................................. ... 2-106
Heated Rear Window Switch (If equipped) ....................... 2-106
68PH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING
Keys
Immobilizer System
EXAMPLE
54G489
Your vehicle comes with a pair of keys.
The key(s) may or may not be equipped
with a transmitter depending on model
variant. Keep the spare key in a safe
place. One key can open all of the locks on
the vehicle.
The key identification number is stamped
on a metal tag provided with the keys or on
the keys. Keep the tag (If equipped) in a
safe place. If you lose your keys, you will
need this number to have new keys made.
Write the number below for your future reference.
KEY NUMBER:
This system is designed to help prevent
vehicle theft by electronically disabling the
engine starting system.
The engine can be started only with your
vehicle’s original immobilizer ignition key
or keyless push start system remote controller which has an electronic identification
code programmed into it. The key or
remote controller communicates the identification code to the vehicle when the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position or
the engine switch is pressed to change the
ignition mode to “ON”. If you need to make
spare keys or remote controllers, see your
authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop. The
vehicle must be programmed with the correct identification code for the spare. A key
made by an ordinary locksmith will not
work.
For vehicles without keyless push start
system
If this light blinks, turn the ignition switch to
the “LOCK” position, then turn it back to
the “ON” position.
If the light still blinks after the ignition
switch is turned back to the “ON” position,
there may be something wrong with your
key or with the immobilizer system. Ask
your authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop to
have the system inspected.
For vehicles with keyless push start
system
If this light blinks, change the ignition mode
to “LOCK” (OFF), then change back to
“ON”. Also refer to “If the master warning
indicator light blinks and the engine cannot
be started” in “Starting the Engine (Vehicle
with Keyless Push Start System)” in the
“OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE” section.
If the light still blinks after the ignition mode
is changed back to “ON”, there may be
something wrong with your key or with the
immobilizer system. Ask your authorised
Maruti Suzuki workshop to have the system inspected.
80JM122
If the immobilizer/keyless push start system warning light blinks when the ignition
switch is in the “ON” position or the ignition
mode is “ON”, the engine will not start.
2-1
68PH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING
The immobilizer/keyless push start system
warning light may also blinks if the remote
controller is not in the vehicle when you
close the door or attempt to start the
engine.
NOTE:
• If you lose your immobilizer ignition key
or remote controller, see your authorised
Maruti Suzuki workshop as soon as possible to have the lost one deactivated,
then have the new key or remote controller made by them.
• If you own other vehicles with immobilizer keys, keep those keys away from
the ignition switch or the engine switch
when using your Vehicle, or the engine
may not be started because they may
interfere with your vehicle’s immobilizer
system.
• If you attach any metal objects to the
immobilizer key or remote controller, it
may not start the engine.
NOTICE
The immobilizer key and remote controller are sensitive electronic instruments. To avoid damaging them:
• Do not expose them to impacts,
moisture or high temperature such
as on the dashboard under direct
sunlight.
• Keep them away from magnetic
objects.
Ignition Key Reminder (If equipped)
A buzzer sounds intermittently to remind
you to remove the ignition key if it is in the
ignition switch when the driver’s door is
opened.
Door Locks
Side Door Locks
EXAMPLE
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
68PH00201
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
LOCK
UNLOCK
Front
Rear
To lock a driver’s door from outside the
vehicle:
• Insert the key and turn the top of the key
toward the front of the vehicle, or
• Turn the lock knob forward, then pull and
hold the door handle as you close the
door.
To unlock a driver’s door from outside the
vehicle, insert the key and turn the top of
the key toward the rear of the vehicle.
2-2
68PH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING
Central Door Locking System
EXAMPLE
EXAMPLE
(1)
(1)
(2)
(2)
(3)
NOTE:
You can switch the function that unlocks all
doors from twice operations to once operation, and vice versa, via the setting mode
of the information display. For details on
how to use the information display, refer to
“Information Display” in this section.
To unlock the driver’s door only, insert the
key in that door lock and turn the top of the
key toward the rear of the vehicle once.
EXAMPLE
(4)
(1)
68PH00202
(1) LOCK
(2) UNLOCK
To lock a door from inside the vehicle, turn
the lock knob forward. Turn the lock knob
rearward to unlock the door.
To lock a rear door from outside the vehicle, turn the lock knob forward and close
the door. You do not need to pull and hold
the door handle as you close the door.
NOTE:
Be sure to hold the door handle when you
close a locked front door, or the door will
not remain locked.
(2)
68PH00203
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
LOCK
UNLOCK
Front
Rear
You can lock and unlock all doors (including the tailgate) simultaneously by using
the key in the driver’s door lock.
To lock all doors simultaneously, insert the
key in the driver’s door lock and turn the
top of the key toward the front of the vehicle once.
To unlock all doors simultaneously, insert
the key in the driver’s door lock and turn
the top of the key toward the rear of the
vehicle twice.
68PH00204
(1) LOCK
(2) UNLOCK
You can also lock or unlock all doors by
depressing the front or rear of the switch,
respectively.
2-3
68PH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING
NOTE:
• You can also lock or unlock all doors by
operating the transmitter or remote controller. Refer to “Keyless Push Start System Remote Controller/Keyless Entry
System Transmitter” in this section.
• If your vehicle is equipped with the keyless push start system, you can also lock
or unlock all doors by pushing the
request switch. Refer to “Keyless Push
Start System Remote Controller/Keyless Entry System Transmitter” in this
section.
NOTE:
• All doors are automatically unlocked
when you change the ignition mode to
“LOCK” (OFF) or turn the ignition switch
to the “LOCK” position and pull out the
key.
• All doors are automatically locked for
safety when the vehicle speed reaches
15 km/h.
• You can change the automatic locking or
unlocking function mentioned above via
the setting mode of the information display.
For details on how to use the information
display, refer to “Information Display” in
this section.
Child-Proof Locks (Rear door)
Tailgate
EXAMPLE
(1)
(1)
EXAMPLE
68PH00205
(1) LOCK
(2) UNLOCK
68PH00206
(1) Tailgate unlatch switch
Each of the rear doors is equipped with a
child-proof lock which can be used to help
prevent unwanted opening of the door
from inside the vehicle. When the lock
lever is in the “LOCK” position (1), the rear
door can only be opened from outside.
When the lock lever is in the “UNLOCK”
position (2), the rear door can be opened
from inside or outside.
WARNING
Be sure to place the child-proof lock
in the “LOCK” position whenever
children are seated in the rear.
You can lock and unlock the tailgate by
using the key in the driver’s door lock.
To open the tailgate, push and hold the tailgate unlatch switch (1) and lift the tailgate.
NOTE:
When the tailgate is closed incompletely,
follow the procedure below:
1) Push the tailgate unlatch switch (1) and
open the tailgate.
2) After a few seconds, close the tailgate.
3) Make sure that the tailgate is closed
completely.
2-4
68PH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING
WARNING
Always make sure that the tailgate is
closed and latched securely. Completely closing the tailgate helps prevent occupants from being thrown
from the vehicle in the event of an
accident. Completely closing it also
helps keep exhaust gases from entering the vehicle.
If you cannot unlatch the tailgate by pushing the unlatch switch (1) due to a discharged battery or malfunction, follow the
procedures below to unlatch the tailgate
from inside the vehicle.
1) Remove the luggage compartment
cover and fold the rear seat forward for
easier access. Refer to “Folding Rear
Seats” section for details on how to fold
the rear seat forward.
2) To approach the emergency lever,
remove the trim of the tailgate.
Keyless Push Start System
Remote Controller/Keyless
Entry System Transmitter
(If equipped)
EXAMPLE
(2)
(3)
Type A
Type B
68PH00207
3) Open the cover (2), and then, move the
emergency lever (3) to the direction of
the arrow with a flat blade screwdriver
as shown in the illustration.
4) Push open the tailgate from inside. The
tailgate will be latched again by simply
closing the tailgate.
If the tailgate cannot be unlatched by pushing the unlatch switch (1), have the vehicle
inspected by your authorised Maruti
Suzuki workshop.
CAUTION
EXAMPLE
82PH02035
Your vehicle is equipped with either a keyless push start system remote controller
(Type A) or a keyless entry system transmitter (Type B). The remote controller has
a keyless entry system and a keyless push
start system. The transmitter has only a
keyless entry system. For details, refer to
the following explanations.
Make sure there is no one near the
tailgate when pushing open the tailgate from inside the vehicle.
2-5
68PH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING
WARNING
Radio waves from the keyless push
start system antenna(s) may interfere
with operation of electrical medical
equipment such as pacemakers. Failure to take the precautions listed
below can increase the risk of severe
injury or death due to radio wave
interference.
• Anyone who uses electrical medical equipment such as a pacemaker should consult the medical
equipment supplier or their medical
advisor about whether radio waves
from the antenna(s) can interfere
with the medical equipment.
• If radio wave interference is a concern, have the function of the
antenna(s) disabled by your authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop.
Keyless Push Start System Remote
Controller (Type A)
The remote controller enables the following operations:
• You can lock or unlock the doors by
operating the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons
on the remote controller. Refer to the
explanation in this section.
• You can lock or unlock the doors by
pushing the request switch. For details,
refer to the explanation in this section.
• You can start the engine without using
an ignition key. For details, refer to
“Engine Switch” in the “OPERATING
YOUR VEHICLE” section.
Central door locking system
• To lock all doors, push the “LOCK” button (1) once.
• To unlock only the driver’s door, push the
“UNLOCK” button (2) once.
• To unlock other doors, push the
“UNLOCK” button (2) once again.
NOTE:
You can switch the function that unlocks all
doors from twice operations to once operation, and vice versa, via the setting mode
of the information display. For details on
how to use the information display, refer to
“Information Display” in this section.
The turn signal lights will flash once and
the siren will sound once when the doors
are locked.
EXAMPLE
When the doors are unlocked:
• The turn signal lights will flash twice and
the siren will sound twice.
• If the interior light switch is in the
“DOOR” position, the interior light will
turn on for about 15 seconds and then
fade out. If you press the engine switch
during this time, the light will start to fade
out immediately.
(1)
(2)
68PH00208
(1) “LOCK” button
(2) “UNLOCK” button
You can lock or unlock all doors (including
the tailgate) simultaneously by operating
the remote controller near the vehicle.
Be sure the doors are locked after you
operate the “LOCK” button (1).
If no door is opened within about 30 seconds after the “UNLOCK” button (2) is
operated, the doors will automatically lock
again.
2-6
68PH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING
Car locator function
This function helps in locating the vehicle.
Push both of the “LOCK” button (1) and
“UNLOCK” button (2) for more than 3 seconds.
The turn signal lights will blink for about
27.5 seconds. Also, the siren will sound for
about 27.5 seconds at the same time.
To cancel the car locator function, press
any button (LOCK or UNLOCK).
You can also cancel the car locator function in any of the following operations.
• Press the engine switch to change the
ignition mode to ON.
• Bring the remote controller with you and
press the request switch.
NOTE:
The car locator function will not activate
when the ignition mode is “ACC” or “ON” or
pre warning / full blast warning by shock
sensor or alarm is in activated condition.
NOTE:
• If you lock the doors using the remote
controller when the engine hood are
open, the siren will sound 3 times to
remind you.
• If the security system was triggered due
to an unauthorized entry into the vehicle
and then you unlock the doors using the
remote controller, the siren will sound 4
times to remind you. If this happens,
check whether your vehicle has been
broken into while you were away from it.
• Once you push both of the “LOCK” button (1) and “UNLOCK” button (2), then
you push one of the buttons within 5 seconds, the siren will not sound. However,
If you push one of the buttons twice
within 5 seconds, or push one of the buttons 5 seconds later, the siren will
sound.
• You can set whether the siren sounds
when locking or unlocking the door(s) via
the setting mode of the information display. For details on how to use the information display, refer to “Information
Display” in this section.
Keyless unlocking/locking using the
request switches
EXAMPLE
NOTE:
• The maximum operating distance of the
remote controller is about 5 m (16 ft.),
but this can vary depending on the surroundings, especially near other transmitting devices such as radio towers or
CB (Citizen’s Band) radios.
• The door locks cannot be operated with
the remote controller if the ignition mode
is other than the “LOCK” (OFF).
• If any door is open, you cannot lock the
door by operating the remote controller,
however unlock the door.
• If you lose one of the remote controllers,
ask your authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop as soon as possible for a replacement. Be sure to have your dealer
program the new remote controller code
in your vehicle’s memory so that the old
code is erased.
(1)
68PM02001
When the remote controller is within the
operating range described in this section,
you can lock or unlock the doors (including
the tailgate) by pushing the request switch
(1) on the driver’s door handle, front passenger’s door handle or tailgate.
To lock all doors when all doors are
unlocked:
• To lock all doors, push one of the
request switches once.
The turn signal lights will flash once and
the exterior siren will sound once when the
doors are locked.
2-7
68PH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING
To unlock a door or all doors:
• Push one of the request switches once
to unlock only one door.
• Push one of the request switches twice
to unlock all doors.
NOTE:
You can switch the function that unlocks all
doors from twice operations to once operation, and vice versa, via the setting mode
of the information display. For details on
how to use the information display, refer to
“Information Display” in this section.
When the doors are unlocked:
• The turn signal lights will flash twice and
the exterior siren will sound twice.
• If the interior light switch is in the
“DOOR” position, the interior light will
turn on for about 15 seconds and then
fade out. If you press the engine switch
during this time, the light will start to fade
out immediately.
Be sure the doors are locked after you
operate the request switch to lock the
doors.
NOTE:
• The door locks cannot be operated by
the request switch under the following
conditions:
– If any door is open or is not completely
closed.
– If the ignition mode is other than
“LOCK” (OFF).
• If no doors are opened within about 30
seconds after unlocking the doors by
pushing the request switch, the doors
will be locked again automatically.
EXAMPLE
(1)
(1)
(1)
68PH00210
NOTE:
• If the remote controller is outside the
request
switch
operating
range
described above, you will not be able to
operate the request switch.
• If the battery of the remote controller
runs down or there are strong radio
waves or noise, the request switch operating range may be reduced or the
remote controller may be inoperative.
• If the remote controller is too close to the
door glass, the request switches may not
operate.
• If a spare remote controller is in the vehicle, the request switches may not operate normally.
• The remote controller will only operate a
request switch if it is within the switch’s
operating range. For example, if the
remote controller is within the operating
range of the driver’s door request switch
but not the front passenger’s door
request switch or the tailgate request
switch, the driver’s door switch can be
operated but the front passenger’s door
switch or tailgate switch cannot be operated.
(1) 80 cm (2 1/2 feet)
When the remote controller is within
approximately 80 cm (2 1/2 feet) from a
front door handle or the tailgate switch, you
can lock or unlock the doors by pushing
the request switch.
2-8
68PH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING
NOTICE
The remote controller is a sensitive
electronic instrument. To avoid damaging the remote controller:
• Do not expose it to impacts, moisture or high temperature such as
by leaving it on the dashboard
under direct sunlight.
• Keep the remote controller away
from magnetic objects such as a
television.
NOTE:
The keyless push start system may not
function correctly in certain environments
or under certain operating conditions such
as the following:
• When there are strong signals coming
from a television, power station or a cellular phone.
• When the remote controller is in contact
with or covered by a metal object.
• When a radio wave type remote keyless
entry is used nearby.
• When the remote controller is placed
near an electronic device such as personal computer.
Some additional precautions you should
take and information you should be aware
of are:
• Make sure the key is stowed in the
remote controller. If the remote controller
becomes unreliable, you will not be able
to lock or unlock the doors.
• Be sure that the driver always carries the
remote controller.
• If you lose one of the remote controllers,
ask your authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop as soon as possible for a replacement. Be sure to have your dealer
program the new remote controller code
in your vehicle’s memory so that the old
code is erased.
• You can use up to four remote controllers and the keys for your vehicle. Ask
your authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop
for details.
• The battery life of the remote controller
is about two years, but it can vary
depending on usage conditions.
EXAMPLE
68PH00211
To stow the key into the remote controller,
push the key in the remote controller until
you hear a click.
EXAMPLE
(A)
68PH00212
To remove the key from the remote controller, push the button (A) in the direction of
the arrow and pull the key out from the
remote controller.
Request switch warning buzzer
This exterior buzzer beeps for about 2 seconds in the following conditions to warn
you that the request switch is not working:
• The request switch is pressed after all
doors are closed with the ignition mode
changed to “ACC” or “ON” by pressing
the engine switch.
• The request switch is pressed in any of
the following conditions after changing
the ignition mode to “LOCK” (OFF) by
pressing the engine switch.
– The remote controller is left inside the
vehicle.
– Any door (including the tailgate) is
open.
2-9
68PH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING
Press the request switch again after doing
the following:
With the ignition mode changed to “LOCK”
(OFF) by pressing the engine switch, bring
out the remote controller if it is inside the
vehicle and check that all doors are completely closed.
Reminder function
EXAMPLE
68PH00213
If the remote controller is not in the vehicle
under the following conditions, the buzzer
sounds intermittently for about 2 seconds
and the immobilizer/keyless push start system warning light on the instrument cluster
blinks:
When one or more doors are opened and
all of the doors are later closed with the
ignition mode is other than “LOCK”.
The indicator light will turn off within several seconds after the remote controller is
returned to an area of the vehicle other
than the rear luggage area.
If the remote controller is left in the vehicle
and you lock the driver’s door or front passenger’s door as described below, the door
will be automatically unlocked.
• If you open the driver’s door and lock the
door by turning the lock knob forward or
pushing the power door locking switch,
the driver’s door will be automatically
unlocked.
• If you open the front passenger’s door
and lock the door by turning the lock
knob forward or pushing the power door
locking switch, the front passenger’s
door will be automatically unlocked.
NOTE:
• The reminder will not operate when the
remote controller is on the instrument
panel, in the glove box, in a storage
compartment, in the sun visor or on the
floor etc.
• Be sure that the driver always carries the
remote controller.
• Do not leave the remote controller in the
vehicle when leaving the vehicle.
Replacement of the battery
If the remote controller becomes unreliable, replace the battery.
To replace the battery of the remote controller:
EXAMPLE
71LMT0201
1) Pull the key out from the remote controller.
2) Insert a flat blade screwdriver covered
with a soft cloth in the slot of the remote
controller and pry it open.
2-10
68PH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING
WARNING
EXAMPLE
Swallowing a lithium battery may
cause serious internal injury. Do not
allow anyone to swallow a lithium
battery. Keep lithium batteries away
from children and pets. If swallowed,
contact a physician immediately.
(1)
Keyless Entry System Transmitter
(Type B)
EXAMPLE
NOTICE
68PH00214
(1) Lithium disc type battery:
CR2032 or equivalent
3) Replace the battery (1) so its + terminal
faces the bottom of the case as shown
in the illustration.
4) Close the remote controller firmly.
5) Make sure the door locks can be operated with the remote controller.
6) Dispose of the used battery properly
according to applicable rules or regulations. Do not dispose of lithium batteries with ordinary household trash.
The remote controller is a sensitive
electronic instrument. To avoid damaging it, do not expose it to dust or
moisture or tamper with internal parts.
(1)
(2)
68PH00215
NOTE:
Used batteries must be disposed properly
according to applicable rules or regulations
and must not be disposed with ordinary
household trash.
(1) “LOCK” button
(2) “UNLOCK” button
You can lock or unlock all doors (including
the tailgate) simultaneously by operating
the transmitter near the vehicle.
2-11
68PH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING
Central door locking system
• To lock all doors, push the “LOCK” button (1) once.
• To unlock only the driver’s door, push the
“UNLOCK” button (2) once.
• To unlock other doors, push the
“UNLOCK” button (2) once again.
NOTE:
You can switch the function that unlocks all
doors from twice operations to once operation, and vice versa, via the setting mode
of the information display. For details on
how to use the information display, refer to
“Information Display” in this section.
The turn signal lights will flash once and
the siren will sound once when the doors
are locked.
When the doors are unlocked:
• The turn signal lights will flash twice and
the siren will sound twice.
• If the interior light switch is in the
“DOOR” position, the interior light will
turn on for about 15 seconds and then
fade out. If you insert the key into the
ignition switch during this time, the light
will start to fade out immediately.
Be sure the doors are locked after you
operate the “LOCK” button (1). If no door is
opened within about 30 seconds after the
“UNLOCK” button (2) is operated, the
doors will automatically lock again.
NOTE:
• If you lock the doors using the transmitter when the engine hood is open, the
siren will sound 3 times to remind you.
• If the security system was triggered due
to an unauthorized entry into the vehicle
and then you unlock the doors using the
transmitter, the siren will sound 4 times
to remind you. If this happens, check
whether your vehicle has been broken
into while you were away from it.
• Once you push both of the “LOCK” button (1) and “UNLOCK” button (2), then
you push one of the buttons within 5 seconds, the siren will not sound. However,
If you push one of the buttons twice
within 5 seconds, or push one of the buttons 5 seconds later, the siren will
sound.
• You can set whether the siren sounds
when locking or unlocking the door(s) via
the setting mode of the information display. For details on how to use the information display, refer to “Information
Display” in this section.
NOTE:
• The maximum operating distance of the
keyless entry system transmitter is about
5 m (16 ft.), but this can vary depending
on the surroundings, especially near
other transmitting devices such as radio
towers or CB (Citizen’s Band) radios.
• The door locks cannot be operated with
the transmitter, if the ignition key is
inserted in the ignition switch.
• If any door is open, you cannot lock the
door by operating the transmitter, however unlock the door.
• If you lose one of the transmitters, ask
your authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop
as soon as possible for a replacement.
Be sure to have your dealer program the
new transmitter code in your vehicle’s
memory so that the old code is erased.
NOTICE
The transmitter is a sensitive electronic instrument. To avoid damaging
the transmitter:
• Do not expose it to impacts, moisture or high temperature such as
by leaving it on the dashboard
under direct sunlight.
• Keep the transmitter away from
magnetic objects such as a television.
2-12
68PH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING
Car locator function
This function helps in locating the vehicle.
Push both of the “LOCK” button (1) and
“UNLOCK” button (2) for more than 3 seconds.
The turn signal lights will blink for about
27.5 seconds. Also, the siren will sound for
about 27.5 seconds at the same time.
To cancel the car locator function, press
any button (LOCK or UNLOCK). You can
also turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position to cancel the car locator function.
Replacement of the battery
If the transmitter becomes unreliable,
replace the battery.
EXAMPLE
(2)
To replace the battery of the transmitter:
EXAMPLE
(1)
(3)
(2)
NOTE:
The car locator function will not activate
when the key is in the ignition switch or pre
warning / full blast warning by shocksensor
or alarm is inactivated condition.
68PH00217
(3) Lithium disc type battery:
CR1616 or equivalent
68PH00216
1) Remove the screw (1), and open the
transmitter cover.
2) Remove the transmitter (2).
3) Put the edge of a flat blade screwdriver
in the slot of the transmitter (2) and pry
it open.
4) Replace the battery (3) so its + terminal
faces the “+” mark of the transmitter.
5) Close the transmitter and install it into
the transmitter holder.
6) Close the transmitter cover, install and
tighten the screw (1).
7) Make sure the door locks can be operated with the transmitter.
8) Dispose of the used battery properly
according to applicable rules or regulations. Do not dispose of lithium batteries with ordinary household trash.
2-13
68PH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING
WARNING
Swallowing a lithium battery may
cause serious internal injury. Do not
allow anyone to swallow a lithium
battery. Keep lithium batteries away
from children and pets. If swallowed,
contact a physician immediately.
NOTICE
The transmitter is a sensitive electronic instrument. To avoid damaging
it, do not expose it to dust or moisture or tamper with internal parts.
NOTE:
Used batteries must be disposed properly
according to applicable rules or regulations
and must not be disposed with ordinary
household trash.
Security System (If equipped)
The security system is armed after you
lock all doors (including engine hood and
tailgate) by using the keyless entry system
transmitter, keyless push start system
remote controller or request switch.
Once the system is armed, any attempt to
open a door by using any other means (*)
than the keyless entry system transmitter,
keyless push start system remote controller or open the engine hood, will cause the
alarm to be triggered.
* These means include the following:
– The key
– The lock knob on a door
– The central door locking switch
– The tailgate emergency lever
Also, in case that you have set the shock
sensor to enabled state and set sensitivity
of the pre-warning function and full blast
warning function to a level other than 0, the
warning will be triggered in case of any
attempt to tamper with the vehicle. The
shock sensor can be selected enabled or
disabled state, and sensitivity of each
warning can be adjusted as desired. To set
the shock sensor, ask your authorised
Maruti Suzuki workshop or use the setting
mode of the information display.
NOTE:
• The default setting of the shock sensor
is in the disabled state. Set to the
enabled state and adjust sensitivity of
each warning according to your preference. For details on how to use the information display, refer to “Information
Display” in this section.
• Your dealer may have already set the
shock sensor of the vehicle to the
enabled state before you purchase it.
Consult your dealer for further information.
NOTE:
• The security system generates alarms
when any of the predetermined conditions is met. However, the system does
not have any function of blocking unauthorized entry into the vehicle.
• Always use the keyless entry system
transmitter or keyless push start system
remote controller to unlock the doors when
the security system has been armed.
Using a key instead will trigger the alarm.
• If a person who does not know the security system is going to drive the vehicle,
we recommend you explain the system
and its operation to the person. Mistakenly triggering the alarm may cause a
nuisance to others.
• Even if the security system is armed,
you should still be careful to guard
against theft. Do not leave money or
things of value in the vehicle.
2-14
68PH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING
How to arm the security system
Lock all doors (including engine hood and
tailgate) using the keyless entry system
transmitter or keyless push start system
remote controller
.
When the system is armed, the indicator
continues to blink at intervals of approximately 2 seconds.
(1)
EXAMPLE
68PH00218
NOTE:
• To prevent the alarm from being accidentally triggered, avoid arming it while
anyone remains inside the vehicle. The
alarm will be triggered if any person
inside opens the door, tailgate, engine
hood, or the warning may be triggered if
anyone swings the vehicle (if the shock
sensor is in the enabled state).
• The security system is not armed when
all doors are locked using the key from
outside, using the door lock knobs or the
central door locking switch from inside.
• If any door is not operated within approximately 30 seconds after the doors have
been unlocked using the keyless entry
system transmitter or keyless push start
system remote controller, the doors are
automatically locked again. When the
doors are locked, the security system
will be armed.
• If the security system indicator (1) blinks
when the ignition switch is in the “ON”
position or the ignition mode is “ON”,
there may be something wrong with the
security system. Ask your authorised
Maruti Suzuki workshop to inspect the
system.
How to disarm the security system
Simply unlock the doors using the keyless
push start system remote controller, the
request switch or the keyless entry system
transmitter. The security system indicator
will go out, indicating that the security system is disarmed.
How to stop the alarm
Should the alarm be triggered accidentally,
the alarm will stop by the following operations.
• Press the engine switch to change the
ignition mode to “ON” or turn the ignition
switch to “ON” position in case of emergency.
• Unlock the doors using the keyless push
start system remote controller, the
request switch, or the keyless entry system transmitter.
NOTE:
• Even after the alarm has stopped, if you
lock the doors using the keyless entry
system transmitter or keyless push start
system remote controller, the security
system will be rearmed.
• If you disconnect the battery while the
security system is in the armed condition
or the alarm is actually in operation, the
alarm will be re-triggered when the battery is then reconnected.
• Even after the alarm has stopped at the
end of the predetermined operation time,
it will be triggered again if any of the
doors, tailgate or engine hood is opened,
or the warning may be triggered if the
vehicle feels a shock (If the shock sensor is in the enabled state), without disarming the security system.
Checking whether the alarm has been
triggered during parking
If the alarm was triggered and you then
turn the ignition switch to “ON” position or
the ignition mode is “ON”, the security system indicator will blink rapidly for about 8
seconds and a buzzer will beep 4 times
during this period. If this happens, check
whether the vehicle has been broken into
while you were away from it.
Security system indication
• If any of the doors or tailgate are opened
without unlocking by the keyless entry
system transmitter or keyless push start
system remote controller, all turn signal
2-15
68PH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING
lights start to blink and the interior
buzzer beeps intermittently. After 5 seconds, the siren will sound for about 27.5
seconds. The security system indicator
continues to blink during this time.
• If the engine hood is opened, all turn signal lights blink, and the siren sounds for
about 27.5 seconds. The security system indicator continues to blink during
this time.
• If the shock sensor is in the enabled
state and the vehicle feels a shock
higher than the pre-warning sensitivity,
the siren sounds for about 2 seconds
(pre-warning). If the vehicle feel a shock
higher than the full blast warning sensitivity, siren will sound for about 4.5 seconds (Full blast warning). The security
system indicator continues to blink
during this time.
NOTE:
If you set the full blast warning sensitivity
higher than the pre-warning sensitivity in
the setting mode of the information display,
or the vehicle feels such shock as to be
able to trigger the full blast warning, the full
blast warning will be triggered preferentially. In this case, the pre-warning will not
be triggered.
Windows
Electric Window Controls
The electric windows can only be operated
when the ignition switch is in the “ON”
position or the ignition mode is “ON”.
Manual Window Control
(If equipped)
EXAMPLE
Driver’s side (Type A)
EXAMPLE
(1)
(2)
60G010
Raise or lower the door windows by turning
the handle located on the door panel.
68PH00224
Driver’s side (Type B)
EXAMPLE
(1)
(4)
(2)
(3)
68PH00225
2-16
68PH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING
The driver’s door has a switch (1) to operate the driver’s window, and a switch (2) to
operate the front passenger’s window or
there are switches (3), (4), to operate the
rear left and right passenger windows,
respectively.
Lock switch
CLOSE
EXAMPLE
EXAMPLE
Passenger’s door
EXAMPLE
OPEN
81A009
(5)
68PH00226
The passenger’s door has a switch (5) to
operate the passenger’s window.
To open a window, push the top part of the
switch and to close the window lift up the
top part of the switch.
The driver’s window has “auto-down” and
“auto-up” (If equipped) features for added
convenience (at toll booths or drivethrough restaurants, for example). This
means the driver can open or close the
window without holding the window switch
in the “Down” or “Up” position. Press down
or lift up the driver’s window switch completely and release it. To stop the window
before it reaches the full-down or full-up
position, pull up or push down the switch
briefly.
68PH00227
The driver’s door also has a lock switch for
the passenger’s window(s). When you
push in the lock switch, the passenger’s
window(s) cannot be raised or lowered by
operating any of the switches (2), (3), (4)
or (5). To restore normal operation, release
the lock switch by pushing again.
2-17
68PH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING
WARNING
Pinching Prevention Function
(If equipped)
• You should always lock the passenger’s window operation when
there are children in the vehicle.
Children can be seriously injured if
they get part of their body caught
by the window during operation.
• To avoid injuring an occupant by
window entrapment, be sure no
part of the occupant’s body such as
hands or head is in the path of the
electric windows when closing
them.
• Always remove the ignition key or
take the keyless push start system
remote controller with you when
leaving the vehicle even if only for
a short time. Also do not leave children alone in a parked vehicle.
Unattended children could use the
electric window switches and get
trapped by the window.
The driver’s window is equipped with the
pinching prevention function. The function
detects a foreign object caught in the window while being closed by the “auto-up”
feature, by which you can close the window without holding the window switch in
the “Up” position, and stops the window
closing to prevent damage.
NOTE:
If you drive with one of the rear windows
open, you may hear a loud sound caused
by air vibration. To reduce the sound, open
the driver’s or front passenger’s window, or
narrow the rear window opening.
• The pinching prevention function
does not act while you are holding
the window switch in the “Up”
position.
• The pinching prevention function
may not detect an object caught in
the window just before the window
is fully closed.
WARNING
To avoid injuring an occupant by window entrapment, be sure no part of
the occupant’s body such as hands
or head is in the path of the electric
window when closing it.
The function may not detect the
object depending on size, hardness,
and position of the object caught by
the closing window.
CAUTION
NOTE:
Even if you cannot close the window by the
auto-up feature because there may be
something wrong with the pinching prevention function, you can close the window by
holding the window switch in the “Up” position.
If you drive in extreme off-road condition,
the pinching prevention function may operate accidentally because the window react
to vehicle jolting.
The Pinching Prevention Function Initialization
When you disconnect and re-connect the
battery or replace the fuse, the function will
be deactivated. In this condition, the autodown feature will be deactivated, while the
auto-up feature may remain being activated. The pinching prevention function
needs to be initialized.
To initialize the pinching prevention function, use the following procedure:
1) Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position or press the engine switch to
change the ignition mode to “ON”.
2) Open the driver’s window fully by holding the window switch in the “Down”
position.
3) Close the driver’s window by holding
the switch in the “Up” position, and
keep holding the switch for 2 seconds
after the window fully closed.
4) Check the driver’s window if the autodown/up feature work.
2-18
68PH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING
WARNING
Whenever you disconnect and reconnect the battery or replace the fuse,
the pinching prevention function
needs to be reinitialized.
The pinching prevention function will
not be activated until the initialization
complete.
Mirrors
WARNING
Inside Rearview Mirror
EXAMPLE
68LMT0205
If the auto-down/up feature would not work
after initialization, there might be something wrong with the pinching prevention
function. Have your vehicle inspected by
an authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop.
EXAMPLE
• Always adjust the mirror with the
selector set to the day position.
• Only use the night position if it is
necessary to reduce glare from the
headlights of vehicles behind you.
Be aware that in this position you
may not be able to see some
objects that could be seen in the
day position.
Auto Dimming Rearview Mirror
(If equipped)
(1)
(2)
EXAMPLE
(3)
68PH00228
(2) Day driving
(3) Night driving
You can adjust the inside rearview mirror
by hand so as to see the rear of your vehicle in the mirror. To adjust the mirror, set
the selector tab (1) to the day position,
then move the mirror up, down or sideways
by hand to obtain the best view.
When driving at night, you can move the
selector tab to the night position to reduce
glare from the headlights of vehicles
behind you.
(1)
(2)
68PH00229
You can adjust the auto dimming rearview
mirror by hand so you can see to the rear
of your vehicle in the mirror. This rearview
mirror has a function of automatically
reducing glare from the lights of vehicles
behind you. The function works when the
2-19
68PH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING
ignition mode has been changed to “ON”
by pressing the engine switch.
• The mirror is always set to the automatic
dimming mode when the ignition mode is
“ON”.
• When the switch (2) is pushed, the
green indicator (1) is lit, indicating that
the mirror is set to the automatic dimming mode. To cancel the automatic
dimming mode, push the switch (2); the
indicator (1) then goes out.
• The auto dimming rearview mirror is
automatically deactivated while the gearshift lever is in the “R” position.
Outside Rearview Mirrors
WARNING
Do not touch or cover the sensor (3)
since this may impair normal operation of the system. Blocking glare
from the sensor with an object such
as a shade, sticker, accessory or baggage may also impair proper operation of the system.
EXAMPLE
NOTICE
Do not hook anything heavy on the
mirror, or the mirror may break under
the weight.
68PH00231
Adjust the outside rearview mirrors so you
can just see the side of your vehicle in the
mirrors.
WARNING
(3)
(3)
EXAMPLE
Be careful when judging the size or
distance of a vehicle or other object
seen in the side convex mirror. Be
aware that objects look smaller and
appear farther away than when seen
in a flat mirror.
68PH00230
2-20
68PH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING
Electric Mirrors (If equipped)
Outside Rearview Mirrors Folding
Switch (If equipped)
(1)
EXAMPLE
(3)
EXAMPLE
Seat Adjustment
WARNING
(1)
(2)
Never attempt to adjust the driver’s
seat or seatback while driving. The
seat or seatback could move unexpectedly, causing loss of control.
Make sure that the driver’s seat and
seatback are properly adjusted
before you start driving.
(4)
(1)
(2)
Front Seats
(3)
(4)
WARNING
68PH00232
The switch to control the electric mirrors is
located on the driver’s door panel. You can
adjust the mirrors when the ignition switch
is in the “ACC” or “ON” position, or the ignition mode is “ACC” or “ON”. To adjust the
mirrors:
1) Move the selector switch to the left or
right to select the mirror you wish to
adjust.
2) Press the outer part of the switch that
corresponds to the direction in which
you wish to move the mirror.
3) Return the selector switch to the center
position to help prevent unintended
adjustment.
68PH00233
You can fold the mirrors when you park the
vehicle in a narrow space. When the ignition switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position,
or the ignition mode is “ACC” or “ON”,
push the folding switch (1) to fold and
unfold the mirrors. Make sure the mirrors
are completely unfolded before you start
driving.
CAUTION
Moving mirrors can pinch and injure
a hand. Do not allow any one’s hand
to get near the mirrors when folding
and unfolding the mirrors.
To avoid excessive seat belt slack,
which reduces the effectiveness of
the seat belts as a safety device,
make sure that the seats are adjusted
before the seat belts are fastened.
WARNING
All seatbacks should always be in an
upright position when driving, or seat
belt effectiveness may be reduced.
Seat belts are designed to offer maximum protection when seatbacks are
in the upright position.
2-21
68PH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING
Seat position adjustment lever (1)
Pull the lever up and slide the seat.
EXAMPLE
Seatback angle adjustment lever (2)
Pull the lever up and move the seatback.
Seat height adjustment lever (3)
(If equipped)
Pull the lever up to raise the seat. Push the
lever down to lower the seat.
After adjustment, try to move the seat and
seatback forward and rearward to ensure
that it is securely latched.
(2)
(3)
(1)
68PH00234
2-22
68PH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING
Head Restraints
EXAMPLE
NOTE:
It may be necessary to recline the seatback to provide enough overhead clearance to remove the head restraint.
Front
Rear Seats
Head Restraints (If equipped)
Head restraints are designed to help
reduce the risk of neck injuries in the case
of an accident.
WARNING
EXAMPLE
• Never drive the vehicle with the
head restraints removed.
• Do not attempt to adjust the head
restraint while driving.
NOTE:
It may be necessary to fold forward the
seatback to provide enough overhead
clearance to remove the head restraint.
80J001
Head restraints are designed to help
reduce the risk of neck injuries in the case
of an accident. Adjust the head restraint to
the position which places the center of the
head restraint closest to the top of your
ears. If this is not possible for very tall passengers, adjust the head restraint as high
as possible.
WARNING
• Never drive the vehicle with the
head restraints removed.
• Do not attempt to adjust the head
restraint while driving.
68PH00235
To raise the front head restraint, pull
upward on the head restraint until it clicks.
To lower the head restraint, push down on
the head restraint while holding in the lock
lever. If a head restraint must be removed
(For cleaning, replacement, etc.), push in
the lock lever and pull the head restraint all
the way out.
Adjust the head restraint to the position
which places the center of the head
restraint closest to the top of your ears. If
this is not possible for very tall passengers,
adjust the head restraint as high as possible.
2-23
68PH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING
Folding Rear Seats
Rear
The rear seat(s) of your vehicle can be
folded forward to provide additional cargo
space.
EXAMPLE
To fold the rear seats forward:
WARNING
If you need to carry cargo in the passenger compartment with the rear
seat back folded forward, be sure to
secure the cargo or it may be thrown
about, causing injury. Never pile
cargo higher than the seatbacks.
To return the seat to the normal position,
follow the procedure below.
WARNING
When returning the rear seatback to
the normal position, make sure that
there is nothing around the striker.
Any foreign materials prevent the
seatback from being locked securely.
68PH00236
To raise the rear head restraint, pull
upward on the head restraint until it clicks.
To lower the head restraint, push down on
the head restraint while holding in the lock
lever. If a head restraint must be removed
(For cleaning, replacement, etc.), push in
the lock lever and pull the head restraint all
the way out.
When installing a child restraint system,
raise the head restraint to the most upper
position.
EXAMPLE
68PH00237
1) Pull up the release knob on the top of
the seat(s), and fold the seatback forward.
NOTICE
CAUTION
When returning the rear seatback to
the normal position, be careful that
your finger is not caught between the
lock and the striker.
After folding the rear seatback forward, do not allow any foreign material to enter the lock opening. This
may cause damage to the inside of
the lock and prevent the seatback
from being locked securely.
2-24
68PH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING
NOTICE
EXAMPLE
68PH00238
Raise the seatback until it locks into place.
After returning the seat, try moving the
seatback to make sure they are securely
latched.
CAUTION
Do not put your hand into the rear
seatback lock opening, or your finger
may get caught and be injured.
• When returning the rear seatback
to the normal position, do not allow
any foreign material to enter the
lock opening. This may prevent the
seatback
from
being
locked
securely.
• When returning the rear seatback
to the normal position, be sure to
handle it carefully by hand to avoid
any damage to the lock itself. Do
not push it by using some material
or by applying excessive force.
• As the lock is designed exclusively
for securing the rear seatback, do
not use it for any other purpose.
Incorrect use of it may cause damage to the inside of the lock and
prevent the seatback from being
locked securely.
Seat Belts and Child Restraint
Systems
EXAMPLE
68PM2001
WARNING
Wear Your Seat Belts at All Times.
WARNING
An air bag supplements, or adds to,
the frontal crash protection offered
by seat belts. The driver and all passengers must be properly restrained
by wearing seat belts at all times,
whether or not an air bag is mounted
at their seating position, to minimize
the risk of severe injury or death in
the event of a crash.
2-25
68PH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING
EXAMPLE
Above the pelvis
EXAMPLE
as low as possible
across the hips
Across the pelvis
65D606
WARNING
• Never allow persons to ride in the
cargo area of a vehicle. In the event
of an accident, there is a much
greater risk of injury for persons
who are not riding in a seat with
their seat belt securely fastened.
• Seat belts should always be
adjusted as follows:
– the lap portion of the belt should
be worn low across the pelvis,
not across the waist.
– the shoulder straps should be
worn on the outside shoulder
only, and never under the arm.
– the shoulder straps should be
away from your face and neck,
but not falling off your shoulder.
(Continued)
EXAMPLE
65D201
WARNING
(Continued)
• Seat belts should never be worn
with the straps twisted and should
be adjusted as tightly as is comfortable to provide the protection
for which they have been designed.
A slack belt will provide less protection than one which is snug.
• Make sure that each seat belt
buckle is inserted into the proper
buckle catch. It is possible to cross
the buckles in the rear seat.
(Continued)
65D199
WARNING
(Continued)
• Pregnant women should use seat
belts, although specific recommendations about driving should be
made by the woman’s medical advisor. Remember that the lap portion
of the belt should be worn as low
as possible across the hips, as
shown in the diagram.
• Do not wear your seat belt over
hard or breakable objects in your
pockets or on your clothing. If an
accident occurs, objects such as
glasses, pens, etc. under the seat
belt can cause injury.
(Continued)
2-26
68PH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING
Lap-Shoulder Belt
WARNING
(Continued)
• Never use the same seat belt on
more than one occupant and never
attach a seat belt over an infant or
child being held on an occupant’s
lap. Such seat belt use could cause
serious injury in the event of an
accident.
• Periodically inspect seat belt
assemblies for excessive wear and
damage. Seat belts should be
replaced if webbing becomes
frayed, contaminated, or damaged
in any way. It is essential to replace
the entire seat belt assembly after it
has been worn in a severe impact,
even if damage to the assembly is
not obvious.
• Children age 12 and under should
ride properly restrained in the rear
seat.
• Infants and small children should
never be transported unless they
are properly restrained. Restraint
systems for infants and small children can be purchased locally and
should be used. Make sure that the
system you purchase meets applicable safety standards. Read and
follow all the directions provided
by the manufacturer.
(Continued)
WARNING
(Continued)
• For children, if the shoulder belt
irritates the neck or face, move the
child closer to the center of the
vehicle.
• Avoid contamination of seat belt
webbing by polishes, oils, chemicals, and particularly battery acid.
Cleaning may safely be carried out
using mild soap and water.
• Do not insert any items such as
coins, clips, etc. into the seat belt
buckles, and be careful not to spill
liquids into these parts. If foreign
materials get into a seat belt
buckle, the seat belt may not work
properly.
• All seatbacks should always be in
an upright position when driving,
or seat belt effectiveness may be
reduced. Seat belts are designed to
offer maximum protection when
seatbacks are in the upright position.
Emergency locking retractor (ELR)
The seat belt has an emergency locking
retractor (ELR), which is designed to lock
the seat belt only during a sudden stop or
impact. It also may lock if you pull the belt
across your body very quickly. If this happens, let the belt go back to unlock it, then
pull the belt across your body more slowly.
Rear outside seat belt guide
(1)
EXAMPLE
68PH00271
2-27
68PH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING
WARNING
EXAMPLE
If rear outside seat belt is fastened
without unhooking the webbing from
the belt guide (1), the seat belt does
not show full performance in the
event of accident and can result in
serious personal injury.
Unhook the webbing from the belt
guide whenever the seat belt is fastened.
Low on hips
All Seat Belts Except Rear Center
All seat belts except rear center are the
lap-shoulder belt.
EXAMPLE
Safety reminder
60A040
Sit up straight and
fully back
Low on hips
To reduce the risk of sliding under the belt
during a collision, position the lap portion
of the belt across your lap as low on your
hips as possible and adjust it to a snug fit
by pulling the shoulder portion of the belt
upward through the latch plate. The length
of the diagonal shoulder strap adjusts itself
to allow freedom of movement.
60A036
To fasten the seat belt, sit up straight and
well back in the seat, pull the latch plate
attached to the seat belt across your body
and press it straight into the buckle until
you hear a “click”.
EXAMPLE
60A038
2-28
68PH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING
Lap Belt
EXAMPLE
EXAMPLE
Rear Center Seat Belt
To fasten the belt, pull the latch plate
attached to the seat belt across your hips
and press it straight into the buckle until
you hear a “click”. To reduce the risk of
sliding under the belt during a collision,
position the belt across your lap as low on
your hips as possible and adjust it to a
snug fit.
TO TIGHTEN
80J2008
60A039
NOTE:
The word “CENTER” is marked on the
buckle for the rear center belt. The buckles
are designed so a latch plate cannot be
inserted into the wrong buckle.
To unfasten the seat belt, push the red
“PRESS” button on the buckle and retract
the belt slowly while attaching a hand to
the belt or/and the latch plate.
Low on hips
EXAMPLE
80JS028
To tighten the belt, pull the free end of the
belt across alongside the lap strap.
2-29
68PH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING
TO LOOSEN
To unfasten the belt, press the release button on the buckle catch.
Driver’s Seat Belt Reminder
With tachometer
EXAMPLE
EXAMPLE
Right angle
EXAMPLE
80JS029
To lengthen, release the latch plate from
the buckle, pull the latch plate (adjuster) in
the direction of the arrow, at right angles to
the belt. The latch plate should then be
refitted into the buckle and the belt tightened as previously described.
79MH0239
NOTE:
The word “CENTER” is marked on the
buckle for the rear center belt. The buckles
are designed so a latch plate cannot be
inserted into the wrong buckle.
68PH00239
Without tachometer
EXAMPLE
68PH00240
2-30
68PH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING
When the driver does not buckle his or her
seat belt, the driver’s seat belt reminder
light in the instrument cluster will come on
or blink and a buzzer will sound as a
reminder to the driver to buckle his or her
seat belt. For more details, refer to the
explanation below.
If the driver’s seat belt remains unbuckled
when the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position or the engine switch is
pressed to change the ignition mode to
“ON”. The reminder works as follows:
1) The driver’s seat belt reminder light will
come on.
2) After the vehicle’s speed has reached
about 15 km/h, the driver’s seat belt
reminder light will blink and a buzzer
will sound for about 95 seconds.
3) After step 2) has finished, the reminder
light will remain on until the driver’s seat
belt is buckled.
If the driver has buckled his or her seat belt
and later unbuckles the seat belt, the
reminder system will be activated from
step 1) or step 2) according to the vehicle’s
speed. When the vehicle’s speed is below
about 15 km/h, the reminder will start from
step 1). When the vehicle’s speed is above
about 15 km/h, the reminder will start from
step 2).
The reminder will be automatically canceled when the driver’s seat belt is buckled
or the ignition switch is turned off, or the
engine switch is pressed to change the
ignition mode to “LOCK” (OFF).
WARNING
Shoulder Anchor Height Adjuster
(If equipped)
EXAMPLE
It is absolutely essential that the
driver and passengers wear their seat
belts at all times. Persons who are
not wearing seat belts have a much
greater risk of injury if an accident
occurs. Make a regular habit of buckling your seat belt before putting the
key in the ignition or pressing the
engine switch.
68PH00241
Adjust the shoulder anchor height so that
the shoulder belt rides on the center of the
outboard shoulder. To move upward, slide
the anchor up. To move downward, slide
the anchor down while pulling the lock
knob out. After adjustment, make sure that
the anchor is securely locked.
WARNING
Be sure that the shoulder belt is positioned on the center of the outside
shoulder. The belt should be away
from your face and neck, but not falling off your shoulder. Misadjustment
of the belt could reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
2-31
68PH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING
Rear Outside Seat Belt Guide
WARNING
EXAMPLE
(1)
WARNING
If rear outside seat belt is fastened
without unhooking the webbing from
the belt guide (1), the seat belt does
not show full performance in the
event of accident and can result in
serious personal injury.
Unhook the webbing from the belt
guide whenever the seat belt is fastened.
Seat Belt Inspection
68PH00272
EXAMPLE
Rear outside seat belt guides (1) are provided on the lateral face of rear seat as
shown in the illustration.
Be sure to inspect all seat belt
assemblies after any collision. Any
seat belt assembly which was in use
during a collision (Other than a very
minor one) should be replaced, even
if damage to the assembly is not
obvious. Any seat belt assembly
which was not in use during a collision should be replaced if it does not
function properly, it is damaged in
any way or the seat belt pretensioners were activated (That is, if the front
air bags were activated).
Child Restraint Systems
EXAMPLE
When the rear seat belt is not fastened,
hook the webbing on the belt guide.
When the rear seat belt is fastened,
unhook the webbing from the belt guide.
68PH00242
Periodically inspect the seat belts to make
sure they work properly and are not damaged. Check the webbing, buckles, latch
plates, retractors, anchorages, and guide
loops. Replace any seat belts which do not
work properly or are damaged.
60G332S
2-32
68PH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING
Infant restraint - rear seat only
Booster seat
EXAMPLE
EXAMPLE
If you must use a front-facing child
restraint in the front passenger’s seat,
adjust the passenger’s seat as far back as
possible.
NOTE:
Observe any statutory regulation about
child restraints.
EXAMPLE
80JC007
Child restraint
EXAMPLE
80JC016
80JC008
MARUTI SUZUKI highly recommends that
you use a child restraint system to restrain
infants and small children. Many different
types of child restraint systems are available; make sure that the restraint system
you select meets applicable safety standards.
All child restraint systems are designed to
be secured on vehicle seats by seat belts
(Lap belts or the lap portion of lap-shoulder
belts). Whenever possible, MARUTI
SUZUKI recommends that child restraint
systems be installed on the rear seat.
According to accident statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in rear
seating positions than in front seating positions.
58MS030
WARNING
Do not install a rear-facing child
restraint in the front passenger’s
seat. If the passenger’s air bag
inflates, a child in a rearfacing child
restraint could be killed or seriously
injured. The back of a rear-facing
child restraint would be too close to
the inflating air bag.
2-33
68PH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING
WARNING
EXAMPLE
If you install a child restraint system
in the rear seat, slide the front seat
far enough forward so that the child’s
feet do not touch the front seatback.
This will help avoid injury to the child
in the event of an accident.
Installation with Lap-Shoulder Seat
Belts
Rear outside seat belt guide
EXAMPLE
EXAMPLE
(1)
65D609
WARNING
65D608
Children could be endangered in a
crash if their child restraint systems
are not properly secured in the vehicle. When installing a child restraint
system, be sure to follow the instructions below. Be sure to secure the
child in the restraint system according to the manufacturer’s instructions.
68PH00271
WARNING
If rear outside seat belt is fastened
without unhooking the webbing from
the belt guide (1), a child restraint
system cannot be installed properly
in the rear seat.
2-34
68PH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING
Installation with ISOFIX type
anchorages (If equipped)
Installation with a Lap Belt
ELR type belt
EXAMPLE
EXAMPLE
Pull to tighten
68PH00243
Install your child restraint system according to the instructions provided by the child
restraint system manufacturer.
Make sure that the seat belt is securely
latched.
Try to move the child restraint system in all
directions to make sure it is securely
installed.
68PH00244
Install your child restraint system according to the instructions provided by the child
restraint system manufacturer.
To lengthen or tighten the belt, refer to the
“Lap-belt” item in this “Seat Belts and
Child Restraint Systems” section. After
making sure that the seat belt is securely
latched, try moving the child restraint system in all directions, to make sure it is
securely installed. If you need to tighten
the belt, pull the free end of the webbing.
EXAMPLE
54P000223
Your vehicle is equipped with the lower
anchorages in the rear seat outboard seating positions for securing a ISOFIX type of
child restraints with the connecting bars.
The lower anchorages are located where
the rear of the seat cushion meets the bottom of the seatback.
WARNING
Install the ISOFIX type of child
restraint(s) in the only outboard seating positions, not in the central position for the rear seat.
2-35
68PH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING
Install the ISOFIX type child restraint system according to the instructions provided
by the child restraint system manufacturer.
After installation, try moving the child
restraint system in all directions especially
forward to check that connecting bars are
securely latched to the anchorages.
EXAMPLE
84MM00252
Your vehicle is equipped with the top tether
anchorages. Use the top tether strap of the
child restraint according to the instructions
provided by the child restraint system manufacturer.
Here is a general instruction:
CAUTION
Adjust the height of the rear head
restraint or remove it for fitting the
child restraint, as necessary. However, if a booster cushion not
equipped with the head restraint is
fitted, the rear seat head restraint
should not be removed. If the rear
head restraint is removed for fitting
the child restraint, you need to install
it again after removing the child
restraint.
If the child restraint is fitted improperly, a child sitting in it could be
injured in a crash.
NOTE:
Stow the removed head restraint in the luggage compartment so it will not cause
inconvenience to the occupants.
EXAMPLE
78F114
1) Place the child restraint in the rear seat,
inserting the connecting bars to the
anchorages between the seat cushion
and the seatback.
EXAMPLE
68LM268
2-36
68PH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING
2) Use your hands to carefully align the
connecting bar tips with the anchorages. Take care not to pinch your fingers.
Installation of child restraint with
top tether (If equipped)
EXAMPLE
Type A
EXAMPLE
EXAMPLE
Front
54G185
54G184
3) Push the child restraint toward the anchorages so that the connecting bar tips are
partially hooked to the anchorages. Use
your hands to confirm the position.
4) Grasp the front of the child restraint and
push the child restraint forcefully to
latch the connecting bars. Check that
they are securely latched by trying to
move the child restraint system in all
directions, especially forward.
5) Attach the top tether strap referring to
“Installation of child restraint with top
tether” section below.
When you put your child in the child
restraint system, appropriately slide the
front seat forward not to touch a part of
your child’s body.
68PM00247
Type B
EXAMPLE
Front
NOTICE
When installing a child restraint system to the rear seat, adjust the front
seat position so that the front seat
does not interfere with the child
restraint system.
66RH145
2-37
68PH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING
Some child restraint systems require the
use of a top tether strap. Top tether anchorage brackets are provided in your vehicle at
the locations shown in the illustrations.
The number of the top tether anchorage
brackets provided in your vehicle depends
on the vehicle specification. Install the child
restraint system as follows:
1) Remove the luggage compartment cover
(If equipped).
2) Secure the child restraint on the rear
seat using the procedure described
above for securing a restraint system
that does not require a top tether strap.
3) Hook the top tether strap to the top
tether anchorage bracket and tighten
the top tether strap according to the
instructions provided by the child
restraint system manufacturer. Attach
the top tether strap to the corresponding top tether anchorage bracket
located directly behind the child
restraint. Do not attach the top tether
strap to the luggage restraint loops (If
equipped).
WARNING
Do not attach the child restraint top
tether strap to the luggage restraint
loops (If equipped). Incorrectly
attached top tether strap will reduce
the intended effectiveness of the
child restraint system.
EXAMPLE
54P000264
4) When routing the top tether strap, pass
the top tether strap as shown in the
illustration. (Refer to “Head restraints”
section for details on how to remove the
head restraint.)
5) Check that cargo does not interfere
with routing of the top tether strap.
NOTICE
When installing a child restraint system to the rear seat, adjust the front
seat position so that the front seat
does not interfere with the child
restraint system.
NOTE:
Maruti Suzuki recommends use of Maruti
Suzuki Genuine accessory of “Child seat,
ISOFIX”.
2-38
68PH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING
Child Restraint System for India
Child Restraint
The suitability of each passenger’s seat position for carriage of children and fitting of child restraint system is shown in the table below.
Whenever you carry children up to 12 years of age, properly use the child restraints which conform to AIS 072, the standard for child
restraints, referring to the table.
Seating position (or other site)
Front
Passenger
Rear
Outboard
Rear
Centre
Intermediate
Outboard
Intermediate
Centre
Group 0
Up to 10 kg
X
U
X
N.A.
N.A.
Group 0+
Up to 13 kg
X
U
X
N.A.
N.A.
Group I
9 to 18 kg
X
U
X
N.A.
N.A.
Group II
15 to 25 kg
X
U
X
N.A.
N.A.
Group III
22 to 36 kg
X
U
X
N.A.
N.A.
MASS GROUP
Key of letters to be inserted in the above table:
U =Suitable for ‘universal’ category restraints approved for use in this mass group
X =Seat position not suitable for children in this mass group
N.A = Seat position not available for children in this mass group.
NOTE: ‘universal’ is the category in the AIS 072.
: ‘Outboard’ indicates window side seat.
2-39
68PH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING
Seat Belt Pretensioner System
and/or
EXAMPLE
Label
68PH00245
WARNING
This section of the owner’s manual
describes your Vehicle’s SEAT BELT
PRETENSIONER SYSTEM. Please
read and follow ALL these instructions carefully to minimize your risk
of severe injury or death.
To determine if your vehicle is equipped
with a seat belt pretensioner system at the
front seating positions, check the label on
the front seat belt at the bottom part. If the
letters “p” and/or “PRE” appear as illustrated, your vehicle is equipped with the
seat belt pretensioner system. You can use
the pretensioner seat belts in the same
manner as ordinary seat belts.
Read this section and the “Supplemental
Restraint System (Air bags)” section to
learn more about the pretensioner system.
The seat belt pretensioner system works
with the SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT
SYSTEM (Air Bags). The crash sensors
and the electronic controller of the air bag
system also control the seat belt pretensioners. The pretensioners are activated in
the event of a frontal crash which is severe
enough to trigger the air bags.
For precautions and general information
including servicing the pretensioner system,
refer to the “Supplemental Restraint System
(Air bags)” section in addition to this “Seat
Belt Pretensioner System” section, and follow all those precautions.
The pretensioner is located in each front
seat belt retractor. The pretensioner tightens the seat belt so the belt fits the occupant’s body more snugly in the event of a
frontal crash. The retractors will remain
locked after the pretensioners are activated.
Upon activation, some noise will occur and
some smoke may be released. These conditions are not harmful and do not indicate a
fire in the vehicle.
The driver and all passengers must be
properly restrained by wearing seat belts at
all times, whether or not a pretensioner is
equipped at their seating position, to minimize the risk of severe injury or death in the
event of a crash.
Sit fully back in the seat; sit up straight; do
not lean forward or sideways. Adjust the
belt so the lap portion of the belt is worn low
across the pelvis, not across the waist.
Please refer to the “Seat Adjustment” section and the instructions and precautions
about the seat belts in this “Seat Belts and
Child Restraint Systems” section for details
on proper seat and seat belt adjustments.
Please note that the pretensioners along
with the air bags will activate in severe frontal collisions. They are not designed to activate in rear impacts, side impacts, rollovers, or minor frontal collisions. The pretensioners can be activated only once. If the
pretensioners are activated (that is, if the air
bags are activated), have the pretensioner
system serviced by an authorised Maruti
Suzuki workshop as soon as possible.
If the “AIR BAG” light on the instrument cluster does not blink or come on briefly when
the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position or the engine switch is pressed to
change the ignition mode to “ON”, stays on
2-40
68PH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING
for more than 10 seconds, or comes on
while driving, the pretensioner system or the
air bag system may not work properly. Have
both systems inspected by an authorised
Maruti Suzuki workshop as soon as possible.
Service on or around the pretensioner system components or wiring must be performed only by an authorised Maruti
Suzuki workshop who is specially trained.
Improper service could result in unintended activation of pretensioners or could
render the pretensioner inoperative. Either
of these two conditions may result in personal injury.
To prevent damage or unintended activation of the pretensioners, be sure the battery is disconnected and the ignition switch
has been in the “LOCK” position or the
ignition mode has been “LOCK” (OFF) for
at least 90 seconds before performing any
electrical service work on your vehicle.
Do not touch pretensioner system components or wiring. The wires are wrapped
with yellow tape or yellow tubing, and the
couplers are yellow. When scrapping your
Vehicle, ask your authorised Maruti Suzuki
workshop body repair shop, or scrap yard
for assistance.
2-41
68PH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING
Supplemental Restraint
System (Air bags)
EXAMPLE
WARNING
This section of the owner’s manual
describes the protection provided by
your
Vehicle’s
SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (air bags).
Please read and follow ALL these
instructions carefully to minimize
your risk of severe injury or death in
the event of a collision.
2
1
3
5
Your vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Restraint System consisting of the
following components in addition to a lapshoulder belt at each seating position.
1. Driver’s front air bag module
2. Front passenger’s front air bag module
3. Seat belt pretensioners
4. Air bag controller
5. Forward crash sensor
4
3
68PH00246
2-42
68PH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING
Front Air Bags
Air bag symbol meaning
WARNING
An air bag supplements, or adds to,
the crash protection offered by seat
belts. The driver and all passengers
must be properly restrained by wearing seat belts at all times, whether or
not an air bag is mounted at their
seating position, to minimize the risk
of severe injury or death in the event
of a crash.
EXAMPLE
EXAMPLE
“AIR BAG” light
EXAMPLE
68PH00247
72M00150
You may find this label on the sun visor.
WARNING
63J030
If the “AIR BAG” light on the instrument
cluster does not blink or come on when the
ignition switch is first turned to the “ON”
position, or the ignition mode is first
changed to “ON”, or the “AIR BAG” light
stays on, or comes on while driving, the air
bag system (Or the seat belt pretensioner
system) may not work properly. Have the
air bag system inspected by an authorised
Maruti Suzuki workshop as soon as possible.
NEVER use a rearward facing child
restraint on a seat protected by an
ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH
or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD
can occur.
Front air bags are designed to inflate in
severe frontal collisions when the ignition
switch is in the “ON” position or the ignition
mode is “ON”.
Front air bags are not designed to inflate in
rear impacts, side impacts, rollovers or
minor frontal collisions, since they would
offer no protection in those types of accidents. Remember, since an air bag
deploys only one time during an accident,
seat belts are needed to restrain occupants from further movements during the
accident.
2-43
68PH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING
Therefore, an air bag is NOT a substitute
for seat belts. To maximize your protection,
ALWAYS WEAR YOUR SEAT BELTS. Be
aware that no system can prevent all possible injuries that may occur in an accident.
Front passenger’s front air bag
EXAMPLE
EXAMPLE
Driver’s front air bag
EXAMPLE
58MS030
68PH00249
68PH00248
The driver’s front air bag is located behind
the center pad of the steering wheel and
the front passenger’s front air bag is
located behind the passenger’s side of the
dashboard.
The words “SRS AIRBAG” are molded into
the air bag covers to identify the location of
the air bags.
WARNING
Do not install a rear-facing child
restraint in the front passenger’s
seat. If the passenger’s front air bag
inflates, a child in a rear-facing child
restraint could be killed or severely
injured. The back of a rear-facing
child restraint would be too close to
the inflating air bag.
Please refer to the “Seat Belts and Child
Restraint Systems” section in this section
for details on securing your child.
2-44
68PH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING
Conditions of front air bags deployment
(Inflation)
EXAMPLE
Conditions of front air bags may inflate
Receiving a strong impact to the lower
body of your vehicle, the front air bags will
inflate in many cases.
EXAMPLE
EXAMPLE
80J101
• Landing hard or falling
80J097
• In frontal collisions with a fixed wall that
does not move or deform in more than
about 25 km/h
80J099
Front air bags may inflate in a strong
impact
• Hitting a curb or medial strip
EXAMPLE
EXAMPLE
EXAMPLE
(1)
(1)
80J120
80J098E
• In collisions such as above at an angle
of about 30 degrees (1) or less from the
front
80J100E
• Collision from the rear
• Falling into a deep hole or ditch
2-45
68PH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING
Front air bags may not inflate
The front air bags may not inflate when the
impact is absorbed since the collision
object moved, vehicle body deformed, or
collision angle was greater than about 30
degrees from the front.
EXAMPLE
EXAMPLE
EXAMPLE
80J119
80J104
• Collision from the side
• Collision with a utility pole or stumpage
80J102
EXAMPLE
• Approximately 50 km/h or lower speed
frontal collision to a stopped vehicle
EXAMPLE
(1)
EXAMPLE
80J110
80J105E
• Vehicle rollover
• Collision with a fixed wall or guardrail at
an angle of greater than about 30
degrees (1) from the front
80J103
• Collision that the front of your vehicle
goes under the bed of a truck etc.
2-46
68PH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING
How the system works
EXAMPLE
80J106
• In frontal collisions with a fixed wall that
does not move or deform in less than
about 25 km/h
EXAMPLE
80J107
• Collision angle is offset from the vehicle
angle (Offset collision)
In a frontal collision, the crash sensors will
detect rapid deceleration, and if the controller judges that the deceleration represents a severe frontal crash, the
controller will trigger the inflators. The inflators inflate the air bags with nitrogen or
argon gas. The inflated air bags provide a
cushion for your head and upper body. The
air bag inflates and deflates so quickly that
you may not even realize that it has activated. The air bag will neither hinder your
view nor make it harder to exit the vehicle.
Air bags must inflate quickly and forcefully
in order to reduce the chance of serious or
fatal injuries. However, an unavoidable
consequence of the quick inflation is that
the air bag may irritate bare skin, such as
the facial area. Also, upon inflation, a loud
noise will occur and some powder and
smoke will be released. These conditions
are not harmful and do not indicate a fire in
the vehicle. Be aware, however, that some
air bag components may be hot for a while
after inflation.
in this section for details on proper seat
and seat belt adjustments.
EXAMPLE
65D610
A seat belt helps keep you in the proper
position for maximum protection when an
air bag inflates. Adjust your seat as far
back as possible while still maintaining
control of the vehicle. Sit fully back in your
seat; sit up straight; do not lean over the
steering wheel or dashboard. Please refer
to the “Front Seat” section and the “Seat
Belts and Child Restraint Systems” section
2-47
68PH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING
WARNING
• The driver should not lean over the
steering wheel. The front passenger should not rest his or her body
against the dashboard, or otherwise get too close to the dashboard. In these situations, the outof-position occupant would be too
close to an inflating air bag, and
may suffer severe injury.
• Do not attach any objects to, or
place any objects over, the steering
wheel or dashboard. Do not place
any objects between the air bag
and the driver or front passenger.
These objects may interfere with air
bag operation or may be propelled
by the air bag in the event of a
crash. Either of these conditions
may cause severe injury.
Note that even though your vehicle may be
moderately damaged in a frontal collision,
the collision may not have been severe
enough to trigger the air bags to inflate. If
your vehicle sustains ANY front-end damage, have the air bag system inspected by
an authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop to
ensure it is in proper working order.
Your vehicle is equipped with a diagnostic
module which records information about
the air bag system if the air bags deploy in
a crash. The module records information
about overall system status, which sensors
activated the deployment, and for a certain
vehicle only, whether the driver’s seat belt
was in use.
Servicing the air bag system
If the air bags inflate, have the air bags
and related components replaced by an
authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop as
soon as possible.
If your vehicle ever gets in deep water and
the driver’s floor is submerged, the air bag
controller could be damaged. If it does,
have the air bag system inspected by the
authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop as
soon as possible.
90 seconds before performing any electrical service work on your Vehicle. Do not
touch air bag system components or wires.
The wires are wrapped with yellow tape or
yellow tubing, and the couplers are yellow
for easy identification.
Scrapping a vehicle that has an uninflated
air bag can be hazardous. Ask your dealer,
body repair shop or scrap yard for help
with disposal.
Special procedures are required for servicing or replacing an air bag. For that reason, only an authorised Maruti Suzuki
workshop should be allowed to service or
replace your air bags. Please remind anyone who services your vehicle that it has
air bags.
Service on or around air bag components
or wiring must be performed only by an
authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop.
Improper service could result in unintended air bag deployment or could render
the air bag inoperative. Either of these two
conditions may result in severe injury.
To prevent damage or unintended inflation
of the air bag system, be sure the battery
is disconnected and the ignition switch has
been in the “LOCK” position or the ignition
mode has been “LOCK” (OFF) for at least
2-48
68PH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING
Instrument Cluster (Type A) (If equipped)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Speedometer
Fuel gauge
Information display
Trip meter selector knob
Indicator selector knob
Warning and indicator lights
EXAMPLE
6
4
1
2
6
3
5
68PH02201
2-49
68PH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING
Speedometer
Fuel Gauge
NOTE:
The activation point of the low fuel warning
light (1) varies depending on road conditions (for example, slope or curve) and
driving conditions because of fuel moving
in the tank.
The speedometer indicates vehicle speed.
(2)
(1)
Refer to “Low Fuel Warning Light” in
“Warning and Indicator Lights” in this section for details.
The mark (2) indicates that the fuel filler
door is located on the left side of the vehicle.
EXAMPLE
68PH02202
When the ignition switch is in the “ON”
position, this gauge gives an approximate
indication of the amount of fuel in the fuel
tank. “F” stands for full and “E” stands for
empty.
If the fuel meter indicator shows only one
segment to “E”, refill the tank as soon as
possible.
NOTE:
If the last segment blinks, it means that the
fuel is almost empty.
If the low fuel warning light (1) comes on,
fill the fuel tank immediately.
2-50
68PH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING
Brightness Control
WARNING
Information Display
EXAMPLE
If you attempt to adjust the display
while driving, you could lose control
of the vehicle.
Do not attempt to adjust the display
while driving.
(1)
EXAMPLE
68PH02203
When the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position, the instrument cluster lights
come on.
NOTE:
• If you do not turn the knob for more than
5 seconds while activating the brightness control, the brightness control display will be canceled automatically.
• When you reconnect the battery, the
brightness of the instrument panel lights
will be reinitialized. Readjust the brightness according to your preference.
(1)
(2)
68PH02204
Your vehicle has a system to automatically
dim the brightness of the instrument panel
lights when the position lights or headlights
are on.
When the position lights and/or headlights
are ON, you can control the meter illumination intensity.
To increase the brightness of the instrument panel lights, turn the brightness control knob (1) clockwise.
To reduce the brightness of the instrument
panel lights, turn the brightness control
knob (1) counterclockwise.
2-51
68PH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING
Clock
When the ignition switch is in the “ON”
position, the display (A) shows the time.
EXAMPLE
(A)
(B)
(D)
(C)
(3)
68PH02205
(1) Trip meter selector knob
(2) Indicator selector knob
(3) Information display
When the ignition switch is in the “ON”
position, the information display shows the
following information.
Display (A)
Clock
Display (B)
Fuel gauge
Display (C)
Trip meter / Odometer / Fuel consumption /
Driving range
To change the time indication:
1) Push the trip meter selector knob (1)
and the indicator selector knob (2)
together.
2) To change the hour indication, turn the
indicator selector knob (2) left or right
repeatedly when the hour indication
blinks. To change the hour indication
quickly, turn and hold the indicator
selector knob (2). To set the hour indication, push the indicator selector knob
(2) and the minute indication will blink.
3) To change the minute indication, turn
the indicator selector knob (2) left or
right repeatedly when the minute indication blinks. To change the minute
indication quickly, turn and hold the
indicator selector knob (2). To set the
minute indication, push the indicator
selector knob (2).
NOTE:
When you reconnect the negative (–) terminal to the battery, the clock indication will
be reinitialized. Change the indication
again to your preference.
Fuel Gauge
When the ignition switch is in the “ON”
position, the display (B) shows the fuel
gauge.
Refer to “Fuel Gauge” in this section.
Trip meter / Odometer / Fuel consumption / Driving range
When the ignition switch is in the “ON”
position, the display (C) shows one of the
following indications, trip meter A, trip
meter B, odometer, instantaneous fuel
consumption, average fuel consumption or
driving range.
To switch the display indication (C), push
the trip meter selector knob (1) or the indicator selector knob (2) quickly.
WARNING
If you attempt to adjust the display
while driving, you could lose control
of the vehicle.
Do not attempt to adjust the display
while driving.
Display (D)
Gearshift Indicator
2-52
68PH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
EXAMPLE
(a)
Trip meter A
Trip meter B
Odometer
Instantaneous fuel consumption
Average fuel consumption
Driving range
WARNING
(b)
If you attempt to adjust the display
while driving, you could lose control
of the vehicle.
Do not attempt to adjust the display
while driving.
(c)
NOTE:
• Indications will change when you push
and release a knob.
• The display shows estimated values.
Indications may not be the same as
actual values.
(d)
(e)
Trip meter
The trip meter can be used to measure the
distance traveled on short trips or between
fuel stops.
You can use the trip meter A or trip meter B
independently.
(f)
68PH10201
Push the trip meter selector
knob (1).
Push the
knob (2).
indicator
selector
To reset the trip meter to zero, push and
hold the trip meter selector knob (1) for a
while when the display shows the trip
meter.
NOTE:
The indicated maximum value of the trip
meter is 9999.9. When you run past the
maximum value, the indicated value will
return to 0.0.
Odometer
The odometer records the total distance
the vehicle has been driven.
NOTICE
Keep track of your odometer reading
and check the maintenance schedule regularly for required services.
Increased wear or damage to certain
parts can result from failure to perform required services at the proper
mileage intervals.
Instantaneous fuel consumption
The display shows the value of instantaneous fuel consumption only when the
vehicle is moving.
NOTE:
• The display does not show the value
unless the vehicle is moving.
• For “L/100km” setting, the indicated
maximum value of instantaneous fuel
consumption is 30. No more than 30 will
be indicated on the display even if the
actual instantaneous fuel consumption is
higher.
• For “km/L” setting, the indicated maximum value of instantaneous fuel con-
2-53
68PH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING
sumption is 50. No more than 50 will be
indicated on the display even if the
actual instantaneous fuel consumption is
higher.
• The indication on the display may be
delayed if fuel consumption is greatly
affected by driving conditions.
• The display shows estimated values.
Indications may not be the same as
actual values.
• You can change the units that instantaneous fuel consumption is displayed in.
Refer to “Average fuel consumption” in
this section.
Average fuel consumption
If you selected average fuel consumption
the last time you drove the vehicle, the display shows the last value of average fuel
consumption from previous driving when
the ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
position. Unless you reset the value of
average fuel consumption, the display indicates the value of average fuel consumption which includes average fuel
consumption during previous driving.
To reset the average fuel consumption to
zero, push and hold the indicator selector
knob (2) for a while when the display
shows the average fuel consumption.
NOTE:
When you reset the indication or reconnect
the negative (–) terminal to the battery, the
value of average fuel consumption will be
shown after driving for a while.
To change the unit of average fuel consumption, while pushing and holding the
trip meter selector knob (1), turn the indicator selector knob (2).
EXAMPLE
(Initial
setting)
Driving range
If you selected driving range the last time
you drove the vehicle, the display indicates
“---” for a few seconds and then indicates
the current driving range when the ignition
switch is turned to the “ON” position.
The driving range shown in the display is
the approximate distance you can drive
until the fuel gauge indicates “E”, based on
current driving conditions.
When the low fuel warning light comes on,
the display “---” will appear.
If the low fuel warning light comes on, fill
the fuel tank immediately regardless of the
value of driving range shown in the display.
As the driving range after refueling is calculated based on the most recent driving
condition, the value is different each time
you refuel.
68PH02207
NOTE:
• When you change the units that average
fuel consumption is displayed in, the
instantaneous fuel consumption units will
be changed automatically.
• When you reconnect the negative (–)
terminal to the battery, the unit of the
average fuel consumption will be reinitialized. Change the unit again to your
preference.
NOTE:
• If you refuel when the ignition switch is in
the “ON” position, the driving range may
not indicate the correct value.
• When you reconnect the negative (–)
terminal to the battery, the value of driving range will be shown after driving for a
while.
Gearshift Indicator
Refer to “Gearshift Indicator” in the
“OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE” section.
2-54
68PH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING
Setting mode
In the setting mode, you can set up the following functions.
Indication
Functions
Time indication of clock “
”
Central door locking system “
”
Automatic door locking function “
Automatic door unlocking function “
”
”
2-55
68PH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING
Indication
Functions
Additional flashes of the turn signal “
Initialization setting “
”
Exit the setting mode “
”
”
2-56
68PH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING
Turn the indicator selector knob
(2).
Push the
knob (2).
indicator
selector
NOTE:
Depending on vehicle’s specifications,
some items may not be displayed.
How to operate the setting mode:
1) When the ignition switch is in the “ON”
position and the vehicle is stationary,
push the trip meter selector knob (1) to
switch the information display indication
(C) to the odometer.
2) Push and hold the indicator selector
knob (2) until the display shows
“
”.
3) Turn and/or push the indicator selector
knob (2) to select a function that you
want to set up according to the above
chart.
4) Turn and/or push the indicator selector
knob (2) to register settings of the following functions.
Time indication of clock “ ”
•
: 12-hour format (Default setting)
•
: 24-hour format
Initialization setting “
”
•
: Initialize all settings
EXAMPLE
Central door locking system “ ”
•
: Unlock all doors by turning the
key once
•
: Unlock all doors by turning the
key twice (Default setting)
68PM00272
Automatic door locking function “ ”
•
: Disable the automatic door
locking function
•
: Lock all doors when the vehicle speed reaches 15 km/h
(Default setting)
Automatic door unlocking
function “ ”
•
: Disable the automatic door
unlocking function
•
: Unlock all doors when the key
is pulled out from the ignition
switch (Default setting)
NOTE:
• As shown in the above illustration, “SEL”
indicates on the display of currently setting item.
• To go back to the higher level display
during operation, turn the indicator
selector knob (2) to display “
” or
“
” and then push the indicator
selector knob (2).
5) To exit the setting mode, switch the display to show “
” and then push the
indicator selector knob (2).
Additional flashes
of the turn signal “ ”
•
: Turn signal flashes three times
after the turn signal lever is
returned (Default setting)
•
: Disable the additional flashes
of turn signal
2-57
68PH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING
Instrument Cluster (Type B) (If equipped)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Speedometer
Tachometer
Fuel gauge
Temperature gauge
Information display
Trip meter selector knob
Indicator selector knob
Warning and indicator lights
EXAMPLE
2
6
4
1
8
8
5
8
3
7
68PH02208
2-58
68PH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING
Speedometer
Fuel Gauge
Refer to “Low Fuel Warning Light” in
“Warning and Indicator Lights” in this section for details.
The speedometer indicates vehicle speed.
Tachometer
The tachometer indicates engine speed in
revolutions per minute.
The mark (2) indicates that the fuel filler
door is located on the left side of the vehicle.
(1)
NOTICE
Never drive the vehicle with the
engine revving in the red zone or
severe engine damage can result.
Keep the engine speed below the red
zone even when downshifting to a
lower gear position.
Refer to “Downshifting maximum
allowable speeds” in the “OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE” section.
(2)
EXAMPLE
68PH02209
When the ignition switch is in the “ON”
position, this gauge gives an approximate
indication of the amount of fuel in the fuel
tank. “F” stands for full and “E” stands for
empty.
If the indicator gets off the graduation of
“E” (Not character “E”), refill the tank as
soon as possible.
NOTE:
The indicator moves a little depending on
road conditions (For example, slope or
curve) and driving conditions because of
fuel moving in the tank.
If the low fuel warning light (1) comes on,
fill the fuel tank immediately.
2-59
68PH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING
Temperature Gauge
Brightness Control
EXAMPLE
To reduce the brightness of the instrument
panel lights, turn the brightness control
knob (1) counterclockwise.
WARNING
If you attempt to adjust the display
while driving, you could lose control
of the vehicle.
Do not attempt to adjust the display
while driving.
(1)
EXAMPLE
68PH02210
68PH02211
When the ignition switch is in the “ON”
position, this gauge indicates the engine
coolant temperature. Under normal driving
conditions, the indicator should stay within
the normal, acceptable temperature range
between “H” and “C”. If the indicator
approaches “H”, overheating is indicated.
Follow the instructions for engine overheating in the “EMERGENCY SERVICE”
section.
When the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position, the instrument cluster lights
come on.
NOTICE
Continuing to drive the vehicle when
engine overheating is indicated can
result in severe engine damage.
Your vehicle has a system to automatically
dim the brightness of the instrument panel
lights when the position lights or headlights
are on.
NOTE:
• If you do not turn the knob for more than
5 seconds while activating the brightness control, the brightness control display will be canceled automatically.
• When you reconnect the battery, the
brightness of the instrument panel lights
will be reinitialized. Readjust the brightness according to your preference.
When the position lights and/or headlights
are ON, you can control the meter illumination intensity.
To increase the brightness of the instrument panel lights, turn the brightness control knob (1) clockwise.
2-60
68PH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING
Information Display
The information display is shown when the
ignition switch is in the “ON” position.
Thermometer
EXAMPLE
When the ignition switch is in the “ON”
position, the display (A) shows the thermometer.
The thermometer indicates the outside
temperature.
EXAMPLE
(A)
(a)
(B)
(C)
(2)
(D)
(3)
68PH02213
EXAMPLE
(2) Trip meter selector knob
(3) Indicator selector knob
(1)
68PH02212
(1) Information display
The information display shows the following information.
Display (A)
Thermometer
Display (B) Selector position (for CVT
vehicles) / Gearshift indicator (for manual
transaxle vehicles)
Display (C)
Trip meter / Odometer / Instantaneous fuel
consumption / Average fuel consumption /
Driving range
68PH02214
If the outside temperature nears freezing,
the mark (a) will appear on the display.
NOTE:
• The outside temperature indication is not
the actual outside temperature when
driving at low speed, or when stopped.
• If there is something wrong with the thermometer, or just after the ignition switch
is turned to the “ON” position, the display
may not indicate the outside temperature.
Display (D)
Clock
2-61
68PH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING
Selector position (For CVT vehicles) / Gearshift indicator (For manual transaxle vehicles)
EXAMPLE
Push the trip meter selector
knob (2).
EXAMPLE
Push the
knob (3).
(b)
b
indicator
selector
(c)
68PH02215
When the ignition switch is in the “ON”
position, the display (B) indicates the gear
position (b).
For details on how to use the transaxle,
refer to “Using the Transaxle” in the
“OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE” section.
Gearshift indicator
Refer to “Gearshift Indicator” in the
“OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE” section.
(d)
Trip meter A
Trip meter B
Odometer
Instantaneous Fuel Consumption
Average fuel consumption
Driving range
WARNING
(e)
If you attempt to adjust the display
while driving, you could lose control
of the vehicle.
Do not attempt to adjust the display
while driving.
(f)
Trip meter / Odometer / Instantaneous fuel consumption / Average
fuel consumption / Driving range
(g)
When the ignition switch is in the “ON”
position, the display (C) shows one of the
following six indications, trip meter A, trip
meter B, odometer, Instantaneous fuel
consumption, Average fuel consumption or
Driving range.
(h)
To switch the display indication (C), push
the trip meter selector knob (2) or the indicator selector knob (3) quickly.
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
NOTE:
• Indications will change when you push
and release a knob.
• The display shows estimated values.
Indications may not be the same as
actual values.
68PH10202
2-62
68PH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING
Trip meter
The trip meter can be used to measure the
distance traveled on short trips or between
fuel stops.
You can use the trip meter A or trip meter B
independently.
To reset the trip meter to zero, push and
hold the trip meter selector knob (2) for a
while when the display shows the trip
meter.
NOTE:
The indicated maximum value of the trip
meter is 9999.9. When you run past the
maximum value, the indicated value will
return to 0.0.
Odometer
The odometer records the total distance
the vehicle has been driven.
NOTICE
Keep track of your odometer reading
and check the maintenance schedule regularly for required services.
Increased wear or damage to certain
parts can result from failure to perform required services at the proper
mileage intervals.
Instantaneous fuel consumption
If you selected instantaneous fuel consumption the last time you drove the vehicle, the display does not show the last
value of instantaneous fuel consumption
from previous driving when the ignition
switch is turned to the “ON” position. The
display shows the value only when the
vehicle is moving.
NOTE:
• The display does not show the value
unless the vehicle is moving.
• For “L/100km” setting, the indicated
maximum value of instantaneous fuel
consumption is 30. No more than 30 will
be indicated on the display even if the
actual instantaneous fuel consumption is
higher.
• For “km/L” setting, the indicated maximum value of value of instantaneous
fuel consumption is 50. No more than 50
will be indicated on the display even if
the actual instantaneous fuel consumption is higher.
• The indication on the display may be
delayed if fuel consumption is greatly
affected by driving conditions.
• The display shows estimated values.
Indications may not be the same as
actual values.
• You can change the units that instantaneous fuel consumption is displayed in.
Refer to “Average fuel consumption” in
this section.
Average fuel consumption
If you selected average fuel consumption
the last time you drove the vehicle, the display shows the last value of average fuel
consumption from previous driving when
the ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
position. Unless you reset the value of
average fuel consumption, the display indicates the value of average fuel consumption which includes average fuel
consumption during previous driving.
To reset the average fuel consumption to
zero, push and hold the indicator selector
knob (3) for a while when the display
shows the average fuel consumption.
NOTE:
When you reset the indication or reconnect
the negative (–) terminal to the battery, the
value of average fuel consumption will be
shown after driving for a while.
(For “L/100km” or “km/L” setting)
To change the unit of average fuel consumption, while pushing and holding the
trip meter selector knob (2), turn the indicator selector knob (3).
2-63
68PH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING
Driving range
If you selected driving range the last time
you drove the vehicle, the display indicates
“---” for a few seconds and then indicates
the current driving range when the ignition
switch is turned to the “ON” position.
EXAMPLE
The driving range shown in the display is
the approximate distance you can drive
until the fuel gauge indicates “E”, based on
current driving conditions.
When the low fuel warning light comes on,
the display “---” will appear.
If the low fuel warning light comes on, fill
the fuel tank immediately regardless of the
value of driving range shown in the display.
68PH02217
NOTE:
• When you change the units that average
fuel consumption is displayed in, the
instantaneous fuel consumption units will
be changed automatically.
• When you reconnect the negative (–)
terminal to the battery, the unit of the
average fuel consumption will be reinitialized. Change the unit again to your
preference.
As the driving range after refueling is calculated based on the most recent driving
condition, the value is different each time
you refuel.
NOTE:
• If you refuel when the ignition switch is in
the “ON” position, the driving range may
not indicate the correct value.
• When you reconnect the negative (–)
terminal to the battery, the value of driving range will be shown after driving for a
while.
Clock
When the ignition switch is in the “ON” position, the display (D) shows the time.
To change the time indication:
1) Push the trip meter selector knob (2) and
the indicator selector knob (3) together.
2) To change the hour indication, turn the
indicator selector knob (3) left or right
repeatedly when the hour indication
blinks. To change the hour indication
quickly, turn and hold the indicator selector knob (3). To set the hour indication,
push the indicator selector knob (3) and
the minute indication will flash.
3) To change the minute indication, turn the
indicator selector knob (3) left or right
repeatedly when the minute indication
blinks. To change the minute indication
quickly, turn and hold the indicator selector knob (3). To set the minute indication,
push the indicator selector knob (3).
WARNING
If you attempt to adjust the display
while driving, you could lose control
of the vehicle.
Do not attempt to adjust the display
while driving.
NOTE:
When you reconnect the negative (–) terminal to the battery, the clock indication will be
reinitialized. Change the indication again to
your preference.
2-64
68PH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING
Setting mode
In the setting mode, you can set up the following functions.
Indication
Functions
Central door locking system “
”
Automatic door locking function “
”
Automatic door unlocking function “
Door locking and unlocking siren “
Additional flashes of the turn signal “
”
”
”
2-65
68PH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING
Indication
Functions
Shock sensor “
”
Pre-warning sensitivity of the shock sensor “
”
Full blast warning sensitivity
of the shock sensor “ ”
Turn the indicator selector knob
(3).
Push the
knob (3).
indicator
selector
NOTE:
Depending on vehicle’s specifications,
some items may not be displayed.
Initialization setting “
”
Exit the setting mode “
”
How to operate the setting mode:
1) When the ignition switch is in the “ON” position and the vehicle is stationary, push the
trip meter selector knob (2) to switch the information display indication (C) to the
odometer.
2) Push and hold the indicator selector knob (3) until the display shows “
”.
3) Turn and/or push the indicator selector knob (3) to select a function that you want to
set up according to the above chart.
4) Turn and/or push the indicator selector knob (3) to register settings of the following
functions.
2-66
68PH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING
Central door locking system “ ”
•
: Unlock all doors by turning the
key or pushing the keyless
entry system transmitter once
•
: Unlock all doors by turning the
key or pushing the keyless
entry system transmitter twice
(Default setting)
Automatic door locking function “ ”
•
: Disable the automatic door
locking function
•
: Lock all doors when the vehicle speed reaches 15 km/h
(Default setting)
•
: (For CVT vehicle)
Lock all door when the gearshift lever is in other than “P”
Automatic door unlocking
function “ ”
•
: Disable the automatic door
unlocking function
•
: Unlock all doors when the key
is pulled out from the ignition
switch (Default setting)
•
: (For CVT vehicle)
Unlock all doors when the
gearshift lever is moved to the
“P” from other position
Door locking and unlocking
siren “ ”
•
: Siren sounds when the
door(s) is(are) locked or
unlocked by using the keyless entry system transmitter
(Default setting)
•
: Siren does not sound when
the door(s) is(are) locked or
unlocked by using the keyless entry system transmitter
Additional flashes
of the turn signal “ ”
•
: Turn signal flashes three
times after the turn signal
lever is returned
(Default setting)
•
: Disable the additional flashes
of turn signal
Shock sensor “ ”
•
: Enable the shock sensor
•
: Disable the shock sensor
(Default setting)
Pre-warning sensitivity of
the shock sensor “ ”
•
: Disable the pre-warning
•
to
:
Adjust the pre-warning sensitivity of shock sensor (Lowest
sensitivity level is L01 and
highest is L15, and default
setting is L14)
Full blast warning sensitivity
of the shock sensor “ ”
•
: Disable the full blast warning
•
to
:
Adjust the full blast warning
sensitivity of shock sensor
(Lowest sensitivity level is L01
and highest is L15, and
default setting is L09)
Initialization setting “
”
•
: Initialize all settings
EXAMPLE
68PM00272
NOTE:
• As shown in the above illustration, “SEL”
indicates on the display of currently setting item.
• To go back to the higher level display
during operation, turn the indicator
selector knob (3) to display “
” or
“
” and then push the indicator
selector knob (3).
4) to exit the setting mode, switch the display to show “
” and then push the
indicator selector knob (3).
2-67
68PH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING
Instrument Cluster (Type C) (If equipped)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Speedometer
Tachometer
Fuel gauge
Temperature gauge
Information display
Trip meter selector knob
Indicator selector knob
Warning and indicator lights
EXAMPLE
2
6
4
1
8
8
5
8
3
7
68PH02222
2-68
68PH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING
Speedometer
Fuel Gauge
Refer to “Low fuel warning light” in “Warning and indicator lights” in this section for
details.
The speedometer indicates vehicle speed.
Tachometer
The tachometer indicates engine speed in
revolutions per minute.
The mark (2) indicates that the fuel filler
door is located on the left side of the vehicle.
(1)
NOTICE
Never drive the vehicle with the
engine revving in the red zone or
severe engine damage can result.
Keep the engine speed below the red
zone even when downshifting to a
lower gear position.
Refer to “Downshifting maximum
allowable speeds” in “OPERATING
YOUR VEHICLE” section.
(2)
EXAMPLE
68PH02223
When the ignition mode is “ON”, this
gauge gives an approximate indication of
the amount of fuel in the fuel tank. “F”
stands for full and “E” stands for empty.
If the indicator approaches a low level
(Near “E”) on fuel gauge, refill the tank as
soon as possible.
NOTE:
The indicator moves a little depending on
road conditions (For example, slope or
curve) and driving conditions because of
fuel moving in the tank.
If the low fuel warning light (1) comes on,
fill the fuel tank immediately.
2-69
68PH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING
Temperature Gauge
Brightness Control
EXAMPLE
WARNING
Do not adjust the brightness of the
instrument panel lights while driving.
Otherwise, you could lose control of
the vehicle.
EXAMPLE
(1)
68PH02224
68PH02225
When the ignition mode is “ON”, this
gauge indicates the engine coolant temperature. Under normal driving conditions,
the indicator should stay within the normal,
acceptable temperature range between
“H” and “C”. If the indicator approaches
“H”, overheating is indicated. Follow the
instructions for “Engine trouble: Overheating” in “EMERGENCY SERVICE” section.
When the engine switch is pressed to
change the ignition mode to “ON”, the
instrument cluster lights come on.
NOTICE
Continuing to drive the vehicle when
engine overheating is indicated can
result in severe engine damage.
Your vehicle has a system to automatically
dim the brightness of the instrument cluster lights when the position lights or headlights are on.
You can change the brightness of the
instrument cluster lights regardless of
whether the position lights or headlights
are off or on.
NOTE:
• If you do not turn the knob for more than
5 seconds while activating the brightness control, the brightness control display will be canceled automatically.
• When you reconnect the battery, the
brightness of the instrument cluster
lights will be reinitialized. Readjust the
brightness according to your preference.
NOTE:
If you select the maximum brightness level
when the position lights or headlights are
on, the following functions will be cancelled.
• The function which automatically dims
the brightness of instrument cluster
lights
• The function which operates with the
brightness control, except maximum
brightness level
To increase the brightness of the instrument cluster lights, turn the indicator selector knob (1) clockwise.
To reduce the brightness of the instrument
cluster lights, turn the indicator selector
knob (1) counterclockwise.
2-70
68PH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING
Information Display
EXAMPLE
The information display is shown when the
ignition mode is “ON”.
EXAMPLE
(A)
Display (D)
Gearshift indicator / Gear position indicator
Display (E)
Trip meter
Display (F)
Odometer
(B)
EXAMPLE
(C)
(D)
(3)
(E)
(F)
(2)
68PM00253
(1)
(2) Indicator selector knob
(3) Trip meter selector knob
68PH02226
(1) Information display
The information display shows the following information.
Display (A)
Clock
Display (B)
Thermometer
Display (C)
Warning and indicator messages /
Fuel consumption / Driving range /
Average speed / Driving time /
Clock and date / Torque and power
68PH02228
When the engine switch is pressed to
change the ignition mode to “ON”, the
clock display shown in the above illustration will appear on the display for several
seconds.
Some warning and indicator messages
may appear on the display when the ignition mode is “ACC” or “LOCK” (OFF).
2-71
68PH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING
Clock
The display (A) shows the time.
To set the clock, follow “Setting mode”
instructions in this section.
Thermometer
The display (B) shows the thermometer.
The thermometer indicates the outside
temperature.
Fuel consumption / Driving range /
Average speed / Driving time
Clock and date / Torque and power
When there are no warning or indicator
messages on the display (C), you can
select one of the following indications to
appear on the display: instantaneous fuel
consumption, average fuel consumption,
driving range, average speed, driving time,
clock and date, torque and power or no
indication.
EXAMPLE
WARNING
If you attempt to adjust the display
while driving, you could lose control
of the vehicle.
do not attempt to adjust the display
while driving.
68PH02229
If the outside temperature nears freezing,
the message shown in the above illustration will appear on the display.
NOTE:
The outside temperature indication is not
the actual outside temperature when driving at low speed, or when stopped.
2-72
68PH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING
EXAMPLE (a)
(b)
(c)
To switch the display indication, push the
indicator selector knob (2) quickly.
NOTE:
The value of instantaneous fuel consumption, average fuel consumption, driving
range, average speed and torque and
power shown on the display are affected
by the following conditions;
• Road condition
• Surrounding traffic condition
• Driving condition
• Vehicle condition
• A malfunction which causes the malfunction indicator light to come on or
blink
(f)
(e)
(d)
(a) Instantaneous fuel consumption / Average fuel consumption / Driving range
(b) Instantaneous fuel consumption / Average fuel consumption / 5 minute average fuel
consumption
(c) Average speed / 5 minute average speed / Driving time
(d) Clock and date
(e) Torque and Power
(f) No indication
2-73
68PH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING
Instantaneous fuel consumption
The display shows instantaneous fuel consumption with a bar graph only when the
vehicle is moving.
EXAMPLE
(4)
• For “MPG(UK)” setting, the indicated
maximum value of instantaneous fuel
consumption is 80. No more than 80 will
be indicated on the display even if the
actual instantaneous fuel consumption is
higher.
• For “MPG(US)” setting, the indicated
maximum value of instantaneous fuel
consumption is 60. No more than 60 will
be indicated on the display even if the
actual instantaneous fuel consumption is
higher.
• The indication on the display may be
delayed if fuel consumption is greatly
affected by driving conditions.
• The display shows estimated values.
Indications may not be the same as
actual values.
68PM00280
(4) Instantaneous fuel consumption
NOTE:
• The display does not show the bar graph
unless the vehicle is moving.
• For “L/100km” setting, the indicated
maximum value of instantaneous fuel
consumption is 30. No more than 30 will
be indicated on the display even if the
actual instantaneous fuel consumption is
higher.
• For “km/L” setting, the indicated maximum value of value of instantaneous
fuel consumption is 50. No more than 50
will be indicated on the display even if
the actual instantaneous fuel consumption is higher.
Average fuel consumption / 5-minute
average fuel consumption
Average fuel consumption from previous
reset and 5-minute average fuel consumption are shown.
(Average fuel consumption)
EXAMPLE
(5)
(5)
68PM00281
(5) Average fuel consumption
If you selected average fuel consumption
the last time you drove the vehicle, the display shows the last value of average fuel
consumption from previous driving when
the engine switch is pressed to change the
ignition mode to “ON”. Unless you reset
the value of average fuel consumption, the
display indicates the value of average fuel
consumption based on the average fuel
consumption during previous driving.
NOTE:
When you reconnect the negative (–) terminal to the battery, the value of average
fuel consumption will be shown after driving for a period of time.
2-74
68PH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING
You can select when the value of average
fuel consumption is reset from among the
following two methods;
• Reset after refuel: the value of average
fuel consumption will be reset automatically by refueling.
• Reset with trip meter A: the value of
average fuel consumption will be reset
automatically by resetting trip meter A.
To change when the value of average fuel
consumption is reset, refer to “Setting
mode” in this section.
NOTE:
• If you add only a small amount of fuel
when you select “Reset after refuel”, the
average fuel consumption value may not
be reset.
• Display option (b) shows the fuel consumption history below current instantaneous fuel consumption. History display
portion is updated to show fuel consumption history every 5 minutes (Till
past 15 minutes) or every driving cycle
(till past 3 driving cycle) depending on
which mode is selected in setting mode.
(5-minute average fuel consumption)
EXAMPLE
Driving range
EXAMPLE
(6)
(7)
68PM00282
(6) 5-minute average fuel consumption
You can check transition of 5-minute average fuel consumption every 5 minutes
from 15 minutes before up to now. Time
indication and driving cycle indication can
be changed. For details, refer to “Setting
mode” in this section.
68PM00283
(7) Driving range
If you selected driving range the last time
you drove the vehicle, the display indicates
“---” for a few seconds and then indicates
the current driving range when engine
switch is pressed to change the ignition
mode to “ON”.
The driving range shown in the display is
the approximate distance you can drive
until the fuel gauge indicates “E”, based on
current driving conditions.
When the low fuel warning light comes on,
the display “---” will appear.
If the low fuel warning light comes on, fill
the fuel tank immediately regardless of the
value of driving range shown in the display.
As the driving range after refueling is calculated based on the most recent driving
2-75
68PH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING
condition, the value is different each time
you refuel.
NOTE:
• If you refuel when the ignition mode is
“ON”, the driving range may not indicate
the correct value.
• When you reconnect the negative (–)
terminal to the battery, the value of driving range will be shown after driving for a
period of time.
Average Speed / 5- minute average
speed
Average speed from previous reset and 5minute average speed are shown.
(Average speed)
EXAMPLE
(8)
If you selected average speed the last time
you drove the vehicle, the display indicates
the last value of average speed from previous driving when the engine switch is
pressed to change the ignition mode to
“ON”. Unless you reset the value of average speed, the display indicates the value
of average speed which includes average
speed during previous driving.
(5-minute average speed)
EXAMPLE
(9)
To reset the value of average speed, push
and hold the indicator selector knob (2) for
about 2 seconds when the display indicates an average speed. The display
shows “---” and then indicates a new average speed after driving for a short time.
NOTE:
• When you reconnect the negative (–)
terminal to the battery, the value of average speed will be shown after driving for
a period of time.
• Display (c) shows current average
speed and average speed history. History display portion is below current
average speed and is updated every 5
minutes (Till past 10 minutes).
68PM00285
(9) 5-minute average speed
You can check transition of 5-minute average speed every 5 minutes from 10 minutes before up to now.
68PM00284
(8) Average speed
2-76
68PH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING
Torque and Power
Present engine torque and power are
shown.
Driving time
EXAMPLE
Information of after driving
When you press the engine switch to
change the ignition mode to “LOCK”
(OFF), the following information appears
for several seconds on the information display.
(10) Driving time
Clock and date
Date and time are shown. For the setting
procedure, refer to “Setting mode” in this
section.
The display (D) shows some of the following indications.
Gear position indicator
68PM00286
NOTE:
Disconnection of the battery negative (-)
terminal will reset the indication of the driving time.
Gearshift Indicator / Gear Position
Indicator (if equipped)
Gearshift indicator
Refer to “Gearshift Indicator” in the
“OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE” section.
EXAMPLE
(10)
Driving time from previous reset is shown.
To reset the driving time, push and hold the
indicator selector knob (2) for about 2 seconds when the display indicates a driving
time. The display shows “---” and then indicates a new driving time after driving for a
short time.
Torque and Power display
Display (e) shows Torque and Power
graphs at various vehicle condition.
This figure is for reference only and indication may not be same as actual value.
EXAMPLE
(1)
68PS00214
Trip Summary display
Trip Summary display comes when ignition
mode is switched to ‘OFF” position. Following summary is displayed.
• Driving Time : Time from ignition “ON”
condition to ignition “OFF” condition is
displayed.
• Driving Mileage : Distance covered from
ignition “OFF” condition is displayed.
68PM02002
When the engine is in running condition
and the gearshift lever position is other
than neutral, the display (D) indicates the
current gear position (1).
For details on how to use the transaxle,
refer to “Using the Transaxle” in the
“OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE” section.
2-77
68PH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING
Trip meter
The display (E) shows the trip meter.
The trip meter can be used to measure the
distance traveled on short trips or between
fuel stops.
You can use trip meter A or trip meter B
independently.
To reset the trip meter to zero, push and
hold the trip meter selector knob (3) for
about 2 seconds when the display shows
the trip meter.
• To select the setting that you want to
change, turn the indicator selector knob
(2) left or right.
• To change the setting, push the indicator
selector knob (2).
• To exit the setting mode, select “Back”
and push the indicator selector knob (2).
EXAMPLE
The display (F) shows the odometer.
The odometer records the total distance
the vehicle has been driven.
Fuel economy
(Fuel consumption unit setting)
You can change the units that fuel consumption is displayed in.
NOTICE
Setting mode
When the ignition mode is “ON” and the
vehicle is stationary, you can enter the setting mode of the information display by
pushing and holding the indicator selector
knob (2) for more than 3 seconds.
Distance unit
(Odometer / trip meter distance unit setting)
You can change the units in which odometer / trip meter distance is displayed.
NOTE:
When you change the units in which odometer / trip meter distance is displayed, the
trip meter will be reset automatically.
Odometer
Keep track of your odometer reading
and check the maintenance schedule regularly for required services.
Increased wear or damage to certain
parts can result from failure to perform required services at the proper
mileage intervals.
• If you turn the ignition switch, press the
engine switch or start to move the vehicle when the display is in the setting
mode, the setting mode will be canceled
automatically.
68PM00256
NOTE:
The currently selected setting item is surrounded by a frame.
NOTE:
• If you push and hold the indicator selector knob (2) to enter the setting mode
when the display (C) shows average fuel
consumption or average speed, the
value will be reset simultaneously. If you
do not want to reset the value, push the
indicator selector knob quickly to switch
the indication of the display.
Language
You can change the language of the information display.
Fuel reset (Average fuel consumption
reset setting)
You can change when the value of average fuel consumption is reset.
Temperature
(Temperature unit setting)
You can change the units that temperature
is displayed in.
2-78
68PH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING
NOTE:
When you change the units that temperature is displayed in, the automatic heating
and air conditioning system (If equipped)
temperature display units will be changed
automatically.
Set sensors
(Parking sensor setting) (If equipped)
The parking sensor can be switched
between the normal mode and trailer
mode.
Clock setting
(Adjusting the clock)
• To change the hour indication, turn the
indicator selector knob (2) left or right
repeatedly when the hour indication
appears as reversed color. To change
the hour indication quickly, turn and hold
the indicator selector knob (2). To set the
hour indication, push the indicator selector knob (2) and the minute indication
appears as reversed color.
• To change the minute indication, turn the
indicator selector knob (2) left or right
repeatedly when the minute indication
appears as reversed color. To change
the minute indication quickly, turn and
hold the indicator selector knob (2). To
set the minute indication, push the indicator selector knob (2).
You can also switch the time indication
between 12-hour and 24-hour format.
(Adjusting the date)
Adjust year, month, and day by operating
the indicator selector knob (2) in the same
way as the adjusting the clock.
Door lock (Door lock setting)
You can choose either once or twice operation(s) to unlock all doors (including the
tailgate) by turning the key, or operating
keyless push start system remote controller or request switch.
You can also turn off or on the siren sound
when the door(s) is (are) locked or
unlocked.
• Auto lock
– Manual Lock:
Disable the automatic door locking
function.
– Speed Syncro:
Lock all doors when the vehicle speed
reaches 15 km/h (default setting).
• Auto unlock
– Syncro Off:
Disable the automatic door unlocking
function (default setting for the vehicle
with the keyless push start system).
– IG-OFF Sync:
Unlock all doors when the key is
pulled out from the ignition switch or
the engine switch is pressed to
change the ignition mode to LOCK
(OFF) (default setting for the vehicle
without the keyless push start system).
Lights
(Light setting)
(Footwell light setting) (If equipped)
The footwell lights can be programmed for
interlocked operation with either lighting
control or door operation and for no lighting.
(Lane change setting)
The turn signal and its indicator can be set
whether they flash three times even if you
return the turn signal control lever immediately after moving it.
Guide me light setting (Light setting)
(If equipped)
You can change the lighting time of “To
car” function or “To home” function.
Antitheft (If equipped)
(Shock sensor system setting)
You can change the on/off of the shock
sensor (default setting is off state).
(Shock sensor P setting)
You can adjust the pre-warning sensitivity
of shock sensor (default setting level is
14).
(Shock sensor F setting)
You can adjust the full blast warning sensitivity of shock sensor (default setting level
is 9).
2-79
68PH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING
Display item (Car color setting)
You can change the car color of the information display.
Master warning indicator light
(Calendar dis setting)
You can change the on/off of the calendar.
(Calendar form setting)
You can change the calendar form of the
information display.
Fuel eco history
(Fuel economy history setting)
Transitional indication of average fuel
consumption can be switched to timed
indication and driving cycle indication.
Default (Initialization setting)
If you select “YES” and push the indicator
selector knob (2), all settings will be reinitialized.
Warning and Indicator Messages
The display shows warning and indicator
messages to let you know about certain
vehicle problems.
A tone may also sound to alert you.
If warning and indicator messages appear
on the display, follow the messages.
78K049
When the display shows warning and indicator messages, the master warning indicator light may also blink.
NOTE:
• When the problem that causes a message to appear is corrected, the message will disappear.
• If a message is displayed, and other
problems requiring a message occur, the
message for each of the problems will
be alternately displayed about every 5
seconds.
• When you push and hold the indicator
selector knob (2) for about 2 seconds
while a message is displayed, the message will disappear temporarily. If the
problem that caused the message is not
corrected, the message will appear
again after 5 seconds.
2-80
68PH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING
Warning and indicator messages
All model
Warning and indicator
message
Master warning
indicator light
Sound
Cause and remedy
Blinks
(Only while vehicle is in motion)
Beep (One time from interior
buzzer; only while vehicle is
in motion)
A door or tailgate is not properly closed.
Stop the vehicle in a safe place and close
the door or tailgate properly. (#1)
Blinks
Continuous beep (From interior buzzer)
The headlights and/or the position lights are
left on. Turn them off.
68PH02232
68PH02233
(#1) This message will disappear for a while even if the problem that caused the message to appear is not corrected.
2-81
68PH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING
Warning and indicator
message
Master warning
indicator light
Sound
Cause and remedy
Off
Beep (One time from interior
buzzer)
Fuel is low. Refill it immediately. (#1)
Off
Off
The road may be icy. Drive very carefully.
(#1)
68PH02234
68PH02235
(#1) This message will disappear for a while even if the problem that caused the message to appear is not corrected.
2-82
68PH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING
Warning and indicator
message
Master warning
indicator light
Sound
Cause and remedy
Off
Off
This message is displayed when “ACC”
position is selected as the power supply
position. (#1)
Off
Off
The clutch pedal is depressed. Press the
engine switch to start the engine.
68PH02237
68PH02238
(#1) This message will disappear for a while even if the problem that caused the message to appear is not corrected.
2-83
68PH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING
Warning and indicator
message
Master warning
indicator light
Sound
Cause and remedy
Blinks
Beep (One time from interior
buzzer)
There is a problem with the steering lock
system.
Have your vehicle inspected by an authorized Maruti Suzuki workshop.
Blinks
Beep (One time from interior
buzzer)
There is a problem with the keyless push
start system. Also, the vehicle battery voltage may be decreased.
When the message is displayed even if you
start the engine with normal voltage of the
vehicle battery, have your vehicle inspected
by an authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop.
68PH02239
68PH02240
2-84
68PH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING
Warning and indicator
message
Master warning
indicator light
Blinks
Sound
Cause and remedy
Series of beeps under certain conditions (For about 2
seconds from exterior and/or
interior buzzers)
The remote controller may be outside the
vehicle or its battery may have become discharged. Locate the remote controller or
touch the engine switch with the remote
controller.
If the message still appears, replace the
remote controller battery.
68PH02241
68PH02242
2-85
68PH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING
Warning and indicator
message
Master warning
indicator light
Sound
Cause and remedy
Off
Off
This message is displayed when “ON” position is selected as the power supply position. (#1)
Blinks
Beep (One time from interior
buzzer)
The steering lock is not disengaged. While
lightly turning the steering wheel in both
directions, press the engine switch again.
68PH02243
68PH02244
(#1) This message will disappear for a while even if the problem that caused the message to appear is not corrected.
2-86
68PH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING
Warning and indicator
message
Master warning
indicator light
Sound
Cause and remedy
Blinks
Beep
The remote controller battery is about to
become flat. Replace the battery. (#1)
Off
Off
The engine switch is pressed without
depressing the brake and clutch pedals. Try
again as instructed by the message.
68PH02245
68PH02246
(#1) This message will disappear for a while even if the problem that caused the message to appear is not corrected.
2-87
68PH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING
Diesel engine model
Warning and indicator
message
Master warning
indicator light
Sound
Cause and remedy
Blinks
Beep (One time from interior
buzzer)
There may be a problem with the fuel filter.
Have your vehicle inspected by an authorized Maruti Suzuki workshop.
Blinks
Beep (One time from interior
buzzer)
It is possible that water may be in the fuel
filter.
Have your vehicle inspected by an authorized Maruti Suzuki workshop.
68PH02247
68PH02248
2-88
68PH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING
Warning and indicator
message
Master warning
indicator light
Off
Sound
Off
Cause and remedy
If the coolant temperature is cool enough,
this message is displayed when the engine
switch is pressed to change the ignition
mode to “ON” and this message will disappear when the glow plug is heated enough
for engine starting.
68PH02249
• If your vehicle is equipped with a parking sensor system, the information display also indicates warning and indicator messages
related to the system. For information on these messages, refer to “Parking sensors (If equipped)” in “OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE”
section.
2-89
68PH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING
Warning and Indicator Lights
NOTE:
if warning and indicator lights blink or come
on, the corresponding messages may be
shown on the information display.
Brake System Warning Light
The light should go out after starting the
engine and fully releasing the parking
brake, if the fluid level in the brake fluid
reservoir is adequate.
The light also comes on together with the
ABS warning light when the rear brake
force control function (Proportioning valve
function) of the ABS system fails.
If the brake system warning light comes on
while you are driving the vehicle, it may
mean that there is something wrong with
the vehicle’s brake system. If this happens,
you should:
65D477
Three different types of operations exist
depending on the vehicle’s specification.
1) The light comes on briefly when the
ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
position or the engine switch is pressed
to change the ignition mode to “ON”.
2) The light comes on when the parking
brake is engaged with the ignition
switch in the “ON” position or the ignition mode “ON”.
3) The light comes on when under either
or both of above two conditions.
The light also comes on when the fluid in
the brake fluid reservoir falls below the
specified level.
1) Pull off the road and stop carefully.
WARNING
Remember that stopping distance
may be longer, you may have to push
harder on the pedal, and the pedal
may go down farther than normal.
2) Test the brakes by carefully starting and
stopping on the shoulder of the road.
3) If you determine that it is safe, drive
cautiously at low speed to the nearest
dealer for repairs,
or
4) Have the vehicle towed to the nearest
dealer for repairs.
WARNING
If any of the following conditions
occur, you should immediately ask
your authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop to inspect the brake system.
• If the brake system warning light
does not go out after the engine
has been started and the parking
brake has been fully released.
• If the brake system warning light
does not come on when the ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
position or the engine switch is
pressed to change the ignition
mode to “ON”.
• If the brake system warning light
comes on at any time during vehicle operation.
NOTE:
Because the brake system is self-adjusting, the fluid level will drop as the brake
pads become worn. Replenishing the
brake fluid reservoir is considered normal
periodic maintenance.
NOTE:
(Parking Brake Reminder Buzzer)
A buzzer sounds intermittently to remind
you to release the parking brake if you
start the vehicle without releasing the parking brake. Make sure that the parking
brake is fully released and the brake system warning light turns off.
2-90
68PH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
Warning Light
If the light and the brake system warning
light stay on, or come on simultaneously
when driving, your ABS system is
equipped with the rear brake force control
function (Proportioning valve function) and
there may be something wrong with both
the rear brake force control function and
anti-lock function of the ABS system.
65D529
When the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position or the engine switch is
pressed to change the ignition mode to
“ON”, the light comes on briefly so you can
check that the light is working.
If the light stays on, or comes on when
driving, there may be something wrong
with the ABS.
If this happens:
1) Pull off the road and stop carefully.
2) Turn the ignition switch to “LOCK” or
change the ignition mode to “LOCK”
(OFF) by pressing the engine switch
and then start the engine again.
If the warning light comes on briefly then
turns off, the system is normal. If the warning light still stays on, the system will be
something wrong.
If one of these happens, have the system
inspected by your authorised Maruti
Suzuki workshop.
If the ABS becomes inoperative, the brake
system will function as an ordinary brake
system that does not have this ABS system.
For details of ABS system, refer to “AntiLock Brake System (ABS)” in the “OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE” section.
Oil Pressure Light
50G051
This light comes on when the ignition
switch is turned to the “ON” position or the
engine switch is pressed to change the
ignition mode to “ON”, and goes out when
the engine is started. The light will come
on and remain on if there is insufficient oil
pressure. If the light comes on when driving, pull off the road as soon as you can
and stop the engine.
Check the oil level and add oil if necessary.
If there is enough oil, the lubrication system should be inspected by your authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop before you
drive the vehicle again.
NOTICE
• If you operate the engine with this
light on, severe engine damage can
result.
• Do not rely on the oil pressure light
to indicate the need to add oil. Be
sure to periodically check the
engine oil level.
2-91
68PH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING
Charging Light
Driver’s Seat Belt Reminder Light
“AIR BAG” Light
50G052
60G049
63J030
This light comes on when the ignition
switch is turned to the “ON” position or the
engine switch is pressed to change the
ignition mode to “ON”, and goes out when
the engine is started.
When the driver doesn’t buckle his or her
seat belt, this light will come on and/or
blink.
For details about the seat belt reminder,
refer to “Seat Belts and Child Restraint
Systems” in this section.
This light blinks or comes on for several
seconds when the ignition switch is turned
to the “ON” position or the engine switch is
pressed to change the ignition mode to
“ON” so you can check if the light is working.
The light will come on and remain on if
there is something wrong with the battery
charging system. If the light comes on
when the engine is running, the charging
system should be inspected immediately
by your authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop.
The light will come on and stay on if there
is a problem in the air bag system or the
seat belt pretensioner system.
WARNING
If the “AIR BAG” light does not blink
or come on briefly when the ignition
switch is turned to the “ON” position
or the engine switch is pressed to
change the ignition mode to “ON”,
stays on for more than 10 seconds,
or comes on while driving, the air bag
system or the seat belt pretensioner
system may not work properly. Have
both systems inspected by an authorized Maruti Suzuki workshop.
2-92
68PH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING
Malfunction Indicator Light
Transaxle Warning Light
(If equipped)
Immobilizer/Keyless Push Start
System Warning Light
65D530
Your vehicle has a computer-controlled
emission control system. A malfunction
indicator light is provided on the instrument
panel to indicate when it is necessary to
have the emission control system serviced.
The malfunction indicator light comes on
when the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position or the engine switch is
pressed to change the ignition mode to
“ON” to let you know the light is working
and goes out when the engine is started.
If the malfunction indicator light comes on
or blinks when the engine is running, there
is a damage in the emission control system.
Bring the vehicle to your authorised Maruti
Suzuki workshop to have the damage
fixed.
NOTICE
Continuing to drive the vehicle when
the malfunction indicator light is on
or blinking can cause permanent
damage to the vehicle’s emission
control system, and can affect fuel
economy and driveability.
80J219
80JM122
This light comes on for several seconds
when the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position or the engine switch is
pressed to change the ignition mode to
“ON” so you can check the light is working.
If this light comes on when the engine is
running, there is a problem with the transaxle system. Ask your authorised Maruti
Suzuki workshop to have the system
inspected.
When the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position or the engine switch is
pressed to change the ignition mode to
“ON”, the light comes on briefly so you can
check that the light is working. If this light
stays on, there is a problem with the system.
Open Door Warning Light
NOTE:
If the CVT fluid temperature becomes too
high, this light will blink. Stop the vehicle in
a safe place and let the fluid cool down.
54G391
This light remains on until all doors are
completely closed.
If any door is open when the vehicle is
moving, a ding sounds to remind you to
close all doors completely.
2-93
68PH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING
Low Fuel Warning Light
Electric Power Steering Light
However, repeating these operations could
cause the power steering system damaged.
NOTE:
If the power steering system does not work
properly, you will feel heavier to steer but
you still will be able to steer.
54G343
79J039
If this light comes on, fill the fuel tank
immediately.
This light comes on when the ignition
switch is turned to the “ON” position or the
engine switch is pressed to change the
ignition mode to “ON”, and goes out when
the engine is started.
When this light comes on, a ding sounds
once to remind you to fill the fuel.
If you do not fill the fuel, a ding sounds
every time when the ignition switch is
turned to the “ON” position or the engine
switch is pressed to change the ignition
mode to “ON”.
NOTE:
The activation point of this light varies
depending on road conditions (For example, slope or curve) and driving conditions
because of fuel moving in the tank.
If this light comes on while driving, the
power steering system may not work properly. Have the system inspected by your
authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop.
NOTE:
Following operations of the steering wheel
while parking or driving at a very lowspeed may have steering effort bigger
gradually. This is not a malfunction of the
steering system, but the power steering
control system limits the power assist in
order to prevent them from overheating.
• The steering wheel is operated very
often.
• The steering wheel is kept in a fully
turned position for a long while.
When the power steering control system
cool down, the power steering system
back to the original condition.
NOTE:
If the steering is operated, you may hear
noise. This is normal and indicates that the
power steering system works properly.
Engine coolant temperature light
(If equipped)
68PH00274
When the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position, this light comes on briefly so
you can check that the light is working.
This indicator has two following functions.
2-94
68PH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING
Low engine coolant temperature light
(Blue color) - For petrol engine model
This light stays on while the engine is still
cold and goes off when the engine has
warmed up.
If this light blinks, there is a problem with
the system. Have your vehicle inspected
by your authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop.
High engine coolant temperature warning light (Red color)
If this light blinks while driving, it means the
engine is running hot. Avoid driving conditions that may lead to actual overheating. If
the light stays on without blinking, then the
engine is overheating. Follow the instructions in the “Engine trouble: Overheating”
of “EMERGENCY SERVICE” section.
Turn Signal Indicators
Illumination Indicator Light
50G055
64J045
When you turn on the left or right turn signals, the corresponding green arrow on the
instrument panel will flash along with the
respective turn signal lights. When you
turn on the hazard warning switch, both
arrows will flash along with all of the turn
signal lights.
This indicator light comes on while the
position lights, tail light and/or the headlights are on.
Front Fog Light Indicator Light
(If equipped)
Main Beam (High beam) Indicator
Light
NOTICE
Continuing to drive the vehicle when
engine overheating is indicated can
result in severe engine damage.
68PH00273
The front fog light indicator light comes on
when the front fog light operates.
50G056
This indicator comes on when headlight
main beams (high beams) are turned on.
2-95
68PH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING
Glow Plug Indicator Light
(If equipped)
If the light comes on when driving, there is
a possibility to have water in the fuel filter.
Drain water as soon as possible. Have
your vehicle inspected by an authorised
Maruti Suzuki workshop.
Lighting Control Lever
EXAMPLE
Master Warning Indicator Light
(If equipped)
60A543
If the coolant temperature is cool enough,
this light comes on when the ignition
switch is turned to the “ON” position or the
engine switch is pressed to change the
ignition mode to “ON” and goes out when
the glow plug is heated enough for engine
starting.
Fuel Filter Warning Light
(If equipped)
78K049
When the information display shows warning and indicator messages, this indicator
light may also blink.
For details, refer to “Information display” in
this section.
65D611
WARNING
To avoid possible injury, do not operate controls by reaching through the
steering wheel.
60A541
This light comes on for several seconds
when the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position or the engine switch is
pressed to change the ignition mode to
“ON” so you can check that light is working.
2-96
68PH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING
Lighting Operation
Automatic Lights Operation
(If equipped)
EXAMPLE
EXAMPLE
EXAMPLE
(3)
(3)
(4)
(2)
(1)
(2)
(1)
68PH00251
68PH00250
To turn the lights on or off, twist the knob
on the end of the lever. There are three
positions:
OFF (1)
All lights are off.
(2)
Front position lights, tail lights, license
plate light and instrument lights are on, but
headlights are off.
(3)
Front position lights, tail lights, license
plate light, instrument lights and headlights
are on.
With the headlights on, push the lever forward to switch to the high beams (Main
beams) or pull the lever toward you to
switch to the low beams. When the high
beams (Main beams) are on, a light on the
instrument panel will come on. To momentarily activate the high beams (Main
beams) as a passing signal, pull the lever
slightly toward you and release it when you
have completed the signal.
68PH00252
EXAMPLE
(5)
68PH00253
Your vehicle’s lighting system is controlled
by two main systems: the Lighting switch
and the Auto-On Headlight System (When
the lighting switch is in the “AUTO” position).
The two systems work together to operate
your lights as shown in the following chart:
2-97
68PH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING
ON: Lights ON
LIGHT: When it is light around the light sensor (5).
DARK: When it is dark around the light sensor (5).
Lighting
switch position
(1) OFF
(2) AUTO
(3)
(4)
Main lights to be
operated
Position lights,
Tail lights
Headlights
Position lights,
Tail lights
Headlights
Position lights,
Tail lights
Headlights
Position lights,
Tail lights
Headlights
To turn the lights on or off, twist the knob
on the end of the lever. There are four
positions:
Ignition mode
“LOCK” (OFF)
or “ACC”
LIGHT
DARK
Ignition mode “ON”
LIGHT
DARK
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
ON
–
–
–
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
–
–
–
–
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF (1)
All lights are off.
AUTO (2)
This function works when the ignition
mode has been changed to “ON” by pressing the engine switch. The headlights and
position lights are turned on and off automatically according to the amount of outside light detected by a sensor. They go
out automatically when you change the
ignition mode to “ACC” or “LOCK” by
pressing the engine switch.
The light sensor (5) for sensing the amount
of outside light is installed on the passenger’s seat side instrument panel.
CAUTION
If the light sensor area of the windshield is covered with mud, ice, or
other similar substances, the headlights and position lights may be
turned on even when it is still light
outside.
2-98
68PH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING
NOTE:
• Avoid covering the light sensor area of
the windshield with a sticker. The sticker
may impair the performance of the sensor and make the system unable to control operation of the lights correctly.
• If you changed the ignition mode to “ON”
by pressing the engine switch and the
“AUTO” position remains selected, the
headlights and position lights come on
automatically as the outside gets dark
even with the engine not running. Leaving the lights lit for a long time may lead
to a completely discharged battery.
Auto-on headlight system
EXAMPLE
EXAMPLE
(5)
68PH00254
(3)
Front position lights, tail lights, license
plate light and instrument lights are on, but
headlights are off.
(4)
Front position lights, tail lights, license
plate light, instrument lights and headlights
are on.
With the headlights on, push the lever forward to switch to the high beams (Main
beams) or pull the lever toward you to
switch to the low beams. When the high
beams (Main beams) are on, a light on the
instrument panel will come on. To momentarily activate the high beams (Main
beams) as a passing signal, pull the lever
slightly toward you and release it when you
have completed the signal.
68PH00253
The Auto-on headlight system automatically turns on all lights that are operated by
the lighting control lever on the steering
column, when the following three conditions are all met.
Conditions for Auto-on headlight system
operation:
1) It is dark around the light sensor (5).
2) The lighting control lever is in the
“AUTO” position.
3) You press the engine switch to change
the ignition mode to “ON”.
This system is operated by a signal from
the light sensor (5) on the passenger’s
seat side Instrument panel. Do not cover
the sensor (5). If you do, the system will
not work correctly.
2-99
68PH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING
Light Reminder Buzzer
WARNING
It takes about 5 seconds for the light
sensor to react to a change in lighting conditions. To help avoid an accident due to reduced visibility, turn on
your headlights before driving into a
tunnel, parking structure or the like.
NOTE:
The light sensor reacts even to infrared
rays, so it may operate incorrectly when
there are strong infrared rays.
The interior buzzer continuously beeps if
you open the driver’s door without turning
off the headlights and position lights. This
function is triggered under the following
condition:
The headlights and/or position lights are
on even after the ignition switch is turned
off, or the engine switch is pressed to
change the ignition mode to “LOCK”
(OFF).
The buzzer stops sounding when you turn
off the headlights and position lights.
NOTE:
A message is indicated on the information
display in the instrument cluster while the
buzzer is sounding.
Daytime Running Light (D.R.L.)
System (If equipped)
When the engine is started, this system
turns on the daytime running lights.
Conditions for D.R.L. system operation
1) The engine is running.
2) Headlights and front fog light (If
equipped) are off.
NOTE:
Brightness of the daytime running lights is
different from the brightness of the position
lights, but it is not a malfunction.
Guide Me Light (Vehicle with automatic lights operation)
Follow me home function
This function turns on the front position
lights and the headlights in the low beam
setting for about 10, 15, 20, 25 or 30 seconds after the engine switch is pressed to
change the ignition mode to “LOCK”
(OFF).
To set the function:
1) Turn the lighting switch to the “AUTO”
position
2) Press the engine switch to change the
ignition mode to “LOCK” (OFF).
3) Pull the lighting control lever toward
you once and open the driver’s side
door within 60 seconds. Or pull the
lighting control lever toward you once
while the driver’s side door is open.
To cancel the function:
Perform any of the following operations.
• Pull the lighting control lever toward you
once.
• Change the ignition mode to “ACC” or
“ON” by pressing the engine switch.
• Turn the lighting switch to any other
position than the “AUTO” position.
NOTE:
• When the “follow me home” is functioning, the front fog lights and the headlights (High beam) are not turned on.
• Lighting time of the “follow me home
function” can be changed on the infor-
2-100
68PH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING
mation display. Refer to “Information Display” in this section.
Lead to vehicle function
If the “UNLOCK” button of the remote controller is pressed while the lighting switch is
positioned in the “AUTO”, the front position
lights and the headlights in the low beam
are turned on for 10, 15, 20, 25 or 30 seconds.
The lead to vehicle function will operate
only when it is dark outside the vehicle.
To cancel the function:
Perform any of the following operations.
• Lock the doors by using the remote controller or request switch, or the key in the
driver’s door lock.
• Change the ignition mode to “ACC” or
“ON” by pressing the engine switch.
• Turn the lighting switch to any other
position than the “AUTO” position.
NOTE:
• When the “lead to vehicle” is functioning,
the front fog lights and the headlights
(high beam) are not turned on.
• Lighting time of the “lead to vehicle function” can be changed on the information
display. Refer to “Information Display” in
this section.
Headlight Leveling Switch
Front Fog Light Switch
(If equipped)
EXAMPLE
EXAMPLE
68PH00257
68PH00256
To turn the front fog light on, twist the knob
as shown in the illustration with the position lights, tail lights and/or the headlights
are on. When the front fog light is on, an
indicator light on the instrument cluster will
come on.
Level the headlight beam according to the
load condition of your vehicle by turning
this switch. The chart below shows the
appropriate switch position for different
vehicle-load conditions.
NOTE:
In some countries the lighting operation
may be different from the above description according to local regulations.
2-101
68PH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING
Vehicle with the halogen headlights
Switch
Vehicle Load Condition
Position
Driver only
0
Driver + 1 passenger
(in front seat)
0
Driver + 4 passengers,
no cargo
1
Driver + 4 passengers,
cargo added
2
Driver + full cargo
3
Turn Signal Control Lever
Normal turn signal
EXAMPLE
EXAMPLE
68PH00258
Vehicle with the discharge headlights
Switch
Vehicle Load Condition
Position
Driver only
0
Driver + 1 passenger
(in front seat)
0
Driver + 4 passengers,
no cargo
2
Driver + 4 passengers,
cargo added
3
Driver + full cargo
4
65D611
WARNING
To avoid possible injury, do not operate controls by reaching through the
steering wheel.
Move the lever all the way upward or
downward to signal. When the turn is completed, the signal will cancel and the lever
will return to its normal position.
Lane change signal
Turn Signal Operation
With the ignition switch in the “ON” position
or the ignition mode “ON”, move the lever
up or down to activate the right or left turn
signals.
EXAMPLE
68PH00259
2-102
68PH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING
Sometimes, such as when changing lanes,
the steering wheel is not turned far enough
to cancel the turn signal. For convenience,
you can flash the turn signal by moving the
lever part way and holding it there. The
lever will return to its normal position when
you release it.
Hazard Warning Switch
Windshield Wiper and Washer
Lever
EXAMPLE
EXAMPLE
NOTE:
The turn signal and its indicator flash three
times even if you return the lever immediately after moving it.
NOTE:
The turn signal and its indicator can be set
whether they flash three times after the
turn signal lever is returned via the information display. Refer to “Information Display” in this section.
NOTE:
You can customize the setting for the number of times of flashing of the turn signal
and its indicator. Please ask an authorised
Maruti Suzuki workshop for the customization.
79MH0231
Push in the hazard warning switch to activate the hazard warning lights. All turn signal lights and both turn signal indicators
will flash simultaneously. To turn off the
lights, push the switch again.
Use the hazard warning lights to warn
other traffic during emergency parking or
when your vehicle could otherwise become
a traffic hazard.
65B611
WARNING
To avoid possible injury, do not operate controls by reaching through the
steering wheel.
Wiper and Washer Operation
When the ignition switch is in the “ON”
position or the ignition mode is “ON”, you
can use the wiper/washer lever.
2-103
68PH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING
Windshield Wipers
Windshield Washer
EXAMPLE
NOTICE
EXAMPLE
68PH00261
68PH00262
To turn the windshield wipers on, move the
lever down to one of the three operating
positions. In the “INT” position, the wipers
operate intermittently. The “INT” position is
very convenient for driving in mist or light
rain. In the “LO” position, the wipers operate at a steady low speed. In the “HI” position, the wipers operate at a steady high
speed. To turn off the wipers, move the
lever back to the “OFF” position.
Move the lever up and hold it to the “MIST”
position, the windshield wipers will turn on
continuously at low speed.
To spray windshield washer fluid, pull the
lever toward you. The windshield wipers
will automatically turn on at low speed if
they are not already on and the “INT” position is equipped.
WARNING
• To prevent windshield icing in cold
weather, turn on the defroster to
heat the windshield before and
during windshield washer use.
• Do not use radiator antifreeze in
the windshield washer reservoir. It
can severely impair visibility when
sprayed on the windshield, and can
also damage your vehicle’s paint.
To help prevent damage to the windshield wiper and washer system
components, you should take the following precautions:
• Do not continue to hold in the lever
when there is no windshield
washer fluid being sprayed or the
washer motor can be damaged.
• Do not attempt to remove dirt from
a dry windshield with the wipers or
you can damage the windshield
and the wiper blades. Always wet
the windshield with washer fluid
before operating the wipers.
• Clear ice or packed snow from the
wiper blades before using the wipers.
• Check the washer fluid level regularly. Check it often when the
weather is bad.
• Only fill the washer fluid reservoir
3/4 full during cold weather to allow
room for expansion if the temperature falls low enough to freeze the
solution.
2-104
68PH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING
Rear Window Wiper/Washer Switch
(If equipped)
NOTICE
Clear ice or snow from the rear window and rear wiper blade before
using the rear wiper. Accumulated
ice or snow could prevent the wiper
blade from moving, causing damage
to the wiper motor.
EXAMPLE
Washer
Tilt/Telescoping (If equipped)
Steering Lock Lever
EXAMPLE
(1)
Wiper
68PH00263
To turn the rear wiper on, twist the rear
wiper switch on the end of the lever forward to the “ON” position. To turn the rear
wiper off, twist the switch rearward to the
“OFF” position.
With the rear wiper in the “OFF” position,
twist the switch rearward and hold it there
to spray window washer fluid.
With the rear wiper in the “ON” position,
turn the switch forward and hold it there to
spray window washer fluid.
(2)
68PH00264
(1) LOCK
(2) UNLOCK
The lock lever is located under the steering
column. To adjust the steering wheel
height and fore-aft position:
1) Push down the lock lever to unlock the
steering column.
2) Adjust the steering wheel to the desired
height and fore-aft position and lock the
steering column by pulling the lock
lever.
3) Try moving the steering wheel up and
down and back and forth to make sure
it is securely locked in position.
2-105
68PH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING
WARNING
Never attempt to adjust the steering
wheel while the vehicle is moving or
you could lose control of the vehicle.
Horn
Heated Rear Window Switch
(If equipped)
EXAMPLE
(1)
68PH00265
Press the horn button of the steering wheel
to sound the horn. The horn will sound with
the ignition switch in any position or any
ignition mode.
EXAMPLE
68PH00266
When the rear window is misted, push this
switch (1) to clear the window.
An indicator light will be lit when the defogger is on. The defogger will work only
when the engine is running. To turn off the
defogger, push the switch again.
NOTICE
The heated rear window uses a large
amount of electricity. Be sure to turn
off after the window has become
clear.
2-106
68PH0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING
NOTE:
• The defogger will work only when the
engine is running.
• The defogger will automatically turn off
after the defogger remains on for 15 minutes to prevent discharging of the battery.
2-107
68PH0-74E
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE
60G408
Exhaust Gas Warning ......................................................... 3-1
Daily Inspection Checklist .................................................. 3-1
Engine Oil Consumption .................................................... 3-2
3
Ignition Switch
(Vehicle without keyless push start system) .................... 3-3
Engine Switch
(Vehicle with keyless push start system) ......................... 3-5
Keyless Push Start System (If equipped) ......................... 3-6
Parking Brake Lever ........................................................... 3-9
Pedal ..................................................................................... 3-10
Starting the Engine
(Vehicle without keyless push start system) .................... 3-11
Starting the Engine
(Vehicle with keyless push start system) ......................... 3-12
Using the Transaxle ............................................................ 3-15
Gearshift Indicator (If equipped) ........................................ 3-19
Parking Sensors (If equipped) ........................................... 3-20
Rearview Camera (If equipped) .......................................... 3-26
Braking ................................................................................. 3-29
68PH0-74E
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE
Exhaust Gas Warning
WARNING
EXAMPLE
52D334
WARNING
Avoid breathing exhaust gases.
Exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide, a potentially lethal gas that is
colorless and odorless. Since carbon
monoxide is difficult to detect by
itself, be sure to take the following
precautions to help prevent carbon
monoxide from entering your vehicle.
• Do not leave the engine running in
garages or other confined areas.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Do not park with the engine running for a long period of time, even
in an open area. If it is necessary to
sit for a short time in a parked vehicle with the engine running, make
sure the air intake selector is set to
“FRESH AIR” and the blower is at
high speed.
• Avoid operating the vehicle with
the tailgate or trunk open. If it is
necessary to operate the vehicle
with the tailgate or trunk open,
make sure the sunroof (If equipped)
and all windows are closed, and the
blower is at high speed with the air
intake selector set to “FRESH AIR”.
• To allow proper operation of your
vehicle’s ventilation system, keep
the air inlet grille in front of the
windshield clear of snow, leaves or
other obstructions at all times.
• Keep the exhaust tailpipe area clear
of snow and other material to help
reduce the buildup of exhaust
gases under the vehicle. This is
particularly important when parked
in blizzard conditions.
• Have the exhaust system inspected
periodically for damage and leaks.
Any damage or leaks should be
repaired immediately.
Daily Inspection Checklist
Before Driving
EXAMPLE
60A187S
1) Make sure that windows, mirrors, lights
and reflectors are clean and unobstructed.
2) Visually check the tires for the following
points:
– the depth of the tread groove
– abnormal wear, cracks and damage
– loose wheel nuts
– existence of foreign material such as
nails, stones, etc.
Refer to “Tires” in “INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE” section for details.
3) Look for fluid and oil leaks.
3-1
68PH0-74E
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
It is normal for water to drip from the air
conditioning system after use.
4) Make sure the hood is fully closed and
latched.
5) Check the headlights, turn signal lights,
brake lights and horn for proper operation.
6) Adjust the seat and head restraint.
7) Check the brake pedal and the parking
brake lever.
8) Adjust the mirrors.
9) Make sure that you and all passengers
have properly fastened your seat belts.
10)Make sure that all warning lights come
on as the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position or the engine switch is
pressed to change the ignition mode to
“ON”.
11)Check all gauges.
12)Make sure that the BRAKE SYSTEM
WARNING light turns off when the parking brake is released.
Once a week, or each time you fill your fuel
tank, perform the following under-hood
checks:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
Engine oil level
Coolant level
Brake fluid level
Battery solution level
Windshield washer fluid level
6) Hood latch operation
Pull the hood release handle inside the
vehicle. Make sure that you cannot
open the hood all the way without
releasing the secondary latch. Be sure
to close the hood securely after checking for proper latch operation. See the
item “All latches, hinges and locks” of
“CHASSIS AND BODY” in the “Periodic
Maintenance
Schedule”
in
the
“INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE”
section for lubrication schedule.
WARNING
Make sure the hood is fully closed
and latched before driving. If it is not,
it can fly up unexpectedly during
driving, obstructing your view and
resulting in an accident.
Once a month, or each time you fill your
fuel tank, check the tire pressure using a
tire pressure gauge. Also check the tire
pressure of the spare tire.
Engine Oil Consumption
It is normal for the engine to consume
some engine oil during normal vehicle
operation.
The amount of engine oil consumed
depends on the viscosity of the oil, the
quality of the oil and the conditions the
vehicle is driven under.
More oil is consumed during high-speed
driving and when there is frequent acceleration and deceleration. Under high loads,
your engine also will consume more oil.
A new engine also consumes more oil,
since its pistons, piston rings and cylinder
walls have not yet become conditioned.
New engines reach the normal level of oil
consumption only after approximately
5000 km driving.
Oil consumption:
Max. 1.0 L per 1000 km
When judging the amount of oil consumption, note that the oil may become diluted
and make it difficult to accurately judge the
true oil level.
As an example, if a vehicle is used for
repeated short trips, and consumes a normal amount of oil, the dipstick may not
show any drop in the oil level at all, even
after 1000 km or more of driving. This is
because the oil is gradually becoming
diluted with fuel or moisture, making it
appear that the oil level has not changed.
3-2
68PH0-74E
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE
You should also be aware that the diluting
ingredients evaporate out when the vehicle
is subsequently driven at high speeds,
such as on an expressway, making it
appear that oil is excessively consumed
after high-speed driving.
Ignition Switch
(Vehicle without keyless push
start system)
EXAMPLE
The ignition switch has the following four
positions:
LOCK
This is the normal parking position. It is the
only position in which the key can be
removed.
Manual transaxle
EXAMPLE
65D611
Turn to “LOCK”
Push
WARNING
To avoid possible injury, do not operate controls by reaching through the
steering wheel.
68PH00301
EXAMPLE
• Manual transaxle vehicles
You must push in the key to turn it to the
“LOCK” position. It locks the ignition, and
prevents normal use of the steering
wheel after the key is removed.
• CVT vehicles
The gearshift lever must be in the “P”
(Park) position to turn the key to the
“LOCK” position. It locks the ignition and
prevents normal use of the steering
wheel and gearshift lever.
68PH00310
3-3
68PH0-74E
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE
To release the steering lock, insert the key
and turn it clockwise to one of the other
positions. If you have trouble turning the
key to unlock the steering, try turning the
steering wheel slightly to the right or left
while turning the key.
EXAMPLE
WARNING
ACC
Accessories such as the radio can operate, but the engine is off.
ON
This is the normal operating position. All
electrical systems are on.
START
This is the position for starting the engine
using the starter motor. The key should be
released from this position as soon as the
engine starts.
Ignition key reminder (If equipped)
A buzzer sounds intermittently to remind
you to remove the ignition key if it is in the
ignition switch when the driver’s door is
opened.
81A297S
WARNING
• Never return the ignition switch to
the “LOCK” position and remove
the ignition key while the vehicle is
moving. The steering wheel will
lock and you will not be able to
steer the vehicle.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Always return the ignition switch to
the “LOCK” position and remove
the ignition key when leaving the
vehicle even if only for a short time.
Also do not leave children alone in
a parked vehicle. Unattended children could cause accidental movement of the vehicle or could tamper
with power windows. They also
could suffer from heat stroke in
warm or hot weather. These could
result in severe injury or even
death.
NOTICE
• Do not use the starter motor for
more than 12 seconds at a time. If
the engine does not start, wait 15
seconds before trying again. If the
engine does not start after several
attempts, check the fuel and ignition systems or consult your authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop.
• Do not leave the ignition switch in
the “ON” position if the engine is
not running as the battery will discharge.
3-4
68PH0-74E
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE
Engine Switch
(Vehicle with keyless push
start system)
EXAMPLE
ON
• With the engine off
You can use such electric equipment as
the power windows and wipers with the
engine off. When this ignition mode is
selected by pressing the engine switch,
the information display in the instrument
cluster shows the following message:
“ON” IGNITION SWITCH POSITION.
• With the engine on
All electric equipment is operational. The
vehicle can be driven when you have
selected this ignition mode by pressing
the engine switch.
68PH00302
LOCK (OFF)
This mode is for parking the vehicle. When
this mode is selected by pressing the
engine switch and then any door (Including
the tailgate) is opened or closed, the steering will be locked automatically.
ACC
Press the engine switch to select this ignition mode to use such electric equipment
as the audio system, outside rearview mirrors and accessory socket with the engine
off. When this position is selected, the
information display in the instrument cluster shows the following message: “ACC”
IGNITION SWITCH POSITION. Refer to
“Information Display” in the “BEFORE
DRIVING” section for details.
START
Provided you have the keyless push start
system remote controller with you, the
engine automatically starts when you
press the engine switch to select this ignition mode after shifting to “N” (Neutral) and
depressing the brake and clutch pedals.
NOTE:
You do not need to keep the engine switch
pressed to start the engine.
NOTE:
In the presence of strong radio signals or
noise, you may not be able to change the
ignition mode to “ACC” or “ON” or to start
the engine using the engine switch. In this
case, the information display on the instrument cluster will show the following message: KEY FOB NOT DETECTED.
Unreleased Steering Lock Warning
If the steering lock remains engaged when
you press the engine switch to change the
ignition mode to “ON”, the information display in the instrument cluster shows the
message: “TRN. STEERING WHEEL TO
RELEASE LOCK”. Refer to “Information
Display” in the “BEFORE DRIVING” section for details.
NOTE:
The steering lock may not be released if
some load is acting on the steering wheel.
If this happens, turn the steering wheel to
the right or left to relieve it from the load
before you press the engine switch again
to change to the desired ignition mode.
NOTICE
Do not leave the engine switch in the
“ACC” or “ON” mode when the
engine is not running. Avoid using
the radio or other electric accessories for a long time when the engine
switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” mode
when the engine is not running, otherwise the battery may discharge.
3-5
68PH0-74E
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE
Keyless Push Start System
(If equipped)
Provided the keyless push start system
remote controller is within the “interior
workable area” (Refer to the related explanation in this section), you can use the
engine switch for starting the engine and
selecting an ignition mode (“ACC” or
“ON”). In addition, the following functions
can be used:
• Keyless entry function. Refer to “Keyless
Push Start System Remote Controller” in
the “BEFORE DRIVING” section for
details.
• Locking and unlocking doors (Including
the tailgate) using a request switch.
Refer to “Keyless Push Start System
Remote Controller” in the “BEFORE
DRIVING” section for details.
• Immobilizer (anti-theft) function. Refer to
“Immobilizer System” in the “BEFORE
DRIVING” section for details.
Engine Switch Illumination
The engine switch is illuminated (lit) in the
following situations:
• When the engine is off and the driver’s
door is open, or for 15 seconds after the
driver’s door is closed. The illumination
will fade out after 15 seconds pass.
• When the engine is off and the position
lights are on. The illumination will go out
when the position lights are turned off.
• When the engine is on and the position
lights and/or the headlights are on. The
illumination will go out when the position
lights and/or the headlights are turned
off.
EXAMPLE
1) Bring the keyless push start system
remote controller with you and sit in the
driver’s seat.
2) Without depressing the clutch pedal,
press the engine switch (1).
EXAMPLE
(1)
82K253
NOTE:
To save the battery, the illumination will be
automatically turned off when both of the
following conditions are simultaneously
met:
• The headlights and position lights are
turned off.
• A period of 15 minutes has elapsed after
opening the driver’s door.
68PH00303
Every time you press the engine switch,
the ignition mode changes as follows.
EXAMPLE
Selection of Ignition Modes
Press the engine switch to select the
“ACC” or “ON” mode as follows when you
use an electric accessory or check the
operation of instruments without running
the engine.
(OFF)
(Audio equipment)
68PH00322
3-6
68PH0-74E
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
When selecting the ignition modes, the
information display in the instrument clustershows certain messages. Refer to
“Information Display” in the “BEFORE
DRIVING” section for details.
If the master warning indicator light
blinks and the ignition modes cannot
be selected
Your keyless push start system remote controller may not be sensed as being within the
“interior workable area” (Refer to the related
explanation in this section). Try again after
making sure you have the remote controller
with you. If the ignition modes still cannot be
selected, the battery of the remote controller
may be discharged. To be able to select an
ignition mode, you must then use the following method:
EXAMPLE
(1)
(2)
68PH00304
1) Without depressing the brake pedal
and the clutch pedal, push the engine
switch (1).
2) Within about 10 seconds during which
the master warning indicator light in the
instrument cluster is blinking and the
“PLACE KEY FOB ON START
SWITCH” message appears on the
information display, touch the engine
switch with the “LOCK” button end of
the remote controller (2) for about 2
seconds. Then you should be able to
select ignition modes.
NOTE:
• If you still cannot select the ignition
modes, there may be some problem with
the keyless push start system. Contact
an authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop
for an inspection of the system.
• The immobilizer/keyless push start system warning light will come on for about
5 seconds while the master warning indicator light is blinking in addition, the
information display in the instrument
cluster will show a message during this
time. Refer to “Information Display” in
the “BEFORE DRIVING” section for
details.
• You may customize the system to cause
the interior buzzer to sound once for the
“remote controller out of sensing range”
warning. To incorporate this customization, please contact an authorised Maruti
Suzuki workshop.
• If the battery of the remote controller is
about to become completely discharged,
the corresponding message will appear on
the information display when you press
the engine switch to change the ignition
mode to “ON”. Refer to “Information Display” in the “BEFORE DRIVING” section
for details. For details on replacing the battery, refer to the “Keyless Push Start System Remote Controller” in the “BEFORE
DRIVING” section.
“Remote Controller Outside” Warning
When either of the conditions described
below is met, the system issues a “remote
controller outside” warning by sounding the
interior and exterior buzzers.At the same
time the immobilizer/keyless push start
system warning light comes on and the
master warning indicator light blinks.
• Any door is opened and then closed
while the remote controller is not inside
the vehicle and the engine is running or
the ignition mode has been changed to
“ACC” or “ON” by pressing the engine
switch.
• The remote controller is not inside the
vehicle when you attempt to start the
engine after changing the ignition mode
to “ACC” or “ON” by pressing the engine
switch.
3-7
68PH0-74E
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE
(OFF) by pressing the engine switch and
then perform the engine starting operation Refer to “Starting the Engine” in this
section.
• Always keep the remote controller with
you as the driver.
EXAMPLE
(2)
Interior Workable Area for Engine
Starting, Ignition Mode Selection
and “Remote Controller Outside”
Warning
EXAMPLE
(1)
68PH02305
(1) Immobilizer/keyless push start system warning light (Blinks)
(2) Master warning indicator light (Blinks)
NOTE:
• If the warning is given, locate the remote
controller as soon as possible.
• Any attempt to start the engine will fail
while the warning is active. The message appearing on the information display in the instrument cluster will also
indicate this condition. Refer to “Information Display” in the “BEFORE DRIVING”
section for details.
• Normally the immobilizer/keyless push
start system warning light should go out
and the master warning indicator light
should stop blinking shortly after the
remote controller is brought back inside
the vehicle. If they remain lit and blinking, change the ignition mode to “LOCK”
(1)
68PH00306
(1) Interior workable area
The “interior workable area” for these functions is defined as all the interior spaces
except for the space above the instrument
panel.
NOTE:
• Even when the remote controller is in the
“interior workable area”, if it is in any of
the following conditions, you may not be
able to start the engine or select the ignition modes, and the “remote controller
outside” warning may be given.
–The remote controller’s battery is low.
–The remote controller is affected by
strong radio signals or noise.
–The remote controller is in contact with
or covered by a metallic object.
3-8
68PH0-74E
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE
–The remote controller is in stowage like
the glove box or a door pocket.
–The remote controller is in the sun visor
pocket or on the floor.
• Even when the remote controller is outside the “interior workable area”, if it is in
any of the following conditions, you may
be able to start the engine or select the
ignition mode. The “remote controller
outside” warning may not be given at
that time.
–The remote controller is outside the
vehicle but very close to a door.
–The remote controller is on the instrument panel.
Parking Brake Lever
may make it difficult to shift out of “P” when
you are ready to drive the vehicle.
When preparing to drive the vehicle, move
the gearshift lever out of the “P” position
before releasing the parking brake.
EXAMPLE
(1)
(2)
(3)
68PHM3001
(1) To set
(2) To release
(3) To release
The parking brake lever is located between
the seats. To set the parking brake, hold
the brake pedal down and pull the parking
brake lever all the way up. To release the
parking brake, hold the brake pedal down,
pull up slightly on the parking brake lever,
push the button on the end of the lever
with your thumb, and lower the lever to its
original position.
For CVT vehicles, always set the parking
brake before moving the gearshift lever to
the “P” (Park) position. If you park on an
incline and shift into “P” before setting the
parking brake, the weight of the vehicle
WARNING
• Never drive your vehicle with the
parking brake on: rear brake effectiveness can be reduced from overheating, brake life may be
shortened, or permanent brake
damage may result.
• If the parking brake does not hold
the vehicle securely or does not
fully release, have your vehicle
inspected immediately by authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop.
WARNING
Always set the parking brake fully
before leaving your vehicle or it may
move, causing injury or damage.
When parking, make sure the gearshift lever for manual transaxle vehicles is in reverse or first gear and the
gearshift lever for CVT vehicles is in
“P” (Park). Remember, even though
the transaxle is in gear or in Park,
you must set the parking brake fully.
3-9
68PH0-74E
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING
When parking the vehicle in
extremely cold weather, the following
procedure should be used:
1) Set the parking brake.
2) Manual transaxle - turn off the
engine, then shift into reverse or
first gear.
CVT - shift into “P” (Park) and turn
off the engine.
3) Get out of the vehicle and put
chocks under the wheels.
4) Release the parking brake.
When you return to your vehicle,
you must remember to first set the
parking brake, then remove the
wheel chocks.
Pedal
Brake Pedal (2)
Manual transaxle
(1)
(2)
EXAMPLE
(3)
80J2121
CVT
WARNING
If brake squeal is excessive and
occurs each time the brakes are
applied, you should have the brakes
checked by your authorised Maruti
Suzuki workshop.
EXAMPLE
(2)
WARNING
(3)
Parking Brake Reminder Buzzer
A buzzer sounds intermittently to remind
you to release the parking brake if you
start the vehicle without releasing the parking brake. Make sure that the parking
brake is fully released and the brake system warning light turns off.
Your vehicle is equipped with front disc
brakes and rear drum brakes. Depressing
the brake pedal applies both sets of
brakes.
You may hear occasional brake squeal
when you apply the brakes. This is a normal condition caused by environmental
factors such as cold, wet, snow, etc.
80J2122
Clutch Pedal (1)
(For manual transaxle)
The clutch pedal is used to disengage the
drive to the wheels when starting the
engine, stopping, or shifting the gearshift
lever. Depressing the pedal disengages
the clutch.
WARNING
Do not drive with your foot resting on
the clutch pedal. It could result in
excessive clutch wear, clutch damage, or unexpected loss of engine
braking.
Do not “ride” the brakes by applying
them continuously or resting your
foot on the pedal. This will result in
overheating of the brakes which
could cause unpredictable braking
action, longer stopping distances, or
permanent brake damage.
Accelerator Pedal (3)
This pedal controls the speed of the
engine. Depressing the accelerator pedal
increases power output and speed.
3-10
68PH0-74E
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE
Starting the Engine
(Vehicle without keyless push
start system)
NOTE:
CVT vehicles have a starter interlock
device which is designed to keep the
starter from operating if the transaxle is in
any of the drive positions.
Before Starting the Engine
If the engine does not start after 12 seconds of cranking, wait about 15 seconds,
then press down the accelerator pedal to
1/3 of its travel and try cranking the engine
again. Release the key and accelerator
pedal when the engine starts.
WARNING
Make sure that the parking brake is
set fully and the transaxle is in Neutral (or Park for vehicles with CVT)
before attempting to start the engine.
If the engine still does not start, try holding
the accelerator pedal all the way down to
the floor while cranking. This should clear
the engine if it is flooded.
(For diesel engine model)
NOTE:
The engine of manual transaxle vehicle will
not start unless the clutch pedal is
depressed.
Starting a Cold and Warm Engine
EXAMPLE
68PH00308
1) Make sure the parking brake is set fully.
2) Manual transaxle – Shift into “N” (Neutral) and depress the clutch pedal all
the way to the floor. Hold the clutch
pedal while starting the engine.
CVT – If the gearshift lever is not in “P”
(Park) position, shift into “P” (Park). (If
you need to re-start the engine while
the vehicle is moving, shift into “N”.)
(For petrol engine model)
With your foot off the accelerator pedal,
crank the engine by turning the ignition key
to “START”. Release the key when the
engine starts.
NOTICE
• Stop turning the starter immediately after the engine has started or
the starter system can be damaged.
• Do not crank the engine for more
than 12 seconds at a time. If the
engine doesn’t start on the first try,
wait about 15 seconds before trying again.
Cold engine
Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” position and wait until the glow plug indicator
goes out if it comes on. Crank the engine
by turning the ignition key to “START”.
Release the key when the engine starts.
NOTICE
• Stop turning the starter immediately after the engine has started or
the starter system can be damaged.
• Do not crank the engine for more
than 30 seconds at a time. If the
engine doesn’t start on the first try,
wait about 15 seconds before trying again.
3-11
68PH0-74E
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE
Warm engine
Crank the engine by turning the ignition
key to “START”. Release the key when the
engine starts.
Caution when stopping the engine with
turbocharger
When stopping the engine after climbing or
high speed driving, let the engine idle for
about one minute or more (If it is not prohibited) to cool down the turbocharger and
engine oil. This is to prevent the engine oil
from
over-deteriorating.
Deteriorated
engine oil will damage the bearings of the
turbocharger.
Restarting diesel engine after fuelempty stop
If the engine stops and the low fuel warning light and the malfunction indicator light
come on, use the following procedure:
1) Fill the fuel tank.
2) Hold the ignition key in “ON” position for
5-10 seconds to feed fuel.
3) Perform above engine starting procedure to start the engine.
If the malfunction indicator light still comes
on after the engine started, there may be
some problem with the engine. Ask your
authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop to
have the engine inspected.
NOTE:
The engine of manual transaxle vehicle will
not start unless the clutch pedal is
depressed.
Starting the Engine
(Vehicle with keyless push
start system)
Before Starting the Engine
EXAMPLE
3) The “PUSH START SWITCH” message
will appear on the information display in
the instrument cluster. Push the engine
switch (1). When the engine is started,
the starter motor will automatically stop.
WARNING
Make sure that the parking brake is
set fully and the transaxle is in “N”
(Neutral) before attempting to start
the engine.
NOTICE
68PH00309
1) Make sure the parking brake is set fully.
2) Shift to “N” (Neutral) and fully depress
the clutch pedal. Hold the clutch and
brake pedals fully depressed.
NOTE:
The engine of manual transaxle vehicle will
not start unless the clutch pedal is
depressed.
EXAMPLE
(1)
• Do not depress the accelerator
during the engine starting procedure.
• If the engine does not respond
when you try to start it with the
engine switch or if the engine
switch repeats cycling through the
“LOCK”(OFF) - “ACC” - “ON”
mode, the vehicle battery may be
discharged. Check the voltage of
the vehicle battery before trying
again.
NOTE:
• You do not need to keep the engine
switch pressed to start the engine.
• The engine of a manual transaxle vehicle will not start unless the clutch pedal
is depressed.
• During the engine starting procedure,
messages on the information display will
68PH00303
3-12
68PH0-74E
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE
help you. Refer to “Information Display”
in the “BEFORE DRIVING” section for
details.
• You should turn off such loads as the
headlights and air conditioning system to
facilitate starting of the engine.
• Even if you fail to start the engine, the
starter motor will stop turning automatically after a short time. After the starter
motor has stopped or if there is some
problem with the system, the starter
motor will rotate only while the engine
switch is being pressed.
Stopping the engine
• Depress the engine switch to stop the
engine after the vehicle stopped completely.
• In case of emergency, you can stop the
engine by quickly pushing the engine
switch more than 3 times, or pushing
and holding the engine switch more than
2 seconds while the vehicle in motion.
NOTE:
Except in emergency, do not stop the
engine while the vehicle is in motion.
The steering and braking operation will
require more efforts when the engine is
stopped.
Refer to “Braking” in this section.
• If the vehicle is stopped & stays as it is
for while after the engine was stopped
unexpectedly or was raced before stopping, a clicking sound may be heard
from around the engine when the engine
is restarted. This is not a malfunction. In
such cases, always let the engine idle
before stopping it.
Starting a Cold and Warm Engine
(For petrol engine model)
With your foot off the accelerator pedal,
crank the engine by pressing the engine
switch to change the ignition mode to
“START”.
NOTICE
Do not crank the engine for more
than 12 seconds at a time.
If the engine doesn’t start on the first
try, wait about 15 seconds before trying again.
After pressing the engine switch to change
the ignition mode to “START”, the starter
cranks the engine for about 12 seconds
before it can start the engine. If the engine
fails to start at the first attempt, wait about
15 seconds, then try again while keeping
the engine switch pressed while pressing
down the accelerator pedal to 1/3 of its
travel. Release the accelerator pedal when
the engine starts.
If the engine still does not start, try holding
the accelerator pedal all the way to the
floor while cranking. This should clear the
engine if it is flooded.
If you are unable to start the engine using
this procedure, consult your authorised
Maruti Suzuki workshop.
(For diesel engine model)
Cold engine
Depress the clutch and brake pedals fully
and press the engine switch to crank the
engine. If the glow plug indicator light
comes on, the engine will start automatically after the glow plug indicator light goes
off or 10 seconds pass.
NOTICE
Do not crank the engine for more
than 30 seconds at a time.
If the engine doesn’t start on the first
try, wait about 15 seconds before trying again.
Warm engine
Crank the engine by pressing the engine
switch to change the ignition mode to
“START”.
Caution when stopping the engine with
turbocharger
When stopping the engine after climbing or
high speed driving, let the engine idle for
about one minute or more (If it is not prohibited) to cool down the turbocharger and
engine oil. This is to prevent the engine oil
from
over-deteriorating.
Deteriorated
engine oil will damage the bearings of the
turbocharger.
3-13
68PH0-74E
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE
Restarting diesel engine after fuelempty stop
If the engine stops and the low fuel warning light and the malfunction indicator light
come on, use the following procedure:
1) Fill the fuel tank.
2) Press the engine switch to change the
ignition mode to “ON” for 5-10 seconds
to feed fuel.
3) Perform above engine starting procedure to start the engine.
EXAMPLE
(1)
(2)
68PH00304
If the malfunction indicator light still comes
on after the engine started, there may be
some problem with the engine. Ask your
authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop to
have the engine inspected.
If the master warning indicator light
blinks and the engine cannot be started
Your keyless push start system remote
controller may not be sensed as being
within the “interior workable area”. Try
again after making sure that you have the
remote controller with you. If the engine
still cannot be started, the battery of the
remote controller may be discharged. You
must then use the following method to be
able to start the engine.
1) Make sure the parking brake is set fully.
2) Shift to “N” (Neutral) and fully depress
the clutch pedal. Hold the clutch and
brake pedals fully depressed.
3) The “PUSH START SWITCH” message
will appear on the information display in
the instrument cluster. Press the engine
switch (1).
4) Within about 10 seconds of blinking of
the master warning indicator light in the
instrument cluster, touch the engine
switch with the “LOCK” button end of
the remote controller (2) for about 2
seconds.Then you should be able to
select ignition modes & start the
engine.
NOTE:
• If you still cannot start the engine after
several attempts using the above
method, there may be a problem elsewhere, such as a low battery. Contact
your authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop
for inspection.
• The immobilizer/keyless push start system warning light will come on for about
5 seconds while the master warning indicator light is blinking. In addition, the
information display will show a certain
message during this time. Refer to
“Information Display” in the “BEFORE
DRIVING” section for details.
• You may customize the system to cause
the interior buzzer to sound once for the
“remote controller out of sensing range”
warning. Please contact an authorised
Maruti Suzuki workshop for the customization.
• If the battery of the remote controller is
about to be completely discharged, a
message warning will appear on the
information display when the ignition
mode is changed to “ON” by pressing
the engine switch. For details on replacing the battery, refer to the “Keyless
Push Start System Remote Controller” in
the “BEFORE DRIVING” section.
Returning the ignition mode to
“LOCK” (OFF)
NOTE:
Certain problems like a fault in engine system may prevent the engine switch from
going back to the “LOCK” (OFF) mode. If
this happens, have the vehicle inspected
by an authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop
after doing the following:
• Lock the doors using the key to prevent
theft. (The request switches and the key-
3-14
68PH0-74E
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE
less push start system remote controller
cannot be used to lock them.)
• Disconnect the negative cable from the
battery to prevent discharge.
with repeated short beeps. If this happens,
have the vehicle inspected by an authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop.
Using the Transaxle
Manual Transaxle
“LOCK” (OFF) mode reminder buzzer
If the driver’s door is opened without
returning the ignition mode to “LOCK”
(OFF) by pressing the engine switch, a
buzzer sounds to warn you of this state.
• If you open the driver’s door after pressing the engine switch to change the ignition mode to “ACC”, the interior buzzer
beeps intermittently.
• The buzzer will stop sounding if you then
push the engine switch twice, thus bringing it back the ignition mode to “LOCK”
(OFF).
NOTE:
Whenever you leave the vehicle, make
sure you have returned the ignition mode
to “LOCK” (OFF) using the engine switch
and then lock the doors. Without returning
the ignition mode to “LOCK” (OFF), you
cannot use a request switch or keyless
push start system remote controller to lock
the doors.
Steering lock warning buzzer
If the steering lock fails to engage due to a
fault in the system when the ignition mode
is turned to “LOCK” (OFF) by pressing the
engine switch and then any door (including
the tailgate) is opened or closed, the interior buzzer will warn you of this condition
EXAMPLE
79MH0303
Starting off
To start off, depress the clutch pedal all the
way to the floor and shift into 1st gear.
After releasing the parking brake, gradually
release the clutch. When you hear a
change in the engine’s sound, slowly press
the accelerator while continuing to gradually release the clutch.
Shifting
All forward gears are synchronized, which
provides for quiet, and easy shifting.
Always depress the clutch pedal all the
way to the floor before shifting gears. Keep
the engine speed to a value so that it does
not rise into the red zone of the tachometer.
3-15
68PH0-74E
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE
Downshifting
speeds
maximum
allowable
For Petrol Engine
(K10C model)
Downshifting
km/h
2nd to 1st
20
3rd to 2nd
70
4th to 3rd
115
5th to 4th
160*
(K12M model)
Downshifting
NOTICE
When downshifting to a lower gear,
make sure not to downshift at the
speed faster than the maximum
allowable speeds for the next lower
speed, or severe engine damage can
result.
WARNING
km/h
2nd to 1st
45
3rd to 2nd
85
4th to 3rd
130
5th to 4th
175*
For Diesel Engine
Downshifting
*NOTE:
You may not accelerate to the maximum
allowable speed because of the driving situation and/or the vehicle condition.
km/h
2nd to 1st
40
3rd to 2nd
70
4th to 3rd
115
5th to 4th
165*
• Reduce your speed and downshift
to a lower gear before going down
a long or steep hill. A lower gear
will allow the engine to provide
braking. Avoid riding the brakes or
they may overheat, resulting in
brake failure.
• When driving on slippery roads, be
sure to slow down before downshifting. Excessive and/or sudden
changes in engine speed may
cause loss of traction, which could
cause you to lose control.
NOTICE
NOTICE
• To help avoid clutch damage, do
not use the clutch pedal as a footrest while driving or use the clutch
to keep the vehicle stationary on a
slope. Depress the clutch fully
when shifting.
• When shifting or starting off, do not
race the engine. Racing the engine
can shorten engine life and cause
negative effect to smooth shifting.
Continuously Variable Transaxle
(CVT)
EXAMPLE
(1)
68PH00311
(1) S (sport) mode switch
Make sure that the vehicle is completely stationary before you shift
into reverse.
3-16
68PH0-74E
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE
Gearshift lever
EXAMPLE
Shift with the knob button (1)
pushed in and the brake pedal
depressed.
EXAMPLE
(1)
Shift with the knob button (1)
pushed in.
(2)
68PH00312
(2) Sport mode indicator
S (Sport) mode switch
The sport mode switch (1) is used to turn
on and off the sport mode.
To turn on the sport mode, push in the
switch and sport mode indicator (2) will
appear on the information display. To turn
off the sport mode, push in the switch
again and sport mode indicator will go off.
When the engine restarts, the sport mode
is turned to the off automatically.
The sport mode is suitable for the following
driving conditions:
• Driving on hilly, winding roads
– You can drive more smoothly with less
frequent gear changing
• Going down a steep hill
– Some engine braking is provided
Shift without the knob button (1)
pushed in.
68PH00313
(1) Knob button
The gearshift lever is designed so that it
cannot be shifted out of the “P” position
unless the ignition switch is in the “ON”
position and the brake pedal is depressed.
WARNING
Always depress the brake pedal
before shifting from “P” (Park) (or
“N” (Neutral) if the vehicle is stationary) to a forward or reverse gear, to
help prevent the vehicle from moving
unexpectedly when you shift.
The gearshift lever has a lock mechanism
to help prevent accidental shifting. To shift
the gearshift lever:
NOTE:
• Always shift the gearshift lever without
pushing in the knob button (1) except
when you shift from “P” to “R”, from “D”
to “L”, from “N” to “R” or from “R” to “P”. If
you always push in the knob button (1)
when shifting the gearshift lever, you
could shift into “P”, “R” or “L” by mistake.
• If driver’s or passenger’s knee hits the
gearshift lever while driving, the lever
could move and the gear could be
changed unexpectedly.
Use the gearshift lever positions as
described below:
P (Park)
Use this position to lock the transaxle
when the vehicle is parked or when starting the engine. Shift into Park only when
the vehicle is completely stationary.
3-17
68PH0-74E
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE
R (Reverse)
Use this position to reverse the vehicle
from stop. Make sure that vehicle is completely stationary before shifting into
Reverse.
NOTICE
Do not shift the gearshift lever into
“R” while moving forward, or the
transaxle may be damaged. If you
shift into “R” when the vehicle speed
is over 10 km/h, the transaxle will not
shift into reverse.
N (Neutral)
Use this position for starting the engine if
the engine stalls and you need to restart it
while the vehicle is moving. You may also
shift into Neutral and depress the brake
pedal to hold the vehicle stationary during
idling.
D (Drive)
Use this position for all normal driving.
With the gearshift lever in “D” range you
can get an automatic downshift by pressing
the accelerator pedal. The higher the vehicle speed is, the more you need to press
the accelerator pedal to get a downshift.
L (Low)
Use this position to provide maximum
power when climbing steep hills or driving
through deep snow or mud, or to provide
maximum engine braking when going
down steep hills.
NOTE:
If you move the gearshift lever to a lower
gear while driving faster than the maximum
allowable speed for the lower gear, the
transaxle will not actually downshift until
your speed drops below the maximum
speed for the lower gear.
If You Cannot Shift CVT Gearshift
Lever Out of “P” (Park)
(2)
NOTICE
Be sure to take the following precautions to help avoid damage to the
CVT:
• Make sure that the vehicle is completely stationary before shifting
into “P” or “R”.
• Do not shift from “P” or “N” to “R”,
“D”, or “L” when the engine is running above idle speed.
• Do not rev the engine with the
transaxle in a drive position (“R”,
“D”, or “L”) and the front wheels
not moving.
• Do not use the accelerator to hold
the vehicle on a hill. Use the vehicle’s brakes.
(1)
EXAMPLE
68PH00314
Vehicles with a CVT have an electrically
operated park-lock feature. If the vehicle’s
battery is discharged, or there is some
other electrical failure, the CVT cannot be
shifted out of Park in the normal way. Jump
starting may correct the condition. If not,
follow the procedure described below. This
procedure will permit shifting the transaxle
out of Park.
1) Be sure the parking brake is firmly
applied.
2) If the engine is running, stop the
engine.
3) Make sure the key is in the “ON” or
“ACC” position.
4) With the release button (1) pushed,
push the knob button (2) and shift the
gearshift lever to the desired position.
3-18
68PH0-74E
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE
This procedure is for emergency use only.
If repeated use of this procedure is necessary, or the procedure does not work as
described, take the vehicle to your authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop for repair.
Gearshift Indicator
(If equipped)
For details on how to use the transaxle,
refer to “Using the Transaxle” in this section.
EXAMPLE
WARNING
68PH02218
In the following cases, the gearshift indicator is indicated on the information display
when the ignition switch is in the “ON”
position or the ignition mode is “ON”.
When the gearshift lever is in a position
other than “N” (Neutral).
The electronic control system monitors
driving condition (such as vehicle speed
and/or engine revolution), and it shows
which gear position is optimal for your driving with the indication on the display.
If UP/DOWN arrow and the gear position
other than currently selected are indicated
on the display while driving, we recommend you to shift up or down the gear to
indicated position. It is the optimal gear
position for a driving condition that reduces
the over revolution and stress to the
engine, and improves fuel consumption.
The gearshift indicator is designed to
indicate optimal gear position for
your driving, however, a driver will
not be relieved from the duty of care
of driving operation or gear change
with this indicator.
To drive safe, do not gaze the gearshift indicator, pay attention to your
driving situation and shift up or down
if necessary.
NOTE:
• The gearshift indicator is not indicated
when the gear position is in “N” (Neutral).
• If you depress the clutch pedal while UP/
DOWN arrow is indicated, the indication
will disappear.
• If you release your foot from the accelerator pedal while UP arrow is indicated,
the indication will display the currently
selected gear position.
• The indication of gearshift indicator timing may differ depending on the vehicle
condition and/or driving situation even in
the same vehicle speed and engine revolution.
3-19
68PH0-74E
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE
Parking Sensors
(If equipped)
Example of the gearshift indicator
Indication
Description
Lower gear position is selected for the vehicle speed and/or
engine revolution. Changing to a higher gear position is recommended.
• In this case, shifting up to 4th gear position is recommended.
Information display symbol
(If equipped)
EXAMPLE
Currently selected gear position is indicated.
• In this case, your vehicle is running in 3rd gear position.
Higher gear position is selected for the vehicle speed and/or
engine revolution. Changing to a lower gear position is recommended.
• In this case, shifting down to 2nd gear position is recommended.
(1)
68PH02301
(1) Symbol representing an obstacle
detected by parking sensor*
* This symbol shows that an obstacle
is located on the right rear of vehicle.
• The parking sensor system uses ultrasonic sensors to detect obstacles near
the rear bumper. If obstacles are sensed
while you are parking or moving the
vehicle slowly, the system warns you by
sounding a buzzer and displaying symbols representing the obstacles on the
information display in the instrument
cluster (If equipped).
3-20
68PH0-74E
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE
• The system emits an ultrasonic wave
and the relevant sensor detects the
return of the wave reflected by an obstacle. The system measures the time
taken by the ultrasonic wave to reach the
obstacle and return from it, from which it
determines the obstacle’s position.
• The parking sensor function can be used
when the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” or the engine switch is pressed to
change the ignition mode to “ON”, the
gearshift lever is in the “R” position and
the parking sensor switch is in the “ON”
position. This function is helpful in the
following cases: pulling over to the curb;
parallel-parking the vehicle; steering the
vehicle into a garage; driving along an
alley; and moving slowly in a place with
obstacles.
WARNING
NOTICE
(Continued)
• The sensors can detect obstacles
only within a limited area and only
when the vehicle is moving within a
limited speed range. So, in tricky
areas, you must move the vehicle
slowly while checking around it
using your direct vision or rearview
mirrors. There is increased risk of
an accident if you control the vehicle relying only on the parking sensor.
• Avoid hitting the sensor areas or
directing the nozzle of a high-pressure car washer onto the sensor
areas. Otherwise, the sensors may
be damaged.
• If the bumper hits a hard object, the
sensors on it may not work properly. If this occurs, have the sensors inspected by an authorised
Maruti Suzuki workshop.
Sensor Locations
EXAMPLE
WARNING
• The parking sensor warns you of
obstacles with buzzers and by
showing you the location of the
obstacles on the information display (If equipped). However, you
must still pay full attention yourself
while driving.
(Continued)
(2)
(1)
(1)
(2)
68PM03001
(1) Rear center sensors (2 places)
(2) Rear corner sensors (2 places)
3-21
68PH0-74E
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE
Working sensors
The sensors that work depends on the position of the gearshift lever as follows:
Gearshift lever position
Rear sensors
Manual transaxle
Approximate areas where obstacles can
be detected
EXAMPLE
CVT
R
N, 1st – 5th
R
N, D or L
Center
On
Off
On
Off
Corner
On
Off
On
Off
68PH00321
• An obstacle within about 20 cm (8 in)
from a sensor or just below a sensor is
not detectable.
• The sensors can detect an obstacle up
to about 1.5 m (5 ft) from the rear of
vehicle.
3-22
68PH0-74E
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING
• Under the following conditions, the
parking sensor system may not
work normally because the sensors
cannot detect obstacles correctly.
– Sensors are covered with mud,
ice or other materials. (Such
materials must be removed for
normal operation.)
– Sensors are wet from water
splashes or heavy rain.
– Sensors are covered by a hand,
sticker, accessory, etc.
– There is an accessory or other
object attached within the sensor’s sensing area.
– Items such as tow hooks, commercially available corner poles,
radio antenna, etc. are installed
on the bumper.
– The height of the bumper is
changed due to alteration to the
suspension or other causes.
– The sensor areas are extremely
hot from direct sunlight or cold
due to freezing weather.
– The vehicle is on a rough surface, slope, gravel road or grass
field.
– The vehicle is at a steep angle.
(Continued)
WARNING
(Continued)
– Sensors have intercepted ultrasonic noise from another vehicle’s horn, engine, air braking
system (Large vehicles), or parking sensor.
– Obstacles are too close to the
sensors.
– Sensors are at an angle to a
highly reflective object such as
glass. (Ultrasonic waves are not
reflected back from the obstacle.)
• Sensors may not be able to correctly detect the following types of
obstacles:
– Objects made of a thin material
like wire netting and ropes
– Square-shaped curbstones or
other objects with sharp edges
– Tall objects with a large upper
part like a road sign
– Low-profile objects such as curbstones
– Sound-absorbing objects such
as cotton and snow
NOTE:
• Thin poles or obstacles lower than the
sensors may become undetectable as
the vehicle moves closer to them even if
they have been detected from longer
distances.
• The system may calculate the distance
to a road sign or similar obstacle to be
shorter than the actual distance.
How to Use the Parking Sensor
Parking sensor switch
(2)
(1)
EXAMPLE
54P000315
(1) Parking sensor switch
(2) Indicator
3-23
68PH0-74E
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE
• Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” position or press the engine switch to change the
ignition mode to “ON” with the parking sensor switch in the “ON” position.
• Push the switch again and it stays in; this is the OFF position. The indicator in the
switch goes out and the parking sensor is deactivated.
Switch position
State
Obstacle Indication by Parking Sensor
Information display symbol
(If equipped)
EXAMPLE
EXAMPLE
ON
• When the indicator light is on and all necessary conditions are
met, system becomes ready for operation.
EXAMPLE
OFF
• The system does not operate. Push the switch to turn off the
indicator if you do not wish to use the parking sensor.
(2)
(1)
(2)
68PH02302
NOTE:
• If you push the parking sensor switch from the “OFF” to “ON” position when the ignition
switch is turned to “ON” position or the engine switch is pressed to change the ignition
mode to “ON”, the inside buzzer sounds.
• When the gearshift lever is shifted to the “R” (Reverse) position with the system ON, a
buzzer will sound once.
(1) Obstacle detected by rear center sensors
(2) Obstacle detected by rear corner sensors
Upon detecting an obstacle, the parking
sensor causes an interior buzzer to sound
and a symbol representing the obstacle
appears on the information display in the
instrument cluster (If equipped).
• A different symbol is displayed depending on the direction and distance of the
obstacle. (If equipped)
• A buzzer located behind the rear seat
sounds when a sensor at the rear
detects an obstacle.
3-24
68PH0-74E
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE
Set Sensors (If equipped)
• Warnings when obstacles are detected by corner sensors
Distance (Approx.)
Buzzer
Symbol
(If equipped)
45 – 60 cm
(18 – 24 in.)
Short beeps at short intervals
Three lines
35 – 45 cm
(14 – 18 in.)
Short beeps at very short intervals
Two lines
Less than 35 cm
(14 in.)
Continuous beep
One line
• Warnings when obstacles are detected by center sensors
Symbol
(If equipped)
Distance (Approx.)
Buzzer
60 – 150 cm
(24 – 59 in.)
Short beeps at long intervals
45 – 60 cm
(18 – 24 in.)
Short beeps at short intervals
35 – 45 cm
(14 – 18 in.)
Short beeps at very short intervals
Two lines
Less than 35 cm
(14 in.)
Continuous beep
One line
Three lines
You can select either the normal or trailer
mode of the parking sensor via the information display. Refer to “Information display” in “BEFORE DRIVING” section.
Normal mode
All sensors operate. Use this mode under
normal conditions.
Trailer mode
The rear corner and rear center sensors
are inhibited from operating. Use this
mode when towing a trailer.
NOTICE
Check that the normal mode is
selected with the parking sensor
when steering the vehicle into a
garage. If the parking sensor is left in
the trailer mode, the rear corner and
rear center sensors are not functioning.
NOTE:
• Symbols are displayed with a short delay after the detection of obstacles.
• If the system detects multiple obstacles simultaneously, the display shows all of their
positions using the corresponding symbols. However, the buzzers will sound only for
the nearest obstacles.
3-25
68PH0-74E
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE
Warning and Indicator Messages
Vehicle without the information display symbol
If there is a problem or warning regarding the parking sensor system, a buzzer and the
status of the indicator on the parking sensor switch inform it. Follow its instruction.
• The buzzer sounds intermittently. The indicated sensor is contaminated. Wipe it clean
with a soft cloth. If the buzzer does not stop after wiping, there may be problem with the
parking sensor system. Have your vehicle inspected by an authorised Maruti Suzuki
workshop.
• The indicator does not come on when the parking sensor switch is pressed. The indicator goes off while operating. There may be a problem with the parking sensor system,
Have your vehicle inspected by an authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop.
Vehicle with the information display symbol
If there is a problem or warning regarding the parking sensor system, a message is displayed on the information display in the instrument cluster, and a symbol blinks and the
buzzer sounds. If a message is displayed, follow its instruction.
Message
Symbol
Buzzer
Probable cause and remedy
Two blinking
Series of
There may be a problem with the
lines in a sensor double beeps parking sensor system.
location.
Have your vehicle inspected by an
authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop.
One blinking line Series of sin- The indicated sensor is contamiin a sensor loca- gle beeps
nated.
tion.
Wipe it clean with a soft cloth.
Rearview Camera
(If equipped)
When the gearshift lever is shifted to the
“R” position while the ignition mode is
“ON”, the rearview camera system automatically shows the view behind the vehicle on the display.
WARNING
The distance viewed in the rearview
camera may differ from the actual
distance according to the condition
of road or the load the vehicle is carrying. Since the camera display area
is also limited, backing up by only
looking at the display may cause an
accident or a collision with an object.
The rearview camera cannot replace
the driver’s attention. The driver
alone is responsible for parking and
similar driving maneuvers.
• Use the rearview camera only to
provide driving assistance.
• Always drive carefully confirming
the safety of the rear and the surrounding conditions by looking
directly with your eyes and using
the rear view mirror.
• Make sure that the tailgate is
securely closed when backing up.
3-26
68PH0-74E
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTICE
NOTICE
If you use the rearview camera for a
long time when the ignition mode is
“ON”, but the engine is not running,
the battery may discharge.
Do not leave the ignition mode “ON”
for a long time when the engine is not
running.
The rearview camera is a precision
instrument. If you strike the camera,
it may be broken and cause damage
resulting in a catching fire or a malfunction.
• Do not strike the camera.
• Do not remove snow or mud on the
camera lens with a stick.
Rearview Camera Location
NOTICE
If water enters the rearview camera, it
may cause a malfunction or catching
fire.
Do not use high pressure water
around the camera.
NOTICE
(1)
EXAMPLE
68PH00315
(1) Rearview camera
The rearview camera is installed beside
the license plate light.
This lens is hard coated to prevent
damage or discoloration. Damage or
discoloration of lens may obscure
the image.
• Do not use a brush to clean lens.
• Do not use alcohol, benzene or
thinner to clean the lens.
• Do not use wax on the camera lens.
How to Use Rearview Camera
1) Press the engine switch to change the
ignition mode to “ON”.
2) Shift the gearshift lever in the “R” position.
• The display automatically shows the
view behind the vehicle.
• When the gearshift lever is shifted
from “R” to another gearshift lever
position, the display returns to the
previous display.
NOTE:
The rearview camera display has first priority in any display mode. However, the
rearview camera display does not show
the rear view while the system is initializing.
Display Range of Rearview Camera
The rearview camera display shows the
area behind the rear end of the tailgate.
The display cannot show objects which are
close to the bumper or under the bumper.
The rearview camera display cannot show
obstacles which are higher than the camera. Upper parts of tall objects such as
road signs cannot be viewed on the display.
NOTE:
If body wax does get on the camera lens,
wipe off the wax with a clean cloth dampened with mild detergent diluted with
water, then wipe with a dry cloth.
3-27
68PH0-74E
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE
Example of display range of rearview
camera
(1)
EXAMPLE
68PH00316
EXAMPLE
(1)
68PH00317
(1) Display range
NOTE:
• Images shown on the display from the
rearview camera are reversed images
(mirror images).
• The colors of objects on the rearview
camera may differ from the actual object
colors.
• The rearview camera display may be difficult to see under the following conditions, but this is not a system
malfunction.
– In dark areas, on a rainy day or at
night.
– When the temperature around the lens
is too high/low, or the camera is wet
such as on a rainy day or during periods of high humidity (dew condensation may occur on the camera lens).
– When a foreign object such as mud or
a drop of water is stuck around the
camera lens.
– When strong light directly enters the
camera (vertical lines may be seen on
the display).
– Under fluorescent light. (The display
may flicker.)
– When the outside temperature is low
(the image on the display may be
darkened).
Example of rearview camera screen
indication
The distance viewed in the rearview
camerdiffer from the actual distance
according to the condition of the road or
the load the vehicle is carrying.
Uphill incline behind the vehicle
EXAMPLE
(1)
(1) Object
(2) Actual distance
(3) Distance on the display
When there is an uphill incline behind the
vehicle, the object shown on the display
appears farther away than the actual distance.
Downhill incline behind the vehicle
EXAMPLE
(1)
(3)
(2)
68PH00319
(1) Object
(2) Actual distance
(3) Distance on the display
When there is a downhill incline behind the
vehicle, the object shown on the display
appears closer than the actual distance.
(2)
(3)
68PH00318
3-28
68PH0-74E
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE
If the rear view from the rearview camera is not shown or there is a poor
image
• If the rear view from the rearview camera
is not shown.
– Check to make sure that the ignition
mode is “ON”.
– Check to make sure that the gearshift
lever is shifted to the “R” position.
• If the image from the rearview camera is
poor.
– Check to make sure that the camera
lens is not dirty.
– Check to make sure that light from the
sun or the beam of the headlights from
the vehicle behind is not shining
directly into the lens.
If the rearview camera system is still not
working properly after checking the above,
have the system inspected by an authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop as soon as
possible.
Braking
WARNING
EXAMPLE
If water gets into the brake devices,
brake performance may become poor
and unpredictable. After driving
through water or washing the underside of the vehicle, test the brakes
while driving at a slow speed to see if
they have maintained their normal
effectiveness. If the brakes are less
effective than normal, dry them by
repeatedly applying the brakes while
driving slowly until the brakes have
regained their normal effectiveness.
60G165S
The distance needed to bring any vehicle
to a halt increases with the speed of the
vehicle. The braking distance needed, for
example, at 60 km/h will be approximately
4 times greater than the braking distance
needed at 30 km/h. Start to brake the vehicle when there is plenty of distance
between your vehicle and the stopping
point, and slow down gradually.
Power-Assisted Brakes
Your vehicle has power-assisted brakes. If
power assistance is lost due to a stalled
engine or other failures, the system is still
fully operational on reserve power and you
can bring the vehicle to a complete stop by
pressing the brake pedal once and holding
it down. The reserve power is partly used
up when you depress the brake pedal and
reduces each time the pedal is pressed.
Apply smooth and even pressure to the
pedal. Do not pump the pedal.
WARNING
Even without reserve power in the
brake system, you can still stop the
vehicle by pressing the brake pedal
harder than normally required. However, the stopping distance may be
longer.
3-29
68PH0-74E
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE
Brake Assist System
When you slam the brakes on, the brake
assist system judges as an emergency
stop and provides more powerful braking
for a driver who cannot hold down the
brake pedal firmly.
NOTE:
If you quickly and forcefully depress the
brakes, you may hear a clicking sound in
the brake pedal. This is normal and indicates that the brake assist system is activated properly.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
ABS will help you avoid skidding by electronically controlling braking pressure. It
will also help you maintain steering control
when braking on slippery surfaces or when
braking hard.
The ABS works automatically, so you do
not need any special braking technique.
Just push the brake pedal down without
pumping. The ABS will operate whenever
it senses that the wheels are locking up.
You may feel the brake pedal moves a little
while the ABS is operating.
NOTE:
• The ABS will not work if vehicle speed is
under about 9 km/h.
• If the ABS system is activated, you may
hear a clunking noise and/or feel pulsating in the brake pedal. This is normal
and indicates that the brake fluid pressure in being controlled properly.
• You may hear and operation sound
when you start the engine or after the
vehicle begins the move. This means
that the above systems are in the selfcheck mode. This sound does not indicate a malfunction.
WARNING
• On some types of loose surfaces
(Such as gravel, snow-covered
roads, etc.) the stopping distance
required for an ABS-equipped vehicle may be slightly greater than for
a comparable vehicle with a conventional brake system. With a conventional brake system, skidding
tires are able to “plow” the gravel
or snow layer, shortening the stopping distance. ABS minimizes this
resistance effect. Allow for extra
stopping distance when driving on
loose surfaces.
• On regular paved roads, some drivers may be able to obtain slightly
shorter stopping distances with
conventional brake systems than
with ABS.
(Continued)
WARNING
(Continued)
• In both of the above conditions,
ABS will still offer the advantage of
helping you maintain directional
control. However, remember that
ABS will not compensate for bad
road or weather conditions or poor
driver judgment. Use good judgment and do not drive faster than
conditions will safely allow.
EXAMPLE
(1)
(2)
63J081
(1) ABS warning light
(2) Brake system warning light
3-30
68PH0-74E
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE
How the ABS Works
WARNING
• If the ABS warning light (1) on the
instrument panel comes on and
stays on while driving, there may
be a problem with the ABS system.
Ask your authorised Maruti Suzuki
workshop to inspect the ABS system immediately. If the ABS system
becomes inoperative, the brake
system will function as an ordinary
brake system that has no ABS.
• If the ABS warning light (1) and the
Brake system warning light (2) on
the instrument panel simultaneously stays on or comes on when
driving, both anti-lock function and
rear brake force control function
(Proportioning valve function) of
the ABS system may have failed. If
so, the rear wheels may easily skid
or the vehicle can even spin in the
worst case when braking on a slippery road or when hard braking
even on a dry paved road. Ask your
authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop
to inspect the ABS system immediately. Drive carefully, avoiding hard
braking as much as possible.
A computer continuously monitors wheel
speed. The computer compares the
changes in wheel speed when braking. If
the wheels slow suddenly, indicating a
skidding situation, the computer will
change braking pressure several times
each second to prevent the wheels from
locking. When you start your vehicle or
when you accelerate after a hard stop, you
may hear a momentary motor or clicking
noise as the system resets or checks itself.
WARNING
The ABS may not work properly if
tires or wheels other than those
specified in the owner’s manual are
used. This is because the ABS works
by comparing changes in wheel
speed. When replacing tires or
wheels, use only the size and type
specified in this owner’s manual.
3-31
68PH0-74E
DRIVING TIPS
DRIVING TIPS
Running-in ........................................................................... 4-1
Catalytic Converter ............................................................. 4-1
Improving Fuel Economy ................................................... 4-2
Highway Driving .................................................................. 4-3
Driving on Hills .................................................................... 4-3
Driving on Slippery Roads ................................................. 4-4
Driving on Wet Roads ......................................................... 4-5
Do’s and Dont’s for Safe Driving ........................................ 4-6
Margin for Safety ................................................................. 4-9
4
60G409
68PH0-74E
DRIVING TIPS
Running-in
EXAMPLE
Catalytic Converter
NOTICE
68PHM4001
WARNING
• WEAR YOUR SEAT BELTS AT ALL
TIMES. Even though air bags are
equipped at the front seating positions, the driver and all passengers
should be properly restrained at all
times, using the seat belts provided. Refer to the “Seat Belts and
Child Restraint Systems” section
for instructions on proper use of
the seat belts.
• Never drive while under the influence of alcohol or other drugs.
Alcohol and drugs can seriously
impair your ability to drive safely,
greatly increasing the risk of injury
to yourself and others. You should
also avoid driving when you are
tired, sick, irritated, or under
stress.
The future performance and reliability of the engine depends on the care
and restraint exercised during its
early life. It is especially important to
observe the following precautions
during the initial 960 km of vehicle
operation.
• After starting, do not race the
engine. Warm it up gradually.
• Avoid prolonged vehicle operation
at a constant speed. Moving parts
will break in better if you vary your
speed.
• Start off from a stop slowly. Avoid
full throttle starts.
• Avoid hard braking, especially
during the first 320 km of driving.
• Do not drive slowly with the transaxle in a high gear.
• Drive the vehicle at moderate
engine speeds.
• Do not tow a trailer.
EXAMPLE
80G106
The purpose of the catalytic converter is to
minimize the amount of harmful pollutants
in your vehicle’s exhaust. Use of leaded
fuel in vehicles equipped with catalytic
converters is prohibited, because lead
deactivates the pollutant-reducing components of the catalyst system.
The converter is designed to last the life of
the vehicle under normal usage and when
unleaded fuel is used. No special maintenance is required on the converter. However, it is very important to keep the engine
properly tuned. Engine misfiring, which can
result from an improperly tuned engine,
may cause overheating of the catalyst.
This may result in permanent heat damage
to the catalyst and other vehicle components.
4-1
68PH0-74E
DRIVING TIPS
NOTICE
To minimize the possibility of catalyst
or other vehicle damage:
• Maintain the engine in the proper
operating condition.
• In the event of an engine malfunction, particularly one involving
engine misfire or other apparent
loss of performance, have the vehicle serviced promptly.
• Do not turn off the engine or interrupt the ignition when the transaxle
is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
• Do not try to start the engine by
pushing or towing the vehicle, or
coasting down a hill.
• Do not idle the engine with any
spark plug wires disconnected or
removed, such as during diagnostic testing.
• Do not idle the vehicle for prolonged periods if idling seems
rough or there are other malfunctions.
• Do not allow the fuel tank to get
near the empty level.
• Avoid driving your vehicle at
excessively high engine speeds, in
or around the red zone of the
tachometer (If equipped).
Improving Fuel Economy
EXAMPLE
The following instructions will help you
improve fuel economy.
Avoid excessive idling
If you are to wait for more than a minute
while you are parked, stop the engine and
start it again later. When warming up a
cold engine, allow the engine to idle until
the temperature gauge pointer comes up
to the “C” position (if the idling is not prohibited). In this position, the engine is sufficiently warm for starting off.
54G584S
WARNING
Be careful where you park and drive;
the catalytic converter and other
exhaust components can get very
hot. As with any vehicle, do not park
or operate this vehicle in areas where
combustible materials such as dry
grass or leaves can come in contact
with a hot exhaust system.
Avoid sudden acceleration
Sudden acceleration starting from rest or
while driving will consume fuel unnecessarily and shorten engine life. Start off
slowly.
Avoid unnecessary stops
Avoid unnecessary deceleration and stopping. Try to maintain a slow, steady speed
whenever possible. Slowing down and
then accelerating again uses more fuel.
Keep a steady cruising speed
Keep as constant a speed as road and
traffic conditions will permit.
4-2
68PH0-74E
DRIVING TIPS
Highway Driving
Keep the air cleaner clean
EXAMPLE
60A183S
If the air cleaner is clogged with dust, there
will be greater intake resistance, resulting
in decreased power output and increased
fuel consumption.
Keep weight to a minimum
Heavier the load, more fuel the vehicle
consumes. Take out any luggage or cargo
when it is not necessary.
Keep tire pressures correct
Underinflation of the tires can waste fuel
due to increased running resistance of the
tires. Keep your tires inflated to the correct
pressure shown on the label on the driver’s
door lock pillar.
When driving at high speeds, pay attention
to the following:
• Stopping
distance
progressively
increases with vehicle speed. Apply the
brakes far enough ahead of the stopping
point to allow for the extra stopping distance.
• On rainy days, hydroplaning can occur.
Hydroplaning is the loss of direct contact
between the road surface and the vehicle’s tires due to a water film forming
between them. Steering or braking the
vehicle while hydroplaning can be very
difficult, and loss of control can occur.
Keep speed down when the road surface is wet.
• At high speeds, the vehicle may be
affected by side winds. Therefore,
reduce speed and be prepared for unexpected buffeting, which can occur at the
exits of tunnels, when passing by a cut
of a hill, or when being overtaken by
large vehicles, etc.
Driving on Hills
EXAMPLE
79MH0401
EXAMPLE
79MS0T401
• When climbing steep hills, the vehicle
may begin to slow down and show a lack
of power. If this happens, you should
shift to a lower gear so that the engine
will again be operating in its normal
power range. Shift rapidly to prevent the
vehicle from losing momentum.
4-3
68PH0-74E
DRIVING TIPS
• When driving down a hill, the engine
should be used for braking by shifting to
next lower gear. (Do this with either a
CVT or a manual transaxle vehicle).
Driving on Slippery Roads
EXAMPLE
WARNING
Try not to hold the brake pedal down
too long or too often while going
down a steep or long hill. This could
cause the brakes to overheat, resulting in reduced braking efficiency.
Failure to take this precaution could
result in loss of vehicle control.
While moving uphill/gradient from a
stand still condition
• Apply the parking brake firmly so that the
vehicle does not roll backwards.
• Depress the Clutch pedal and Shift the
gearshift lever to 1st Select position.
• Do not slip the clutch.
• When ready to start, press accelerator
pedal and slowly release the clutch
pedal simultaneously. When the vehicle
starts to move, gradually release the
parking brake.
Tire Chains
Tire chains should only be used if they are
needed to increase traction or are required
by law. Make sure that the chains you use
are the correct size for your vehicle’s tires.
Also make sure that there is enough clearance between the fenders and the chains
as installed on the tires.
Install the chains on the front tires tightly,
according to the chain manufacturer’s
instructions. Retighten the chains after
driving about 1.0 km if necessary. With the
chains installed, drive slowly.
60G089S
Under wet road conditions you should
drive at a lower speed than on dry roads
due to possible slippage of tires during
braking. When driving on icy, snow-covered, or muddy roads, reduce your speed
and avoid sudden acceleration, abrupt
braking, or sharp steering movements.
NOTICE
• If you hear the chains hitting
against the vehicle body while driving, stop and tighten them.
• If your vehicle is equipped with full
wheel caps, remove the wheel caps
before installing the chains or the
wheel caps can be damaged by the
chain bands.
NOTICE
When descending down a hill,
NEVER turn the ignition key to the
“LOCK” position or press the engine
switch to change the ignition mode to
“LOCK” (OFF). Emission control system and CVT (If equipped) damage
may result.
4-4
68PH0-74E
DRIVING TIPS
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck
If your vehicle gets stuck in snow, mud, or
sand, follow the directions below:
1) Shift the transaxle back and forth
between a forward range (or first gear
for manual transaxle) and reverse. This
will create a rocking motion which may
give you enough momentum to free the
vehicle. Press gently on the accelerator
to keep wheel spinning to a minimum
wheel rpm. Remove your foot from the
accelerator while shifting.
Do not race the engine. Excessive
wheel spin will cause the tires to dig
deeper, making it more difficult to free
the vehicle.
2) If your vehicle remains stuck after a few
minutes of rocking, we recommend you
to consult your authorised Maruti
Suzuki workshop or a roadside assistance service. If a towing service is not
available in an emergency, your vehicle
may be temporarily towed by a towing
cable or chain secured to the towing
hook either on the front of the vehicle or
on the rear of the vehicle. Refer to
“Frame Hooks” in the “OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT” section.
WARNING
Do not allow anyone to stand near
the vehicle when you are rocking it,
and do not spin the wheels faster
than an indicated 40 km/h on the
speedometer. Personal injury and/or
vehicle damage may result from spinning the wheels too fast.
NOTICE
Do not continue rocking the vehicle
for more than a few minutes. Prolonged rocking can cause engine
overheating or transaxle damage.
Driving on Wet Roads
NOTICE
• When driving on wet roads, avoid
driving through large amount of
standing water on the road. Large
amount of water entering the
engine compartment may cause
damage to the engine and or electrical components.
• If stuck in deep water, do not start
the engine.
• Water is incompressible substance,
water inside engine is harmful to
the engine.
WARNING
In addition to following the driving
tips in this section, it is important to
observe the following precautions.
• Make sure your tires are in good
condition and always maintain the
specified tire pressure. Refer to
“Tires” in the “INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE”
section
for
details.
(Continued)
4-5
68PH0-74E
DRIVING TIPS
WARNING
(Continued)
• Do not use tires other than those
specified by MARUTI SUZUKI.
Never use different sizes or types
of tires on the front and rear
wheels. For information regarding
the specified tires, refer to the Tire
Information Label located on the
driver’s door lock pillar.
• Never use oversized tires or special shock absorbers and springs
to raise (jack up) your vehicle. This
will change the handling characteristics. Oversized tires may also rub
against the vehicle body over
bumps, causing vehicle damage or
tire failure.
• After driving through water, test the
brakes while driving at a slow
speed to see if they have maintained their normal effectiveness. If
they are less effective than normal,
dry them by repeatedly applying
the brakes while driving slowly
until the brakes have regained their
normal effectiveness.
Do’s and Dont’s for Safe
Driving
EXAMPLE
Exercise care in handling your vehicle. Be
conscious of not only your own safety but
also the safety of others on the road, and
thus enjoy the best and most comfortable
driving experience.
Following are basic rules for safe driving.
Read them carefully for good understanding of the content so that you can enjoy
safe and pleasant driving in your vehicle.
Starting
68PHM4002
1) Adjust the driver’s seat for the proper
driving posture.
2) Adjust the rear view mirror so as to
obtain the best possible rear view.
EXAMPLE
83K-04-008
4-6
68PH0-74E
DRIVING TIPS
3) Before moving, look around your vehicle to confirm safety.
4) Don’t accelerate suddenly, since it is
dangerous and wastes fuel.
General driving
1) Be sure to stop before a stop light or
stop sign. When moving into an intersection without any traffic lights or
signs, drive slowly to confirm safety.
2) Always follow other vehicles at a safe
distance in order to prevent a rear-end
collision, in case the vehicle ahead
makes a sudden stop.
5) When overtaking other vehicles, watch
out for oncoming vehicles and carefully
ensure safety.
6) Don’t attempt zigzag driving as it will
hinder your control over the vehicle and
may cause an accident.
7) Avoid reckless high speed driving and
try to drive at a safe speed suitable for
the road conditions while maintaining a
constant speed.
8) The higher the speed, the narrower the
driver’s visual range becomes. In such
a state, it is difficult to anticipate any
hazard and the driver feels fatigued.
Braking
EXAMPLE
EXAMPLE
EXAMPLE
83k-04-010
83K-04-009
3) Turn ON the turn signal at least 30
meters before making a turn or changing the lane so as to not be hit.
4) Before entering a corner, decelerate to
a safe speed. Don’t apply brakes during
cornering, or skidding may occur.
83K-04-012
9) Do not attempt sharp handling during
high speed driving. You may lose your
control over your vehicle.
10)When overtaking or changing lanes
while driving at a high speed, keep
ample vehicle-to-vehicle distance.
1) Use the parking brake when parking
your vehicle and shift the gear shift
lever into the first gear or reverse gear
position for the sake of safety.
2) Don’t use hand-braking unless unavoidable. It causes the vehicle to skid and a
collision may occur. It is especially dangerous when the tyres are worn out as
they skid more.
4-7
68PH0-74E
DRIVING TIPS
Night time driving
EXAMPLE
EXAMPLE
EXAMPLE
83K-04-011
Use foot brake in three stages
1. Warn the vehicle behind you
2. Gradually apply the brake.
3. Bring the vehicle to a halt.
3) When driving downhill, try not to apply
the brake but use the engine brake
effectively. Overuse of the foot-brake
may result in reduction of brake effectiveness.
Long distance driving
83K-04-014
83K-04-013
1) Drive at lower speeds during the night
than in the daytime, as the visual range
is restricted at night.
2) Avoid overtaking other vehicles at night.
Darkness bothers your sense of speed
and hinders your judgment of vehicleto-vehicle distance.
3) Don’t use headlights on high beam
unless its use is inevitable. It may cause
visual impairment to the driver of the
oncoming vehicle or the vehicle ahead
of you, which may cause an accident.
4) Always keep the window glasses clean.
Don’t operate the windshield wiper
when the windshield glass is dry else
the wiper blade and glass may get damaged.
1) Be sure to perform safety checks before
starting a trip.
2) Take rest at regular intervals to prevent
accidents which may occur due to feeling sleepy or tired.
4-8
68PH0-74E
DRIVING TIPS
Margin for Safety
It is important to allow yourself a margin for
safety during driving so that you can cope
with erroneous or unexpected driving of
other drivers. For that, observe the following.
• Drive at a safe speed.
• Maintain a sufficient distance between
your vehicle and the vehicle ahead.
• Don’t force yourself to overtake other
vehicles.
• Don’t accelerate suddenly, steer sharply
or stop suddenly.
• Keep ample gaps between driving
schedules.
• Observe traffic rules and regulations.
Conclusion
A perfect driver does not exist. The
endeavour of every motorist should be to
strive for perfection. Safety consciousness
not only ensures your safety and the safety
of other road users, it also helps reduce
the wear and tear on your vehicle, lengthens its life, gives better fuel efficiency and
ensures a comfortable driving experience.
Follow the do’s and dont’s listed, and
driving will never be the same again.
4-9
68PH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
68PM5002
Fuel Filler Cap ..................................................................... 5-1
Engine Hood ........................................................................ 5-2
Sun Visor ............................................................................. 5-4
Interior Light ........................................................................ 5-5
Accessory Socket ............................................................... 5-8
AUX/USB Socket (If equipped) ........................................... 5-9
Assist Grips ......................................................................... 5-9
Coat Hooks .......................................................................... 5-9 5
Glove Box ............................................................................ 5-10
Cup Holder and Storage Area ............................................ 5-11
Footrest ................................................................................ 5-13
Floor Mats (If equipped) ..................................................... 5-13
Luggage Compartment Hook (If equipped) ...................... 5-14
Luggage Compartment Cover ............................................ 5-14
Frame Hooks ....................................................................... 5-15
Heating and Air Conditioning System ............................... 5-16
Manual Heating and Air Conditioning System ................. 5-19
Automatic Heating and Air Conditioning System
(Climate control) .................................................................. 5-24
Radio Antenna ..................................................................... 5-30
Installation of Radio Frequency Transmitters .................. 5-30
Audio System (If equipped) ................................................ 5-31
68PH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
Fuel Filler Cap
The fuel filler cap is located on the left rear
side of the vehicle. The fuel filler door can
be unlocked by pulling up the opener lever
located on the outboard side of the driver’s
seat and locked by simply closing the door.
EXAMPLE
Close
Open
EXAMPLE
(1)
(3)
(1)
(1)
(2)
68PH00502
68PM05001
EXAMPLE
EXAMPLE
57L51093
To remove the fuel filler cap:
1) Open the fuel filler door.
2) Remove the cap by turning it counterclockwise.
CAUTION
Remove the fuel filler cap slowly. The
fuel may be under pressure and may
spray out, causing injury.
NOTE:
The cap holder (1) holds the fuel filler cap
(2) by hooking the groove (3) when refueling.
To reinstall the fuel filler cap:
1) Turn the cap clockwise until you hear
several clicks.
2) Close the fuel filler door.
WARNING
Fuel is extremely flammable. Do not
smoke when refueling, and make
sure there are no open flames or
sparks in the area.
68PH00574
5-1
68PH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
WARNING
If you need to replace the fuel cap,
use a MARUTI genuine cap. Use of an
improper cap can result in a malfunction of the fuel system or emission
control system. It may also result in
fuel leakage in the event of an accident.
Engine Hood
EXAMPLE
EXAMPLE
68PM05002
68PH00503
To open the engine hood:
1) Pull the hood release handle located on
the outboard side of the driver’s side of
the instrument panel. This will disengage the engine hood lock halfway.
2) Push the under-hood release lever
sideways with your finger, as shown in
the illustration. While pushing the lever,
lift up the engine hood.
CAUTION
The release lever can be hot enough
to burn your finger right after driving.
Touch the lever after it becomes cool
enough.
NOTICE
Make sure that the wiper arms are not
raised before you lift up the engine
hood to avoid damaging the wiper
arms and the engine hood.
5-2
68PH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
EXAMPLE
To close the engine hood:
1) Lift the hood up slightly and remove the
prop rod from the hole. Put the prop rod
back to the holding clip.
EXAMPLE
WARNING
Make sure the hood is fully closed
and latched before driving. If it is not,
it can fly up unexpectedly during
driving, obstructing your view and
resulting in an accident.
CAUTION
To avoid injury, be sure no part of the
occupant’s body such as hands or
head is in the path of the hood when
closing it.
68PM05003
3) While holding the hood, pull the prop
rod out from the holding clip, then insert
the end of the rod into the designated
hole.
CAUTION
• The prop rod can be hot enough to
burn your finger right after driving.
Touch the rod after it becomes cool
enough.
• Insert the end of the rod into the
hole securely. If the rod drops off,
your body may be caught in the
hood.
• The rod may drop off when the
hood is hit by a wind. Be careful on
windy days.
NOTICE
68PM05004
2) Lower the hood to about 20 cm above
the hood latch, then let it drop down.
Make sure the hood is securely latched
after closing.
Pressing the hood from above may
damage the hood.
5-3
68PH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
Sun Visor
Card holder (If equipped)
Type1
You can put a card in the card holder (1) on
the back of the sun visor.
EXAMPLE
NOTICE
When you park your vehicle outdoors
in direct sunlight or in hot weather,
do not leave plastic cards in the
holder. The heat may distort them.
Vanity mirror (If equipped)
EXAMPLE
(1)
EXAMPLE
68PH00507
The sun visors can be pulled down to block
glare coming through the windshield, or
they can be unhooked and turned to the
side to block glare coming through the side
window.
(3)
68PH00508
Type2
(2)
(4)
NOTICE
When unhooking and hooking a sun
visor, be sure to handle it by the hard
plastic parts or the sun visor can be
damaged.
68PH02501
(3) Vanity mirror
(4) Vanity mirror light (If equipped)
(1)
EXAMPLE
68PH00509
To use the vanity mirror (3) on the back of
the sun visor, pull up the mirror cover (2).
The vanity mirror light (4) comes on when
the mirror cover (2) is opened.
(1) Card holder
(2) Mirror cover
5-4
68PH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
WARNING
• Do not use the mirror while driving
your vehicle or could lose control
of the vehicle.
• When using the vanity mirror, do
not move too close to a front air
bag location or lean against it. If
the front air bag is accidentally
inflated, it could hit you hard.
Interior Light
EXAMPLE
EXAMPLE
(3)
(5)
NOTICE
If the vanity mirror has the light, do
not leave the mirror cover open for a
long time, or the battery will discharge.
(1)
(2)
(5)
(4)
(2)
68PH00511
(1) Glove box light (If equipped)
(2) Footwell lights (If equipped)
(6)
68PH00512
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
Front (If equipped)
Center
Courtesy Lights (If equipped)
Luggage compartment (If equipped)
5-5
68PH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
Glove Box Light (If equipped) (1)
Front (If equipped) (3)
Center (4)
Refer to “Glove Box” in this section.
Footwell Lights (If equipped) (2)
EXAMPLE
EXAMPLE
(c) (b) (a)
A footwell light is provided in the leg space
in front of each front seat. The light comes
on when the door is opened. After closing
all doors, the light will remain on for about
15 seconds and then fade out. If you press
the engine switch to change the ignition
mode to “ACC” or “ON” during this time,
the light will start to fade out immediately.
NOTE:
• You can change the footwell lights operation via the information display. Refer to
“Information Display” in the “BEFORE
DRIVING” section.
• The light will automatically be turned off
to prevent the battery from discharging
when all of the following conditions are
simultaneously met for 15 minutes or
more:
– The ignition switch is in the “LOCK”
position, or the ignition mode is “LOCK”
(OFF).
– If footwell lights setting mode is in
lighting control mode and headlamp or
position lamp is off.
– If any door is open.
68PH00513
68PH00514
Push the switch to turn on the light and
push it again to turn off the light.
This light switch has three positions which
function as described below:
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with the keyless
push start system or the keyless entry system, the light will automatically be turned
off to prevent the battery from discharging
when the following conditions are simultaneously met:
• The ignition switch is in the “LOCK” position, or the ignition mode is “LOCK” (OFF).
• The hazard warning lights, the position
lights and the headlights are off.
• After 15 minutes of the light on.
ON (a)
The light comes on and stays on regardless of whether the door is open or closed.
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with the keyless
push start system or the keyless entry system, the light will automatically be turned
off to prevent the battery from discharging
when the following conditions are simultaneously met:
• The ignition switch is in the “LOCK” position, or the ignition mode is “LOCK” (OFF).
• The hazard warning lights, the position
lights and the headlights are off.
• After 15 minutes of the light on.
5-6
68PH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
DOOR (b)
The light comes on when the door is
opened. After closing all doors, the light
will remain on for about 15 seconds and
then fade out. If you insert the key, or press
the engine switch to change the ignition
mode to “ACC” or “ON” during this time,
the light will start to fade out immediately.
After removing the key from the ignition
switch or press the engine switch to
change the ignition mode to “LOCK”, the
light will turn on for about 15 seconds and
then fade out.
NOTE:
If you leave any door open, the light will
automatically be turned off after about 15
minutes to prevent the battery from discharging.
OFF (c)
The light remains off even when the door is
opened.
Courtesy Lights (If equipped) (5)
EXAMPLE
Luggage Compartment
(If equipped) (6)
EXAMPLE
(1)
(2)
68PH00515
Each front door has a courtesy light on its
inside bottom. It lights automatically when
the door is opened.
NOTE:
If you leave any door open, the light will
automatically be turned off after about 15
minutes to prevent the battery from discharging.
68PH00516
When you open the tailgate with the luggage compartment light switch in the “ON”
position (1), the light comes on for about
15 minutes.
When the luggage compartment light
switch is in the “OFF” position (2), the light
remains off regardless of whether the tailgate is open or close.
5-7
68PH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
Accessory Socket
EXAMPLE
The accessory socket will work when the
ignition switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position, or the ignition mode is “ACC” or “ON”.
Each socket can be used to provide 12
volt/120 watt/10 ampere power for electrical accessories when used alone. Make
sure that the cap remains on the socket
when the socket is not in use.
Center console
EXAMPLE
NOTICE
68PH00517
NOTE:
The number of doors involved in the lighting operation of the interior light depends
on the vehicle specification. If there is a
switch (Rubber projection) at the door
opening as shown, the door is involved in
the lighting operation. The tailgate is also
involved in this operation even without the
rubber projection.
68PH00518
Floor console
EXAMPLE
• To prevent the fuse from being
blown, when using sockets at the
same time, do not exceed the total
combined power capacity of 12
volt/120 watt/10 ampere.
• Use of inappropriate electrical
accessories can cause damage to
your vehicle’s electrical system.
Make sure that any electrical
accessories you use are designed
to plug into this type of socket.
68PH00519
5-8
68PH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
AUX/USB Socket (If equipped)
EXAMPLE
Assist Grips
Coat Hooks
EXAMPLE
EXAMPLE
68PH00520
Connect your portable digital music player,
etc. to this socket to enjoy music through
the vehicle’s audio system using it as a
source. Refer to “Audio System” in this section
NOTICE
68PH00521
Assist grips are provided for convenience.
NOTICE
To avoid damaging the assist grip
and the molded headlining, do not
hang down the assist grip.
68PH00522
You can hang clothing on the coat hooks.
These hooks are not designed for large or
heavy items and are located with rear right
assist grip.
Always close the lid when not in use,
since entry of foreign material, dust,
water, conductive liquids may damage the audio system or USB device.
5-9
68PH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
Glove Box
EXAMPLE
EXAMPLE
68PH00523
To open the glove box, pull the latch lever.
To close it, push the lid until it latches
securely.
68PH00524
The glove box light (If equipped) stays on
while the lid is open.
WARNING
Never drive with the glove box lid
open. It could cause injury if an accident occurs.
5-10
68PH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
Cup Holder and Storage Area
Driver’s Pocket (1)
WARNING
EXAMPLE
(1)
Do not place any objects which may
fall out from the pocket when the
vehicle is moving.
Failure to take the precaution may
result in an object interfering with the
pedals and causing a loss of vehicle
control or an accident.
(7)
(3)
(4)/(5)
(2)
(3)
(6)
(7)
68PM5004
(1) Driver’s pocket
(3) Front bottle holder
(5) Rear cup holder (If equipped)
(7) Rear bottle holder
(2) Front cup holders
(4) Front armrest with console box
(If equipped)
(6) Front seat back pocket (If equipped)
5-11
68PH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
Front Cup Holders (2) /
Rear Cup Holder (If equipped) (5)
WARNING
Front Bottle Holder (3) /
Rear Bottle Holder (7)
Front Armrest with Console Box
(If equipped) (4)
Always place the bottle with its cap closed
in the bottle holder.
NOTICE
Failure to take the precautions listed
below could cause personal injury or
vehicle damage.
To avoid damage to the armrest, do
not lean on it or allow a child to sit on
it.
• Be careful when you are using the
cup holders to hold a cup containing hot liquid. Spilling out hot liquid can cause burn injury.
• Do not use the bottle holders to
hold sharp-edged, hard, or breakable objects. Objects in the bottle
holders may be thrown about
during a sudden stop or impact,
and could cause personal injury.
• Be careful not to spill liquid or
insert any foreign materials into the
moving part of the gearshift lever,
or any electrical components. Liquid or foreign materials may damage these parts.
Console box
Use this stowage for keeping small items.
Open the compartment by raising the top
lid while keeping the lever (1) up.
EXAMPLE
(
(1)
(
(1)
61MM0B030
NOTE:
Always close the lid after you put something into or take something out of the box.
5-12
68PH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
Footrest
Front Seat Back Pocket
(If equipped) (6)
Floor Mats (If equipped)
EXAMPLE
EXAMPLE
(1)
EXAMPLE
68PH00528
This pocket is provided for holding light
and soft things such as gloves, newspapers or magazines.
CAUTION
Do not put sharp-edged hard or
breakable objects in the pocket. If an
accident occurs, objects such as bottles, cans, etc. can injure the occupants in the rear seat.
68PH00529
68PH00530
Use the footrest (1) as a support for your
left foot.
To prevent the driver’s side floor mat from
sliding forward and possibly interfering with
the operation of the pedals, MARUTI genuine floor mats are recommended.
Whenever you put the driver’s side floor
mat back in the vehicle after it has been
removed, be sure to hook the floor mat
grommets to the fasteners and position the
floor mat properly in the footwell.
When you replace the floor mats in your
vehicle with a different type such as allweather floor mats, we highly recommend
using MARUTI genuine floor mats for
proper fitting.
5-13
68PH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
WARNING
Failure to take the following precautions may result in the driver’s side
floor mat interfering with the pedals
and causing a loss of vehicle control
or an accident.
• Make sure that the floor mat grommets are hooked to the fasteners.
• Never place additional floor mats
on top of the existing floor mat.
Luggage Compartment Hook
(If equipped)
Luggage Compartment Cover
EXAMPLE
EXAMPLE
68PH00532
68PH00531
You can hang the shopping bag or other
suitable objects on the hook.
This hook is not designed for large or
heavy items.
NOTICE
To avoid breaking the hook, do not
hang items heavier than following
weight.
Shopping hook: 2 kg (4.4 lbs)
Luggage or other cargo placed in the luggage compartment is hidden from view by
a luggage compartment cover.
WARNING
Do not carry items on top of the luggage compartment cover, even if they
are small and light. Objects on top of
the cover could be thrown about in
an accident, causing injury, or could
obstruct the driver’s rear view.
5-14
68PH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
Frame Hooks
EXAMPLE
Front
EXAMPLE
(1)
EXAMPLE
(C)
(A)
(1)
(B)
(A)
68PM05005
The towing hook (1) is provided on the
front of the vehicle for use in emergency
situations only.
61MM0B039
68PM05006
1) Pick up the towing hook (1), jack handle
(A) and wheel brace (B) that are stowed
in the luggage compartment.
2) Remove the cover (C) by using a jack
handle (A) covered with a soft cloth as
shown in the illustration.
EXAMPLE
To install the hook (1), follow the procedure
below.
(1)
68PM05007
3) Install the towing hook (1) by hand.
5-15
68PH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
Rear
EXAMPLE
EXAMPLE
(1)
(B)
Heating and Air Conditioning
System
There are two of heating and air conditioning systems as follows:
• Manual Heating and Air Conditioning
System
• Automatic Heating and Air Conditioning
System (Climate control)
(2)
68PM05008
4) To tighten the towing hook (1), turn it
clockwise by using a wheel brace (B)
until the hook (1) is securely installed.
WARNING
Use extreme caution when you use
the towing hook (1). Avoid pulling the
vehicle to get out of severe snowy,
muddy or sandy conditions, sudden
starts or erratic driving maneuvers
which would give excessive stress
on the towing hook. The towing hook
or vehicle body may break and cause
serious injury or damage.
To remove the towing hook (1), reverse the
procedure used to install the towing hook.
68PM05009
The frame hook (2) is provided on the rear
of the vehicle.
WARNING
Use extreme caution when you use
the frame hook (2). Avoid towing the
vehicle heavier than your vehicle,
pulling the vehicle to get out out of
severe snowy, muddy or sandy conditions, sudden starts or erratic driving maneuvers which would give
excessive stress on the frame hook.
The towing hooks or vehicle body
may break and cause serious injury
or damage.
To tow your vehicle on the road or highway, follow the instruction of “Towing” in
“EMERGENCY SERVICE” section.
5-16
68PH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
Air Outlet
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(1)
Windshield defroster outlet
Side defroster outlet
Side outlet
Center outlet
Floor outlet
(2)
(3)
(4)
(2)
(3)
(5)
(5)
EXAMPLE
68PH00538
5-17
68PH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
Center outlet
EXAMPLE
Side outlet
(1)
EXAMPLE
(1)
(2)
(1)
68PH00540
68PH00539
Move the knob (1) vertically or horizontally, to adjust the direction of airflow as desired.
Move the knob (1) vertically or horizontally,
to adjust the direction of airflow as desired.
The side outlet opens when you turn the
dial (2) upward and closes when you turn it
downward.
5-18
68PH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
Manual Heating and Air
Conditioning System
Air flow selector (3)
(c)
Bi-level (b)
EXAMPLE
EXAMPLE
Description of Controls
(1)
(2)
(b)
(3)
(a)
(4) (5)
EXAMPLE
68PH02502
Temperature selector (1)
This is used to select the temperature by
turning the selector.
(d)
(e)
68PH00542
68PH00544
This is used to select one of the functions
described below.
Temperature-controlled air comes out of
the floor outlets and cooler air comes out
of the center and side outlets. When the
temperature selector (1) is in the fully
COLD position or fully HOT position, however, the air from the floor outlets and the
air from the center and side outlets will be
the same temperature.
Ventilation (a)
EXAMPLE
Blower speed selector (2)
This is used to turn on the blower and to
select blower speed by turning the selector.
68PH00543
Temperature-controlled air comes out of
the center and side outlets.
5-19
68PH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
Heat & defrost (d)
Heat (c)
EXAMPLE
Defrost (e)
EXAMPLE
EXAMPLE
68PH00545
68PH00546
68PH00547
Temperature-controlled air comes out of
the floor outlets and the side outlets, also
comes out of the windshield defroster outlets and also comes slightly out of the side
defroster outlets.
Temperature-controlled air comes out of
the floor outlets, the windshield defroster
outlets, the side defroster outlets and the
side outlets.
Temperature-controlled air comes out of
the windshield defroster outlets, the side
defroster outlets and the side outlets.
5-20
68PH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
System Operating Instructions
Air intake selector (4)
EXAMPLE
(f)
(g)
68PH00548
This selector is used to select the following
modes.
Fresh Air (f)
When this mode is selected, the indicator
light will go off and outside air is used.
Recirculated Air (g)
When this mode is selected, the indicator
light will come on, outside air is shut out
and inside air is recirculated. This mode is
suitable when driving through dusty or polluted air such as in a tunnel, or when
attempting to quickly cool down the interior.
“FRESH AIR” and “RECIRCULATED AIR”
are switched alternately each time the air
intake selector is pushed.
NOTE:
If you select “RECIRCULATED AIR” for an
extended period of time, the air in the vehicle can become contaminated. Therefore,
you should occasionally select “FRESH
AIR”.
Air conditioning switch (5)
To turn on the air conditioning system, set
the blower speed selector to a position
other than off and push in the “A/C” switch.
With this “A/C” switch operation, a indicator light will come on when the air conditioning system is on. To turn off the air
conditioning system, push the “A/C” switch
again.
During operation of the air conditioner, you
may notice slight changes in engine
speed. These changes are normal, the
system is designed so that the compressor
turns on or off to maintain the desired temperature.
Less operation of the compressor results
in better fuel economy.
Natural ventilation
Select “VENTILATION” and “FRESH AIR”,
the temperature selector to the desired
temperature position, and the blower
speed selector to off. Fresh air will flow
through the vehicle during driving.
Forced ventilation
The control settings are the same as for
natural ventilation except you set the
blower speed selector to a position other
than off.
Normal heating (using outside air)
Select “HEAT” and “FRESH AIR”, the temperature selector to the desired temperature position and the blower speed selector
to the desired blower speed position. Setting the blower speed selector to a higher
blower speed position increases heating
efficiency.
Quick heating (Using recirculated air)
The control settings are the same as for
normal heating except you select “RECIRCULATED AIR”. If you use this heating
method for an extended period of time, the
air in the vehicle can become contaminated and the windows can become misty.
Therefore, use this method only for quick
heating and change to the normal heating
method as soon as possible.
5-21
68PH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
Head cooled/Feet warmed heating
Select “BI-LEVEL” and “FRESH AIR”, the
temperature selector to the desired temperature position, and the blower speed
selector to the desired blower speed position. Unless the temperature selector is in
the fully COLD position or fully HOT position, the air that comes out of the center
and side outlets will be cooler than the air
that comes out of the floor outlets.
Normal cooling
Set the air flow selector to “VENTILATION”,
the temperature selector to the desired temperature position and the blower speed
selector to the desired blower speed position, and turn on the “A/C” switch. Setting
the blower speed selector to a higher
blower speed position increases cooling
efficiency.
You can switch the air intake selector to
either “FRESH AIR” or “RECIRCULATED
AIR” as you desire. Choosing “RECIRCULATED AIR” increases cooling efficiency.
Quick cooling (Using recirculated air)
The control settings are the same as for
normal cooling except you select “RECIRCULATED AIR” and the highest blower
speed.
NOTE:
• If you select “RECIRCULATED AIR” for
an extended period of time, the air in the
vehicle can become contaminated.
Therefore, you should occasionally
select “FRESH AIR”.
• If your vehicle has been left in the sun
with the windows closed, it will cool
faster if you open the windows briefly
while you operate the air conditioner with
the air intake selector at “FRESH AIR”
and the blower at high speed.
Dehumidifying
Set the air flow selector to a desired air
flow selector position, the temperature
selector to the desired temperature position and the blower speed selector to the
desired blower speed position. Also select
“FRESH AIR” and turn on the “A/C” switch.
NOTE:
Because the air conditioner dehumidifies
the air, turning it on will help keep the windows clear, even when blowing heated air
using the “DEFROST” or “HEAT &
DEFROST” functions.
EXAMPLE
68PH00549
NOTE:
If you need maximum defrosting:
• select “DEFROST” and “FRESH AIR”,
• set the blower speed selector to HIGH,
• adjust the temperature selector to the
HOT end,
• turn on the “A/C” switch, and
• adjust the side outlets so the air blows
on the side windows.
5-22
68PH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
Maintenance
If you do not use the air conditioner for a
long period, such as during winter, it may
not give the best performance when you
start using it again. To help maintain optimum performance and durability of your air
conditioner, it needs to be run periodically.
Operate the air conditioner at least once a
month for one minute with the engine
idling. This circulates the refrigerant and oil
and helps protect the internal components.
If your air conditioner is equipped with air
filters, clean or replace them as specified
in the “Maintenance Schedule” in the
“INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE” section.
NOTE:
Your vehicle uses the air conditioning
refrigerant HFC-134a, commonly called
“R-134a”. R-134a replaced R-12 around
1993 for automotive applications. Other
refrigerants are available, including recycled R-12, but only R-134a should be used
in your vehicle.
NOTICE
Using the wrong refrigerant may
damage your air conditioning system. Use R-134a only. Do not mix or
replace the R-134a with other refrigerants.
5-23
68PH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
Automatic Heating and Air Conditioning System
(Climate control)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
Description of Controls
EXAMPLE
(2)
(6)
(5)
(4)
(9)
(8)
Temperature selector
Blower speed selector
Air intake selector
Air flow selector
Defrost switch
Air conditioning switch
“OFF” switch
“AUTO” switch
Display
(1)
(7)
(3)
68PH00550
5-24
68PH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
Temperature selector (1)
Air intake selector (3)
Blower speed selector (2)
EXAMPLE
EXAMPLE
(1)
(2)
EXAMPLE
(a)
(3)
(b)
68PH00551
68PH00552
68PH00553
Push the temperature selector (1) to adjust
the temperature.
Air flows out at a higher rate when you
press the upper switch and at a lower rate
when you press the lower switch.
Push the air intake selector (3) to change
between the following modes.
If the “AUTO” switch (8) is pushed, the
blower speed will vary automatically as the
climate control system maintains the
selected temperature.
If the “AUTO” switch (8) is pushed, the air
intake will vary automatically as the climate
control system maintains the selected temperature.
NOTE:
When you select the recirculated air mode,
the automatic operation system is deactivated if you push the “AUTO” switch (8).
RECIRCULATED AIR (a)
When this mode is selected, outside air is
shut off and inside air is recirculated. This
mode is suitable when driving through an
area with polluted air such as a tunnel, or
when attempting to quickly cool down the
vehicle.
5-25
68PH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
FRESH AIR (b)
When this mode is selected, outside air is
introduced.
“FRESH AIR” and “RECIRCULATED AIR”
are selected alternately each time the air
intake selector is pushed.
If the “AUTO” switch (8) is pushed, the air
flow will vary automatically as the climate
control system maintains the selected temperature.
Bi-level (d)
EXAMPLE
Ventilation (c)
EXAMPLE
NOTE:
If you select “RECIRCULATED AIR” for an
extended period of time, the air in the vehicle can become contaminated. Therefore,
you should occasionally select “FRESH
AIR”.
68PH00544
Air flow selector (4)
(c)
EXAMPLE
68PH00543
(d)
Temperature-controlled air comes out of
the center and side outlets.
Temperature-controlled air comes out of
the floor outlets and cooler air comes out
of the center and side outlets. When the
temperature selector (1) is in the fully
COLD position or fully HOT position, however, the air from the floor outlets and the
air from the center and side outlets will be
the same temperature.
(e)
(4)
(f)
68PH00554
Push the air flow selector (4) to change
among the following functions. The indication of the selected mode appears on the
display.
5-26
68PH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
Heat & defrost (f)
Heat (e)
EXAMPLE
Defrost switch (5)
EXAMPLE
EXAMPLE
(5)
68PH00545
68PH00546
68PH00555
Temperature-controlled air comes out of
the floor outlets and the side outlets, a
small amount of air comes out of the windshield defroster outlets and also comes
slightly out of the side defroster outlets.
Temperature-controlled air comes out of
the floor outlets, the windshield defroster
outlets, the side defroster outlets and the
side outlets.
Push the defrost switch (5) to turn on the
defroster.
5-27
68PH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
System Operating Instructions
Air conditioning switch (6)
Defrost
EXAMPLE
EXAMPLE
Automatic operation
EXAMPLE
(6)
68PH00547
Temperature-controlled air comes out of
the windshield defroster outlets, the side
defroster outlets and the side outlets.
NOTE:
When the defrost switch (5) is pushed to
turn on the defroster, the air conditioning
system will come on and the “FRESH AIR”
mode will be selected automatically. In
very cold weather, however, the air conditioning system will not turn on.
68PH00556
The air conditioning switch (6) is used to
turn on and off the air conditioning system
only when the blower is on. To turn on the
air conditioning system, push in the switch
and “A/C” will appear on the display. To
turn off the air conditioning system, push in
the switch again and “A/C” will go off.
(6)
(8)
(7)
(1)
68PH00557
You can let the climate control system work
automatically. To set the system for fully-automatic operation, follow the procedure below.
1) Start the engine.
2) Push the “AUTO” switch (8).
3) Set the desired temperature by turning
the temperature selector (1).
The blower speed, air intake and air flow are
controlled automatically to maintain the set
temperature. However, the air flow is not
changed to the “Defrost” position automatically.
NOTE:
When you select the recirculated air mode,
the automatic operation system is deactivated if you push the “AUTO” switch (8).
5-28
68PH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
You can use the air conditioning switch (6)
to manually turn the air conditioner on or off
according to your preference. When you
turn the air conditioning switch off, the climate control system cannot lower the
inside temperature below outside temperature.
To turn the climate control system off, push
the “OFF” switch (7).
NOTE:
If the “AUTO” on the display blinks, there is
a problem in the heating system and/or air
conditioning system. You should have the
system inspected by an authorised Maruti
Suzuki workshop.
NOTE:
• To find the temperature at which you are
most comfortable, start with the 25°C
(75°F) setting.
• If you turn the temperature selector (1)
until “HI” or “LO” appears on the display,
the climate control system will operate at
maximum heating or cooling and the
blower will run at full speed.
• To avoid blowing cold air in cold weather
or hot air in hot weather, the system will
delay turning on the blower until warmed
or chilled air is available.
• If your vehicle has been left in the sun
with the windows closed, it will cool
faster if you open the windows briefly.
• Even under the automatic operation, you
can set individual selectors to the man-
ual mode. The manually selected functions are maintained, and the other
functions remain under automatic operation.
• If the windshield and/or the front door
windows are fogged, push the defrost
switch (5) to turn on the defroster, or
push the air flow selector (4) to change
the air flow to the “Heat & defrost” position to defog the windows.
• To return the blower speed selector (2),
air intake selector (3), and air flow selector (4) to automatic operation, push the
“AUTO” switch (8).
Manual operation
You can manually control the climate control system. Set the selectors to the
desired positions.
EXAMPLE
EXAMPLE
68PH00549
(11)
(10)
68PH00558
Be careful not to cover the interior temperature sensor (10) located between the
steering wheel and the climate control
panel, or the solar sensor (11) located at
the top of the driver’s side dashboard.
These sensors are used by the automatic
system to regulate temperature.
NOTE:
If you need maximum defrosting:
• push the defrost switch (5) to turn on the
defroster (The air conditioning system
will come on and the “FRESH AIR” mode
will be selected automatically),
• set the blower speed selector to HIGH,
• adjust the temperature selector to the
“HI” indication on the display, and
• adjust the side outlets so the air blows
on the side windows.
5-29
68PH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
Maintenance
If you do not use the air conditioner for a
long period, such as during winter, it may
not give the best performance when you
start using it again. To help maintain optimum performance and durability of your air
conditioner, it needs to be run periodically.
Operate the air conditioner at least once a
month for one minute with the engine
idling. This circulates the refrigerant and oil
and helps protect the internal components.
If your air conditioner is equipped with air
filters. Clean or replace them as specified
in the “Maintenance Schedule” in the
“INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE”
section. Have this job done by your authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop as the lower
glove box must be lowered for this job.
NOTE:
Your vehicle uses the air conditioning
refrigerant HFC-134a, commonly called
“R-134a”. R-134a replaced R-12 around
1993 for automotive applications. Other
refrigerants are available, including recycled R-12, but only R-134a should be used
in your vehicle.
NOTICE
Using the wrong refrigerant may
damage your air conditioning system. Use R-134a only. Do not mix or
replace the R-134a with other refrigerants.
Radio Antenna
EXAMPLE
Installation of Radio
Frequency Transmitters
We recommend that you always ask a
authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop about
frequency band, max output power,
antenna position at vehicle and specific
conditions for installation and/or use before
installing a radio transmitter in your vehicle. Such equipments may cause the electronic control system to malfunction if they
are incorrectly installed or they are not
suited for the vehicle.
68PH00559
The radio antenna on the roof is removable. To remove the antenna, turn it counterclockwise. To reinstall the antenna, turn
it clockwise firmly by hand.
NOTICE
To avoid damage to the radio
antenna:
• Remove the antenna when using an
automatic car wash.
• Remove the antenna when the
antenna hits anything such as a
low ceiling in a parking garage or
putting a car cover over your vehicle.
5-30
68PH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
Audio System (If equipped)
EXAMPLE
AM/FM CD PLAYER
68PH00575
NOTE:
For vehicle equipped with SMARTPLAY INFOTAINMENT SYSTEM, refer to audio manual available with the vehicle.
5-31
68PH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
Safety Information
WARNING
If you pay extended attention to operating the audio system or viewing the
audio system display while driving,
an accident can occur. If you set the
sound volume too loud, it could prevent you from being aware of road
and traffic conditions.
• Keep your eyes on the road and
your mind on the drive. Avoid paying extended attention to operating
the audio system or viewing the
audio system display.
• Familiarize yourself with the audio
system controls and operation of
the audio system before driving.
• Preset your favorite radio stations
before driving so that you can
quickly tune to them using the presets.
• Set the sound volume to a level
that will allow you to continue to be
aware of road and traffic conditions
while driving.
Notes on Discs
Precautions
• When the inside of the vehicle is very
cold and the player is used soon after
switching on the heater, condensation
may form on the disc or the optical parts
of the player and proper playback may
not be possible. If condensation forms
on the disc, wipe it off with a soft cloth. If
condensation forms on the optical parts
of the player, do not use the player for
about one hour. This will allow the condensation to disappear normally.
• Driving on extremely bumpy roads which
cause severe vibrations may cause
sound to skip.
• This unit uses a precision mechanism.
Even in the event that trouble arises,
never open the case, disassemble the
unit, or lubricate the rotating parts.
Please bring the unit to an authorised
Maruti Suzuki workshop.
Cautions on Handling
EXAMPLE
(A)
52D274
This unit has been designed specifically for
playback of compact discs bearing mark
(A) shown above.
No other discs can be played.
Removing the disc Proper way to hold
the compact disc
EXAMPLE
52D275
To remove the compact disc from its storage case, press down on the center of the
case and lift the disc out, holding it carefully by the edges.
Always handle the compact disc by the
edges.
Never touch the surface.
5-32
68PH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
Use of such discs will cause damage or
prevent the system from operating properly.
EXAMPLE
EXAMPLE
EXAMPLE
52D347
52D348
To remove fingermarks and dust, use a
soft cloth, and wipe in a straight line from
the center of the compact disc to the circumference.
Never stick labels on the surface of the
compact disc or write on the surface with a
pencil or pen.
EXAMPLE
(B)
(C)
(B)
52D349
Do not use any solvents such as commercially available cleaners, anti-static spray,
or thinner to clean compact discs.
EXAMPLE
52D277
New discs may have some roughness
around the edges. The unit may not work
or the sound may skip if such discs are
used. Use a ball-point pen (B), etc. to
remove the roughness (C) from the edges
of the disc before inserting it into the unit.
52D351
Do not expose compact discs to direct sunlight or any heat source.
EXAMPLE
NOTE:
• Do not use commercially available CD
protection sheets or discs equipped with
stabilizers, etc.
These may get caught in the internal
mechanism and damage the disc.
• It may be impossible to play CD-R discs
with this unit due to the recording conditions.
• CD-RW discs cannot be played with this
unit.
52D350
Do not use compact discs that have large
scratches, are misshaped, or cracked, etc.
5-33
68PH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
WARNING
This is a class I laser product. Use of
controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than
those specified herein may result in
hazardous radiation exposure.
Do not open covers and do not
attempt to repair this unit by yourself.
Refer servicing to qualified personnel.
The Bluetooth® word mark and logo are
registered trademarks and are owned by
the Bluetooth SIG, Ink.
Stop using this unit and a Bluetooth®
ready device whenever requested.
This unit shares the communication frequency with other private or public wireless
communication equipment such as a wireless LAN and other wireless communication radios.
You should stop using this unit whenever
you are notified that your unit disturbs
other wireless communication immediately.
5-34
68PH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
Basic Operations
Turning power on/off
Press the VOL PUSH POWER knob (1).
The unit starts in the function mode it was
in when the power was turned off last.
EXAMPLE
Adjusting the volume
Turn the VOL PUSH POWER knob (1).
Turning it clockwise increases the volume;
turning it counterclockwise decreases the
volume.
NOTE:
While driving, adjust the volume to an
extent that sound and/or noise coming
from outside the vehicle can be heard.
(2)
(1)
68PH00560
(1) VOL PUSH POWER knob
(2) TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob
5-35
68PH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
Adjusting bass/treble/balance /fader
1) Press the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
SOUND knob (2).
Each time the knob is pressed, sound
adjustment will change as follows:
Preset-EQ (EQ OFF)
Bass adjustment (BASS 0)
Treble adjustment (TREBLE 0)
Balance adjustment (BALANCE 0)
Fader adjustment (FADER 0)
AVC adjustment (AVC LEVEL 2)
2) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
SOUND knob (2) to adjust the sound.
Adjusting the AVC (Auto volume control)
The Auto Volume Control (AVC) function
automatically
adjusts
(increases/
decreases) the sound volume in accordance with vehicle speed. The AVC control
is provided with three selectable levels
(LEVEL OFF, 1, 2, 3). The range of volume
adjustment increases together with the
LEVEL number.
1) Press the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
SOUND knob (2) until the AVC adjustment mode is selected.
2) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
SOUND knob (2) to select the desired
AVC adjustment level. (Initial setting:
LEVEL 2)
Preset-EQ
Preset-EQ calls up various sound types in
accordance with the listening music type.
1) Press the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
SOUND knob (2) several times until
“PRESET-EQ” appears.
2) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
SOUND knob (2).
Each time the knob is turned, preset
EQ mode will change as follows:
OFF (FLAT)
JAZZ
ROCK
POP
CLASSIC
HIP-HOP
5-36
68PH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
Listening to the Radio
Display
(A)
EXAMPLE
(B)
(4)
(1)
(2)
(5)
(7)
(3)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
FM button
AM button
Up button
Down button
TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob
Preset buttons ([1] to [6])
AS button
(A) Band
(B) Frequency
(6)
68PH00561
5-37
68PH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
Selecting the FM band
Press the FM button (1).
Each time the button is pressed, the reception band will change as follows:
FM1
FM2
Selecting the AM band
Press the AM button (2).
Seek tuning
Press the seek Up button (3) or the seek
Down button (4).
The unit stops searching for a station at a
frequency where a broadcast station is
available.
Manual tuning
Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND
knob (5).
The frequency being received is displayed.
Preset memory
1) Select the desired station.
2) Hold down a desired button ([1] to [6])
of the Preset buttons (6) to which you
want to store the station for 2 seconds
or longer.
Auto store
Hold down the AS button (7) for 2 seconds
or longer.
Six stations in good reception will automatically be stored to the Preset buttons (6) in
order, starting from a station whose frequency is the lowest.
NOTE:
• Auto store can be released by pressing
AS button (7) while auto store is under
way.
• When the auto store is performed, the
station previously stored in the memory
at the position is overwritten.
• When there are fewer than 6 stations
that can be stored even if 1 round of
auto store operation is performed, no
station will be stored at the remaining
Preset buttons (6).
• 6 stations can be preset for FM1 and
FM2 in common, and 6 stations for AM
in auto store mode.
Radio reception
Radio reception can be affected by environment, atmospheric conditions, or radio
signal’s power and distance from the station. Nearby mountains and buildings may
interfere or deflect radio reception, causing
poor reception. Poor reception or radio
static can also be caused by electric current from overhead wires or high voltage
power lines.
Auto store mode on/off
Press the AS button (7).
Each time the button is pressed, the mode
is switched as follows:
AS mode on
AS mode off
5-38
68PH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
Listening to a CD
Display
(A)
EXAMPLE
(1)
(2)
(B)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
Insertion slot
Eject button
CD button
Up button
Down button
RPT button
RDM button
DISP button
(A) Track number
(B) Play time
(8)
NOTE:
This product does not support 8 cm CD
(sometimes called as “mini single CD”, “3inch CD”, “CD3”, etc.).
68PH00562
5-39
68PH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
EXAMPLE
(A)
52D274
• CDs or CD-ROMs carrying no mark (A)
cannot be used.
• Some discs recorded in CD-R/CD-RW
format may sometimes be impossible to
use.
NOTICE
NOTICE
• Never insert your finger or hand
into the CD insertion slot. Never
insert foreign objects.
• Never insert a CD with glue coming
out from adhesive tape or a rental
CD label or with a trace indicating
that adhesive tape or a rental CD
label has been removed. This may
cause the CD not to eject or result
in a malfunction.
If you forcefully try to push an
ejected CD inside the unit before auto
reloading, the disc surface might be
scratched.
When reloading a CD, remove it from
the unit completely before reloading.
Loading a CD
Insert a CD in the Insertion slot (1).
When a CD is loaded, It begins to play.
EXAMPLE
52D291
• A CD is to be inserted with its label side
up.
• When there is a CD already in the unit, it
is impossible to insert another CD without ejecting the CD in the unit. Do not
use force to insert a CD into the CD
insertion slot.
Ejecting a CD
Press the Eject button (2).
When the ignition mode is “LOCK”, the CD
remained ejected for around 15 seconds or
longer will automatically be drawn inside
the unit. (Auto reload function)
The backup eject function:
This function allows you to eject a CD by
pressing the Eject button (2) even when
the ignition mode is off.
Listening to a CD
When a CD is inserted, playback will automatically start.
When a CD is already inside the unit,
press the CD button (3) to start playback.
Selecting a track
• Press the Up button (4) to listen to the
next track.
• Press the Down button (5) twice to listen
to the previous track.
When the Down button (5) is pressed
once, the track currently being played
will start from the beginning again.
Fast forwarding/Rewinding a track
• Hold down the Up button (4) to fast forward the track.
• Hold down the Down button (5) to fast
rewind the track.
5-40
68PH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
Random playback
Press the RDM button (7).
Each time the button is pressed, the mode
will change as follows:
OFF
TRACK RANDOM
Display change
Press the DISP button (8).
Each time the button is pressed, display
will change as follows:
Play time
Disc title
Track title
• TRACK RANDOM
The random indicator “RDM” will light.
The tracks in the loaded disc will be
played in random order.
Repeat playback
Press the RPT button (6).
Each time the button is pressed, the mode
will change as follows:
OFF
NOTE:
• “NO TITLE” will be displayed when there
is no text information in the disc currently
being played.
• If text data contains more than 16 characters, the “>” mark will appear at the
right end. Holding down the DISP button
(8) for 1 second or longer can display the
next page.
TRACK REPEAT
• TRACK REPEAT
The repeat indicator “RPT” will light.
The track currently being played will be
played repeatedly.
5-41
68PH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
Listening to an MP3/WMA/AAC Disc
Display
(A)
EXAMPLE
(D)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(1)
(6)
(5)
(B)
(C)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob
Up button
Down button
RPT button
RDM button
DISP button
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
Folder number
Track number
Play time
DISC type
68PH00563
5-42
68PH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
Selecting a folder
Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND
knob (1) to select a folder.
Selecting a track
• Press the Up button (2) to listen to the
next track.
• Press the Down button (3) twice to listen
to the previous track.
When the Down button (3) is pressed
once, the track currently being played
will start from the beginning again.
Fast forwarding/Rewinding a track
• Hold down the Up button (2) to fast forward the track.
• Hold down the Down button (3) to fast
rewind the track.
Random playback
Press the RDM button (5).
Each time the button is pressed, the mode
will change as follows:
OFF
FOLDER RANDOM
ALL RANDOM
• FOLDER RANDOM
The random indicator “F.RDM” will light.
The tracks in the current folder will be
played in random order.
• ALL RANDOM
The random indicator “RDM” will light.
The tracks in the loaded disc will be
played in random order.
Repeat playback
Press the RPT button (4).
Each time the button is pressed, the mode
will change as follows:
OFF
FILE REPEAT
FOLDER REPEAT
• FILE REPEAT
The repeat indicator “RPT” will light.
The track currently being played will be
played repeatedly.
• FOLDER REPEAT
The repeat indicator “F.RPT” will light.
All tracks in the currently selected folder
will be played repeatedly.
5-43
68PH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
Display change
Press the DISP button (6).
Each time the button is pressed, display
will change as follows:
Play time
Folder name
File name
Album name (MP3, AAC only)
Track title
Artist name
NOTE:
• “NO TITLE” will be displayed when there
is no text information in the disc currently
being played.
• If text data contains more than 16 characters, the “>” mark will appear at the
right end. Holding down the DISP button
(6) for 1 second or longer can display the
next page.
Notes on MP3/WMA/AAC
What is MP3?
• MP3 (MPEG audio layer3) is an audio
compression format that has become
the standard format among PC users. Its
merit is that the original audio data is
compressed to approximately 1/10 and
high sound quality is maintained. This
means that it is possible to store the data
of approximately 10 music CDs on a single CD-R/RW disc, which in turn makes
it possible to play music for a long time
without having to change the disc.
What is WMA?
• An abbreviation of “Windows Media
Audio,” WMA is an audio compression
format developed by Microsoft.
• WMA files for which the DRM (Digital
Rights Management) function is ON cannot be played.
• Windows MediaTM and the Windows®
logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and other countries.
What is AAC?
• An abbreviation of “Advanced Audio
Coding,” AAC is an audio compression
format used by MPEG2 and MPEG4.
Points to remember when making MP3/
WMA/AAC files
Common
• High bit rate and high sampling frequency are recommended for high quality sounds.
• Selecting VBR (Variable Bit Rate) is not
recommended. Selecting VBR may
cause display of incorrect playing time
and jumpiness of playback.
• Playback sound quality varies depending on the encoding environment. For
details, refer to the user manual of the
encoding software and the writing software in use.
NOTICE
Never assign the “.mp3”, “.wma”, or
“.m4a” file name extension to a file if
it is not in the MP3/WMA/AAC format
file. Failure to observe this may result
in damage to the speaker due to
noise production.
Recording MP3/WMA/AAC files on a CD
media
• It is recommended not to write both CDDA files and MP3/WMA/AAC files on a
disc.
• If both CD-DA files and MP3/WMA/AAC
files are on the same disc, tracks may
not be played in the correct order or
some tracks may not be played at all.
5-44
68PH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
• When storing both MP3 data and WMA
data on the same disc, sort and place
them in different folders.
• Do not write files other than MP3/WMA/
AAC files and unnecessary folders on a
disc.
• MP3/WMA/AAC files should be named
to meet the standards and the file system specifications as shown below.
• The file extension “.mp3”, “.wma” or
“.m4a” should be assigned to files based
on their format independently.
• You may encounter a trouble in playing
MP3/WMA/AAC files or displaying information of MP3/WMA/AAC files depending on the writing software or CD
recorder in use.
• This unit does not have a play list function.
• It is recommended to write discs in Discat-Once mode even though Multi-session mode is supported.
WMA (Ver. 7, Ver. 8, Ver. 9*)
• Bit rate: CBR 32 k - 320 kbps
• Sampling frequency: 32 k/44.1 k/48 kHz
* WMA 9 Professional/LossLess/Voice are
not supported.
AAC*
• Bit rate: ABR 16 k - 320 kbps
• Sampling frequency: 32 k/44.1 k/48 kHz
* Apple Lossless is not supported.
Supported file systems
ISO 9660 Level 1/Level 2, Joliet, Romeo
Maximum number of files/folders
• Maximum number of files: 512
• Maximum number of files in a folder: 255
• Maximum depth of tree structure: 8
• Maximum number of folders: 255
(Root folder is included.)
Compression formats
MP3
• Bit rate:
MPEG1 Audio Layer III: 32 k - 320 kbps
MPEG2 Audio Layer III: 8 k - 160 kbps
MPEG2.5 Audio Layer III: 8 k - 160 kbps
• Sampling frequency:
MPEG1 Audio Layer III: 32 k/44.1 k/
48 kHz
MPEG2 Audio Layer III: 16 k/22.05 k/
24 kHz
MPEG2.5 Audio Layer III: 8 k/11.025 k/
12 kHz
5-45
68PH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
Listening to files stored in a USB device
Display
(A)
EXAMPLE
(D)
(3)
(4)
(1)
(5)
(2)
(7)
(6)
(B)
(C)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
MEDIA button
TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob
Up button
Down button
RPT button
RDM button
DISP button
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
Folder number
Track number
Play time
File type
NOTICE
68PH00560
Do not connect any USB device other
than a USB memory or a USB audio
player. Do not connect multiple USB
devices to the USB connector using a
USB hub, etc. Supplying power to
multiple USB devices from the connector could cause overheating and
smoking.
5-46
68PH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
Selecting a USB device mode
Press the MEDIA button (1).
Each time the button is pressed, the mode
will change as follows:
USB (iPod®) (If equipped)
Random playback
Press the RDM button (6).
Each time the button is pressed, the mode
will change as follows:
OFF
FOLDER RANDOM
ALL RANDOM
Bluetooth® audio (If equipped)
• FOLDER REPEAT
The repeat indicator “F.RPT” will light.
All the tracks in the folder currently
selected will be played repeatedly.
Display change
Press the DISP button (7).
Each time the button is pressed, display
will change as follows:
AUX (If equipped)
Selecting a folder
Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND
knob (2) to select the desired folder.
Selecting a track
• Press the Up button (3) to listen to the
next track.
• Press the Down button (4) twice to listen
to the previous track.
When the Down button (4) is pressed
once, the track currently being played
will start from the beginning again.
Fast forwarding/Rewinding a track
• Hold down the Up button (3) to fast forward the track.
• Hold down the Down button (4) to fast
rewind the track.
• FOLDER RANDOM
The random indicator “F.RDM” will light.
The tracks in the currently selected
folder will be played in random order.
• ALL RANDOM
The random indicator “RDM” will light.
The tracks in the connected USB device
will be played in random order.
Repeat playback
Press the RPT button (5).
Each time the button is pressed, the mode
will change as follows:
OFF
FILE REPEAT
FOLDER REPEAT
• FILE REPEAT
The repeat indicator “RPT” will light.
The track currently being played will be
played repeatedly.
Play time
Folder name
File name
Album name (MP3, AAC only)
Track title
Artist name
NOTE:
• “NO TITLE” will be displayed when there
is no text information in the disc currently
being played.
• If text data contains more than 16 characters, the “>” mark will appear at the
right end. Holding down the DISP button
(7) for 1 second or longer can display the
next page.
5-47
68PH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
Notes on USB device
Compatible USB devices
• USB Mass Storage Class
For details as to whether your USB
memory/USB Audio is compatible with
USB Mass Storage Class, please contact the USB memory/USB Audio manufacturer.
• USB Standard Compatibility 1.1/2.0 Full
Speed
• File System FAT12/16/32, VFAT
• Maximum current less than 1.0 A
• If devices such as USB hub, extension
cable are connected to the audio system, it may not be recognized. In such
case connect the USB device directly to
the audio system.
• Devices such as MP3 player/Mobile
phone/digital camera may not be recognized by the audio system for playing
music.
USB device connection
• When connecting a USB device, make
sure that the connector is pushed all the
way into the port.
• Do not leave the USB device for long
periods of time in places inside the vehicle where the temperature can rise too
high.
• Back up any important data beforehand.
We cannot accept responsibility for any
lost data.
• It is recommended not to connect a USB
device that contains data files other than
MP3/WMA/AAC format.
Recording MP3/WMA/AAC files on a
USB device
• Playback or display may not be possible
depending on the type of USB device in
use or the condition of the recording.
• Depending on the connected USB memory, the files may be played in different
order from the order that the files were
stored.
Maximum number of files/folders
• Maximum number of files: 2500
• Maximum number of files in a folder: 255
• Maximum depth of tree structure: 8
• Maximum number of folders: 255
(Root folder is included.)
Compression formats
MP3
• Bit rate:
MPEG1 Audio Layer III: 32 k - 320 kbps
MPEG2 Audio Layer III: 8 k - 160 kbps
MPEG2.5 Audio Layer III: 8 k - 160 kbps
• Sampling frequency:
MPEG1 Audio Layer III: 32 k/44.1 k/48 kHz
MPEG2 Audio Layer III: 16 k/22.05 k/24 kHz
MPEG2.5 Audio Layer III: 8 k/11.025 k/12 kHz
WMA (Ver. 7, Ver. 8, Ver. 9*)
• Bit rate: CBR 32 k - 320 kbps
• Sampling frequency: 32 k/44.1 k/48 kHz
* WMA 9 Professional/LossLess/Voice are
not supported.
AAC*
• Bit rate: ABR 16 k - 320 kbps
• Sampling frequency: 32 k/44.1 k/48 kHz
* Apple Lossless is not supported.
5-48
68PH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
Listening to an iPod®
Display
(A)
EXAMPLE
(B)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(1)
(7)
(2)
(6)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(C)
MEDIA button
TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob
Up button
Down button
RPT button
RDM button
DISP button
Preset buttons ([1] to [6])
(A) Track title
(B) Track number
(C) Play time
(8)
68PH00565
5-49
68PH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
Selecting an iPod® mode
Press the MEDIA button (1).
Each time the button is pressed, the mode
will change as follows:
USB (iPod®) (If equipped)
Random playback
Press the RDM button (6).
Each time the button is pressed, the mode
will change as follows:
OFF
SONG RANDOM
ALBUM RANDOM
Bluetooth® audio (If equipped)
Fast forwarding/Rewinding a track
• Hold down the Up button (3) to fast forward the track.
• Hold down the Down button (4) to fast
rewind the track.
Playlist name /
Track title (Playlist mode only)
Artist name /
Track title
AUX (If equipped)
Selecting a track
• Press the Up button (3) to listen to the
next track.
• Press the Down button (4) twice to listen
to the previous track.
When the Down button (4) is pressed
once, the track currently being played
will start from the beginning again.
Display change
Press the DISP button (7).
Each time the button is pressed, display
will change as follows:
• SONG RANDOM
The random indicator “RDM” will light.
The tracks in the iPod® will be played in
random order.
• ALBUM RANDOM
The random indicator “F.RDM” will light.
The albums in the iPod® will be played in
random order.
Repeat playback
Press the RPT button (5).
Each time the button is pressed, the mode
will change as follows:
OFF
Album name /
Track title
Track title /
Play time
NOTE:
If text data contains more than 16 characters, the “>” mark will appear at the right
end. Holding down the DISP button (7) for
1 second or longer can display the next
page.
SONG REPEAT
• SONG REPEAT
The repeat indicator “RPT” will light.
The track currently being played will be
played repeatedly.
5-50
68PH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
Playing Mode selection
1) Press the button numbered [1] of the
Preset buttons (8) for 1 second or longer.
2) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
SOUND knob (2).
Each time the knob is turned, the mode
will change as follows:
PLAYLIST
ARTIST
ALBUM
SONGS
GENRE
3) Press the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
SOUND knob (2) to select the desired
mode.
NOTE:
• When the button numbered [1] of the
Preset buttons (8) is pressed, the previous mode will be displayed.
Notes on iPod®
Supported iPod®
• iPod® touch (5th generation)
• iPod® touch (4th generation)
• iPod® touch (3rd generation)
• iPod® touch (2nd generation)
• iPod® touch (1st generation)
• iPod® classic
• iPod® nano (7th generation)
• iPod® nano (6th generation)
• iPod® nano (5th generation)
• iPod® nano (4th generation)
• iPod® nano (3rd generation)
• iPod® nano (2nd generation)
• iPod® nano (1st generation)
• iPhone® 5S
• iPhone® 5C
• iPhone® 5
• iPhone® 4S
• iPhone® 4
• iPhone® 3GS
• iPhone® 3G
• iPhone®
* Some functions may not be available
depending on the model of iPod®.
* iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
* iPhone® is a trademark of Apple Inc.,
registered in the U.S. and other countries.
* Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with
safety and regulatory standards.
iPod® connection
• Make sure to detach the iPod® after
pressing the engine switch to change the
ignition mode to LOCK. The iPod® may
not be shut down when it is being connected and may result in battery depletion.
• Please do not connect iPod® accessories such as an iPod® remote control or
headphones while connecting the iPod®
with the unit. The unit may not operate
correctly.
5-51
68PH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
AUX Function
AUX connection
To listen to auxiliary audio sources (Sold
separately) through the unit, follow the
instruction below.
1) Connect the auxiliary audio source to
the AUX/USB socket (Separately
attached) with an AUX cable.
2) Press the MEDIA button (1).
Each time the button is pressed, the
mode will change as follows:
EXAMPLE
USB (iPod®) (If equipped)
Bluetooth® audio (If equipped)
(1)
AUX (If equipped)
CAUTION
68PH00566
(1) MEDIA button
• Before connection, mute the unit,
and also keep the volume of the
auxiliary audio source within a
range that will not cause distortion.
• When the audio source is turned
off, noise may be emitted. Be sure
to turn off the unit or switch to
another mode before turning off the
audio source.
5-52
68PH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
NOTE:
• Please consult your place of purchase
for details about whether a given auxiliary audio source can be connected and
the proper auxiliary cord to use.
• The volume and tone controls of the
auxiliary audio source can be adjusted
on the unit.
• In AUX mode, the volume setting is different from another mode.
5-53
68PH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
Bluetooth® Hands-Free (If equipped)
Steering switch
EXAMPLE
EXAMPLE
(6)
Bluetooth
(7)
(8)
68PH00568
(5)
(4)
(1)
EXAMPLE
(2)
(9)
(3)
(10)
68PH00569
68PH00567
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob
VOL PUSH POWER knob
Preset buttons
Back button
Bluetooth® setup button (On control panel)
(6) Bluetooth® setup button (On steering
wheel)
(7) Off Hook button
(8) On Hook button
(9) MUTE switch
(10) VOL switch
5-54
68PH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
Phone registration
To use the hands-free function with this
unit, it is required to register the phone
in advance.
NOTE:
• Up to 5 phones can be registered.
• To set up a new phone, disconnect the
audio player from the unit. Connect the
audio player again after phone setup is
completed if necessary.
• When failed to establish the pairing
within 120 seconds, the connecting
operation will be canceled. Please try
again or refer to the manual of the phone
in use for how to establish the pairing
with the phone.
1) Press the Bluetooth® setup button (5)
or (6).
The Bluetooth® setup menu will be displayed.
2) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
SOUND knob (1) to select “Setup Bluetooth”, and press the knob (1) to determine the selection.
3) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
SOUND knob (1) to select “Pairing”,
and press the knob (1) to determine the
selection.
4) Select “MY CAR” from the Bluetooth®
menu of the phone and establish the
pairing.
Refer to the manual of the phone in use
for further information.
5) Enter the Passkey displayed on the unit
to the phone.
6) When the pairing with the phone is
established, automatic transfer of the
phonebook and the call history
becomes selectable. The automatic
transfer starts with “Yes” and it does not
with “No”.
7) Press the On Hook button (8).
NOTE:
• When selecting “Go Back” or pressing
the back button (4), the previous menu
will be displayed.
• When additionally registering a phone,
operate the same step from 1).
Receiving a call
Press the Off Hook button (7) to receive a
call.
Ending a call
Press the On Hook button (8) to end a call.
Rejecting a call (Only for supported
models)
Press the On Hook button (8) to reject a
incoming call.
Mute of hands-free microphone
Press the MUTE switch (9) to mute the
microphone. To cancel the mute, press the
MUTE switch (9) again.
Adjusting the listening volume
• Turn the VOL PUSH POWER knob (2)
during a call.
Turning it clockwise increases the volume;
turning
it
counterclockwise
decreases the volume.
• Press the VOL switch (10) during a call.
Pressing “+” of the switch increases the
volume, pressing “-” of the switch
decreases the volume.
Adjusting the ring volume
• Turn the VOL PUSH POWER knob (2)
while a call coming in.
Turning it clockwise increases the volume;
turning
it
counterclockwise
decreases the volume.
• Press the VOL switch (10) during a call.
Pressing “+” of the switch increases the
volume, pressing “-” of the switch
decreases the volume.
Adjusting the call or ringtone volume
Follow the instructions below to adjust the
call or ringtone volume.
1) Press the Bluetooth® setup button (5)
or (6).
The Bluetooth® setup menu will be displayed.
2) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
SOUND knob (1) to select “Setup Telephone”, and press the knob (1) to determine the selection.
5-55
68PH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
3) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
SOUND knob (1) to select “Sound Setting”, and press the knob (1) to determine the selection.
4) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
SOUND knob (1) to select “Call Volume” or “Ringtone Volume”, and press
the knob (1) to determine the selection.
The current call or ringtone volume will
be displayed.
5) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
SOUND knob (1) to select desired call
or ringtone volume, and press the knob
(1) to determine the selection.
NOTE:
When selecting “Go Back” or pressing the
back button (4), the previous menu will be
displayed.
Dialing using Missed/Incoming/
Outgoing Calls
Follow the instructions below to dial to the
last dialed number again.
NOTE:
Up to 30 phone numbers of the latest calls
can be stored. (30 calls including missed,
received and dialed call)
1) Press the Bluetooth® setup button (5)
or (6).
The Bluetooth® setup menu will be displayed.
2) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
SOUND knob (1) to select “Setup Telephone”, and press the knob (1) to determine the selection.
3) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
SOUND knob (1) to select “All Calls”,
“Missed Calls”, “Incoming Calls” or
“Outgoing Calls”, and press the knob
(1) to determine the selection.
To dial from the dialed history or the
received history, select “All Calls”,
“Missed Calls”, “Incoming Calls” or
“Outgoing Calls” respectively.
4) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
SOUND knob (1) to select the desired
number, and press the knob (1) to
determine the selection.
5) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
SOUND knob (1) to select “Dial”, and
press the knob (1) or the Off Hook button (7) to dial to the selected number.
NOTE:
• When selecting “Go Back” or pressing
the back button (4), the previous menu
will be displayed.
• Pressing “Confirm” after selecting “Add
Speed Dial” can register the selected
number in the speed dial.
• Pressing “Confirm” after selecting
“Delete” can delete the selected number
from the call history.
Deletion of call history
Follow the instructions below to delete a
missed/incoming/outgoing call history.
1) Press the Bluetooth® setup button (5)
or (6). The Bluetooth® setup menu will
be displayed.
2) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
SOUND knob (1) to select “Setup Telephone”, and press the knob (1) to determine the selection.
3) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
SOUND knob (1) to select “Setup
Phonebook”, and press the knob (1) to
determine the selection.
4) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
SOUND knob (1) to select “Delete History”, and press the knob (1) to determine the selection.
5) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
SOUND knob (1) to select “Missed
Calls”, “Incoming Calls”, or “Outgoing
Calls”, and press the knob (1) to determine the selection.
6) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
SOUND knob (1) to select a number to
5-56
68PH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
be deleted or “ALL”, and press the knob
(1) to determine the selection.
7) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
SOUND knob (1) to select “Delete?” or
“Delete All?”, and press the knob (1) to
determine the selection.
8) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
SOUND knob (1) to select “Confirm”,
and press the knob (1) to complete the
deletion.
NOTE:
When selecting “Go Back” or pressing the
back button (4), the previous menu will be
displayed.
Registration in phonebook
Registration of numbers in the phonebook.
Follow the instructions below to register
phone numbers in the Phonebook of the
unit.
1) Press the Bluetooth® setup button (5)
or (6).
The Bluetooth® setup menu will be displayed.
2) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
SOUND knob (1) to select “Setup Telephone”, and press the knob (1) to determine the selection.
3) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
SOUND knob (1) to select “Setup
Phonebook”, and press the knob (1) to
determine the selection.
4) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
SOUND knob (1) to select “Add Con-
tacts”, and press the knob (1) to determine the selection.
5) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
SOUND knob (1) to select “Overwrite
All” or “Add One Contact”, and press
the knob (1) to determine the selection.
The “Rest of Memory XXXX: Ok?” will
be displayed.
6) Press or turn the TUNE FOLDER
PUSH SOUND knob (1) to select “Confirm”, and press the knob (1) to determine the selection.
7) Transfer contacts from the phone.
When the registration is completed, the
“Setup Phonebook” will be displayed.
tory”, and press the knob (1) to determine the selection.
4) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
SOUND knob (1) to select “Overwrite
call History”, and press the knob (1) to
determine the selection.
5) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
SOUND knob (1) to select “Confirm”,
and press the knob (1) to transfer the
call history from the phone.
NOTE:
• When selecting “Go Back” or pressing
the back button (4), the previous menu
will be displayed.
• Up to 1000 numbers can be registered in
Phonebook.
Automatic transfer of phonebook/call
history
You can select whether or not the device
transfers the phonebook and the call history automatically when the phone is registered. Follow the instructions below to
select.
1) Press the Bluetooth® setup button (5)
or (6).
The Bluetooth® setup menu will be displayed.
2) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
SOUND knob (1) to select “Setup Telephone”, and press the knob (1) to determine the selection.
3) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
SOUND knob (1) to select “A.Transfer”,
and press the knob (1) to determine the
selection.
Transfer of call history (Call history)
Follow the instructions below to transfer
call history of the registered phone.
1) Press the Bluetooth® setup button (5)
or (6).
The Bluetooth® setup menu will be displayed.
2) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
SOUND knob (1) to select “Setup Telephone”, and press the knob (1) to determine the selection.
3) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
SOUND knob (1) to select “Call His-
NOTE:
When selecting “Go Back” or pressing the
back button (4), the previous menu will be
displayed.
5-57
68PH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
4) Pressing the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
SOUND knob (1) switches between
“A.transfer On” and “A.transfer Off”.
NOTE:
Selecting “Go Back” or pressing the back
button (4) stores displayed setting and the
previous menu is displayed.
Making a call by phonebook
Follow the instructions below to dial a number registered in Phonebook.
1) Press the Off Hook button (7).
The Bluetooth® phonebook menu will
be displayed.
2) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
SOUND knob (1) to select “Phonebook”, and press the knob (1) to determine the selection.
3) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
SOUND knob (1) to select the initial of
the name you would like to make a call,
and press the knob (1) to determine the
selection.
The registered numbers will be displayed in sequence. If names have
been registered together with numbers,
the names will be displayed.
4) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
SOUND knob (1) to select “Dial”, and
press the knob (1) to determine the
selection.
5) Press the Off Hook button (7).
The displayed number or the contact
registered with the displayed name will
be dialed.
NOTE:
The system can only access the contacts
that are stored in the phone memory.
Deletion of registered data (Delete
entry)
Follow the instructions below to delete a
number registered in Phonebook.
1) Press the Bluetooth® setup button (5)
or (6).
The Bluetooth® setup menu will be displayed.
2) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
SOUND knob (1) to select “Setup Telephone”, and press the knob (1) to determine the selection.
3) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
SOUND knob (1) to select “Setup
Phonebook”, and press the knob (1) to
determine the selection.
4) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
SOUND knob (1) to select “Delete Contacts”, and press the knob (1) to determine the selection.
5) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
SOUND knob (1) to select a contact to
be deleted, and press the knob (1) to
determine the selection.
6) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
SOUND knob (1) to select “Delete?”,
and press the knob (1) to determine the
selection.
7) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
SOUND knob (1) to select “Confirm”,
and press the knob (1) to complete the
deletion.
NOTE:
When selecting “Go Back” or pressing the
back button (4), the previous menu will be
displayed.
Registration in speed dial
Follow the instructions below to assign a
number to one of the Preset buttons to use
as the speed dial.
1) Press the Bluetooth® setup button (5)
or (6).
The Bluetooth® setup menu will be displayed.
2) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
SOUND knob (1) to select “Setup Telephone”, and press the knob (1) to determine the selection.
3) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
SOUND knob (1) to select “Setup
Phonebook”, and press the knob (1) to
determine the selection.
4) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
SOUND knob (1) to select “Add Speed
Dial”, and press the knob (1) to determine the selection.
5) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
SOUND knob (1) to select a contact to
be assigned, and press the knob (1) to
determine the selection.
6) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
SOUND knob (1) to select “Choose
5-58
68PH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
Preset”, and press the knob (1) to
determine the selection.
7) Press one of the Preset buttons (3) to
which the selected contact is to be
assigned. If a contact is already
assigned to the selected button, a confirmation message will be displayed.
Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
SOUND knob (1) to select “Overwrite”,
and press the knob (1) to complete the
selection.
8) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
SOUND knob (1) to select “Confirm”,
and press the knob (1) to complete the
assignment.
When the assignment is completed, the
“Setup Phonebook” will be displayed.
NOTE:
When selecting “Go Back” or pressing the
back button (4), the previous menu will be
displayed.
Registration in speed dial (Alternate
method)
1) Press the Off Hook button (7).
The Bluetooth® phonebook menu will
be displayed.
2) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
SOUND knob (1) to select “All Calls”,
”Missed Call” or “Outgoing Call”, and
press the knob (1) to determine the
selection. To select a contact / number
to be assigned from the dialed history
or the received history, select “All Calls”
3)
4)
5)
6)
,“Missed Call”, “Incoming Calls “or “Outgoing Calls” respectively.
Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
SOUND knob (1) to select desired contact/number, and press the knob (1) to
determine the selection.
Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
SOUND knob (1) to select “Add to
speed dials”, and press the knob (1) to
assign to the selected contact/number.
Press one of the Preset buttons (3) to
which the selected contact is to be
assigned. If a number is already
assigned to the selected button, a confirmation message will be displayed.
Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSSH
SOUND knob (1) to select “Overwrite?”,
and press the knob (1) to determine the
selection.
Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSSH
SOUND knob (1) to select “Confirm”,
and press the knob (1) to complete the
assignment.
One-touch call (Speed dial)
Follow the instructions below to dial the
number assigned to each of the Preset
buttons (3).
1) Press the Off Hook button (7).
The Bluetooth® phonebook menu will
be displayed.
Pressing one of the Preset buttons (3)
can skip step 2) and the 1st line of step
3).
2) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
SOUND knob (1) to select “Speed
Dials”, and press the knob (1) to determine the selection.
3) Press one of the Preset buttons (3).
The assigned number/contact will be
displayed. When no number is
assigned, “No Entry” is displayed.
4) Press the Off Hook button (7).
The selected number will be dialed.
NOTE:
When selecting “Go Back” or pressing the
back button (4), the previous menu will be
displayed.
5-59
68PH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
Deletion of speed dial (Del speed dial)
To delete a number assigned for the speed
dial, follow the instructions below.
1) Press the Off Hook button (7).
The Bluetooth® phonebook menu will
be displayed.
2) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
SOUND knob (1) to select “Speed
Dials”, and press the knob (1) to determine the selection.
3) Press one of the Preset buttons (3) to
which the number to be deleted is
assigned.
“No Entry” appears if the number is not
registered.
4) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
SOUND knob (1) to select “Delete”, and
press the knob (1) to determine the
selection.
5) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
SOUND knob (1) to select “Del Speed
Dial”, and press the knob (1) to determine the selection.
6) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
SOUND knob (1) to select “Confirm”,
and press the knob (1) to complete the
deletion.
Display of device data (Device name)
Follow the instructions below to display the
BD (Bluetooth® Device) address and
device name.
1) Press the Bluetooth® setup button (5)
or (6).
The Bluetooth® setup menu will be displayed.
2) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
SOUND knob (1) to select “Setup Bluetooth”, and press the knob (1) to determine the selection.
3) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
SOUND knob (1) to select “Bluetooth
Info”, and press the knob (1) to determine the selection.
4) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
SOUND knob (1) to select “Device
Name” or “Device Address”, and press
the knob (1) to display the device name
or the BD (Bluetooth® Device) address.
NOTE:
When selecting “Go Back” or pressing the
back button (4), the previous menu will be
displayed.
Reset to the factory defaults
Follow the instructions below to reset all
the settings to the factory defaults.
1) Press the Bluetooth® setup button (5)
or (6).
The Bluetooth® setup menu will be displayed.
2) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
SOUND knob (1) to select “Setup Bluetooth”, and press the knob (1) to determine the selection.
3) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
SOUND knob (1) to select “Initialize”,
and press the knob (1) to determine the
selection.
4) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
SOUND knob (1) to select “All Initialize”, and press the knob (1) to determine the selection.
5) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
SOUND knob (1) to select “Confirm”,
and press the knob (1) to start the
reset.
NOTE:
When selecting “Go Back” or pressing the
back button (4), the previous menu will be
displayed.
NOTE:
When selecting “Go Back” or pressing the
back button (4), the previous menu will be
displayed.
5-60
68PH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
Selection of phone (Select phone)
Follow the instructions below to select a
phone to be paired with from the registered
phones.
1) Press the Bluetooth® setup button (5)
or (6).
The Bluetooth® setup menu will be displayed.
2) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
SOUND knob (1) to select “Setup Bluetooth”, and press the knob (1) to determine the selection.
3) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
SOUND knob (1) to select “List Phone”,
and press the knob (1) to determine the
selection.
4) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
SOUND knob (1) to select a phone to
be paired with, and press the knob (1)
to determine the selection.
5) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
SOUND knob (1) to select “Select”, and
press the knob (1) to determine the
selection.
NOTE:
• When selecting “Go Back” or pressing
the back button (4), the previous menu
will be displayed.
• The Bluetooth® ready audio device will
be disconnected when the phone is
selected.
List of phones (List phones)
Follow the instructions below to display the
names of the registered phones in
sequence.
1) Press the Bluetooth® setup button (5)
or (6).
The Bluetooth® setup menu will be displayed.
2) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
SOUND knob (1) to select “Setup Bluetooth”, and press the knob (1) to determine the selection.
3) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
SOUND knob (1) to select “List Phone”,
and press the knob (1) to determine the
selection.
The names of the registered phones
are displayed in sequence.
NOTE:
When selecting “Go Back” or pressing the
back button (4), the previous menu will be
displayed.
Passkey setting (Set passkey)
Follow the instructions below to set the
security number (Passkey).
1) Press the Bluetooth® setup button (5)
or (6).
The Bluetooth® setup menu will be displayed.
2) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
SOUND knob (1) to select “Setup Bluetooth”, and press the knob (1) to determine the selection.
3) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
SOUND knob (1) to select “Passkey”,
and press the knob (1) to determine the
selection.
4) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
SOUND knob (1) to select “New Passkey”, and press the knob (1) to determine the selection.
5) Press or turn the TUNE FOLDER
PUSH SOUND knob (1) to select “Confirm”.
6) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
SOUND knob (1) to select a number for
the first digit, and press the knob (1) to
determine the selection. Select and
determine numbers for the second,
third and fourth digits in order in the
same manner. When not entering up to
the eighth digit, enter blanks for the
successive digits.
7) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
SOUND knob (1) to determine the
passkey setting.
NOTE:
When selecting “Go Back” or pressing the
back button (4), the previous menu will be
displayed.
5-61
68PH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
Deletion of phone information (Delete
phone)
Follow the instructions below to delete the
registered information of the phone.
1) Press the Bluetooth® setup button (5)
or (6).
The Bluetooth® setup menu will be displayed.
2) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
SOUND knob (1) to select “Setup Bluetooth”, and press the knob (1) to determine the selection.
3) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
SOUND knob (1) to select “List Phone”,
and press the knob (1) to determine the
selection.
4) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
SOUND knob (1) to select a phone to
be deleted, and press the knob (1) to
determine the selection.
5) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
SOUND knob (1) to select “Delete
Phone”, and press the knob (1) to
determine the selection.
6) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
SOUND knob (1) to select “Delete?”,
and press the knob (1) to determine the
selection.
7) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
SOUND knob (1) to select “Confirm”,
and press the knob (1) to determine the
selection.
NOTE:
When selecting “Go Back” or pressing the
back button (4), the previous menu will be
displayed.
BT function on/off (BT power)
Follow the instructions below to turn on/off
the Bluetooth® function.
1) Press the Bluetooth® setup button (5)
or (6).
The Bluetooth® setup menu will be displayed.
2) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
SOUND knob (1) to select “Setup Bluetooth”, and press the knob (1) to determine the selection.
3) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
SOUND knob (1) to select “BT Power”,
and press the knob (1) to determine the
selection.
4) Press the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
SOUND knob (1) to select “BT Power
On” or “BT Power Off”.
NOTE:
• When the BT function is turned off, the
connection between this unit and the
registered phone in use will be disconnected.
• When selecting “Go Back” or pressing
the back button (4), the previous menu
will be displayed.
5-62
68PH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
Bluetooth® audio (If equipped)
Steering switch
EXAMPLE
EXAMPLE
(8)
Bluetooth
(3)
(4)
(7)
(5)
(2)
(1)
68PH00571
Display
(6)
(A)
(B)
68PH00570
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
MEDIA button
TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob
Up button
Down button
DISP button
Back button
Bluetooth® setup button (On control
panel)
(8) Bluetooth® setup button (On steering
wheel)
(A) Track number
(B) Play time
5-63
68PH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
Registration of audio devices
To use Bluetooth® ready audio devices
with this unit, it is required to register the
devices.
NOTE:
• To set up a new audio player, disconnect
the phone from the unit. Connect the
phone after audio player setup is completed if necessary.
• When failed to establish the connection
within 120 seconds, the connecting
operation will be canceled. Please try
again or refer to the audio player manual
for assistance with the pairing process.
1) Press the Bluetooth® setup button (7)
or (8).
The Bluetooth® setup menu will be displayed.
2) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
SOUND knob (2) to select “Setup Bluetooth”, and press the knob (2) to determine the selection.
3) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
SOUND knob (2) to select “Pairing”,
and press the knob (2) to determine the
selection.
4) Select “My Car” from the Bluetooth®
menu of the audio player and establish
the pairing.
Refer to the manual of the audio player
in use for further information.
5) Enter the Passkey displayed on the unit
to the audio player.
NOTE:
• When selecting “Go Back” or pressing
the back button (6), the previous menu
will be displayed.
• When additionally registering audio
devices, operate the same step from 1).
Selecting the Bluetooth® audio mode
Press the MEDIA button (1).
Each time the button is pressed, the mode
will change as follows:
USB (iPod®) (If equipped)
Bluetooth® audio (If equipped)
AUX (If equipped)
Selecting a group (only for supported
models)
Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND
knob (2) to select a group.
Selecting a track
• Press the Up button (3) to listen to the
next track.
• Press the Down button (4) twice to listen
to the previous track.
When the Down button (4) is pressed
once, the track currently being played
will start from the beginning again.
Fast forwarding/Rewinding a track
• Hold down the Up button (3) to fast forward the track.
• Hold down the Down button (4) to fast
rewind the track.
NOTE:
Some functions may not be available
depending on Bluetooth® audio.
Display change
Press the DISP button (5).
Each time the button is pressed, display
will change as follows:
Play time
Track name
Artist name
Album name
NOTE:
If text data contains more than 16 characters, the “>” mark will appear at the right
end. Holding down the DISP button (5) for
1 second or longer can display the next
page.
5-64
68PH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
Selection of audio device (Select audio)
Follow the instructions below to select an
audio device to be paired with from the
registered audio devices.
1) Press the Bluetooth® setup button (7)
or (8).
The Bluetooth® setup menu will be displayed.
2) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
SOUND knob (2) to select “Setup Bluetooth”, and press the knob (2) to determine the selection.
3) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
SOUND knob (2) to select “List Audio”,
and press the knob (2) to determine the
selection.
4) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
SOUND knob (2) to select an audio
device to be used, and press the knob
(2) to determine the selection.
5) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
SOUND knob (2) to select “Select”, and
press the knob (2) to determine the
selection.
6) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
SOUND knob (2) to select “Confirm”,
and press the knob (2) to complete the
pairing.
NOTE:
• When selecting “Go Back” or pressing
the back button (6), the previous menu
will be displayed.
• The phone will be disconnected when
the Bluetooth® ready audio device is
selected.
List of audio devices (List audio)
Follow the instructions below to display the
names of the registered audio devices in
sequence.
1) Press the Bluetooth® setup button (7)
or (8).
The Bluetooth® setup menu will be displayed.
2) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
SOUND knob (2) to select “Setup Bluetooth”, and press the knob (2) to determine the selection.
3) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
SOUND knob (2) to select “List Audio”,
and press the knob (2) to determine the
selection. The names of registered
audio devices will be displayed in
sequence.
NOTE:
When selecting “Go Back” or pressing the
back button (6), the previous menu will be
displayed.
Passkey setting (Set passkey)
Follow the instructions below to set the
security number (Passkey).
1) Press the Bluetooth® setup button (7)
or (8).
The Bluetooth® setup menu will be displayed.
2) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
SOUND knob (2) to select “Setup Bluetooth”, and press the knob (2) to determine the selection.
3) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
SOUND knob (2) to select “Passkey”,
and press the knob (2) to determine the
selection.
4) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
SOUND knob (2) to select “New Passkey”, and press the knob (2) to determine the selection.
5) Press or turn the TUNE FOLDER
PUSH SOUND knob (2) to select “Confirm”.
6) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
SOUND knob (2) to select a number for
the first digit, and press the knob (2) to
determine the selection. Select and
determine numbers for the second,
third and fourth digits in order in the
same manner. When not entering up to
the eighth digit, enter blanks for the
successive digits.
7) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
SOUND knob (2) to determine the
passkey setting.
NOTE:
When selecting “Go Back” or pressing the
back button (6), the previous menu will be
displayed.
5-65
68PH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
Deletion of audio device information
(Delete audio)
Follow the instructions below to delete the
registered information of audio device.
1) Press the Bluetooth® setup button (7)
or (8).
The Bluetooth® setup menu will be displayed.
2) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
SOUND knob (2) to select “Setup Bluetooth”, and press the knob (2) to determine the selection.
3) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
SOUND knob (2) to select “List Audio”,
and press the knob (2) to determine the
selection.
4) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
SOUND knob (2) to select an audio
device to be deleted, and press the
knob (2) to determine the selection.
5) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
SOUND knob (2) to select “Delete”, and
press the knob (2) to determine the
selection.
6) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
SOUND knob (2) to select “Delete?”,
and press the knob (2) to determine the
selection.
7) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
SOUND knob (2) to select “Confirm”,
and press the knob (2) to complete the
deletion.
NOTE:
When selecting “Go Back” or pressing the
back button (6), the previous menu will be
displayed.
Disclaimer for Bluetooth® function
• Depending on the mobile phone models,
some phones may not be compatible
fully or partially (some function may be
restricted).
• Connectivity or voice quality may get
affected depending on circumstances.
• After the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position, the audio system takes
few seconds to detect and connect to
the Bluetooth® device (if already paired).
Remote Audio Controls
(If equipped)
Controlling of basic functions of the audio
system is available using the switches on
the steering wheel.
EXAMPLE
(2)
(1)
(3)
(4)
68PH00572
5-66
68PH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
<
<
<
Selecting the mode
Press the switch (3).
Each time the button is pressed, the mode
will change as follows:
Selecting the radio station (FM1, FM2,
AM mode)
• To select the next preset station, press
“ ” of the switch (4) only for a moment.
• To select the previous preset station,
press “ ” of the switch (4) only for a
moment.
• To scan a higher frequency radio station,
press “ ” of the switch (4) for 1 second
or longer.
• To scan a lower frequency radio station,
press “ ” of the switch (4) for 1 second
or longer.
<
Adjusting the volume
• To increase the volume, hold down “+” of
the VOL switch (1). The volume will keep
on being increased until the switch is
released.
• To decrease the volume, hold down “-” of
the VOL switch (1). The volume will keep
on being decreased until the switch is
released.
• To mute the sound, press the switch (2).
<
Selecting the track (CD, USB (iPod®),
Bluetooth® audio mode)
• To skip to the next track, press “ ” of the
switch (4) only for a moment.
• To skip to the previous track, press “ ” of
the switch (4) twice only for a moment.
When the switch (4) is pushed down
once only for a moment, the track currently being played will start from the
beginning again.
<
FM1 (Radio)
FM2 (Radio)
CD
Bluetooth® audio (If equipped)
AUX (If equipped)
<
<
USB (iPod®) (If equipped)
Fast forwarding/Rewinding a track
• To fast forward, press “ ” of the switch
(4) for 1 second or longer.
• To fast rewind, press “ ” of the switch (4)
for 1 second or longer.
AM (Radio)
It is possible to turn on the audio system
by pressing the switch (3).
5-67
68PH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
Anti-Theft Feature
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
EXAMPLE
VOL PUSH POWER knob
Preset buttons ([1] to [6])
Up button
TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob
(3)
(1)
(4)
(2)
68PH00573
5-68
68PH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
The anti-theft function is intended to discourage thefts, such as that the audio system becomes inoperable when it is
installed on other vehicles.
This function works by entering a Personal
Identification Number (PIN).
When the unit is disconnected from its
power source, such as when the audio
system is removed or the battery is disconnected, the unit will become inoperable
until the PIN is reentered.
Setting the anti-theft function
1) Press the VOL PUSH POWER knob (1)
to power off.
2) Hold down the buttons numbered [1]
and [6] of the Preset buttons (2) and
press the VOL PUSH POWER knob (1).
“SECURITY” will be displayed.
3) Press the Up button (3) and the button
numbered [1] of the Preset buttons (2)
simultaneously.
4) Enter a 4-digit number to be registered
as PIN using the buttons numbered [1] [4] of the Preset buttons (2).
5) Hold down the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
SOUND knob (4) for 1 second or longer
to set the anti-theft function.
NOTE:
Take a note of the registered PIN and keep
it for the future use.
Canceling the anti-theft feature
To cancel the anti-theft function, delete the
registered PIN.
1) Press the VOL PUSH POWER knob (1)
to power off.
2) Hold down the buttons numbered [1]
and [6] of the Preset buttons (2) and
press the VOL PUSH POWER knob (1).
“PIN ENTRY” will be displayed.
3) Press the Up button (3) and the button
numbered [1] of the Preset buttons (2)
simultaneously.
4) Enter a 4-digit number to be registered
as PIN using the buttons numbered [1] [4] of the Preset buttons (2).
5) Hold down the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
SOUND knob (4) for 1 second or longer
to delete the registered PIN. The indication “----” will be displayed and the
anti-theft function will be canceled.
NOTE:
To change your PIN, first delete your current PIN, then set a new one.
Confirming the personal identification
number (PIN)
When the main power source is disconnected such as when the battery is
replaced, etc, it is required to enter the PIN
to make the unit operable again.
1) Set the ignition switch to the “ACC”
position.
“SECURITY” will be displayed.
2) Press the Up button (3) and the button
numbered [1] of the Preset buttons (2)
simultaneously.
3) Enter a 4-digit number to be registered
as PIN using the buttons numbered [1] [4] of the Preset buttons (2).
4) Hold down TUNE FOLDER PUSH
SOUND knob (4) for 1 second or longer.
When the PIN same as registered is
entered, the power of the audio system
will be turned off automatically and it
will become operable again.
NOTE:
If an incorrect PIN is entered, “ERROR”
and the total number of incorrect entry
attempts will be displayed.
If an incorrect PIN is entered 10 times,
“HELP” will be displayed and the audio
system will become inoperable.
5-69
68PH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
Battery Installation
WARNING
Install a lithium battery (CR2025) with the poles facing the correct direction.
• Do not expose the battery to flame.
Do not short circuit, disassemble,
or heat the battery.
• Do not charge the battery.
• Use the specified type battery.
• Keep the button-shaped battery
away from children to prevent accidental swallowing.
If the battery is swallowed, contact a
doctor immediately.
CAUTION
Battery replacement timing
• When battery power is depleted, the button may not be operable. If the remote controller
does not operate, replace the battery and check the operation.
• Install the battery with the poles
facing the correct direction.
• When not in use for a long period
of time, or if the battery is dead,
remove the battery from the remote
controller.
Caution on battery
• Be sure to follow the instructions to prevent battery leakage, over-heating, ignition or
explosion.
If battery leakage has occurred, wipe the
container first then install a new battery. If
the battery solution contacts the skin, wash
off with water completely.
EXAMPLE
68PM5001
5-70
68PH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
Caution on Remote Controller
• Do not leave the remote controller in an
area exposed to direct sunlight, such as
on the dashboard or steering wheel. The
remote controller may deform because
of the heat, (Be especially careful of the
dashboard exposed to direct sunlight in
the summer, as it will become extremely
hot).
• When the vehicle is parked in an area
exposed to direct sunlight, Ensure the
remote controller is placed in an area not
exposed to direct sunlight. For example:
Glove box.
Under direct sunlight, signal reception
from the remote controller weakens. If
this happens, hold the remote controller
close to the signal receptor on the front
panel.
5-71
68PH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
Remote Controller
Common operations
POWER button
Power ON / OFF
TUNE FOLDER UP/DOWN button
In Sound Mode
Press to adjust the sound.(bass/treble/balance/fader)
In Preset-EQ Mode
The Preset-EQ setting switches as follows:
VOLUME button
Press to adjust volume.
(including at AUX mode)
MUTE button
Press to mute the sound. Press it again to cancel
the mute.
MODE button
OFF (FLAT)
The mode switches as
follows:
JAZZ
ROCK
POP
CLASSIC
HIP-HOP
SOUND button
While playback, the sound
mode switches as follows
(including at AUX mode,
except while displaying
iPod® menu):
Preset-EQ
In AVC Mode
The AVC setting switches
as follows:
OFF
LEVEL 1
LEVEL 2
BASS
FM1
FM2
CD
Bluetooth® audio
(If equipped)
AUX (If equipped)
TREBLE
USB (iPod®)
(If equipped)
BALANCE
AM
FADER
AVC
LEVEL 3
5-72
68PH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
Radio operations
SEEK TRACK UP/DOWN button
Press to select the radio station.
AS button
PRESET buttons (1-6)
Press to select the desired preset station.
Press to return to the last received frequency in the previous auto store mode.
Press it for 2 seconds or longer. It selects
the stations with the stronger signals and
stores them in order.
NOTE:
When there are fewer than 6 stations that can be stored even if 1 round of auto store operation is performed, no station will be
stored at the remaining preset buttons.
5-73
68PH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
CD operations
DISP button
The display switches as follows:
Play time
Disc title
Track title
Press it for 1 second or longer to display the
next page.
RPT button
Press to plays the current track repeatedly.
Press it again to cancel.
SEEK TRACK UP/DOWN button
Press to skip to the next/previous track.
Press it for 1 second or longer to fast-forward/
fast-rewind the track.
RDM button
Press to play the current track randomly.
Press it again to cancel.
5-74
68PH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
MP3/WMA/AAC Disc operations
DISP button
The display switches as follows:
Play time
Folder name
File name
Album name (MP3, AAC only)
Track title
Artist name
SEEK TRACK UP/DOWN button
Press to skip to the next/previous track.
Press it for 1 second or longer to fast-forward/fastrewind the track.
Press it for 1 second or longer to display the next
page.
RDM button
The random mode switches as follows:
RPT button
The repeat mode switches as follows:
OFF
OFF
FOLDER RANDOM
ALL RANDOM
FILE REPEAT
FOLDER REPEAT
TUNE FOLDER UP/DOWN button
Press to skip to the next/previous folder.
5-75
68PH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
USB operations
DISP button
The display switches as follows:
Play time
Folder name
File name
Album name (MP3, AAC only)
Track title
Artist name
SEEK TRACK UP/DOWN button
Press to skip to the next/previous file.
Press it for 1 second or longer to fast-forward/fastrewind the file.
Press it for 1 second or longer to display the next
page.
RDM button
The random mode switches as follows:
RPT button
The repeat mode switches as follows:
OFF
OFF
FOLDER RANDOM
ALL RANDOM
FILE REPEAT
FOLDER REPEAT
TUNE FOLDER UP/DOWN button
Press to skip to the next/previous folder.
5-76
68PH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
iPod® operations
DISP button
The display switches as follows:
Playlist name /
Track title (Playlist mode only)
Artist name / Track title
SEEK TRACK UP/DOWN button
Press to skip to the next/previous file.
Press it for 1 second or longer to fast-forward/fastrewind the file.
Album name / Track title
Track title / Play time
Press it for 1 second or longer to display the next
page.
RDM button
MENU button
During playback
• Press to display iPod® menu.
• Press it for 1 second or longer to display the top menu.
While iPod® menu is displayed
• Press to display the folder in one layer upper.
• Press it for 1 second or longer to display the top menu.
The random mode switches as follows:
OFF
SONG RANDOM
ALBUM RANDOM
RPT button
Press to play the current track repeatedly.
Press it again to cancel.
ENT button
While displaying iPod® menu, press to select the
desired item and display the list. When a track is
selected from the list, the playback starts.
TUNE FOLDER UP/DOWN button
While displaying iPod® menu, press to display the next/previous list in the same layer.
5-77
68PH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
Troubleshooting
When encountered a problem, check and follow the instructions as described below.
If the described suggestions do not solve the problem, it is recommended to take the unit to your authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop.
Problem
Possible cause
Possible solution
Common
Unable to operate
The security function is on.
When “SECURITY” is displayed, enter
the ID.
When “HELP” is displayed, contact your
authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop.
Unable to turn on the power (no sound)
(No sound is produced)
Fuse is blown.
Contact your authorised Maruti Suzuki
workshop.
Much noise
It may not be exactly tuned in to the station.
Tune it in exactly to the station.
Unable to receive by auto tuning
There may be no station emitting signals
powerful enough.
Pick up a station by manual tuning.
The disc is dirty.
Wipe the disc with a soft cloth.
The disc has a major scratch or is
warped.
Replace the disc with the one with no
scratch and also not warped.
Radio
CD
Sound skips or noise produced
5-78
68PH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
Problem
Possible cause
Possible solution
MP3/WMA/AAC
No playback
The disc contains unsupported formatted
data.
Check the file format.
Sound skips or noise produced
Sound skipping may occur when playing
VBR (Variable Bit Rate) files.
It is not recommended to play VBR files.
There is no supported format file to play
on this unit.
Check the file format.
The current consumption of the USB
device exceeds 1.0 A.
Use an USB device with a current consumption lower than 1.0 A.
The distance between this unit and the
Bluetooth® ready device is too far, or a
metallic object may be located between
the Bluetooth® ready device and this unit.
Change the location of the Bluetooth®
ready device.
The Bluetooth® function of the Bluetooth® ready device is off.
Refer to the manual of the Bluetooth®
ready device (Some devices have the
power saving function that automatically
activates after a certain time).
Unable to receive a call
Your current location may be out of service area.
Drive your vehicle to the service area of
the phone.
The voice quality of hands-free is low
(Distortion, noise etc.)
Another wireless device may be located
near the unit.
Switch off the wireless device or keep it
away from the unit.
USB
Playback does not start when the USB
device is connected
Bluetooth®
Pairing failed
5-79
68PH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
Error Display Messages
Display
Possible cause
Possible solution
CD
ERROR 1
The disc cannot be read.
Insert the disc with its label side up.
Check the disc if it is not warped or is free of flaws.
When ERROR 1 does not disappear even when a normal disc is inserted, contact your authorised Maruti
Suzuki workshop.
ERROR 3
The player developed an error of an
unidentified cause.
When the CD is in the unit, press the CD eject button to
remove the disc.
When the disc cannot be ejected, contact your authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop.
ERROR 1
The USB device is disconnected.
Check the connection of the USB device.
ERROR 2
Impossible to communicate correctly with
the USB device.
Unplug the USB device and plug it again.
Check the USB device.
ERROR 3
Inoperable due to an unidentified cause.
Unplug the USB device and plug it again.
When ERROR 3 does not disappear, contact your authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop.
ERROR 4
The current consumption of the USB
device exceeds 1.0 A.
Check the USB device.
USB/iPod®
5-80
68PH0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
Display
Possible cause
Possible solution
The player developed an error of an
unidentified cause.
Disconnect the Bluetooth® ready device and connect it
again.
When ERROR 1 does not disappear, contact your authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop.
Connection
Failed
Failed to establish pairing or connection.
Try to establish the pairing or connection again.
Memory Full
Reached the limit for the number of phonebook data in transfer.
Delete registered data of unnecessary number in phonebook and try to transfer the register phone numbers in
the phonebook again.
Not Available
Inoperable during driving.
Operate the system after pulling over your car.
Bluetooth®
ERROR 1
5-81
68PH0-74E
VEHICLE LOADING AND TOWING
VEHICLE LOADING AND TOWING
Vehicle Loading ................................................................... 6-1
Trailer Towing ...................................................................... 6-1
6
54G215
68PH0-74E
VEHICLE LOADING AND TOWING
Vehicle Loading
Your vehicle was designed for specific
weight capacities. The weight capacities of
your vehicle are indicated by the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and the
Permissible maximum Axle Weight (PAW,
front and rear). The GVWR and PAW
(Front and Rear) are listed in the “SPECIFICATIONS” section.
GVWR – Maximum permissible overall
weight of the fully loaded vehicle (including
all the occupants, accessories and cargo
plus the trailer nose weight if towing a
trailer).
PAW – (Front and Rear) Maximum permissible weight on an individual axle.
Actual weight of the loaded vehicle and
actual loads at the front and rear axles can
only be determined by weighing the vehicle. Compare these weights to the GVWR
and PAW (Front and Rear). If the gross
vehicle weight or the load on either axle
exceeds these ratings, you must remove
enough weight to bring the load down to
the rated capacity.
WARNING
Never overload your vehicle. The
gross vehicle weight (Sum of the
weights of the vehicle, all the occupants, accessories, cargo plus trailer
nose weight if towing a trailer) must
never exceed the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR). In addition,
never distribute a load so that the
weight on either the front or rear axle
exceeds the Permissible maximum
Axle Weight (PAW).
Trailer Towing
EXAMPLE
68PHM6001
WARNING
Always distribute cargo evenly. To
avoid personal injury or damage to
your vehicle, always secure cargo to
prevent it from shifting if the vehicle
moves suddenly. Place heavier
objects on the floor and as far forward in the cargo area as possible.
Never pile cargo higher than the top
of the seat backs.
Your vehicle was originally designed to
carry people and a normal amount of
cargo, not to tow a trailer. MARUTI
SUZUKI does not recommend you use
your vehicle to tow a trailer. Towing a trailer
can adversely affect handling, durability,
and fuel economy.
6-1
68PH0-74E
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
60G410
Maintenance Schedule ....................................................... 7-2
Periodic Maintenance Schedule ........................................ 7-2
Drive Belt ............................................................................. 7-6
Engine Oil and Filter ........................................................... 7-7
Engine Coolant .................................................................... 7-11
Air Cleaner ........................................................................... 7-13
Spark Plugs (Petrol engine) ............................................... 7-14
Gear Oil ................................................................................ 7-15
Clutch Pedal ........................................................................ 7-16
Continuously Variable Transaxle (CVT) Fluid .................. 7-16
Fuel Filter (Diesel engine) .................................................. 7-18
Brakes .................................................................................. 7-18 7
Steering ................................................................................ 7-20
Tires ...................................................................................... 7-20
Battery .................................................................................. 7-24
Fuses .................................................................................... 7-25
Headlight Aiming ................................................................. 7-29
Bulb Replacement ............................................................... 7-29
Wiper Blades ....................................................................... 7-36
Windshield Washer Fluid ................................................... 7-39
Air Conditioning System .................................................... 7-39
68PH0-74E
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
EXAMPLE
WARNING
60B128S
WARNING
You should take extreme care when
working on your vehicle to prevent
accidental injury. Here are a few precautions that you should be especially careful to observe:
• To prevent damage or unintended
activation of the air bag system or
seat belt pretensioner system, be
sure the battery is disconnected and
the ignition switch has been in the
“LOCK” position or the ignition
mode has been “LOCK” (OFF) for at
least 90 seconds before performing
any electrical service work on your
MARUTI SUZUKI. Do not touch air
bag system components, seat belt
pretensioner system components or
wires.
The wires are wrapped with yellow
tape or yellow tubing, and the couplers are yellow for easy identification.
• Do not leave the engine running in
garages or other confined areas.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• When the engine is running, keep
hands, clothing, tools, and other
objects away from the fan and drive
belt. Even though the fan may not
be moving, it can automatically
turn on without warning.
• When it is necessary to do service
work with the engine running, make
sure that the parking brake is set
fully and the transaxle is in Neutral
(For manual transaxle vehicles) or
Park (For CVT vehicles).
• Do not touch ignition wires or other
ignition system parts when starting
the engine or when the engine is
running, or you could receive an
electric shock.
• Be careful not to touch a hot
engine, exhaust manifold and
pipes, muffler, radiator and water
hoses.
• Do not allow smoking, sparks, or
flames around fuel or the battery.
Flammable fumes are present.
• Do not get under your vehicle if it is
supported only with the portable
jack provided in your vehicle.
• Be careful not to cause accidental
short circuits between the positive
and negative battery terminals.
(Continued)
WARNING
(Continued)
• Keep used oil, coolant, and other
fluids away from children and pets.
Dispose of used fluids properly;
never pour them on the ground,
into sewers, etc.
7-1
68PH0-74E
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
Maintenance Schedule
The following table shows the times when
you should perform regular maintenance
on your vehicle. This table shows in kilometers and months when you should perform inspections, adjustments, lubrication
and other services.
WARNING
MARUTI SUZUKI recommends that
maintenance on your Maruti Suzuki
vehicle should be performed by MARUTI SUZUKI authorized workshop/
Service station.
NOTICE
Whenever it becomes necessary to
replace parts on your vehicle, it is
recommended that you use MARUTI
genuine replacement parts or their
equivalent.
Periodic Maintenance
Schedule
“C”: Clean
“R”: Replace or Change
“I”: Inspect, clean, adjust, lubricate or
replace as necessary
“L”: Lubricate
“T”: Tighten to Specified Torque
“O”: Rotate
NOTE:
This table includes services as scheduled
up to 80,000 km mileage. Beyond 80,000
km, carry out the same services at the
same intervals respectively.
7-2
68PH0-74E
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
FREE INSPECTION
Interval: This interval should be judged by odometer readkm (x1000)
ing or months, whichever comes first.
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE AT COST
1
5
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
1
6
12
24
36
48
60
72
84
96
K10C
-
-
-
-
-
I
-
-
-
R
K12M
-
-
-
I
-
I
-
I
-
R
months
ENGINE
1-1.
Water pump drive belt (Tension, Wear)
1-2
Engine Coolant (Level, Leakage)
l
l
l
R
l
R
l
R
l
R
1-3
Engine oil, engine oil filter and drain plug gasket (Level, Leakage)
I
I
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
1-4
Cooling system hoses and connections (Leakage and Damage)
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
1-5
Engine Mounting and Manifold Fixing (Loose, Damage)
-
-
I
-
I
-
I
-
I
-
-
-
-
-
I
-
-
I
-
-
-
l
-
l
-
I
-
I
-
l
Petrol
-
l
-
l
-
I
-
I
-
l
Diesel
-
-
-
-
C
-
-
C
-
-
Petrol
-
-
-
-
-
R
-
-
-
R
1-6
Valve Clearance
1-7
Exhaust System (Noise, Leakage etc.)
1-8
1-9
Petrol
Petrol
Positive Crank Case Ventilation System
(Hoses, Connections and Valve)
Exhaust Gas Recirculation Valve
K12M
IGNITION
2-1.
Spark Plug
FUEL
Paved-road
3-1.
Air cleaner filter element
Dusty
Condition
Petrol
Clean every 5,000 KM. Replace after every 40,000 KM.
Diesel
Clean every 10,000 KM. Replace after every 40,000 KM
Petrol
Clean every 2,500 KM or as required. Replace after every 40,000 KM
Replace more frequently if dust condition is severe.
Diesel
3-2.
Fuel tank cap, fuel lines and connections (Leakage and Damage)
-
l
-
-
-
l
-
-
-
l
3-3.
Fuel Filter (Leakage)
Petrol
l
l
l
l
l
R
l
l
l
R
3-4.
Fuel Filter and Water Draining
Diesel
3-5.
Fuel Injector (Inspection, Cleaning)
Petrol
K10C
I
I
I
R
I
R
I
R
I
R
-
-
I
I&C
I
I&C
I
I&C
I
I&C
CLUTCH AND TRANSMISSION
4-1.
Clutch Pedal (Play)
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
4-2.
Clutch fluid (Level, Leakage)
Petrol
l
l
l
R
l
R
l
R
l
R
4-3.
Clutch slipping (Dragging or Excess Damage)
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
7-3
68PH0-74E
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
Interval: This interval should be judged by odometer
reading or months, whichever comes first.
km (x1000)
months
FREE INSPECTION
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE AT COST
1
5
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
1
6
12
24
36
48
60
72
84
96
Replace at 1,60,000 km or 10 years whichever comes first
4-4.
Manual Transmission Oil (Level, Leakage)
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
4-5.
Continuously Variable Transaxle Fluid (If equipped) (Level, Leakage)
-
-
-
-
I
-
-
I
-
-
4-6.
Gear shifter (Operation)
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DRIVE SHAFT
5-1.
Drive shaft noise
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
5-2.
Drive shaft boot (Damage)
-
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
BRAKE
6-1.
Brake Fluid (Level, Leakage)
I
I
I
R
I
R
I
R
I
R
6-2.
Brake pedal (Pedal - carpet clearance)
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
6-3.
Parking brake lever and cable (Play, Damage)
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
6-4.
Brake disc and pad
(front) (rear (If equipped))
-
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
6-5.
Brake drum and shoes
(rear (If equipped))
-
-
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
6-6.
Master cylinder, wheel cylinder, caliper piston
(Fluid leakage, boot/seal damage)
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
6-7.
Brake hoses and pipes (Fluid leakage, Damage)
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
WHEEL
7-1.
Tyres (air pressure, abnormal wear, crack and rotation)
I
I&O
I&O
I&O
I&O
I&O
I&O
I&O
I&O
I&O
7-2.
Wheels (Damage)
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
7-3.
Front/Rear wheel bearing (Loose, Damage)
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
FRONT / REAR SUSPENSION
8-1.
Suspension strut (Oil leakage, Damage)
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
8-2.
Suspension arms / Knuckle support or Torsion rods (Loose, Damage)
-
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
8-3.
Rear spring (Damage)
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
8-4.
Shock absorbers (Oil leakage, Damage)
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
8-5.
All bolts and nuts (Loose)
-
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
7-4
68PH0-74E
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
Interval: This interval should be judged by odometer reading
or months, whichever comes first.
km (x1000)
months
FREE INSPECTION
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE AT COST
1
5
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
1
6
12
24
36
48
60
72
84
96
STEERING
9-1.
Steering wheel (Play, Loose)
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
9-2.
All rods and arms (Loose, Damage, Wear)
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
9-3.
Tilt / Telescopic (if equipped) Steering (Operation)
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
ELECTRICAL
10-1.
Battery - Electrolyte (Level, Leakage) and voltage
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
10-2.
Wiring harness connection (Loose, Damage)
-
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
10-3.
Lighting system (Operation)
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
10-4.
Wiper (Operation, Stains, Damage)
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
10-5.
Horn (Operation)
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
10-6.
AUX, USB and accessory socket (Operation)
-
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
11-1.
All chassis bolts and nuts (Tighten)
-
I
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
11-2.
All latches, hinges and locks (Function)
I
I&L
I&L
I&L
I&L
I&L
I&L
I&L
I&L
I&L
BODY
ROAD TEST
12-1.
Operation of Brakes, gear shifting and speedometer
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
12-2.
Body and chassis noise
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
AIR CONDITIONER
13-1.
Check belt tension
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
13-2.
Tighten compressor mounting bolt
-
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
I
13-3.
All hose joint (Check, Tighten)
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
13-4.
Check functioning of recirculating flap
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
13-5.
Clean condenser with low pressure water
-
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
13-6.
Check belt for frayed edges
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
13-7.
Check all mounting bolts
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
13-8.
Air conditioner filter element (If equipped)
I
I
I
I
R
I
I
R
I
I
7-5
68PH0-74E
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
Drive Belt
(For petrol engine model)
K12M model
EXAMPLE
K10C model
WARNING
(2)
When the engine is running, keep
hands, hair, clothing, tools, etc. away
from the moving fan and drive belts.
Make sure the drive belt tension is correct.
If the belt is too loose, insufficient battery
charging, engine overheating, poor power
steering, poor air conditioning, or excessive belt wear can result. When you press
the belt with your thumb midway between
the pulleys, there should be a deflection
according to the following chart.
The belts should also be examined to
ensure that they are not damaged.
If you need to replace or adjust the belt
have it done by your authorised Maruti
Suzuki workshop.
(1)
DEF: 5.6 – 6.8 mm
(0.22 – 0.27 in.)
(4)
(b)
(3) (6)
(a)
(5)
GE
EXAMPLE
68PM00701
(1)
(3)
(5)
(6)
Front
(2) Rear
Generator
(4) Water pump
Air conditioner compressor
Idler pulley
Drive belt deflection (100 N (10 kg, 22
lbs) press)
(a) 6.2 - 7.1 mm (0.24 - 0.28 in.)
(b) 4.4 - 5.0 mm (0.17 - 0.20 in.)
o: 100 N (10 kg, 22 lbs) press
GE: Generator
DEF: Deflection
68PH00701
(For diesel engine model)
The drive belts tension is adjusted automatically.
If you need to replace or adjust the belt
have it done by your authorised Maruti
Suzuki workshop.
7-6
68PH0-74E
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
Engine Oil and Filter
Specified Oil
Oil Level Check
(For diesel engine model)
(For petrol engine model)
(3)
EXAMPLE
(For petrol engine model)
• K10C model
Be sure that the engine oil you use
comes under the quality classification of
API SL, SM and SN. The recommended
Engine Oil is SAE 5W-30.
(2)
• K12M model
Be sure that the engine oil you use
comes under the quality classification of
API SL, SM and SN. The recommended
Engine Oil is SAE 0W-20.
(For diesel engine model)
Be sure that the engine oil you use comes
under the quality classification of ACEA
A5/B5. The recommended Engine Oil is
SAE 5W-30.
(1)
EXAMPLE
68PH00703
68PH00702
EXAMPLE
Upper
Lower
(1) MIN
(2) MAX
(3) Engine oil dipstick
It is important to keep the engine oil at the
correct level for proper lubrication of your
vehicle’s engine. Check the oil level with
the vehicle on a level surface. The oil level
indication may be inaccurate if the vehicle
is on a slope. The oil level should be
checked either before starting the engine
or at least 5 minutes after stopping the
engine.
The handle of the engine oil dipstick is colored yellow for easy identification.
52D084
Pull out the oil dipstick, wipe oil off with a
clean cloth, insert the dipstick all the way
into the engine, then remove it again. The
oil on the stick should be between the
upper and lower limits shown on the stick.
7-7
68PH0-74E
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
If the oil level indication is near the lower
limit, add enough oil to raise the level to
the upper limit.
Refilling
Changing Engine Oil and Filter
Drain the engine oil while the engine is still
warm.
EXAMPLE
NOTICE
Failure to check the oil level regularly
could lead to serious engine trouble
due to insufficient oil.
EXAMPLE
Open
Close
Open
Close
NOTICE
(For diesel engine model)
Do not top up the oil over the MAX
limit. Too much oil causes serious
engine trouble.
68PH00762
Remove the oil filler cap and pour oil slowly
through the filler hole to bring the oil level
to the upper limit on the dipstick. Be careful
not to overfill. Too much oil is almost as
bad as too little oil. After refilling, start the
engine and allow it to idle for about a minute. Stop the engine, wait about 5 minutes
and check the oil level again.
68PH00704
1) Remove the oil filler cap.
2) Place a drain pan under the drain plug.
3) Using a wrench, remove the drain plug
and drain out the engine oil.
CAUTION
The engine oil temperature may be
high enough to burn your fingers
when the drain plug is loosened. Wait
until the drain plug is cool enough to
touch with your bare hands.
7-8
68PH0-74E
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
Replace the Oil Filter
WARNING
EXAMPLE
(Continued)
To minimize your exposure to used
oil, wear a long-sleeve shirt and
moisture-proof gloves (Such as dishwashing gloves) when changing oil. If
oil contacts your skin, wash thoroughly with soap and water.
Launder any clothing or rags if wet
with oil.
Recycle or properly dispose of used
oil and filters.
68PH00705
Tightening torque for drain plug
Petrol engine :
35 Nm (3.6 kg-m, 25.8 lb-ft)
Diesel engine :
20 Nm (2.0 kg-m, 14.8 lb-ft)
1) Using an oil filter wrench, turn the oil filter counterclockwise and remove it.
2) Using a clean rag, wipe off the mounting surface on the engine where the
new filter will be seated.
3) Smear a little engine oil around the rubber gasket of the new oil filter.
4) Screw on the new filter by hand until the
filter gasket contacts the mounting surface.
(For petrol engine model)
EXAMPLE
4) Reinstall the drain plug and new gasket. Tighten the plug with a wrench to
the specified torque.
WARNING
New and used oil can be hazardous.
Children and pets may be harmed by
swallowing new or used oil. Keep
new and used oil and used oil filters
away from children and pets.
Repeated, prolonged contact with
used engine oil may cause skin cancer.
Brief contact with used oil may irritate skin.
(Continued)
(1)
(2)
68PH00706
(1) Loosen
(2) Tighten
7-9
68PH0-74E
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
Tightening (Viewed from filter top)
(1)
EXAMPLE
EXAMPLE
(2)
(3)
(2)
(1)
61M7001
54G093
(1) Oil filter
(2) 3/4 turn
(For diesel engine model)
NOTE:
Since special procedures and tools are
required, it is recommended that you trust
this job to your authorised Maruti Suzuki
workshop.
1) Using a socket or a ring spanner
remove oil filter housing cover (3).
NOTICE
To prevent oil leakage, make sure
that the oil filter is tight, but do not
over-tighten it.
(1) Loosen
(2) Tighten
2) Remove the old oil filter element and
replace it with a new oil filter element.
3) Clean the surface of oil filter cap and
replace the O-ring.
4) Tighten the oil filter housing cover on
the oil filter housing using a socket or
ring spanner to the specified torque.
Refill with Oil and Check for Leaks
1) Pour oil through the filler hole and
install the filler cap.
For the approximate capacity of the oil,
refer to the “Capacities” item in the
“SPECIFICATIONS” section.
2) Start the engine and look carefully for
leaks at the oil filter and drain plug. Run
the engine at various speeds for at least
5 minutes.
3) Stop the engine and wait about 5 minutes. Check the oil level again and add
oil if necessary. Check for leaks again.
Tightening torque for oil filter
3/4 turn or
Petrol engine :
14 Nm (1.4 kg-m, 10.3 lb-ft)
Diesel engine :
25 Nm (2.5 kg-m, 18.5 lb-ft)
7-10
68PH0-74E
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
NOTICE
• When replacing the oil filter, it is
recommended that you use a MARUTI genuine replacement filter. If
you use an aftermarket filter, make
sure it is of equivalent quality and
follow the manufacturer’s instructions.
• Oil leaks from around the oil filter
or drain plug indicate incorrect
installation or gasket damage. If
you find any leaks or are not sure
that the filter has been properly
tightened,
have
the
vehicle
inspected by your authorised
Maruti Suzuki workshop.
Engine Coolant
Selection of Coolant
To maintain optimum performance and
durability of your engine, use MARUTI
Genuine Coolant or equivalent.
This type of coolant is best for your cooling
system as it:
• Helps maintain proper engine temperature.
• Gives proper protection against freezing
and boiling.
• Gives proper protection against corrosion and rust.
Failure to use the proper coolant can damage your cooling system. Your authorised
Maruti Suzuki workshop can help you
select the proper coolant.
NOTICE
To avoid damaging your cooling system:
• Always use a high quality ethylene
glycol base non-silicate type coolant diluted with distilled water at
the correct mixture concentration.
• Make sure that the proper mix is 50/
50 coolant to distilled water (Diesel) and 30/70 (Petrol) and in no
case higher than 70/30. Concentrations greater than 70/30 coolant to
distilled water will cause overheating conditions.
• Neither use 100% coolant nor 100%
plain water.
• Do not add extra inhibitors or additives. They may not be compatible
with your cooling system.
• Do not mix different types of base
coolants. Doing so may result in
accelerated seal wear and/or the
possibility of severe overheating
and extensive engine/CVT damage.
Coolant Level Check
Check the coolant level at the reservoir
tank, not at the radiator. With the engine
cool, the coolant level should be between
the “FULL” and “LOW” marks.
7-11
68PH0-74E
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
Adding Coolant
(For diesel engine model)
(For petrol engine model)
EXAMPLE
WARNING
Swallowing engine coolant can cause
severe injury or death. Inhaling coolant mist or vapors or getting coolant
in your eyes could result in severe
injury.
• Do not drink antifreeze or coolant
solution. If swallowed, do not
induce vomiting. Immediately contact a poison control center or a
physician.
• Avoid inhaling coolant mist or hot
vapors. If inhaled, remove to a
fresh air area.
• If coolant gets in the eyes, flush
with water and seek medical attention.
• Wash thoroughly after handling
coolant.
• Keep engine coolant out of the
reach of children and pets.
NOTICE
• The mixture you use should contain 50% concentration of antifreeze.
• If the lowest ambient temperature
in your area is expected to be –35°C
(–31°F) or below, use higher concentrations up to 60% following the
instructions on the antifreeze container.
EXAMPLE
68PH00708
If the coolant level is below the “LOW”
mark, more coolant should be added.
Remove the reservoir tank cap and add
coolant until the reservoir tank level
reaches the “FULL” mark. Never fill the
reservoir tank above the “FULL” mark.
NOTICE
When putting the cap on the reservoir tank, line up the mark on the cap
and the mark on the tank. Failure to
follow this can result in coolant leakage.
68PH00709
WARNING
It is hazardous to remove the reservoir tank cap (Degassing tank cap)
for a diesel engine when the water
temperature is high, because scalding fluid and steam may be blown out
under pressure. Wait until the coolant
temperature has lowered before
removing the cap.
7-12
68PH0-74E
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
If the coolant level is below the “LOW”
mark, more coolant should be added.
When the engine is cool, remove the
degassing tank cap by turning it anticlockwise slowly to release any pressure. And
add coolant until the degassing tank level
reaches the “FULL” mark. Never fill the
degassing tank above the “FULL” mark.
Air Cleaner
Coolant Replacement
K10C model
Since special procedures are required, we
recommend you take your vehicle to your
authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop for
coolant replacement.
If the air cleaner is clogged with dust, there
will be greater intake resistance, resulting
in decreased power output and increased
fuel consumption.
(For petrol engine model)
EXAMPLE
(2)
EXAMPLE
68PM00705
(1)
2) Unclamp the side clamps and remove
the element from the air cleaner case. If
the element appears to be dirty clean
the element or replace it with a new one
as per periodic maintenance schedule.
3) Clamp the side clamps securely.
(1)
68PM00734
1) Remove the bolts (1) and lift the air
cleaner case (2) directly above.
7-13
68PH0-74E
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
Spark Plugs (Petrol engine)
(For diesel engine model)
K12M model
Replacing and inspection of spark
plugs
Since special procedures, materials and
tools are required, it is recommended that
you trust this job to your authorised Maruti
Suzuki workshop.
EXAMPLE
EXAMPLE
68PM00706
68PH00711
1) Unclamp the side clamps and remove
the element from the air cleaner case.If
the element appears to be dirty clean
the element or replace it with a new one
as per periodic maintenance schedule.
2) Clamp the side clamps securely.
1) Loosen the screws and remove the element from the air cleaner case. If the
element appears to be dirty clean the
element or replace it with a new one as
per periodic maintenance schedule.
2) Tighten the screws securely.
7-14
68PH0-74E
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
Gear Oil
Gear Oil Level Check
Manual Transaxle Oil
Tightening torque for oil filler and level
plug (1) or (2)
EXAMPLE
When adding gear oil, use gear oil with the
appropriate viscosity and grade as shown
in the chart below.
(1)
CAUTION
We highly recommend you use:
“MARUTI GENUINE GEAR OIL 75W-80”
for manual transaxle gear oil.
After driving the vehicle, the gear oil
temperature may be high enough to
burn you. Wait until the oil filler is
cool enough to touch with your bare
hands before inspecting gear oil
level.
Manual transaxle oil
EXAMPLE
(2)
68PH00712
75W-80
o
C -30
F -22
o
-20
-4
Manual transaxle:
21 Nm (2.1 kg-m, 15.5 lb-ft)
-10
14
0
32
10
50
20
68
30
86
40
104
68LM728
(1) Oil filler and level plug
(For K12M model)
(2) Oil filler and level plug
(For K10C and D13A model)
To check the gear oil level, use the following procedure:
1) Park the vehicle on a level surface with
the parking brake applied. Then, stop
the engine.
2) Remove the oil filler and level plug (1)
or (2).
3) If gear oil flows from the plug hole, the
oil level is correct. Reinstall the plug. If
gear oil does not flow from the plug
hole, add oil through the filler plug hole
until oil flows a little from the plug hole.
NOTICE
When tightening the plug, apply the
following sealing compound or
equivalent to the plug threads to prevent oil leakage.
MARUTI SUZUKI Bond No. “1216E” or
“1217G”
Gear Oil Change
Since special procedures, materials and
tools are required, it is recommended that
you trust this job to your authorised Maruti
Suzuki workshop.
7-15
68PH0-74E
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
Clutch Pedal
Fluid Control Clutch (If equipped)
Cable Control Clutch (If equipped)
EXAMPLE
EXAMPLE
Continuously Variable
Transaxle (CVT) Fluid
(If equipped)
Specified Fluid
MAX
Use a CVT fluid SUZUKI CVT FLUID
GREEN-2.
Fluid Level Check
MIN
NOTICE
Driving with too much or too little
fluid can damage the transaxle.
68PH00713
54G274
Clutch pedal play “d”:
10 - 15 mm (0.4 - 0.6 in.)
Measure the clutch pedal play by moving
the clutch pedal with your hand and measuring the distance it moves until you feel
slight resistance. The play in the clutch
pedal should be between the specified values. If the play is more or less than the
above, or clutch dragging is felt with the
pedal fully depressed, have the clutch
inspected by your authorised Maruti
Suzuki workshop.
Check the clutch pedal for smooth operation and clutch fluid level from time to time.
If clutch dragging is felt with the pedal fully
depressed, have the clutch inspected by
your authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop. If
the clutch fluid level is near the “MIN” line,
fill it up to the “MAX” line with Maruti Genuine Brake Fluid (MGBF) or DOT 3.
We highly recommend to use “Maruti Genuine Brake Fluid” (MGBF).
You must check the fluid level with the CVT
fluid at normal operating temperature.
To check the fluid level:
1) To warm up the CVT fluid, drive the
vehicle or idle the engine until the temperature gauge indicates normal operating temperature.
2) Then drive for ten more minutes.
NOTICE
Be sure to use the specified CVT
fluid. Using CVT fluid other than
SUZUKI CVT FLUID GREEN-2 may
damage the CVT of your vehicle.
7-16
68PH0-74E
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
NOTE:
Do not check the fluid level if you have just
driven the vehicle for a long time at high
speed, or if you have driven in city traffic in
hot weather. Wait until the fluid cools down
(about 30 minutes), or the fluid level indication will not be correct.
3) Park your vehicle on level ground.
4) Apply the parking brake and then start
the engine in “P” (Park). Let it idle for
two minutes and keep it running during
the fluid level check.
5) With your foot on the brake pedal,
move the gearshift lever through each
gear, pausing for about three seconds
in each range. Then move it back to the
“P” (Park) position.
WARNING
6) The handle of the CVT fluid dipstick is
colored red for easy identification.
Remove the dipstick, clean it and push
it back in until the cap seats. Then pull
out the dipstick.
7) Check both sides of the dipstick, and
read the lowest level. The fluid level
should be between the two marks in the
“HOT” range on the dipstick.
EXAMPLE
NOTICE
After checking or adding oil, be sure
to insert the dipstick securely.
68PH00715
EXAMPLE
Since special procedures, materials and
tools are required to check the deterioration of CVT oil or change, it is recommended that you trust this job to your
authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop.
(1)
(3)
Be sure to depress the brake pedal
when moving the gearshift lever, or
the vehicle can move suddenly.
Deterioration Checking or Changing Oil
(2)
EXAMPLE
68PH00716
(1) FULL
(2) LOW
(3) The lowest point = Fluid level
68PH00714
7-17
68PH0-74E
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
Fuel Filter (Diesel engine)
If the fuel filter warning light comes on
when driving, there is a possibility that
water is in the fuel filter. Drain water as
soon as possible. Have your vehicle
inspected by an authorised Maruti Suzuki
workshop.
Brakes
WARNING
Brake Fluid
EXAMPLE
MAX
MIN
68PH00713
Check the brake fluid level by looking at
the reservoir in the engine compartment.
Check that the fluid level is between the
“MAX” and “MIN” lines. If the brake fluid
level is near the “MIN” line, fill it up to the
“MAX” line with Maruti Genuine Brake
Fluid (MGBF) or DOT 3.
We highly recommend to use “Maruti Genuine Brake Fluid” (MGBF).
Failure to follow the guidelines below
can result in personal injury or serious damage to the brake system.
• If the brake fluid in the reservoir
drops below a certain level, the
brake warning light on the instrument panel will come on (The
engine must be running with the
parking brake fully disengaged).
Should the light come on, immediately ask your authorised Maruti
Suzuki workshop to inspect the
brake system.
• A rapid fluid loss indicates a leak in
the brake system which should be
inspected by your authorised
Maruti Suzuki workshop immediately.
• Do not use any fluid other than
Maruti Genuine Brake Fluid (MGBF)
or DOT 3. Do not use reclaimed
fluid or fluid that has been stored in
old or open containers. It is essential that foreign particles and other
liquids are kept out of the brake
fluid reservoir.
CAUTION
Brake fluid can harm your eyes and
damage painted surfaces. Use caution when refilling the reservoir.
7-18
68PH0-74E
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
EXAMPLE
WARNING
Brake fluid is harmful or fatal if swallowed, and harmful if it comes in contact with skin or eyes. If swallowed,
do not induce vomiting. Immediately
contact a poison control center or a
physician. If brake fluid gets in eyes,
flush eyes with water and seek medical attention. Wash thoroughly after
handling. Solution can be poisonous
to animals. Keep out of the reach of
children and animals.
NOTE:
With disc brakes, the fluid level can be
expected to gradually fall as the brake
pads wear.
Brake Pedal
Check if the brake pedal stops at the regular height without “spongy” feeling when
you depress it. If not, have the brake system inspected by your authorised Maruti
Suzuki workshop. If you doubt the brake
pedal for the regular height, check it as follows:
NOTE:
When measuring the distance between the
brake pedal and floor wall, be sure not to
include the floor mat or rubber on the floor
wall in your measurement.
EXAMPLE
“a”
54G108
Pedal to floor carpet minimum distance “a”: 53 mm (2.1 in.)
With the engine running, measure the distance between the brake pedal and floor
carpet when the pedal is depressed with
approximately 30 kg (66 lbs) of force. The
minimum distance required is as specified.
Since your vehicle’s brake system is selfadjusting, there is no need for pedal
adjustment.
If the pedal to floor carpet distance as
measured above is less than the minimum
distance required, have your vehicle
inspected by your authorised Maruti
Suzuki workshop.
60G104S
WARNING
If you experience any of the following
problems with your vehicle’s brake
system, have the vehicle inspected
immediately by your authorised
Maruti Suzuki workshop.
• Poor braking performance
• Uneven braking (Brakes not working uniformly on all wheels.)
• Excessive pedal travel
• Brake dragging
• Excessive noise
7-19
68PH0-74E
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
Steering
Parking Brake
EXAMPLE
Tires
EXAMPLE
( )
(1)
“c”
“c”
“b”
“b”
EXAMPLE
68PM7001
Ratchet tooth specification “b”:
4th – 9th
Lever pull force (1):
200 N (20 kg, 45 lbs)
Check the parking brake for proper adjustment by counting the number of clicks
made by the ratchet teeth as you slowly
pull up on the parking brake lever to the
point of full engagement. The parking
brake lever should stop between the specified ratchet teeth and the rear wheels
should be securely locked. If the parking
brake is not properly adjusted or the
brakes drag after the lever has been fully
released, have the parking brake inspected
and/or adjusted by your authorised Maruti
Suzuki workshop.
68PH00717
68LM708
Steering wheel play “c”:
0 – 30 mm (0.0 – 1.2 in.)
Check the play of the steering wheel by
gently turning it from left to right and measuring the distance that it moves before
you feel slight resistance. The play should
be between the specified values.
Check that the steering wheel turns easily
and smoothly without rattling by turning it
all the way to the right and to the left while
driving very slowly in an open area. If the
amount of free play is outside the specification or you find anything else to be
wrong, an inspection must be performed
by your authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop.
The front and rear tire pressure specifications for your vehicle are listed on the Tire
Information Label. Both the front and rear
tires should have the specified tire pressure.
Note that the value does not apply to the
compact spare tire, if equipped.
Tire Inspection
Inspect your vehicle’s tires at least once a
month by performing the following checks:
1) Measure the air pressure with a tire
gauge. Adjust the pressure if necessary. Remember to check the spare
tire, too.
7-20
68PH0-74E
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING
• Air pressures should be checked
when the tires are cold or you may
get inaccurate readings.
• Check the inflation pressure from
time to time while inflating the tire
gradually, until the specified pressure is obtained.
• Never underinflate or overinflate
the tires.
Underinflation can cause unusual
handling characteristics or can
cause the rim to slip on the tire
bead, resulting in an accident or
damage to the tire or rim.
Overinflation can cause the tire to
burst, resulting in personal injury.
Overinflation can also cause
unusual handling characteristics
which may result in an accident.
CAUTION
EXAMPLE
Hitting curbs and running over rocks
can damage tires and affect wheel
alignment. Be sure to have tires and
wheel alignment checked periodically by your authorised Maruti
Suzuki workshop.
(1)
4) Check for loose wheel bolts.
5) Check that there are no nails, stones or
other objects sticking into the tires.
(2)
68PH00718
(1) Tread wear indicator
(2) Indicator location mark
2) Check that the depth of the tread
groove is more than 1.6 mm (0.06 in.).
To help you check this, the tires have
molded-in tread wear indicators in the
grooves. When the indicators appear
on the tread surface, the remaining
depth of the tread is 1.6 mm (0.06 in.)
or less and the tire should be replaced.
3) Check for abnormal wear, cracks and
damage. Any tires with cracks or other
damage should be replaced. If any tires
show abnormal wear, have them
inspected by your authorised Maruti
Suzuki workshop.
7-21
68PH0-74E
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
• Your MARUTI SUZUKI is equipped
with tires which are all the same
type and size (Except spare tire.
Which may be dependent on vehicle variant). This is important to
ensure proper steering and handling of the vehicle. Never mix tires
of different size or type on the four
wheels of your vehicle. The size
and type of tires used should be
only those approved by MARUTI
SUZUKI as standard or optional
equipment for your vehicle.
• Replacing the wheels and tires
equipped on your vehicle with certain combinations of aftermarket
wheels and tires can significantly
change the steering and handling
characteristics of your vehicle.
• Therefore, use only those wheel
and tire combinations approved by
MARUTI SUZUKI as standard or
optional equipment for your vehicle.
5-tire rotation
(Vehicle with 185/65R15 88S tire)
NOTICE
WARNING
Replacing the original tires with tires
of a different size may result in false
speedometer or odometer readings.
Check with your authorised Maruti
Suzuki workshop before purchasing
replacement tires that differ in size
from the original tires.
EXAMPLE
Tire Rotation
4-tire rotation
(Vehicle with 195/55R16 87H tire)
EXAMPLE
68PH00755
To avoid uneven wear of your tires and to
prolong their life, rotate the tires as illustrated. Tires should be rotated every 10000
km. After rotation, adjust front and rear tire
pressures to the specification listed on
your vehicle’s Tire Information Label.
54G114
Wheel Balancing
If the vehicle vibrates abnormally on
smooth road, have the wheel balanced at
authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop.
Wheel Alignment
In case of abnormal tyre wear or pulling
towards one side, have the wheel aligned
at authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop.
7-22
68PH0-74E
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
Tubeless Tyres (If equipped)
The vehicle is equipped with Tubeless
Tyres. In tubeless tyre, a thin layer of butyl
rubber is used for lining the inside of the
tubeless tyre. This layer is to prevent air
loss and fulfilling the purpose of tube. The
air pressure is maintained by the sealing
between tyre bead and wheel rim. Tubeless tyres are having advantage of slow air
loss and preventing sudden deflation while
driving.
Care and maintenance tips for tubeless
tyres
1) Always maintain recommended inflation
pressure. Driving continuously at low
inflation pressure can lead to tyre damage.
2) In case any leakage is found, check for
any nail penetration/valve core damage or rim bent. Damaged wheel must
not be used.
3) In case tyre has run at low pressure, it
must be inspected for any defect.
4) Whenever new tyre is fitted, replace the
valve.
5) If continuous high speed driving is
required, increase tyres pressure by 5
psi over recommended inflation pressure.
6) Never run the tyre beyond TWI (Tread
wear indicator). The tyre is recommended to be replaced when the remaining
tread has worn to this point. The indicators are spaced across the tread
around the tyre marked by a triangular
symbol (TWI).
7) Always prefer tubeless tyre mounting
machine. In case of manual mountingtyre/wheel rim damage may occur.
8) In case of any problem, please get in
touch with authorised Maruti Suzuki
workshop.
Temporary Spare Tire (If equipped)
Your vehicle comes equipped with the temporary spare tire. It is only intended for
temporary emergency use, until the conventional tire can be repaired or replaced.
The inflation pressure of the temporary
spare tire should be checked at least
monthly. At the same time, check that the
tire is stored securely. If it is not, tighten it.
Note that two or more temporary spare
tires should not be used on one vehicle
simultaneously.
WARNING
The temporary spare tire and wheel
are intended for temporary emergency
use only. Continuous use of this spare
can result in tire failure and loss of
control. Always observe these precautions when using this spare:
• Your vehicle will handle differently
with this temporary spare.
• Do not exceed 80 km/h speed (Only
vehicle with 195/55R16 87H tire).
• Replace this spare with a standard
tire and wheel as soon as possible.
• Use of this spare may reduce
ground clearance.
• Set the specified tire pressure indicated on the tire information label
located on the driver’s door lock
pillar.
• Do not use tire chains on the temporary spare. If you must use tire
chains, rearrange the wheels so
standard tires and wheels are fitted
to the front axle.
• The temporary spare tire has a
much shorter tread life than the
conventional tires on your vehicle.
Replace the tire as soon as the
tread wear indicator appears.
• When replacing the temporary
spare tire, use a replacement tire
with the exact same size and construction.
7-23
68PH0-74E
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
Battery
Replacement of the battery
EXAMPLE
For petrol engine model
WARNING
• Batteries
produce
flammable
hydrogen gas. Keep flames and
sparks away from the battery or an
explosion may occur. Never smoke
when working in the vicinity of the
battery.
• When checking or servicing the
battery, disconnect the negative
cable. Be careful not to cause a
short circuit by allowing metal
objects to contact the battery posts
and the vehicle at the same time.
• To avoid harm to yourself or damage to your vehicle or battery, follow the jump starting instructions
in the “EMERGENCY SERVICE”
section of this manual if it is necessary to jump start your vehicle.
• Diluted sulfuric acid spilled from
battery can cause blindness or
severe burns. Use proper eye protection and gloves. Flush eyes or
body with ample water and get
medical care immediately if suffered. Keep batteries out of the
reach of children.
EXAMPLE
MAX
(3)
(1)
(2)
MIN
(4)
54GM701
For maintenance-free battery (Cap-less
type), you need not add water. For traditional type battery, which has water filler
caps, the level of the battery solution must
be kept between the “MAX” and the “MIN”
level lines at all times. If the level is found
to be below the “MIN” level line, add distilled water to the “MAX” level line. You
should periodically check the battery, battery terminals, and battery hold-down
bracket for corrosion. Remove corrosion
using a stiff brush and ammonia mixed
with water, or baking soda mixed with
water. After removing corrosion, rinse with
clean water.
If your vehicle is not going to be driven for
a month or longer, disconnect the cable
from the negative terminal of the battery to
help prevent discharge.
68PH00719
For diesel engine model
(1)
EXAMPLE
(2)
(4)
(3)
68PH00720
7-24
68PH0-74E
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
To remove the battery:
1) Disconnect the negative cable (1).
2) Disconnect the positive cable (2).
Fuses
For petrol engine model;
3) Remove the retainer nuts (3) and
remove the retainer (4).
Main fuse
The main fuse takes current directly from
the battery.
Fuses in the Engine Compartment
Your vehicle has three types of fuses, as
described below:
For diesel engine model;
3) Remove the bracket bolt (3) and
remove the bracket (4).
4) Remove the battery.
Primary fuses
These fuses are between the main fuse
and individual fuses, and are for electrical
load groups.
To install the battery:
1) Install the battery in the reverse order of
removal.
2) Tighten the bracket bolt and battery
cables securely.
Individual fuses
These fuses are for individual electrical circuits.
(5)
(4)
(4)
(3)
(6)
(3)
(1)
(1)
(2)
(2)
74LHT0715
To remove a fuse, use the fuse puller (1)
provided in the fuse cover.
(35)
(36)
(37)
(31)
(32)
(1)
(38)
(39)
(40)
(41)
NOTE:
When the battery is disconnected, some of
the vehicle’s function will be initialized and/
or deactivated.
These function are required to reset after
the battery is reconnected.
(5)
(33)
(34)
68PH00721
(20)
(21)
(22)
(23)
(24)
(25)
(26)
(27)
(28)
(29)
(30)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)
(19)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
68PH00722
7-25
68PH0-74E
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
MAIN FUSE / PRIMARY FUSE
(1)
120 A
FL1
(2)
100 A
FL2
(3)
80 A
FL3
(4)
100 A
FL4
(5)
50 A
FL5
(6)
150 A
FL6
(7)
30 A
Starting motor
(8)
30 A
Blower fan
(9)
40 A
Battery
(10)
40 A
ABS motor
(11)
40 A
Ignition switch
(12)
30 A
B/U
(13)
30 A
Sub battery
(14)
–
Blank
(15)
–
Blank
(16)
25 A
ABS control module
(17)
15 A
Headlight (Left)
(18)
15 A
Headlight (Right)
(19)
–
Blank
(20)
–
Blank
(21)
30 A
Radiator fan
(39)
25 A
Headlight high
(22)
60 A
Power steering
(40)
15 A
Headlight high (Right)
(23)
5A
ECM
(41)
15 A
Headlight high (Left)
(24)
20 A
Fuel pump
(25)
20 A
Front fog light
(26)
10 A
Air compressor
(27)
50 A
Ignition switch 2
(28)
15 A
Transaxle
15 A
FI (Petrol - K12M)
30A
FI main (Petrol - K10C)
30 A
FI main (Diesel)
(30)
15 A
T/M pump
(31)
–
Blank
(32)
–
Blank
(33)
5A
(34)
–
(29)
(35)
(36)
(37)
(38)
20 A
20 A
–
Starting Signal
Blank
INJ DRV (Diesel)
INJ DRV (Petrol - K10C)
Blank
10 A
FI (Petrol - K10C)
10 A
FI (Diesel)
–
The main fuse, primary fuses and some of
the individual fuses are located in the
engine compartment. If the main fuse
blows, no electrical component will function. If a primary fuse blows, no electrical
component in the corresponding load
group will function. When replacing the
main fuse, a primary fuse or an individual
fuse, use a Maruti Genuine Part.
To remove a fuse, use the fuse puller provided in the fuse box. The amperage of
each fuse is shown in the back of the fuse
box cover.
Blank
7-26
68PH0-74E
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
Fuses under the Dash Board
PRIMARY FUSE
EXAMPLE
OK
BLOWN
68PH00723
EXAMPLE
68PH00724
WARNING
If the main fuse or a primary fuse
blows, be sure to have your vehicle
inspected by an authorised Maruti
Suzuki workshop. Always use a
Maruti Genuine Part. Never use a
substitute such as a wire even for a
temporary repair, or extensive electrical damage and a fire can result.
NOTE:
Make sure that the fuse box always carries
spare fuses.
For vehicle without keyless push start
system or keyless entry system
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10)
(11)
(12) (13)
(14) (15) (16) (17) (18) (19) (20) (21) (22) (23)
68PH00725
(1)
10 A
Back-up light
(2)
15 A
Ignition coil
(3)
10 A
Meter
(4)
10 A
Wiper
(5)
5A
Ignition-2 signal
(6)
15 A
Washer
(7)
25 A
Front wiper
(8)
10 A
Tail light
(9)
10 A
Hazard
(10)
10 A
Stop light
(11)
30 A
Power window
(12)
15 A
ACC-2
(13)
5A
ACC
(14)
5A
Starting signal
(15)
10 A
Ignition-1 signal
(16)
10 A
Air bag
(17)
5A
ABS control module
(If equipped)
(18)
15 A
Horn
(19)
20 A
Door lock
(20)
25 A
Rear defogger
7-27
68PH0-74E
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
(21)
15 A
Radio
(22)
5A
Dome light
(23)
10 A
Dome light-2
PRIMARY FUSE
For vehicle with keyless push start system or keyless entry system
(1)
(2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12)
(13) (14) (15) (16) (17) (18) (19) (20) (21) (22) (23) (24) (25)
(26) (27) (28) (29) (30) (31) (32) (33) (34) (35) (36) (37) (38)
(39)
(40)
(1)
30 A
Power window
(2)
10 A
Meter
(3)
15 A
Ignition coil
(4)
5A
Ignition-1 signal 2
(5)
20 A
Shift (Petrol - K10C)
(6)
20 A
S/R (Petrol - K10C)
(7)
–
(8)
20 A
Blank
Door lock
(9)
15 A
Steering lock
(10)
10 A
Hazard
(11)
5A
A-STOP controller*
(12)
10 A
RR fog lamp
(13)
5A
ABS control module
68PH00759
(14)
15 A
Seat heater
(15)
5A
Ignition-1 signal 3
(16)
10 A
Dome light-2
(17)
5A
Dome light
(18)
15 A
Radio
(19)
5A
CONT
(20)
5A
Key 2
(21)
20 A
Power window timer
(22)
5A
Key
(23)
15 A
Horn
(24)
5A
Tail light (Left)
(25)
10 A
Tail light
(26)
10 A
Air bag
(27)
10 A
Ignition-1 signal
(28)
10 A
Back-up light
(29)
5A
ACC-3
(30)
20 A
Rear defogger
(31)
10 A
Heated mirror
(32)
15 A
ACC-2
(33)
5A
ACC
(34)
10 A
Wiper
(35)
5A
Ignition-2 signal
(36)
15 A
Washer
(37)
25 A
Front wiper
(38)
10 A
(39)
–
(40)
25 A
Stop light
Blank
Rear defogger 2
* Feature not available in the vehicle.
7-28
68PH0-74E
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
EXAMPLE
OK
BLOWN
81A283
WARNING
Always be sure to replace a blown
fuse with a fuse of the correct amperage. Never use a substitute such as
aluminum foil or wire to replace a
blown fuse. If you replace a fuse and
the new one blows in a short period
of time, you may have a major electrical problem. Have your vehicle
inspected immediately by your
authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop.
Headlight Aiming
Since special procedures are required, we
recommend you take your vehicle to your
authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop for
headlight alignment.
Bulb Replacement
CAUTION
• Light bulbs can be hot enough to
burn your finger right after being
turned off. This is true especially
for halogen headlight bulbs.
Replace the bulbs after they
become cool enough.
• The headlight bulbs are filled with
pressurized halogen gas. They can
burst and injure you if they are hit
or dropped. Handle them carefully.
• To avoid injury by sharp-edged
parts of the body, wear gloves and
a long-sleeved shirt when replacing
light bulbs.
NOTICE
The oils from your skin may cause a
halogen bulb to overheat and burst
when the lights are on. Grasp a new
bulb with a clean cloth.
NOTICE
Frequent replacement of a bulb indicates the need for an inspection of
the electrical system. This should be
carried out by your authorised Maruti
Suzuki workshop.
7-29
68PH0-74E
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
Headlights
Halogen headlights
EXAMPLE
Discharge headlights
EXAMPLE
(2)
(1)
EXAMPLE
(1)
(1)
68PH00726
(1) Headlight (High/Low Beam)
68PM07001
(1) Headlight (High/Low Beam)
Since special procedures are required, we
recommend you take your vehicle to your
authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop for
bulb replacement.
WARNING
Never attempt to replace the bulb of a
discharge headlight, or you could
suffer an electric shock from the
high-voltage circuit in the headlight
system. Always have a discharge
headlight bulb replaced by an authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop.
(3)
68PH00727
Open the engine food. Disconnect the coupler (1). Remove the sealing rubber (2).
Push the retaining spring (3) forward and
unhook it. Then remove the bulb. Install a
new bulb in the reverse order of removal.
7-30
68PH0-74E
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
EXAMPLE
Side Turn Signal Light (On fender)
(If equipped)
EXAMPLE
EXAMPLE
(3)
(4)
(5)
68PH00728
NOTE:
You can see the position of retaining spring
from the hole of headlight.
WARNING
Don’t twist/shake the bulb coupler
while removing as it may disturb the
terminal gap leading to loose connection and sparking causing subsequent coupler melting/ fire.
(1)
68PH00761
68PH00729
1) Remove the light housing (1) by sliding
to left with your finger.
EXAMPLE
(4) Removal
(5) Install
3) To remove and install the bulb of the
side turn signal light (3), simply pull out
or push in the bulb.
(2)
68PH00760
2) Turn the bulb holder (2) clockwise and
pull it out from the light housing.
7-31
68PH0-74E
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
Front turn signal light and
front position light
EXAMPLE
EXAMPLE
Vehicle with the halogen headlights
EXAMPLE
(2)
(1)
(3)
(4)
68PH00732
(2)
68PH00730
(1) Front turn signal light
(2) Front position light
Vehicle with the discharge headlights
EXAMPLE
(1)
1) Open the engine hood. To remove the
bulb holder of the front turn signal light
or the front position light from the light
housing, turn the holder counterclockwise and pull it out.
(1)
68PH00733
(3) Removal
(4) Installation
2) To remove the bulb of the front turn signal light (1) from the bulb holder, push
in the bulb and turn it counterclockwise.
To install a new bulb, push it in and turn
it clockwise.
To remove and install the bulb of the
front position light (2), simply pull out or
push in the bulb.
68PH00731
(1) Front turn signal light
7-32
68PH0-74E
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
Front Fog Light (If equipped)
Rear combination light
1) Start the engine. Turn the steering
wheel to the opposite side of the replacing fog light to replace the bulb easily.
Then turn off the engine.
EXAMPLE
(2)
(1)
EXAMPLE
(1)
EXAMPLE
68PM07003
3) Open the end of the cover inside the
fender.
EXAMPLE
68PH00737
1) Remove the bolts (1) and pull the light
housing (2) straight.
EXAMPLE
68PM07002
(3)
2) Remove the clips (1).
68PH00736
4) Disconnect the coupler by pushing the
lock release. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise and remove it.
(4)
68PH00738
2) Remove the wire (3) from a clamp (4).
7-33
68PH0-74E
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
EXAMPLE
(5)
(6)
4) To remove the bulb of the rear turn signal light (5) from the bulb holder, push
in the bulb and turn it counterclockwise.
To install a new bulb, push it in and turn
it clockwise.
To remove and install the bulb of the
reversing light (6), simply pull out or
push in the bulb.
License Plate Light
EXAMPLE
(1)
68PH00739
68PH00742
3) To remove the bulb holder of the rear
turn signal light (5) or the reversing light
(6) from the light housing, turn the
holder counterclockwise and pull it out.
1) Turn the cover (1) counterclockwise to
remove it.
EXAMPLE
EXAMPLE
68PH00741
NOTE:
When reinstalling the light housing, check
that the clips are properly attached.
(6)
(7)
(8)
EXAMPLE
(5)
68PH00743
68PH00740
(7) Removal
(8) Installation
(2)
2) To remove and install the bulb of the
license plate light (2), simply pull out or
push in the bulb.
7-34
68PH0-74E
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
Interior Light
Luggage compartment (If equipped)
Remove the lens by using a flat blade
screwdriver covered with a soft cloth as
shown. To install it, simply push it back in.
EXAMPLE
Front (If equipped)
Glove Box Light (If equipped)
Since special procedures are required, we
recommend you take your vehicle to your
authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop for
bulb replacement.
EXAMPLE
68PH00746
Courtesy light (If equipped)
68PH00744
EXAMPLE
Center
68PH00748
EXAMPLE
1) Press inward on both sides of the glove
box and pull frontward and then
unclamp it.
EXAMPLE
68PH00747
68PH00745
7-35
68PH0-74E
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
Wiper Blades
NOTE:
Some wiper blades may be different from
the ones described here depending on
vehicle specifications. If so, consult your
authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop for
proper replacement method.
EXAMPLE
For windshield wipers:
EXAMPLE
(1)
EXAMPLE
68PH00749
54G129
2) To remove and install the bulb of the
glove box light (1), simply pull out or
push in the bulb.
If the wiper blades become brittle or damaged, or make streaks when wiping,
replace the wiper blades.
To install new wiper blades, follow the procedures below.
NOTICE
To avoid scratching or breaking the
window, do not let the wiper arm
strike the window while replacing the
wiper blade.
70G119
1) Hold the wiper arm away from the window.
NOTE:
When raising both of the front wiper arms,
pull the driver’s side wiper arm up first.
When returning the wiper arms, lower the
passenger’s side wiper arm first. Otherwise, the wiper arms may interfere with
each other.
7-36
68PH0-74E
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
Removal
EXAMPLE
EXAMPLE
EXAMPLE
(3)
(2)
(1)
(3)
EXAMPLE
68PH00753
68PH00751
(3) Retainer
Installation
EXAMPLE
(2)
(1)
4) If the new blade is provided without the
two metal retainers, move them from
the old blade to the new one.
EXAMPLE
(1)
(1)
(3)
68PH00750
2) Squeeze lock (1) towards wiper arm (2)
and remove the wiper frame from the
arm as shown.
3) Unlock the lock end of the wiper blade
and slide the blade out as shown.
68PH00752
(3)
(1) Locked end
68PH00754
7-37
68PH0-74E
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
For rear wipers:
EXAMPLE
EXAMPLE
(A)
(B)
(3)
EXAMPLE
60MHM7001
68PH00764
(A) Up
(B) Down
NOTE:
Do not flex the wiper blade frame end more
than necessary. If you do, it can break off.
NOTE:
When you install the metal retainers (3),
make sure the direction of metal retainers
as shown in the above illustrations.
5) Install the new blade in the reverse
order of removal, with the locked end
positioned toward the wiper arm.
Make sure the blade is properly
retained by all the hooks. Lock the
blade end into place.
6) Reinstall wiper frame to arm, making
sure that the lock lever is snapped
securely into the arm.
68PH00763
1) Hold the wiper arm away from the window.
2) Remove the wiper frame from the arm
as shown.
3) Slide the blade out as shown.
7-38
68PH0-74E
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
Windshield Washer Fluid
EXAMPLE
EXAMPLE
(1)
(1)
Air Conditioning System
If you do not use the air conditioner for a
long period, such as during winter, it may
not give the best performance when you
start using it again. To help maintain optimum performance and durability of your air
conditioner, it needs to be run periodically.
Operate the air conditioner at least once a
month for one minute with the engine
idling. This circulates the refrigerant and oil
and helps protect the internal components.
Replacement of the Air Conditioner
Filter (If equipped)
68PH00765
(1) Retainer
4) If the new blade is provided without the
two metal retainers, move them from
the old blade to the new one.
5) Install the new blade in the reverse
order of removal.
Check that the blade is properly
retained by all the hooks.
6) Reinstall wiper frame to arm in the
reverse order of removal.
68PH00756
Check that there is washer fluid in the tank.
Refill it if necessary. Use a good quality
windshield washer fluid, diluted with water
as necessary.
Since special procedures are required, we
recommend you take your vehicle to your
authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop for the
air conditioner filter replacement.
EXAMPLE
WARNING
Do not use radiator antifreeze in the
windshield washer reservoir. This
can severely impair visibility when
sprayed on the windshield, and can
also damage your vehicle’s paint.
NOTICE
Damage may result if the washer
motor is operated with no fluid in the
washer tank.
68PH00757
1) To approach the air conditioner filter,
press inward on both sides of the grove
box, pull it frontward and remove it.
7-39
68PH0-74E
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
(3)
(1)
(2)
EXAMPLE
68PH00758
2) Remove the cover (1) and pull out the
air conditioner filter (2).
NOTE:
When you install a new filter, make sure
the UP mark (3) faces upward.
7-40
68PH0-74E
EMERGENCY SERVICE
EMERGENCY SERVICE
Tire Changing Tool ............................................................. 8-1
Jacking Instructions ........................................................... 8-1
Changing Wheels ................................................................ 8-4
Jump Starting Instructions ................................................ 8-5
Towing .................................................................................. 8-6
If the Starter Does Not Operate .......................................... 8-7
If the Engine is Flooded ...................................................... 8-7
If the Engine Overheats ...................................................... 8-8
Warning Triangle ................................................................. 8-9
8
60G411
68PH0-74E
EMERGENCY SERVICE
Tire Changing Tool
Jacking Instructions
WARNING
After using the tire changing tools, be
sure to stow them securely or they
can cause injury if an accident
occurs.
EXAMPLE
(1)
(2)
(3)
EXAMPLE
CAUTION
The jack should be used only to
change wheels. It is important to read
the jacking instructions in this section before attempting to use the
jack.
68PH00802
61MM0B100
1) Place the vehicle on level, hard ground.
2) Set the parking brake firmly and shift
into “P” (Park) if your vehicle has a
CVT, or shift into “R” (Reverse) if your
vehicle has a manual transaxle.
(1) Jack
(2) Wheel brace
(3) Jack handle
The tire changing tools are stowed in the
luggage compartment.
WARNING
(1)
EXAMPLE
68PH00801
To remove the spare tire, turn the bolt (1)
counterclockwise and remove it.
• Be sure to shift into “P” (Park) for a
CVT vehicle, or into “R” (Reverse)
for a manual transaxle vehicle
when you jack up the vehicle.
• Never jack up the vehicle with the
transaxle in “N” (Neutral). Otherwise, unstable jack may cause an
accident.
8-1
68PH0-74E
EMERGENCY SERVICE
3) Turn on the hazard warning flasher if
your vehicle is near traffic.
4) Block the front and rear of the wheel
diagonally opposite of the wheel being
lifted.
5) Place the spare wheel near the wheel
being lifted as shown in the illustration
in case that the jack slips.
EXAMPLE
7) Continue to raise the jack slowly and
smoothly until the tire clears the
ground. Do not raise the vehicle more
than necessary.
WARNING
EXAMPLE
68PH00803
EXAMPLE
• Use the jack only to change wheels
on level, hard ground.
• Never jack up the vehicle on an
inclined surface.
• Never raise the vehicle with the
jack in a location other than the
specified jacking point (shown in
the illustration) near the wheel to
be changed.
• Make sure that the jack is raised at
least 50 mm (2 inch) before it contacts the flange. Use of the jack
when it is within 50 mm (2 inch) of
being fully collapsed may result in
failure of the jack.
• Never get under the vehicle when it
is supported by the jack.
• Never run the engine when the
vehicle is supported by the jack
and never allow passengers to
remain in the vehicle.
68PH00804
6) Position the jack at an angle as shown
in the illustration and raise the jack by
turning the jack handle clockwise until
the jack-head groove fits around the
jacking bar beneath the vehicle body.
8-2
68PH0-74E
EMERGENCY SERVICE
To Raise the Vehicle with a Garage
Jack
Front jacking point for garage jack (1)
Rear jacking point for garage jack (2)
EXAMPLE
• Apply the garage jack to one of the
points indicated below.
• Always support the raised vehicle with
jack stands (Commercially available) at
the points indicated below.
(2)
68PM08001
Application point for jack stand (3)
or two-column lift
EXAMPLE
(1)
EXAMPLE
68PH00805
(3)
(3)
68PH00807
8-3
68PH0-74E
EMERGENCY SERVICE
NOTICE
Never apply a garage jack to the
exhaust pipe, side under spoiler (If
equipped), engine undercover or rear
torsion beam.
NOTE:
For more details, please contact an authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop.
Changing Wheels
To change a wheel, use the following procedure:
1) Clear all passengers and luggage from
the vehicle.
2) Remove the jack, tools and spare
wheel from the vehicle.
3) Loosen, but do not remove the wheel
nuts.
4) Jack up the vehicle.
5) Remove the wheel nuts and wheel.
6) Before installing the new wheel, clean
any mud or dirt off from the surface of
the wheel and hub with a clean cloth.
Clean the hub carefully; it may be hot
from driving.
7) Install the new wheel and replace the
wheel nuts with their cone shaped end
facing the wheel. Tighten each nut
snugly by hand until the wheel is
securely seated on the hub.
EXAMPLE
Loosen
Tighten
68PH00808
Tightening torque for wheel nut
100 Nm (10.2 kg-m, 74.0 lb-ft)
8) Lower the jack and fully tighten the nuts
in a crisscross fashion with a wrench as
shown in the illustration.
WARNING
Use genuine wheel nuts and tighten
them to the specified torque as soon
as possible after changing wheels.
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly
tightened wheel nuts may come
loose or fall off, which can result in
an accident. If you do not have a
torque wrench, have the wheel nut
torque checked by an authorised
Maruti Suzuki workshop.
8-4
68PH0-74E
EMERGENCY SERVICE
Full Wheel Cover (If equipped)
EXAMPLE
(1)
(2)
68PH00809
(1) or (2) Flat end tool
Your vehicle includes two tools, a wheel
brace and a jack crank, one of which has a
flat end.
Use the tool with the flat end to remove the
full wheel cap, as shown above.
EXAMPLE
68PH00810
When installing the cover, make sure that it
is positioned so that it does not cover or
foul the air valve.
Jump Starting Instructions
WARNING
• Never attempt to jump start your
vehicle if the battery appears to be
frozen. Batteries in this condition
may explode or rupture if jump
starting is attempted.
• When making jump lead connections, be certain that your hands
and the jump leads remain clear
from pulleys, belts, or fans.
• Batteries
produce
flammable
hydrogen gas. Keep flames and
sparks away from the battery or an
explosion may occur. Never smoke
when working in the vicinity of the
battery.
• If the booster battery you use for
jump starting is installed in another
vehicle, make sure the two vehicles
are not touching each other.
• If your battery discharges repeatedly, for no apparent reason, have
your vehicle inspected by an
authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop.
• To avoid harm to yourself or damage to your vehicle or battery, follow the jump starting instructions
below precisely and in order.
If you are in doubt, call for qualified
road service.
NOTICE
Your vehicle should not be started by
pushing or towing. This starting
method could result in permanent
damage to the catalytic converter.
Use jump leads to start a vehicle with
a weak or flat battery.
When Jump Starting Your Vehicle,
Use the Following Procedure:
1) Use only a 12-volt battery to jump start
your vehicle. Position the good 12-volt
battery close to your vehicle so that the
jump leads will reach both batteries.
When using a battery installed on
another vehicle, DO NOT LET THE
VEHICLES TOUCH. Set the parking
brakes fully on both vehicles.
2) Turn off all vehicle accessories, except
those necessary for safety reasons (for
example, headlights or hazard lights).
8-5
68PH0-74E
EMERGENCY SERVICE
WARNING
Never connect the jump lead directly
to the negative (–) terminal of the discharged battery, or an explosion may
occur.
(1)
CAUTION
(3)
EXAMPLE
(2)
68PH00811
3) Make jump lead connections as follows:
1. Connect one end of the first jump
lead to the positive (+) terminal of
the flat battery (1).
2. Connect the other end to the positive
(+) terminal of the booster battery
(2).
3. Connect one end of the second jump
lead to the negative (–) terminal of
the booster battery (2).
4. Make the final connection to an
unpainted, heavy metal part (i.e.
engine mount bracket (3)) of the
engine of the vehicle with the flat
battery (1).
Connect the jump lead to the engine
mount bracket securely. If the jump
lead disconnects from the engine
mount bracket because of vibration
at the start of the engine, the jump
lead could be caught in the drive
belts.
4) If the booster battery you are using is
fitted to another vehicle, start the
engine of the vehicle with the booster
battery. Run the engine at moderate
speed.
5) Start the engine of the vehicle with the
flat battery.
6) Remove the jump leads in the exact
reverse order in which you connected
them.
Towing
If you need to have your vehicle towed,
contact a professional service. Your dealer
can provide you with detailed towing
instructions.
NOTICE
To help avoid damage to your vehicle
during towing, proper equipment and
towing procedures must be used.
2-Wheel Drive (2WD) CVT
CVT vehicles may be towed using either of
the following methods.
1) From the front, with the front wheels
lifted and the rear wheels on the
ground. Before towing, make sure that
the parking brake is released.
2) From the rear, with the rear wheels
lifted and a dolly under the front wheels.
NOTICE
Towing the 2WD vehicle with the
front wheels on the ground can result
in damage to the CVT.
8-6
68PH0-74E
EMERGENCY SERVICE
2-Wheel Drive (2WD) Manual
Transaxle
Manual transaxle vehicles may be towed
using either of the following methods.
1) From the front, with the front wheels
lifted and the rear wheels on the
ground. Before towing, make sure that
the parking brake is released.
2) From the rear, with the rear wheels
lifted and the front wheels on the
ground, provided the steering and
drivetrain are in operational condition.
Before towing, make sure that transaxle
is in neutral, the steering wheel is
unlocked (Vehicle without keyless push
start system - the ignition key should be
in the “ACC” position) (Vehicle with keyless push start system - the ignition
mode is “ACC”), and the steering wheel
is secured with a clamping device
designed for towing service.
If the Starter Does Not
Operate
1) Try turning the ignition switch to the
“START” position or try pressing the
engine switch to change the ignition
mode to “START” with the headlights
turned on to determine the battery condition. If the headlights go excessively
dim or go off, it usually means that
either the battery is flat or the battery
terminal contact is poor. Recharge the
battery or correct battery terminal contact as necessary.
2) If the headlights remain bright, check
the fuses. If the reason for failure of the
starter is not obvious, there may be a
major electrical problem. Have the vehicle inspected by your authorised Maruti
Suzuki workshop.
If the Engine is Flooded
If the engine is flooded with fuel, it may be
hard to start. If this happens, press the
accelerator pedal all the way to the floor
and hold it there while cranking the engine.
• For petrol engine model, do not operate
the starter motor for more than 12 seconds.
• For diesel engine model, do not operate
the starter motor for more than 30 seconds.
NOTE:
If the engine refuses to start, the starter
motor automatically stops after a certain
period of time. After the starter motor has
automatically stopped or there is anything
abnormal in the engine starting system,
the starter motor runs only while the
engine switch is pressed/ignition switch is
in “on” position.
NOTICE
The steering column is not strong
enough to withstand shocks transmitted from the front wheels during
towing. Always unlock the steering
wheel before towing.
8-7
68PH0-74E
EMERGENCY SERVICE
If the Engine Overheats
The engine could overheat temporarily
under severe driving conditions. If the
engine coolant temperature gauge indicates overheating during driving:
1) Turn off the air conditioner, if equipped.
2) Take the vehicle to a safe place and
park.
3) Let the engine run at the normal idle
speed for a few minutes until the indicator is within the normal, acceptable temperature range between “H” and “C”.
WARNING
If you see or hear escaping steam,
stop the vehicle in a safe place and
immediately turn off the engine to let
it cool. Do not open the hood when
steam is present. When the steam
can no longer be seen or heard, open
the hood to see if the coolant is still
boiling. If it is, you must wait until it
stops boiling before you proceed.
If the temperature indication does not
come down to within the normal, acceptable range:
1) Turn off the engine and check that the
water pump belt and pulleys are not
damaged or slipping. If any abnormality
is found, correct it.
2) Check the coolant level in the reservoir.
If it is found to be lower than the “LOW”
line, look for leaks at the radiator, water
pump, and radiator and heater hoses. If
you locate any leaks that may have
caused the overheating, do not run the
engine until these problems have been
corrected.
3) If you do not find a leak, carefully add
coolant to the reservoir and then the
radiator, if necessary. (Refer to “Engine
Coolant” in the “INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE” section.)
EXAMPLE
79J007
EXAMPLE
NOTE:
If your engine overheats and you are
unsure what to do, contact your authorised
Maruti Suzuki workshop.
65D350d
8-8
68PH0-74E
EMERGENCY SERVICE
WARNING
• It is hazardous to remove the radiator cap (Or degassing tank cap for
a diesel engine) when the water
temperature is high, because
scalding fluid and steam may be
blown out under pressure. The cap
should only be taken off when the
coolant temperature has lowered.
• To help prevent personal injury,
keep hands, tools and clothing
away from the engine cooling fan
and
air-conditioner
fan
(If
equipped). These electric fans can
automatically turn on without warning.
Warning Triangle
EXAMPLE
MHO07001
In case of vehicle break-down or during
emergency stopping, where, your vehicle
could become a potential traffic hazard,
keep the warning triangle, provided with
your vehicle, on the road free from any
obstacles behind your vehicle so as to
warn the approaching traffic, at an approximate distance of 50-100 m. The reflecting
side of the triangle should face the on coming traffic. Please activate the hazard
warning lamps before alighting the vehicle
to keep the warning triangle.
EXAMPLE
• Remove the warning triangle carefully
from the cover as shown by arrow 1.
• Open both the reflector arms as shown
by arrow and lock the arms with each
other with the clip provided in the right
arm. Open the bottom stand in counter
clock-wise direction as shown by arrow
3. Position the warning triangle behind
the vehicle on a plain surface.
• Reverse the removal procedure for keeping inside the cover.
EXAMPLE
MHO07015
MHO07014
8-9
68PH0-74E
APPEARANCE CARE
APPEARANCE CARE
Corrosion Prevention ......................................................... 9-1
Vehicle Cleaning ................................................................. 9-2
60G412
9
68PH0-74E
APPEARANCE CARE
Corrosion Prevention
It is important to take good care of your
vehicle to protect it from corrosion. Listed
below are instructions for how to maintain
your vehicle to prevent corrosion. Please
read and follow these instructions carefully.
Important Information About Corrosion
Common causes of corrosion
1) Accumulation of road salt, dirt, moisture, or chemicals in hard-to-reach
areas of the vehicle underbody or
frame.
2) Chipping, scratches and any damage to
treated or painted metal surfaces
resulting from minor accidents or abrasion by stones and gravel.
Environmental conditions which accelerate corrosion
1) Road salt, dust control chemicals, sea
air or industrial pollution will all accelerate the corrosion of metal.
2) High humidity will increase the rate of
corrosion particularly when the temperature range is just above the freezing point.
3) Moisture in certain areas of a vehicle
for an extended period of time may promote corrosion even though other body
sections may be completely dry.
4) High temperatures will cause an accelerated rate of corrosion to parts of the
vehicle which are not well ventilated to
permit quick drying.
This information illustrates the necessity of
keeping your vehicle (Particularly the
underbody) as clean and dry as possible. It
is equally important to repair any damage
to the paint or protective coatings as soon
as possible.
How to Help Prevent Corrosion
Wash your vehicle frequently
The best way to preserve the finish on your
vehicle and to help avoid corrosion is to
keep it clean with frequent washing.
Wash your vehicle at least once during the
winter and once immediately after the winter. Keep your vehicle, particularly the
underside, as clean and dry as possible.
If you frequently drive on salted roads,
your vehicle should be washed at least
once a month during the winter. If you live
near the ocean, your vehicle should be
washed at least once a month throughout
the year.
For washing instructions, refer to the “Vehicle Cleaning” section.
Remove foreign material deposits
Foreign material such as salts, chemicals,
road oil or tar, tree sap, bird droppings and
industrial fall-out may damage the finish of
your vehicle if it is left on painted surfaces.
Remove these types of deposits as quickly
as possible. If these deposits are difficult to
wash off, an additional cleaner may be
required. Be sure that any cleaner you use
is not harmful to painted surfaces and is
specifically intended for your purposes.
Follow the manufacturer’s directions when
using these special cleaners.
Repair finish damage
Carefully examine your vehicle for damage
to the painted surfaces. If you find any
chips or scratches in the paint, touch them
up immediately to prevent corrosion from
starting. If the chips or scratches have
gone through to the bare metal, have a
qualified body shop make the repair.
Keep passenger and luggage compartments clean
Moisture, dirt or mud can accumulate
under the floor mats and may cause corrosion. Occasionally, check under these
mats to ensure that this area is clean and
dry. More frequent checks are necessary if
the vehicle is used off road or in wet
weather.
Certain cargos such as chemicals, fertilizers, cleaners, salts, etc. are extremely corrosive by nature. These products should
be transported in sealed containers. If a
9-1
68PH0-74E
APPEARANCE CARE
spill or leak does occur, clean and dry the
area immediately.
Store your vehicle in a dry, well-ventilated area
Do not park your vehicle in a damp, poorly
ventilated area. If you often wash your
vehicle in the garage or if you frequently
drive it in when wet, your garage may be
damp. The high humidity in the garage
may cause or accelerate corrosion. A wet
vehicle may corrode even in a heated
garage if the ventilation is poor.
Vehicle Cleaning
Cleaning the Interior
EXAMPLE
WARNING
Do not apply additional undercoating
or rust preventive coating on or
around exhaust system components
such as the catalytic converter,
exhaust pipes, etc. A fire could be
started if the undercoating substance
becomes overheated.
76G044S
WARNING
When cleaning the interior or exterior
of the vehicle, NEVER USE flammable
solvents such as lacquer thinners,
petrol, benzene or cleaning materials
such as bleaches or strong household detergents. The materials could
cause personal injury or damage to
the vehicle.
Vinyl upholstery
Prepare a solution of soap or mild detergent mixed with warm water. Apply the
solution to the vinyl with a sponge or soft
cloth and let it soak for a few minutes to
loosen dirt.
Rub the surface with a clean, damp cloth
to remove dirt and the soap solution. If
some dirt still remains on the surface,
repeat this procedure.
Fabric upholstery
Remove loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner.
Using a mild soap solution, rub stained
areas with a clean damp cloth. To remove
soap, rub the areas again with a cloth
dampened with water. Repeat this until the
stain is removed, or use a commercial fabric cleaner for tougher stains. If you use a
fabric cleaner, carefully follow the manufacturer’s instructions and precautions.
9-2
68PH0-74E
APPEARANCE CARE
Leather upholstery
Remove loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner.
Using a mild soap or saddle soap solution,
wipe dirt off with a clean damp soft cloth.
To remove soap, wipe the areas again with
a soft cloth dampened with water. Wipe the
areas dry with a soft dry cloth. Repeat this
until the dirt or stain is removed, or use a
commercial leather cleaner for tougher dirt
or stains. If you use a leather cleaner,
carefully follow the manufacturer’s instructions and precautions. Do not use solvent
type cleaners or abrasive cleaners.
NOTE:
• In order to keep leather upholstery looking good, it should be cleaned at least
twice a year.
• If leather upholstery becomes wet,
immediately wipe it dry with tissue paper
or a soft cloth. Water may cause leather
to harden and shrink if it is not wiped off.
• When parking on sunny days, select a
shady place or use a sunshade. If
leather upholstery is exposed to direct
sunlight for a long time, it may discolor
and shrink.
• As it is common with natural materials,
leather is inherently irregular in grain and
cowhide has spots in its natural state.
These do not affect the performance of
the leather in any way.
Seat belts
Clean seat belts with a mild soap and
water. Do not use bleach or dye on the
belts. They may weaken the fabric in the
belts.
Vinyl floor mats
Ordinary dirt can be removed from vinyl
with water or mild soap. Use a brush to
help loosen dirt. After the dirt is loosened,
rinse the mat thoroughly with water and
dry it in the shade.
Carpets
Remove dirt and soil as much as possible
with a vacuum cleaner. Using a mild soap
solution, rub stained areas with a clean
damp cloth. To remove soap, rub the areas
again with a cloth dampened with water.
Repeat this until the stain is removed, or
use a commercial carpet cleaner for
tougher stains. If you use a carpet cleaner,
carefully follow the manufacturer’s instructions and precautions.
Instrument panel and console
Remove loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner.
Gently wipe dirt off with a tightly squeezed
damp clean cloth. Repeat this until the dirt
is removed.
NOTICE
Do not use chemical products that
contain silicon to wipe electrical
components such as the air conditioning system, audio, navigation
system, or other switches. These will
cause damage to the components.
Cleaning the Exterior
NOTICE
It is important that your vehicle be
kept clean and free from dirt. Failure
to keep your vehicle clean may result
in fading of the paint or corrosion to
various parts of the vehicle body.
Caring for Aluminum Wheels
NOTE:
• Do not use an acidic or alkaline detergent, or a cleaner containing petroleum
solvent to wash aluminum wheels.
These types of cleaner will cause permanent spots, discoloration and cracks
on finished surfaces and damage to center caps.
• Do not use a bristle brush and soap containing an abrasive material. These will
damage finished surfaces.
9-3
68PH0-74E
APPEARANCE CARE
Washing
When washing the vehicle, park it where
direct sunlight does not fall on it and follow
the instructions below:
1) Flush the underside of body and wheel
housings with pressurized water to
remove mud and debris. Use plenty of
water.
EXAMPLE
NOTICE
60B212S
WARNING
• Never attempt to wash and wax
your vehicle with the engine running.
• When cleaning the underside of the
body and fender, where there may
be sharp-edged parts, you should
wear gloves and a long-sleeved
shirt to protect your hands and
arms from being cut.
• After washing your vehicle, carefully test the brakes before driving
to make sure they have maintained
their normal effectiveness.
When washing the vehicle:
• Avoid directing steam or hot water
of more than 80°C (176°F) on plastic parts.
• To avoid damaging engine components, do not use pressurized
water in the engine compartment.
2) Rinse the body to loosen the dirt.
Remove dirt and mud from the body
exterior with running water. You may
use a soft sponge or brush. Do not use
hard materials which can scratch the
paint or plastic. Remember that the
headlight covers or lenses are made of
plastic in many cases.
NOTICE
To avoid damage to the paint or plastic surface, do not wipe the dirt off
without ample water. Be sure to follow above procedure.
3) Wash the entire exterior with a mild
detergent or car wash soap using a
sponge or soft cloth. The sponge or
cloth should be frequently soaked in the
soap solution.
NOTICE
When using a commercial car wash
product, observe the cautions specified by the manufacturer. Never use
strong household detergents or
soaps.
4) Once the dirt has been completely
removed, rinse off the detergent with
running water.
5) After rinsing, wipe off the vehicle body
with a wet chamois or cloth and allow it
to dry in the shade.
9-4
68PH0-74E
APPEARANCE CARE
6) Check carefully for damage to painted
surfaces. If there is any damage,
“touch-up” the damage following the
procedure below:
1. Clean all damaged spots and allow
them to dry.
2. Stir the paint and “touch-up” the
damaged spots lightly using a small
brush.
3. Allow the paint to dry completely.
Waxing
EXAMPLE
NOTICE
If you use an automatic car wash,
make sure that your vehicle’s body
parts, such as spoilers, cannot be
damaged. If you are in doubt, consult
the car wash operator for advice.
60B211S
After washing the vehicle, waxing and polishing are recommended to further protect
and beautify the paint.
• Only use waxes and polishes of good
quality.
• When using waxes and polishes,
observe the precautions specified by the
manufacturers.
9-5
68PH0-74E
GENERAL INFORMATION
GENERAL INFORMATION
Vehicle Identification .......................................................... 10-1
FASTag (if equipped) .......................................................... 10-2
84MM01001
10
68PH0-74E
GENERAL INFORMATION
Vehicle Identification
also used to assist your dealer when
ordering or referring to special service
information. Whenever you have occasion
to consult your authorised Maruti Suzuki
workshop, remember to identify your vehicle with this number. If you find the number
difficult to read, you will also find it on the
identification plate.
Chassis Serial Number
EXAMPLE
Engine Serial Number
EXAMPLE
60G128
68PH01001
The engine serial number is stamped on
the cylinder block as shown in the
illustration.
EXAMPLE
68PH01002
The chassis and/or engine serial numbers
are used to register the vehicle. They are
10-1
68PH0-74E
GENERAL INFORMATION
FASTag (if equipped)
As seen from inside of the vehicle
As per Ministry of Road Transport and
Highways, the FASTag (1) is mandatory for
each vehicle for the purpose of electronic
toll collection or any other purpose as may
be defined by the Government of India.
In case of any damage to FASTag or
replacement of front windscreen, please
contact your nearest authorised Maruti
Suzuki workshop.
EXAMPLE
(1)
64MM01001
EXAMPLE
As seen from outside of the vehicle
EXAMPLE
Easy to Cruise
!
Please do not peel off the tag, as it
would permanently damage the tag
xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx
4
64MM01002
64MM01003
NOTE:
The picture shown is for indicative purpose
only. Internal structure of actual device
mounted on vehicle may be different.
NOTE:
The picture shown is for indicative purpose
only. Internal structure of actual device
mounted on vehicle may be different.
NOTE:
• Any attempt to remove the tag from the
windscreen will result in permanent damage to the tag.
• Use of chemical cleaners to clean the
windscreen area where the tag is
mounted can damage the tag.
• Use of any sharp objects on the tag can
damage the tag.
10-2
68PH0-74E
SPECIFICATIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
NOTE:
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
M/T: Manual transaxle
CVT: Continuously variable transaxle
Petrol: Petrol engine model
Diesel: Diesel engine model
ITEM: Dimensions
Overall length
UNIT: mm
3995
Overall width
Overall height
Wheelbase
Front
Track
Rear
1745
1510
2520
1515
1505
1525
1515
170
185/65R15 tire
195/55R16 tire
185/65R15 tire
195/55R16 tire
Ground clearance (Unladen condition)
ITEM: Mass (Weight)
Kerb mass (Weight)
Gross vehicle mass (Weight) rating
Permissible maximum Axle Weight
UNIT: kg
Petrol
Diesel
K10C
K12M
D13A
M/T
950
865 - 890
960 – 985
CVT
–
910 - 935
–
M/T
1360
1340
1430
CVT
–
1360
–
Front
810
Rear
760
11-1
68PH0-74E
SPECIFICATIONS
ITEM: Engine
Type
K10C (DOHC)
K12M (DOHC)
D13A (DOHC)
3
4
4
Bore
73.0 mm
73.0 mm
69.6 mm
Stroke
79.5 mm
71.5 mm
82.0 mm
Piston displacement
998 cm3
1197 cm3
1248 cm3
Compression ratio
10.0 : 1
11.0 : 1
17.6 : 1
Number of cylinders
ITEM: Electrical
Standard spark plug
Battery
Petrol
Petrol
Diesel
Fuses
K10C
NGK ILZKR7D8
K12M
NGK LKR6F-10
K10C
55B24L
K12M
34B19L
DIN55LMF or DIN50LMF
See “INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE” section.
11-2
68PH0-74E
SPECIFICATIONS
ITEM: Lights
WATTAGE
12V 60/55W
H4
12V 25W
D8S
Front fog light (If equipped)
12V 35W
H8 / PSX24W
Position light (Vehicle with the halogen headlights)
12V 5W
W5W
LED
–
Front
12V 21W
PY21W
Rear
12V 21W
PY21W
(On fender)
12V 5W
WY5W
LED
–
Headlight
Halogen
BULB No.
Discharge
Position light & Daytime running light
(Vehicle with the discharge headlights)
Turn signal light
Side turn signal light
(On outside rear view mirror)
Tail/brake light
LED
–
High mount stop light
LED
–
Reversing light
12V 16W
W16W
License plate light
12V 5W
W5W
LED
–
Front (If equipped)
12V 5W
W5W
Center
12V 10W
C10W
Luggage compartment
(If equipped)
12V 5W
W5W
Glove box light
(If equipped)
12V 1.4W
W1.4W
Courtesy light
(If equipped)
12V 5W
W5W
Footwell light
(If equipped)
Interior light
11-3
68PH0-74E
SPECIFICATIONS
ITEM: Wheels and Tires
Tire size, front and rear
185/65R15 88S*1, 195/55R16 87H*1
Rim size
185/65R15 tire: 15X5 1/2J
195/55R16 tire: 16X6J
Tire pressures
For the specified tire pressure, see the Tire Information
Label located on the driver’s door lock pillar.
Recommended snow tire
185/65R15*2 or 195/55R16*2
Tire size, spare*3
For vehicle equipped with 195/55R16 tire
185/65R15 (Steel wheel)
For vehicle equipped with 185/65R15 tire
185/65R15 (Steel wheel)
*1 If you cannot prepare tires with the specified load index rate and speed symbol, prepare tires with higher load index rate and speed
symbol.
*2 If you prepare snow tires;
• Make sure they are tires of the same size, structure and load capacity as the originally installed tires.
• Mount the snow tires on all four wheels.
• Please understand that the maximum permissible speed of snow tires is generally less than the originally installed tires.
Consult your authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop or supplier for further information.
*3 The spare wheel provided with alloy wheel variant is of steel wheel rim, hence follow 4 tire rotation only. (Refer: Section Inspection
and Maintenance)
11-4
68PH0-74E
SPECIFICATIONS
ITEM: Recommended Fuel/Lubricants and Capacities (approx.)
Fuel
See “FUEL RECOMMENDATION” section.
37 L
K10C
Classification: API SL, SM and SN
Viscosity: SAE 5W-30
2.9 L
(Replacement with oil filter)
K12M
Classification: API SL, SM and SN
Viscosity: SAE 0W-20
3.1 L
(Replacement with oil filter)
Classification: ACEA A5/B5
Viscosity: SAE 5W-30
3.1 L
(Replacement with oil filter)
Petrol
Engine oil
Diesel
Petrol
K10C
5M/T
K12M
5M/T
K12M
CVT
Engine coolant
4.3 L
(Including reservoir tank)
See “INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE”
section.
Manual transaxle oil
4.3 L
(Including reservoir tank)
5.9 L
(Including reservoir tank)
Diesel
Petrol
4.1 L
(Including reservoir tank)
K10C
K12M
2.6 L
MARUTI GENUINE GEAR OIL 75W-80
Diesel
1.5 L
2.6 L
Continuously variable transmission (CVT) fluid
SUZUKI CVT FLUID GREEN-2
5.7 L
Brake fluid / Clutch fluid
MARUTI GENUINE BRAKE FLUID (MGBF)
or DOT 3.
Refill to the proper oil level according to the instructions in the
“INSPECTION
AND
MAINTENANCE” section.
11-5
68PH0-74E
For latest Service Network details kindly visit
mentioned below.
MARUTI SUZUKI SERVICE NETWORK (AS ON )
www.nexaexperience.com or contact our regional office / area office as
REGIONAL OFFICE (NORTH-I) MARUTI SUZUKI INDIA LIMITED
PLOT NO. 1, NELSON MANDELA ROAD, VASANT KUNJ, NEW DELHI-110070
PH : (011) 46781000, 46150291
WEST UP, UTTARAKHAND, DELHI, GURGAON, FARIDABAD, NOIDA,
GHAZIABAD, REWARI, MAHENDRAGARH, NORTH-UP
REGIONAL OFFICE (NORTH-II) MARUTI SUZUKI INDIA LIMITED
S.C.O. 39-40, SECTOR 8-C, MADHYA MARG, CHANDIGARH-160008
PH : (0172) 2780057, 2781352, 2540787
PUNJAB, CHANDIGARH, JAMMU & KASHMIR
REGIONAL OFFICE (NORTH-III) MARUTI SUZUKI INDIA LIMITED
G.F., B-I BLOCK, PICUP BHAWAN, VIBHUTI KHAND, GOMTI NAGAR, LUCKNOW-226010
PH : (0522) 2720931-34
PART OF U.P. AND UTTARAKHAND
REGIONAL OFFICE (NORTH-IV) MARUTI SUZUKI INDIA LIMITED
S.C.O. 81, FIRST FLOOR, SECTOR 5, PANCHKULA-134109
PH : (0172) 2590056, 2580056
HARYANA, HIMACHAL PRADESH
REGIONAL OFFICE (NORTH-V) MARUTI SUZUKI INDIA LIMITED
7TH FLOOR, POOJA TOWER, 3 GOPALPURA BY-PASS, TONK ROAD, JAIPUR-302018
PH : 0141-5157000, 5118006 / 7
RAJASTHAN
REGIONAL OFFICE (EAST-I) MARUTI SUZUKI INDIA LIMITED
L & T CHAMBERS, 4TH FLOOR, 16 CAMAC STREET, KOLKATA-700 017
PH : (033) 22835252-54
WEST BENGAL, SIKKIM, ANDAMAN & NICOBAR
REGIONAL OFFICE (EAST-II) MARUTI SUZUKI INDIA LIMITED
401, 4TH FLOOR, ROHINI APARTMENT, OPPOSITE HOTEL APSARA, 56 CIRCULAR ROAD,
NEAR LALPUR CHOWK, RANCHI-834001, PH : (0651) 2563931
BIHAR, JHARKHAND
REGIONAL OFFICE (EAST-III) MARUTI SUZUKI INDIA LIMITED
5A, 5TH FLOOR, ABOVE CITY MART SHOPPING MALL, 724, PEACE ENCLAVE, ULUBARI,
GUWAHATI–781 007, ASSAM PH.: (0361) 2734308/ 10/ 11/ 12
REGIONAL OFFICE (EAST-IV) MARUTI SUZUKI INDIA LIMITED
"vvˆViÊ œ°ÊÈäx]ÊÈäÈ]ÊÈ̅ʏœœÀ]Ê1̎>Ê-ˆ}˜>ÌÕÀi]Ê*>…>]Ê ‡x]ʅÕL>˜iÅÜ>ÀʇÊÇxÓ£ä£ ­"`ˆÃ…>®]Ê
*…Ê\ÊäÈÇ{‡ÈÇx£xn£
ARUNACHAL PRADESH, ASSAM, MANIPUR, MEGHALYA, MIZORAM,
NAGALAND, TRIPURA
"-]Ê
/-,
MARUTI SUZUKI SERVICE NETWORK (AS ON )
REGIONAL OFFICE (WEST-I) MARUTI SUZUKI INDIA LIMITED
602, MADHAVA BLDG., BANDRA KURLA COMPLEX, BANDRA (E), MUMBAI-400 051
PH : (022) 2659 0165/0286/0290/0291 FAX : 26590285
MUMBAI, NAVI MUMBAI, THANE, RAIGAD, RATNAGIRI,
SINDHUDURG & GOA
REGIONAL OFFICE (WEST-II) MARUTI SUZUKI INDIA LIMITED
7TH FLOOR, NORTH BLOCK, SACRED WORLD WANOWARIE, PUNE-411040
PH : (020) 64002641 / 2 / 3 /0 4
REST OF MAHARASHTRA
REGIONAL OFFICE (WEST-III) MARUTI SUZUKI INDIA LIMITED
211, ISKON MALL, ABOVE STAR INDIA BAZAAR, SATELLITE ROAD, AHMEDABAD-380015
PH : (079) 40036660/40036671
GUJARAT , DADRA & NAGAR HAVELI, DAMAN AND DIU
REGIONAL OFFICE (WEST-IV) MARUTI SUZUKI INDIA LIMITED
3RD FLOOR, COMMERCE HOUSE, 7 RACE COURSE ROAD, INDORE-452001
PH : (0731) 4069481, 4069382 FAX : 4069382
MADHYA PRADESH
REGIONAL OFFICE (SOUTH-I) MARUTI SUZUKI INDIA LIMITED
7TH FLOOR, CAPITAL TOWERS, 180, KODAMBAKKAM HIGH ROAD, NUNGAMBAKKAM,
CHENNAI - 600 034 PH: (044) 28233050-53 FAX: (044) 28242059
TAMILNADU, PONDICHERRY
REGIONAL OFFICE (SOUTH-II) MARUTI SUZUKI INDIA LIMITED
204, 2ND FLOOR, “EMBASSY CLASSIC”, VITTAL MALLYA ROAD, BENGALURU-560001
PH. : (080) 22127384-85, 5112017-18 FAX : (080) 22484841
KARNATAKA
REGIONAL OFFICE (SOUTH-III) MARUTI SUZUKI INDIA LIMITED
2ND FLOOR, TUTUS TOWER, NH-47 BYPASS, PADIVATTOM, COCHIN-682024
PH. : (0484) 4088400
KERALA, LAKSHADWEEP
REGIONAL OFFICE (SOUTH-IV) MARUTI SUZUKI INDIA LIMITED
MAHAVIR CHAMBERS, DOOR NO. 3-6-363 & 3-6-1/1, CHAMBER NO. 101 & 102, 1ST FLOOR,
LIBERY SQUARE, HIMYATNAGAR, HYDERABAD PH : (040) 66729999
ANDHRA PRADESH, TELANGANA
-!254) 35:5+)3%26)#%.%47/2+!3 /. DETAILS OF AREA OFFICES
A
O
L
Agra
A
O
A
Maruti Suzuki India Limited, 7th Floor, B-15/8, Shri Vrindavan Tower Sanjay Palace,
Agra - 282001, Ph. : 0562-4052646
Bhopal
Maruti Suzuki India Limited, 522, 5th Floor, Corporate Zone, Ashima Mall,
Hoshangabod Road, Bhopal-462026, Ph: 0755 - 6051555
Calicut
Maruti Suzuki India Limited, 1st Floor, Central Arcade, Bye pass Road, Puthyara
Calicut - 673 004, Ph: +91 495 2723151
Coimbatore
Dehradun
Maruti Suzuki India Limited, A-203, 2nd Floor, Raheja Center, Avinashi Road,
Coimbatore 641018, Ph: (0422)-2242109
Maruti Suzuki India Limited, 70 Rajpur Road, Opp Madhuban Hotel, Dehradun 248001, Ph: 0135-2740549
Hubli
Maruti Suzuki India Limited, Shiva Avenue, 2nd Floor, Gokul Road, Hubli - 580030,
Ph: 0836-4259447
Jammu
Maruti Suzuki India Limited, Area Office - N2, Holl No. 116, Fast Flour, A-2, South
Block, Bahu Plaza, Jammu
Ludhiana
Maruti Suzuki India Limited, Sco No. 16/17, 4Th Floor, Fortune Chambers, Feroze
Gandhi Market, Ludhiana-141001, Ph: 0161-4649763, 4649765
0$587,68=8.,6(59,&(1(7:25.$621
DETAILS OF AREA OFFICES
A
O
L
O
A
0DGXUDL
0DUXWL6X]XNL,QGLD/LPLWHGUG)ORRU$'57RZHUV.DODYDVDO7KHQL%\SDVV5RDG
0DGXUDL3K
1DJSXU
0DUXWL6X]XNL,QGLD/LPLWHG3ORW1RVW)ORRU1DUD\DQL+RXVH+LOO5RDG
'KDVDPSHWK([W1DJSXU3K
1DVKLN
0DUXWL6X]XNL,QGLD/LPLWHGQG)ORRU5XVKLUDM7RZHUV*DUJDSXU5RDG1DVKLN
3K
3DWQD
0DUXWL6X]XNL,QGLD/LPLWHG$*3OD]D(DVW%RULQJ&DQDO5RDG$GM6W-RKQV
6FKRRO3DWQD3K
5DLSXU
0DUXWL6X]XNL,QGLD/LPLWHG0DJQHWR2IIL]R0DJQHWR0DOO/DEKDQGL
5DLSXU&KKDWLVJDUK3K
6XUDW
0DUXWL6X]XNL,QGLD/LPLWHGUG)ORRU6KLYDOLN:HVWHUQ
$ERYH7*%5HVWDXUDQW/36DYDQL5RDG$GDMDQ6XUDW*XMDUDW
7ULYDQGUXP
9LVDNKDSDWQDP
A
0DUXWL6X]XNL,QGLD/LPLWHGWK)ORRU.(.7RZHU2SS3ROLFH+HDG4XDUWHUV
9D]XWKDFDXG7ULYDQGUXP3K
0DUXWL6X]XNL,QGLD/LPLWHGQG)ORRU'XWW,VODQG6LULSXUDP-XPFWLRQ
9LVDNKDSDWQDP3K
!"# $%
"
&
!"# %' &
$
!"# $#' $"$'% $#
()"&
!"# $%
&
&&
* + &&!&)
&,
$"" !''$%#''$"""""
)&
' + $
,
,$"
!' ##"$$$$$
&&&
+"
$$
!'$$ #$'
$
&
&$" !'' %$%$
%
%
#+'-
&
.
&
&&-/
$"$$$'
!'##''$ ' #''$""
),
$ $' "
$ !'%" &"% '"
&,&
$$ !'$$ #$'
'%+
&&$ '
!' "%%""##'$" %%""
#
%"$
)
.),
$ $
!'%$ '$$$
&
&
'($,
$ !'% %# ' $%
"
%"(
$"$++&,
&
,
$
! $" "$ +#
,
$'
!'$' $ $%%
$
3
3
%,
$ !'% #''#''" "
&
&
% &,
$ !'% $ $#
"
" )&
&22&22
$
+
,
.
,$"'
!'##'#$%"#
""
),
((((
$$+ %
,,
$ ""%
!'$#%#''"""
%""
&&
(().
/$ !'%% $#''$%'
"
),
'' $
,$ ""
!'$# %
"$
)&
&.&.
%"
(-
,&-
,,$"
!'#$#'#$ "%
'
&
&
''
$++#
,&
'
$ !'%" % %" ## &
&
'' ,
$ !'%%$"%#
)&
..
&.&,
,
$"%
!#$'#" $+ %
%
),
$ )"
&,,
$ %"
!'%#'%%'"
'
&
..
$ "%+",
,,$""
!'' "$ '$
#
#
&
&
%#+"
&
$ !'% $ $#
'
%" % $ "
!'% % 1##''$%$"'"
2 &
)$"
!'' ##'' #$$$
$
&.
0
(
$$"
!'' ' %
%
",&
$%
!'$% %$ $
&
&
'" +,
$
!'$ #'' "
),
$ ## $ "$
!'$##"""$"
&&
+&,
.&
!,$"
!'##''$%%$
"
&
$$
(
.
.)
)
$""
!''" % #
&)&)
)
),,
$" !'##"%%
"'
"#
'
#
%".%#
,,$" !'# '"
&&
#"
$' "
!'%''''####$ $ $
& &$
.
4
&
,!.
$" !''###$
),
,)
$ !'% % "
,
#'#
'"%,&
!' ""$ "
&
&
'# +%%+
$$
!'%$#
&&
,,
%$"$+
(
.
$""
!''$%%'#"'''
$
$
$ $"
$
$$
$%
%
3
3
% %"
).
$ !'%%%" '"%""%'
%" %
'+
).$ '
!'%% $$$"
$'
$
)&
%%%"
#+%
,).,
/$"%
!'# $###'#$%"#
%"%'
$'+ &
,
$&)
$'"
!'# $ $''$
%"%
''&
).,$" %
!'# $"$
%"%( $
&
,
,$"
!'# $"$
)&
%%%
#
,
$"'
!'# $%'"
)&
%%% !$ $
,,
$""
!'#3## %%
',&
&,,
.
,$"
!'##''$""
%"%,
"#"#$
--
-,
$"
!"$$$$
%"'
(
//
$"$
!'# ##%%%##'
$#
$
%" %%
$%+$% +$$%+"$% +%
,).,
$ !'%%#''$"' % %
"+$
%+ ,
).,
$ !'%%##'#%# $$ % %
% %"
&
&$'$
!
!"% '"
&
$$0
#
!"% $" $
&
$$ $ &.
# "
!"% %%"' &
$$
&(
#
!#"%"
&
$'"
&/
#
!"%'#"$' %$+
'
%$
%%
%
.
,/'/
((&
.
!"%%% %"" % "
&
/ "&
'""
!"%%% %%
&
&
'""'"
!"%%##$$%#+ "$'+#'$##'#$'
&5&5
,
''
&,
/&
&$,)
'
!"%#'$ $' $
,
,
$ )
'$
!"$ ##$'"$"'
"
)&
,
&'%
!"" " ' " #"
&&
/-
&
&,-&
-,'"'
!"%#'%$ ''
,
&&
)
"
.
&
,,
'%$
!"#"$$#"'
%
.
+
&)
,&)
' $
!"% "#'$ "#%
%#
)&
''
&
'" '+ #+ /
$"$
!'# $$"%% $$"''""" " %
%'
.
&&
&
&
&"'
-
&
-,
'%
!"$#"$'%
$
%
&
5''5'
&
)
!" ' $$
)&
)&
)&
'%%
!"''#'$%
&
!
,!
+!
!"!
'"
!'%#'$$$
'
,
)" )""#
)
!
'$% !" "%#"%#
#
#
'
'
' '"
'
'$
'%
'
''
'#
&
##
),&.'
!"%%""$$"
&
#"#
&
&.
.&.' !"%#'%$ $$+%
# #
5
((
.(5,
.'
!"% "%"#+# +#" "%# "%'#'
"% ""
.
##
&
.'"%
!"% ""#%# ""#$
&
## &&&
".' '
!"%''% #"+# &
#"#"&
&
/
.'$
!"% " +#'$$#
/
#%#"
&
.' #
!"% "##$
/
#%# "
&
,.
' '
!"%#'% #%%%%
# # "-
)
,
/-&
,/
.-,
'"
!#'%$ ''
.
#$#"
,.
' #
!"%#"$$$$'$"
&
##"&
)
&
.'
!"%#'%$ $
,
!" +"(
)
&,
,
)-
' "$
!"%#$$%'%'
#
)& )
.
' !"%'#"$$%#$ %
# ,
##
)&)
'$
!"%"%#"%#
#"
)
%#
,)''
!"'" % '
#
.
//
5"#
,,-,&
' %
!#%"%%
#$
.
..
$ '$
!"%#$ #%
)),,&
' !" "%
&
# # .,&/&)
&
&'""$
!"% "
,
$ ,
'"
!"$ " " $
.
%5%5
..
$
&
3,'"$
!"%#$#$'
,
## ,
&
&'$%
!" " $
"
)
%#) ,
5
''%
!"' %%% $
%
&)
(
&)&'$"'
!%$$'##% +$$'" (
&
."&' "
!%' #"%'$'''
#
& %
"')
&,
.,
&'"
!# %"%"%%
$
,
$ ))
''
!#"'%'#'$'
%
'
+
&
&5' !%'"' #%"%$+' #%"% .
))
,,
'%'"
!" " $ &"
.
&(&
'"
!% #$ #
&
,/'$
!"%' '#
' '&
)
)&
' $
!%'##% +'##%#
"
&
22
"
,
!#"$$
&
. '&
,&&'$"'
!% $ "$+#'%'"
##
#'
,
"
,.
$ ,'
!"$ " .
.&
"''%'
!"$ #
,
,
%#"%
.,&)&
"
&&'%#
!# $$ $
,
"
&&'%"
!# $$ $
'
,
&%%
&
' "
!%"%" #' "%
.,"&&'$
!# $% %
#
"
"
'
)
)&
' "
!%$% # #+#'%"#
&
,%,"$+%$
)'
!# %"%" %"
#
"
"
%
%&
,
,'$$
!%$ '##% +'##%#
55
!,.
,)
&'$$
!%$% ""+'##%"
"
..
&5
' #
!%'' #%"%" +' #%"%#
)
&("
.,& '
.&'$
!% $ $# "%#%%#
$
%
)
&
/
/((&' !% %%+##"#'+# "%#%
)
& &
/((.' !%"#'+# "$%'
((
",
-&&'$" !'##%'##% '
&)#
,
"$" 0
((
.
&'$
!# %"%" $%
" $' $#+
!% %$#%#""$###
,
&$ $
&)&
'"
!% 0#" #+#" 0
&$"$&
'
!#% ,
$$"
'#&
)
,)'
!% $ '$+##" ""
%%
",&&
&'$" %
!%$ "
#+'###%
"
&'$ !# %"%"'$%
"
,
..,
"##$,
%
&''
!# %%
55
#
&' $
!%'' #%"% +' #%"%$
$
)
&
'""
!# "%#%
%
$
$
'$
.' "%
!%$#'%+#'%" "#
,
&$)&,
.,
&
&/
#"""
! %%
&&&
(
&
#""$
!#% %$
&&&)&&)
&#"'
!## %% %%% '
'""'""
&# %
!''"$
$"
&"""
&#$
!$ %$' $ $
,
&,
"'+ &
#""# #
!'''###'% ,
&
)#
!' "$+ "#'
$
&"# ,
,.
))#$%%'
!'##' %"
$$
,
&$,%/
&",,
-,,#""
! ""
$%
,
)&,.
,.,&
###$
! $$#
$
&"
,
&#$%'
!$# '% '%' '%#
$'
&$ # &
.,&&
! " ''
$#
#
&
&$%"
!#%%#%"'''"
.
,$
* "
%
!#''
$ &,#
! "'$ $"
. .
)&(
.,
,#
!''#' %%"
"'
$
"
"%
# #+%
%
! "$
& .
%
! %$$$$%$%"""
%
"
% #
! $ $
"& %
! $"
& .
"
&,
,
#
!'' ' %
%
&&&
,
+ &
'%%'
!##' %%%%'#
%
&5
&5
,
$%+ -)
#%'
!'''##$$$$'
% %
,
&'
,&
.,&)
!#"%#%
& )
#%
!% ' $'
%$
%%
%
%'
%#
,
&$$
&&/# ! ,
&$$ ,,
# !#
&$ $
,
,)
# !
,
&$$)
.(
&
# "
!# $ $
,
&$$$,
,
# !" $$
,
&$"$
&# %
! &$ $
&,
# !
"
&$ $$
"
&
!## %% %%% "
&$ "
)#"''
! "$$%
'""2
,%
)
#
! # '
'$
$
&
'+
%'
!##%$$$ %"
,
&&(&(
,
' +$' +%
#"$$'
! $"$
%
'%
'
&
&&,
+"+ + $+
%+ &,,
""$
!##' %%%%'#
''
'
'
'
' '"
,
&#''
,..
"#% ! %''%% ##+ #
'#
,
&
"#% "
! %
%$$+$%
#
#
# ))5
''"'"
#
,
)
,.
(
""
!$$$$
))5
''"'("#
,
. !% #%'$$
''
#
. '
!$$"
&
(&&
'#''##
.
!' '
5
&''''
,.
!" %%%%
#"
#
#$
#%
#
#'
'&'
& ,. !%%%'''%%%###
&,
''
"#$)
).#
!%'''"%'''"
&,
'' ,
&
,
&.$
! "$ %% "$ % %
&
'%''#$+')
&."
! &
'%'"
"/
#%
!$"
'& '
.
,
! $#%"$"$'%%$
'"'
.%
!'$#"$ " '"'$
./)
./
.
"
! $"##%## $%%%
,
''
#
,
.%"
!" '''''
''''
#" %
!'
'&'
%'+"
.$
!"" '&' !&,
""
!$#
,
&
''''
,
". !##########
'' ,.
!
''%'(#+&
!$%#%# $ $#
##
"
$
%
'
#
&'''"
,
.""
!'''''
.
'#'
"""
5
,./&
#
!$"""
.
'#' &%
'&.
!'"""
.
'#'
$'(
)#
!#'"'$"""
.
'"'
+#
,
!#"""
&''' &,
,
&
""
! "" $ "'$%
&
'%'$&'".
$
! %'#'
&,
''"
%'(
&&
(
,).
!$%'''''$%'''
''&%+%
,.
!' %"'##"
&'%'%
)(
.
!'"#'+'+ ''$'
)
/
(,,
#""
!%#### '&'',
'
.,.
!##$$#''$$$%%#
,
'#'"
"./
$
! ## $$
"
$
%
.
' '
&#
.%
!#"""#####""
'"'$#+$$,
.$
!####"'''
'$'
#$)
.#
!#''
'"'%'$&)
,.)(
."
!#### '+#### #
'',
'+ .,
"
! "#
'&#'"
,
'+"'+'
'+"+
,
%%,.
!%%''''
'
&&
%+.
&
"$ #
!'" "'$$
#
.
"
!'" %""
"
" %
%+
"
""
!'" %"% %"%"
.
"'
,
&
"
!'" "$ .
"''/"
#+ ,.
"$
!'" $'+$+%
""
$
%
.
"'
(
"%
!'" # #"$%#' ""#
"#
.
$
"+""+
.
(
&
"
!'" %+ '$''##
" +!
5
"'
!'" ''" ##$## #%
.
"''
$'$#
"&
"
!'" ' '
#
"
" '/$
+#
"$
!'" %
.
"' &&
,
)
"
!'" ""+ " !"%+(!&/
"$
!'" # " '
" ,/)
"
!'" #
+
$
"
" ""
((
).
"
!'" " % "## " " .
&,&,
&
"
-
,-
-
"%
!'" %$ "
.
"'&
%&
$
,
"$$
!'" %'
$
"
.
"'%
&
,.,.
"
!'" "## " "$
"%
"
"'
"#
"
" 5
,,
"'
!'" $ $'+ $ %'+ $ %+#'$$$# $ " .
"'#
&
&
"'
!'" $ +'""$"
%
'
#
,
$+"
",
&"'%
!#%$$$$$
,
&
+'&
.)&"'%
!# $"+$
,
&$
,
,&"''
!# %$+ ,
&
&,&
,&."'$
!#" """+" " ,
,)
.
)
&&"'$
! %#$$%
,
&
.,).
&"' !# %'#'%" %'##%$$#$$$
%$ '$$$%$ #$$$
,
"
&
(
&"#$
!# %# %# """
$
$
$ .
$&
.
&"' "
!#%#" " .
&
&
.
&"'$
!#%$$'
,"5
(
,.&)"' "
!#"# &
#+"
,
&
)"' $
!#''%%$$''+'%''''"
$
"+ .
,
&"' ""
!# #$+$"
,
(
""++
,
,
&"' ""
!#% $$$+% $$$
.
#&&
.,
.
&
)"'
!#"# %
%&
-&
&
&-&
)"'$'
!#%##""
,
' ++
,&"'$
!#%$$$$$+$$
$"
('/"
,)&&
!&)"# !#%'%#%
$
##&
)"%$%
! # '###'
$$
( ()
)
"'' ! %# ##' ##'
%$
$%
##
% + +&
,.
"#"
! %% $" + '
$
$'
,
&
2%2 &
,
"
&&
&
)"#"
!# '""+# '%#+ % "
2 &
&
"#%
! % #' $""+#'#$
$#
,
&
&&$+%+
5
.'&),-
,
-&)
"' $
!#%###
%%
%
%'
,
&.
&.&"' $
!$%####
%#
,
&5
&
&.&"'
! " $
,
$) &&&)
&)"
! '" " ('(''
/.&"# ! % ""$%$$
%
##+
&
.
,
&"%
!# '#" #"
5
&
#
! '#'$''" ####$"
((
"
,
'&),
-
-
)"%"$ !' "'##
"
,
&
&
&
&
&
!&
!
"#
! %%" $$"
& )
.
"'#$
! %"
"
$
2'2"
.
"'$$"$
! ##
%
& &"
)
&
"' "$
! % "$%
'
,
&
&,&,
#+"+
)"#%$
! %"" %
#
#,&
.(,,
)"%$%
! ' % #%%###' % """$ '
'
'$
#
.
,
"%""
! $ ' "
'%
& & &
"
'"' '
!# " %# +#"+#
'
'"
&
, (
""$
.
" ! '"% """
&
, "
#+ %
.
,)"
!# $
&&,&,
+%+'
-
.)
-)"'#"$
! %' ''
55
$%,,
.
&
.
)"%"""
! $' ##
'#
,
%%
"'"
! 3#' $%
#
,
55
%#&)
!
&,"'""
!'$$##
#
# ' $$"$'&
.
,),
.
"%"
! ' $ ##$
'
& + .
)"'#
! % %$"% %$""%$"'
& .
!
"'#
! % % #
& $&
&"'#"'
! %$ %"
&)&)&
-.&
-
)"''$
! %$#$'%
% ,
&
&
,!,
"#"$
! %%$
"+
%
,
$$
$+%+/.
&))"
! '" '" " $"+$
%
## '$'+ &
&
&"%
! ' $% % # ' ##%+'
&),
.
&)"%
! '# ' $# '#"
##$
#
"+"+ )
&
)
.
&!&)
"%
! '##### %# '#""%
((
%#)
)"%
! ''"
(("%
)"%
! '' $$ $
#"
$$"
&#
$"
,
),
.
)),
)"%$
! ' #
% ###$ #
(
,,
,
.&
),
.
))"%"
! ' "##'##''%
#$
(
$$ ,'%
$+
+++(
)"% !#'#$'$ ,,
!,!"' $
! % #
& &(. % %',
.
,
"'" '
! % '+' +'"
#'
//
'$+'&
,
',)
)
"# ! %$ $' ' + $'$'$
##
&(&(
+'+#),
.)
,&,,&
)"''% ! %$####%%
""
,
&..
% ),
'
,"#
! % "' + $ "$$$$
&&
%+
&),
.
)"%" ! $' % % )
5&
)"% #
! ' % %+# '#"
"$
,
..
'
).
!&
)"' "
! $#''"# $
" ,
$ %
)
%
6&
7
,"%$
! '" #$+
""
& &
)"' '$
!# # "
"$
2'
'
&
.).
"'
! % # #" #
$$"&.'
" '
,
,
),
)"% !## %''
"%
,
% )
&,
"'""$
! 3'$$##$
%// #%+#
,&
)
"#$
! %
%%+ ''
"
$
.
&-
)"#
! %% ""$$+ ""%%
"'
"#
2'2'
&&.
"'$
! $+ $##+ $
2''
$+ ,
.
"'$&,
)"'$
! %$%%$
2# ."' %$
! %%%%'%%'%
"
(%$
'
.
&
&)
"%$
! '% # " "
,
%+
&,)
.,
,)&,
)"'" $
!#% '''
" " $
" %
" " '
"
" "#
,
&
22
'#
'
,
)
"#%%"
! %""+""#
,
&/(
&
5,
&
'&
,!,
"' ! % # '%''%%$#"
( )5
"'"
! %' $'#' $'#'
"'
&
, ) ,)
" ! '"' #% "
#
),&.
,/,!
))"%
! '' '%$
" "%
(
$$ 5$
"$+ )
&
&
&
)"%"%
!#'#$'$ ###$'## $##$%#
"
.)
"'
! % $$$ "
"
"
&&&
#3&
.
..,.
)"'# "
!#'# %#'#' $#%"##$'%%"
"
#%
" " #
$$"$$
&,
),
"%
! ' % '+' $$"$$ &
,
),
"%$
! ' $$$"+
(
$$ $$
(
),
"%
! '"%$''"%%$#
(
$$ $$$
.,),
"%$
! ' $% "" $% "
$$"$$%),
&.
)
),
"%"
! ' $"
(
$$ $$'
$+$(
,),
)"%%
!###'%##$
""
#5#5
).
))!
)"#"$
! % "$'
"
" ""
&,&,
.,)(&
))"%$$%
! # $
""
"" & "
"'# %
! %$
$ """
,
((
$# +,, &
.,-&
,--
)"#
!#% ###$
"
"$
"%
""
,
%
(&
,
#
,!
"#"
!# '"+# ""$
""%
""
""'
""#
"
)
))
"# ! %%+ & .
%
"# ! % % '+##'#'% ,
&
&
.)
"#$
! % $+# '%
,
&$
,
)
"#$
! %"' "'"' "' $
,
&
&
),,"#$
! %#' $#+# ,
&
"#$
! % %""%
%,.
5&
"# ! %"# "
,
&'
&
,
""
'
,
)
"#"
! % ''+ +"+
%"
""
(
+,
-)"#$
! % '' %'
,
$
"(
%
))
"#$#
!# #&
,
%
'+,)
,,
,,)!"#$%
! %'#' ##+'#''##
# #
((,
,
"#$%
! %%# %$$$+%# %%%%
"$
"$ "$"
"$
"$$
"$%
"$
"$'
"
%+
,
..
"%""
! $ "+%$$%
"$#
"'
((
"+ ,
)"'' !$%'#'%
(
&(&(
"
%
.
,&
&.
)-
)"% $%
!'$$ "
"%
2' (
.
)"'
! ##
$"$
"+2'+
.'
,&
)
"#%$
! %'"
"% "%"
"%
,
&
2& )&,
&
(
-)
"#%$'
! %" "#
,
&#"
#
.'
"#%#$
! %"' +"' %
,
&##
"+ &'
&&
.
)"%##
! % ' +''%%$#+#" #"
"%
(
$$ $
&)
.))"% %$
! '% "%$
.
)"' '
! %" $#
"%%
,
&&
"#+,
,
!&)"' $
!'$%%
"%
.$
&)
"'"$
! %$
#
"%'
&&
&
,
$++
"
-)"#%$
! % % +
"%#
"$
,
& %
)"#% ! %" "" + "" $
"#
,
& &&
.
"#
!''%% ' +$'
" .
)"#%
! %$ #$ ,
##+,
"#
! %$ % ,
%&)
"#
! %$ $
" ,
,
!
)"#
! %$ ' ' ,
& #'+
',
)"#
! %$"# $+"
$ ,&
)"#%
! %$ '''
,
"+
&
' "
.&
),,
"#
! %$ &&
),
.,.
).&
.,
)"%"% ! ' ' $$%
"
,.' '
%)
&""
! ' $%#
"
" ""
,.' '"
'
&&.,&
,&
""
! $ $####' &''
.
&
""
! $ $ $$
&'' &
""
! $ '
"'
"' ,
'#%
.
,,
, "
!# " "'"
"%
,
&
,
&
))) $
! % %' + %%%+#' $'$$$
,
,
%'' -&&
$
!### #
)
5" &.
,&.
"%
!### "%"### "% "'$
,
&&,.
",
+ + '$+ %
&)))
))))))
"
!### ""
"'%
&&&
,.+,
"'',
%+#
5&,&
&.
,"'
!#% %'
"'
"''
"'#
"'
,
&&
$"+ &)
&
))) !### $
,,
,
##
,
#+" + -
-(,
-
"$%
!#'' "# $# %%
,
"
.,
&
$$$
!%%% "%' #$"# #'# "#
"#
&
$'"$'+
(&
"
! #$ $##
&
$'"$' '+ (&
"
! # "'#
&$'$'
%(& ! # # # #
$'$'"
#+%
(&
%
! #"$ '% "
$'$' +$,
(& ! # '$""%% '%% #%'$
$
%
"#
,
(& $$
!%% ##+%% %##+#'#%" )
"
.
"
!" %$
"#%
,
'#%$.
&
" !' $ " $ '
"#
)
,
.,
,
.
""
!### "$
"#'
"##
"
&
#$$#$ $(
""
! $ &#$%#$
%
%
! '# $$$'# '# '%#'# '
&#$%#$ '
$
! $$$
$'#$ $
! "#$+# "#' ""
#$'#$ ' +'
$ ./&
!%$$ $'#$
$+ +
'
! '$
#$#$
/,
&
,
!%$"%$
#$ #$
"
!%$""%$""''
&#$#$
"+")
5)
5.')
.,
! #'"" #'$ $
#$##$ %
! '%
#$##$"2
'+ ,
$
'
! "
#
"#
"#"
"#$
"
,.55,
&&&
&
"" !" '%
,
' &,
,
"%"
!"
+"
''
"'
($'$$'
(& "
!##$""% "'
#'# +$
&&(&
! # '#'## $"% $"%
"# "$
&
&&&,
)
&-
"$
!" #' $$"$#' $$'#
"
)
5"5"
,
.
&. !%%#' "%
)
.
,
!### "'"
"
&%%$,
$
!%% %"% &% %
$$
!%% &% % &&&
$
!#"$$
2
%"%
&
!
$%
!'''$$$"'
,
&&
&
))) $
! $ $+ #
$
,
' ,%
'#+ #,
(()
,
)
%
!%' %%%
%
,
)
,
.&
)) %
!'"#$#%
,
' '
&
%$,"% !% $#$# #"#""
'
& )
,,-
,"""
!" ###+ $$$
'
,
'#%'#+"
," !' $$$$$ "'
,
'#%'# &
&.
," !' '
&'#'#
.,
,
" !' $"
)
&&
,,
&,,,
"
!" $'
"
.
)
,
-.
""
!' )
((,&
,
"
!"'$##$"$
#
,
'#%%"
$%
,,
! " ' "
&(,(,
-" "
!' %%''
&'&
!" ' "
"
&""
" "
! % # % $%' &"""
)
" "
!' %'''''#'
&""
"
$
" "
!' %%## %%''
&"&
$"
! % ,
'#% %
,,
."% '
! #
###%"'''
,
&((&((
,
"+,. (
,
,"% %
!'"#$#%
" ""
.
. ! $"
"
"$
"%
,,"',"
"%
,
! $# " $#"$%""%
& ,""
"' ,""
! $# .
,$,""
$
,""
!#'' % )
"'"
*"%
!'#
& )
&
"$
!" '"%$#' $$''
$
. &.
&
.
"
! %"
%
)
%%
, ! % $$ $
)
%%"
,
.,&
, !### "'$
'
,
' )$
&,
((
) %
!#'#%$$"$
,
&2&2,
$$,
% ++ '+ ##++"))),
&
((
-.-
))) %
!#%%$
$
&" ,
" !'% $ )
(8
,
, $
!#' "$
$"
,
,.
%,
'%,
&
,,"%"$
!###% %
$
,
&& $$$
!%%%"%'
$$
&#$%,/"
"
! #$ $%
)
)$)$ "
!#' %$
$
"
$
"
)&
.
,'''
"/
&
! ' %%##'#% %#
,.' &,&
(
" "
!" '$$
,
' ."
(
. %$,
. %%
!%'#'"$'"
#
%
)
%/'
,
.
,
, !### "
"#
$
' %
$
! %$%$
#
,
, &.
$
!%%' ##'' ##%%
#'#% "$
"'
)
)$)$
&
.
"
! % " "%%
$'
&&&,
"++ .
.
$
!'%'"# #'"#
$#
,
55
&
$ !%# ## ##
%#
,# ,
!# "
%
)
&.
&. ! $"'$##$%%
%
% %"
' %),
!" %#"
& )
"$
!" "##
& "
'
"$
!###% %
%
,&&&&
)
&) ,
&)
,%$
!'# $"#
,
&.&.,
#,
,
"&,
&%""
!'## $'% " "%#'''"
&
%%,.
'+',
,
"+""/,
#
--
&
!#'''""+''
%
%'
,# )("
&&&%"
!'##
'%
#'$# $ ,# )($
,
''+#%,
% '+ %
&
%"
!##''"
'''
,)
!'#" %$$$
"
&
&&
&&
)
$$
!%# #' %"%$
& 2 2
&
,$ %
!# %%%$#% $#'
$
%%
&
.#.#,,
.
!# $% ''
&&5&&5
,
-,
,-,-
" !#''"' %
&
&,&,
,$"
!# #'"'%$
&
&"&",
,
$
!#$ "'%$
&
&5&5),
'"
!# " '%$
#
,# #
&.,%
!'# $"# $"'
'
%$
,&&&&
. /&
,
% #
!#'$%$
'
,# #%
),&
/&
&.,
%
!'# $"# $"'
'
''
& &
!#'%#% ' ,# )
)
)
,% !'#" %'# %"""
'"
, ,
,
%%
!'# "% '#
#' &&),
&
" $
!#'% '
'$
&)5&)5
,
$+$$'+",
-"'+#'
)
-)-
"
!#''"' '%
&(&(
,
' +' $
$$+"#%
%"+
--
!#'" $$ " !# #
&22
)
!""
!# $% ''
#
,
/
'%$
!#" '%$
# ),,
$
)&
),#"$
!#$ $'$
#"
'
##
! "' '
)/)/
!#'' ),,
''.
&#"
!# "'#$
#
), / /
,&
),' !##% ""%
#$
),,
//&&
),# !# %$%
#%
#
),""%""
&
)'$
!#%%%'%""'
),""%"" &
((&
)'
!# $% "$ $"#"$ $ " "
#'
##
$
$
),""%""
).)'
!# %'$
,
)""""
&
(
)'
!# ''"
)
""'""%
,
)'
!# $% $$ # $$'"
)
""'"" )
((
,
)'
!# $% $$ # $$'"
$ )
"& "&.
",
,,'
!'"%""%
$"
,
,# !#" %"
$
),,
$5"),
(
((
,.#" "
!#$$ $"" $$
,
/
##
,,
#
!#' $$
$%
),
..,
),'$ !#%$
# $
$ $
,
"
.# "
!#"" %
$ $"
$
$$
$%
),""%,%
,,
&
)
'$"
!#% %#"
$#
),""%)"
)'
!# " $#$
' !# "$##
&
.#
!#$ $### '
),,
$ &
#$
!# "$$%
,
&
#
!# " %
),,
$ $&
),#
!##"" $
,
) /&
'$$"
!#% ""#
$'
,
) ,,(
&
,
!
'$
!#'"" $#
$'
),
,
',
&
)'#
!# %% %% $ $% "$
),''
.3,
&
.' !## % %%
$ )
5 5
,-,
)' !# $ ###% $"
),&&
,.
",
#'
"%+'%
/&
.,.),#" !## $
,
)"""" ,
$ %,
$ %
,&,
(&
,
)'
!# ''"#$#%% $
$ "
$ $""
$" ,
)
' !%$% #"'%%'"
$"
&$ ,"
)
'
!%" #" $"" $"$
$"%
$ '
$ #
&$ $ ,
&),' %
!" %"$"$'#" $"" &$ $ &
&,&!,
,
,
&' ' !" %'#'%# &$ $ %
,
&
),' ' !#'"$'" $"
&
,
,),'
!#'$$$# ##
&&
/&
' $"
!# %"%"" ## "" "
((
$/&
),' $"
!# %"%"" #"#'$
$"
$ $" 5
"
'"$ !%$ $ %
&$ )$&
.,
'""
!#" #
$ $
&$ "
&
'$"
!%$" #%#+##" $ "
&$&$ &
,
&
,
' !%$ ""%#+# %"%""$
&$&$" &
,
),' !# #%
&
%',
'/
""
(
.,
&),'" ""
!%$'$#"'"""''
$" $
,
(
# ""
!# %%%%
$"'
$"#
.
" """
.,
)
'"
!%$ "%"% "%"
&
""
)'"
!%$#%
&
"" %
&
.
)'"
!#"'"""''
$
&&
5&
5
'".&,
)),'$"$
!#'"$'
$
&
(
(
"
/&,&,
&,
' # $
!%$%$'
#$"####
$$
&
( (
,,,
&
,
,
$'"
!'"'' """
$ $$ ""
' #
!# %"%"" &.&.
%$
&)
&$#"
!' '#''' $'#$"'$
$"
$$"
$
$$
$%
$
$'
$'$'
,
,
!%$ $%% $ %$
$"$$ ,,
'"'
!%$ "%'%#"'"#
$"$"+,
&
(
.'"
!%$" "#+#"'"$
$"$$
"")
'""
!%$%$%'
&
$$ ),'"$
!#$"####
&
$$"
"#&
'"$ !#$"####
$#
&,((
"+"
#+$.&
,
",,
,,
,,%#%
!"%' '++ $$
$(*$+"
,
,&
&,
,$% %
!'#""
%
&
%,&
$%
!' %$ %+ +"+
$%
$% $%"
$%
$$
,
&&
++')
&
&&
&
$% !##'%$%%$
$$$
)
.//
'+ &
,&,
$'"
!'"$ #"+#
$%$
$%%
$%
$$%
$$
$$'
$$#
$%
&
% %+ .
(
&
$%'
!'"$'""%+ +"
&
% %#+ ,,,,
&
$%'
!'"' #$+%+"+
&
% "
+,
)
(
)
&
&&
$%%
!'" '$+ &
% %
((
&
$%"'
!'"$'%"'++ #'$ % $ &
' %+",
,
&&
,$%%
!'"'''#
$%'
$%#
$
$
$ $"
( ",,,
&
$%%
!' %" $+ +"
( #+
.&
$%"
!' "%"%++ ,
,
&&
$'" !' '%%+$+%+
+.
&
$% !'
""%"
$
+%5
,&
5
)&
$%#
!' "%'$
+ "&&
,
.&
$%
!' """
'
,,
)
"&
$%'
!' %$'##$+ %$'"%"
$
&
))
.
&..$%
!' "$'+ "$#
%+'
,
$%"
!' $$$%+%
$ %
&)
&
$%"
!' % # #
$ ,0
),
&
,)) &
$%
!'"'
$ "
"#" 2
&
$%
!'"
" " $,
.
&
$%
!' ""$$'
$
$$
$%
$
$'
$#
$'
$'
$' $'"
$'
$'$
$'%
" &
&
$%%'
!' $#
" %,
.&
$%
!'"%"#'"$+
& " "#+ &
&&
$% #
!'" %%"+ & " '+
,,
&&
$%
!' %%%
, ' "+",
&
!' '$
+"+
#&
$+"&
&
$%%
!' %%'" " %$'##$
,
, " !$'+%+ ,
&
$%#
!'"" "$
,
" "
#+,
&
,(
&
,(
&$ "#
!'#
, ' *$+&
&
$%%'
!' $" '
,
" $+&,&
&$%%
!''"#
, ' "
%
,
&
&
$%"
!'$" # ##
&
' "+"' &
$%$'
!##$ " "
$ $*$'+$,
5
/
)
&,,&
$%"
!'" $'
$''
$'#
$#
$#
$# $#"
$#
$#$
$#%
$#
" #,&&&
&
),
&
$% $'
!'" ( "
+&&,,&
&
&
$% !' "% "" &
'% *'+'$
(
.(
&
$%%%
!'"%#"%#
, ' '#5
&
5
&
,(
,
&
,,$%"
!' $$ ##++
,
' *
+$,
&
,,$%$%
!'""%"""
+ 5
)&
,,$%"
!#""
&
% %
' &.
&
5
&.
&
,,$%""
!'"%'
&&
.
'")
.
&
$%#"
!' $"+
,
" $
+$
&&
((,
&&
$%"
!'##$###%
,
& # $$
,
-
&
$%"
!'###''% ,
,
,,
&
&
$%%
!##$ "$$%
$#'
$##
%
%
! %&
&&
,$%
!' $%+%+% +%"+%
" %+&
&,
&&(
&,,$%#
!' "$" '%
# +#%
%+ .
&&.
))
&
$%
!' "'$$$$##'$" # &
+ + +"
+&
.
&
&
$%"
!""' '% #
%#
%
,
'+
,
&
&,,$%"
!' $" # ##
%
$
&
&.,,$ "
!' "
% %"
%$
%%
''
).
&$#
!'" ""'+ $ "+ %% ''"
$/&$#%
!'" '
''
'
$+$
,
& #
!'" $+ %'
,( &
$'&
&$'"
!'"# "%%%+%'$
,( "
.
0
&
&$'""
!'"# $'#
)
,&
,5
)
,,$""
!' %
'$+'$'
%$
&2&2
$,
(
"
$ "
!''#'###""
%%
%
&
&&
" $%" $
,
5%%
&
,
,$% !' $'##$
%
,
&5&5
$'
&,
$% %
!' ''###
%
%'
,
"'#
"%+"" +&
!,,$"%
!' $%% #'"
&
,) ,)
%#+
,,,&
&
,&$% !'$%"$+ +
%#
&"( ,
,$
!' % '"9 '
% '/&$
&,
)
,,
,,$# !'""' " % "
$,+
)
&),,$'%#
!'"$ ' %
55
$+$
,&
&&$'$
!'' " #$
%"
&
((
$+ %%
&,,
,,$'" !'"' #'##$"
% &
$"
&&
,,$ !' $% ""
$&2%
""5
)
,
,,$%" $
!'##%"
%
,
&
5
$ "
!'" % "
&
,,$
!'# #%%""%$$
% &
..
++%.&&
&
!$% !' %''
% $
,
&5&5
&
,&,
.,,$'
!'"% %%%
% %
",
%
((&
$' "
!'" " "%
% ,")
5
$'" !'$"" $$
%"
%"'
% '
&&
$# +$ )
,&
&
.
,&$% !##$ "$$"
% #
%+"+ ,,&
$#"
!'"" %%
%"
$"
,,
,
$ "
!' #'
%"#
%
# #
,(&
&$'$
!' $' %
(
&5&5
+ +"&
,
.
!"
&
&
$'" !'"# %% % ,
' '
" %
.
$" !' "$+
%"
,
&&&&
),&
$'
!'"$ "$#
%"$
&
%$
$+'
,
,,&
,
.
&
$% !''"#'
%"%
&
,
$'" "
!'"# %% %
&
%""
,,
,
,,$
!' $' ""$$9 ""'$
%
%"
,
&5&5
+&,&
&
&,,,
,,
$% !##$"
&
')')
$#+ &$%+ &$%+"
,,.,
,,,
$'"
!'"' %$$"
%'
,
"
,&
$%$#
!' '%$
%%
2(%+"
&
.
,
)
,
$%"
!'$ &
( (
0
%%,
,&,,,
$'""
!'"'% """
%$
%$'
%$#
%#
&
% ,,, '
!' $ '
%%
%$
,
&22
,&
,,
,,$ "
!'" %$
!'',
,
,,$ "
!' % "%$ ""%$
%$ (
&
2&
2
&
5
,,
$'
!'$" $$$$
%$"
(
$ 25 &&
.
,,
$ !' ##'$$""#'$$''
%$
$&%
%%+,5
$
!' " " %
%%
%$%
&
$"$
,,)
&
)
$$
!' ""
$ $
&&
,
$$
!' " '
&
$""
&&
0
&$ !' $' "'%"
%% &
$"2$
&&
,
$$
!' #""
%%"
"' &
&
.
,,$'"$
!'"'$ % #$+#%+#
%%
%%$
%%%
%$$
$ $"
.
'
$$
!' $ "
$ $
&
,,$$'
!' "# "
&
$"$%
#+ #+,
&
5
&&.
,
&
,
,,$$
!' ""
$ $'
%"+)&
-,
,,,$$
!' #'$ "
%$
,( '"+
,
3%",
$'" "'
!'$"# $$
%""
&2&2
5,,
&&
,-
,$$'
! % %
%" &&
+ ,,&
,,,,
$ !' $ %"$
%"
""&
,&$' $
!'"% ' $+ "#
""(
,
.&&$'"
!'"% "%$+$ ,
"""
%$+.
&,,$' #
!'"%%%""" %%
(
$ $
$'
!' $ $ $$
' +$+&
,,$
!' +
$ $'
+ ,
,,$
!' ##
$ $
!$
,
$$
!' %%'
(
&,&,
"+$#+
)
-
,,$"
!' # $# $$$$'
%%#
&&&&
%+ ,
,&
&
&
&,,$% "
!' $
%
&
$"/ .
$$'"
!' $ " "
%
", * %
&
$'
!'$" ##'
% ,
)& *,"'+ "
&
$$
!' $##+ +"+
%"
.(.(&
&,&&
%
$
!''"
"
%'
%#
%$
%%
&&,
$##
,
$ !'' #%
&&"&
,
&
&,
$ !'' $ #%
&&$
+"+
!'' #'$"##"%
%
&
&&
&,)
-
,--
,$'"$$
!$'"$$#'##$"
%''
%'
%'#
$ .
&
,,$ "#
!' $ " " $9 " "
$ ,
,$$'
!' $%#'+ $''##
%#
%#
%' &
2.2.
%%,,
,
,
,$$
!' %%"
,
&"
&! %
,,$ !'" $"%%"
%'
,
&
,$ %
!'% $%""+%%
%# %#"
%'%
&
%%
$%"
!' %$+
+"""+
&
%%$
"$+
$$.
$%
!#'$ %'
&
&.&.
" &
)
&,,
,,,$ !' $% " "##'%$""
)
%'#$'
!"#$##'""
$) ,
,
,
,%#$ "
!"#%"$$#
&
$$&
%''
!#'$'
&
$$"
/%''$ !# %#'
%#
&.
&.&.
$%+'$$+'$$+#
,,,
,,,
,%'%'
!#$%"###
%#$
&.
&2#
""+,
%'"
!''$'###"
%#%
%#
).(
,
%'"$
!#$##'"
).' )
%'"$
!''%'#' %5,
,
%#$
!''%'''
%##
%2
/,,
&
%#$$
!'#""$# "
%'$
%'"
'#)
5
.,-&.-
,,$ "
!' $$ "# "
%'
$ $
"
,,$ !' $ $ "+ '+ #
"2,&
$'
!'"' "'$
%
,(
(5(5
$$+
% %+".
#
,,$' '
!'$"$ ##
.
,
,,
,,%"
!#$#$##'#
%
,
)
.%"$
!#$#$##' '
5
%"%$$
!#$#$##''
&
.
%"%
!#$''%'%$
&,,
&
,
/,
%"#
!''%'%$
$
&.
/) /)
,%'"%
!'#$%'%# "#
%
'
,
,
,,
%'"
!##%%$"
,
,
,%#$'$
!#'#$$%'
'
&.
)%
,,
%'$
!#%$#%"###
#
%
,
,/
%'# !## %%$
#
,
&&
$+
$+-
,-
-,,%#$"
!%% # $' '
"
,),,//
%''$$
!#$##%""
&
%%
#+# #+#+ ,
,
,%'%$"
!#'"$#%#
"
&
&&
"+
-,-
-,%#$$
$
%
'
&
5
%' $
!'#$##'
#
,,
,,
%' "
!'#$##'"
,
,,
%' $
!'#'% $
&
&,
%' '
!#'%#'%%
$ $+$
%' !'#%$%#$
$ %' !#%$$$
,
%' #
!#$## $ '
,/,)
,
,
%' !#%$%""#
)
&
# $+$ $+$ $+$"
)
,,
%'"
!'$$###'% "
"
$,
/,
,
%#$'
!##%%'
' ,
!#'$ $
&&
'"+ ,
,,
(
,
%' $
!#%$%"'
%
&.
,2$
,
),
%'%
!#$"#%###
) '&
&,,
%"
!#$$# #
'
$
/&
,%'%'
!#%$$$"
#
2"
,.,
,%'"%
!'#$##' "
&
%"2/
*+ +$
,
,&
,/,
%#$%$
!''%#
"
)
,,,
,.%"$#
!#$##'$# ,(
' +%
,
,
/
,%'
!##'%"
&.
&
,,,
,,%'$#
!###$'$##
2$,
,
,,
%#$
!## %$
" "
""
"
,", ,,
%"$
!#%$###
, %.)
,
,%'#%
!%'#'%"
, (
#+"#+" )
,
,
,
,%$
!#$##' "$
# ,&,,&
,)%'%$%
!#$##'#
"%
"
"'
"#
,,
,
,
%%
!##$"##"# ,,"
,
,,
&/,
%
!#$"##$
,
&,),
,
%#
!##$##' "
,","%$&
),
,,
,,%
!#$$' '''#
$
,""
,
% "
!###
",
,
%"
!##''%''%
""
"'+"
,
%$
!#$$
%
//
,,,,&
,,,%'$$'
!'%'#%"%
'
#
&
$',
,
)
,,/
,%#$
!###' '$
,,,,
/%#$
!##$##'$
&' '",
,
,,
/
%#$
!###%$%
$
%%$
)
,%#$
!'$'### "
$
$',"
,,
%'%%
!''%%#'%
$ &5&5
!#+#
#+,
,
,
/,
,%"$
!#'#$## "
$"
$
% 2"
,
%#$
!#$##'
%2
,,
%'%
!#'%#'%$%
$$
$%
&
2
%#
!#' %$
'
"'+
& ,
%#$'#
!#' %$ $" '
$
%+&
,
"%
+,
,
,%'"$"
!#$##'$
$'
&
&
,
,
,
%'%%%
!'$#%$% $'
%
% %"
%
#"
,,
&,,
%'%%#
!#$##'#
#&&
((
,
,
%'%%#
!##%%%
&''
.
)
,
,
!#
%
%$
''
,
,,,
,
%#$"
!''%"%%
' '.
.,,,
,
,
,%#$"
!##"%$
%%
%
%'
%#
&'&'
,,
%'%
!'#%" "###
&'
,/),
,
,%'%"
!'#$##'
&'
/,
,
%'%"
!#$##'
&' &'
,
%'%%
!'#$"#
"
.'"
,
/
)
%'#%
!#%# #''
'
,,%'$
!''#'%"#%%
%%
.%%$#
!#"#'#$$" $
'"
'
5,
.,
%'#$'$
!#$
$
%
%'$,,
&),
%% !#'#$$%"$
,
' '
&
)
,%% "
!## ',)
&),,)
,%% !'"'$'### $
'$
'
#
% "
,,,%'$'
!#'#$##'
,,
/
,,%'$'"
!#$##$#%
'
'
' &' # ,
,
5,
,
,
,
,,,
%#$
!#'% #'% % #&
,,,
%#
!#$##'"
&
##
+"
)
,
,,,%#
!# #/,
,
/
,%'%%%
!'$#$##'
' ,
)
/,%'%%"
!#'%"'%
'
&
+%,,
#/
,%'%%"
'%
&
%" ,
,
,
%#$$"
!###$'%% '
'
,&
,3
%#$ !#$$
''
+ + '+ '+
,,,,%#"
!''%"$$$$
$#
'#
&
,
,,%%$"
!#"#$##'
'"&
&
,
,
%%$
!'"##%%"
'#
(
)
&,
%#" #
!#"#$##'"#%
(
,&
&
%#" #
!#$##'
#
&
%""
,
,
%#$"$
!''%#
#
&
"+%% "+%%#
,,
,,,
,%#
!%%#$##'
# &' ,
%'%$$
!' ''%"$
#"
#
#$
$
,
%'%$
!#$##'''
"
%+&
, ,
%'%%$
!' #" %
%&
,
%.
)
).
,,
%'%$'
!#$%#"
'$
'%
'
#
#'
,,,
,/
,,%'
!#$##'$#
#
,
,
,,%'
!##'%"%$
!$+"%%"%,
,,%'
!#$#$
''
&.
/'
,%'"$ !#$%'%# "#
'#
'
'
'
.'.' )
%'#%
!%'#'"
.'.'
$"++".
",&/
' '"
'
.''.'
.
!%'# ''
% %
,&/%'#%$"
!%'#$##''
&' .'$,
%'#%$
!##%$%'
%"(
%#"
!#""' #'' "$
,
'+'$
,%#"$
!#""# $"
,
%
,%#"
!#""# '"
' '
#//
%"#
!##'%"%$
##
'%
$'.
&
,
,%'"$
!#%$%$"
'"
,"("
.,
,%"#
!#$ % ' '
'2" '
2
,
%#"
!$#'"%$
'
"
"
&
"+$"
,,
2,
/,
%""%
!#$##'$
)5%
,,
%'#%
!#$##'"
''
' %
% #
5+%%%% %%",/
/
&,
,
,
-,
%#$ !#$##''#
' '#
,,&
,)
,
%# !'$'### $
' '
,#. ,
,,
&%
!%#$"##'
' "
,,
,%
!#$ ' #
'"
'"
'" '""
'
,
,%$
!##$##' ' "
' $$
%'#
!%#'%%$$
&' $%
,&
,%'#"
!''%"'#
' $
,
%%
#'$+"$%
,,,&,
,%#$ #
!#$ %'
/
/%'$$'
!#$##'%"
' ,
%$%
#+"
#+$#+'
#+#+$
#+'#+#%+ #+ ",/,
/-
,
%#$$
!"$#$$
%#
+ ,
,
'$
%,&%
(
,
,%"%"
!#$%'%%
#%
%'
&,,%#"%
!%%#$%'%%$#
'&
,,
&%#""
!#$##' #$
%'#
,
&,,
&
,,,
%#"%
!%%#$%'%%$#
'"
&.
&
,
,
%'"
!'###$'
'
,,,,
2
%'$$
!'#$##'$
)
5
.
(
%'
!'#$##'
$,,
,%'%$$
!''$'### $%
+"
,%'
!#%$%'#
&.
,
/,,%'
!'#%%$ #
'"$
&.
%'%#
!#$"##'''
'"%
'"
% .
,
%%
!##'#$#
,
$
+ &
,,
,%%"
!# %"
'"'
%'
,,
%%"
!##'#$$" "
'"#
''/,
%'$%%
!'#'%%## $
'
$,$
,
%' "
!#%$$%
'
' '"
'
'$
'%
'
''
&
%"%/
%#$$%
!###$'%%$
% % &
%#$ #
!#$##'"
% %
+''$
,%#$
!#$##'
%%
,
,
%#$
!#'%#'%""
%,
&
%#$#
!##'%$
% %'
)),,
%#$ '
!#$
% %
"+%##,/
,)
%#$"
!#%""$
% %$
)
)%#$
!#$##' '#
'$
,,
,
,%"
!'$'#$%%
, &
,
,%" !### '$
),,
,
,
%'$%
!#$##'
'$#
'%
'$"
'&
),%"%"
!#%#$##' ' '
,,
/,
,%"
!#%'#""$#"$
'$
'$$
,
/"
$
,
%%$$
!# "
'$%
&.
5"
/,
,
,
.,,
%'$'"
!#$%'%#"
'%
%+ +",
&)
,"""
!## %'#
'$'
,
$,
+$%
)
&
'
!%" ''
'% '%"
&
" "
,
"+ ))
&
%%%'
!'% ""
).
&(&(
,
+
&
%%
!$%#' % #%
,
&&,&&,
)
&
))$%
!#$$$ '%
'
' '"
'%$
'
'$
,
$$ &
.&
.,&%
! "###+ "### '%
'%'
).
" "#
&
% !$$$''''
&
"""
'#) &
% '
!$$ '+
###
&2&2
+"++$&
&,
%
&-
"
!##'"
'%
'%%
"2("
&
2&
&
%$%
!" "%"
(
)
&.$$$
! # "%%
&&
&
((
&
&-
$"
!"'##"%
&
""""#%
,
,
&
% !$$' '$
""
&
% !$$ + $%
)
)
()
"'"'
),
&
% "
!$$%"$ #""" """"$
).
" ""
$
)&&,
/
&
% "
!$$#' % #%$ $$''"
).
" "
,
$$$++
(&
&
% "%
!$$$#''
'$
'
)$
5
&.$
! ' $%'' %
.)
/
&
,
,,
,%'%%$
!#%""
'%#
'$ &&
,
#+&
&
&
.
&.
$%%
! #$ "
'##"$ &&
,
%$+$%&
(
&,
,/
.
)
&
$""
!" $ '
'& &
&
!%' %
''
,
$$"
,
.
&
&
&
.'
!% "%"%
'#
,
$$%
$%
&&
.
'
!'"#### ''
"".$
&
)
&
$%%
!$ "" "%
'' .&.&"
$"$
!" $$
$
'#
"2"2
&&
.
$$
! $#"
''
,
$" + )$
! # "$
'# '#"
'#
'#$
'#%
'#
''$
,,.
'%%
!% '"0 '
'#'
''%
&
)&
% !"'## ''# '##
''
""
&
"
!$ %'$+ %''
'''
''#
"""&
.
!$$
"$",
.
!$$$"
(,,'$)&&
&
%
!$ $%%
''"
(, .
%""
!'''# '
#"
",
,
%%
!' ''
'#
#
#
# $"$$"'++"
,,)
%
$ "
!" $""$" %+&
$ !" $
$""$" '+"+")&
$ !""""""
,
$"$"
"&
$ !"$
,
$"$""
+$
)
$ !"$'
$"%$"
#
#
2
$ !"%% $%% $$
$"%$" 2
&,.
$ !"%%$$ '$$
$"$$" ,
$++',
.
.,
$ !""""
$""$""
.&
$ %
!" "'"## "' ##
$"%$""
#
'(
$ !#%'$""""""'##"%$
,
$"$"
'"+ + $ !" #
#$
#%
&
$"$
)&
'%
!%#####
$ $
&&,,
)&' !%$+%
$ $"
,
,)&
' !%"'
&
$"$"$%+$+
$%+",$%+",$%+"&
)&
' !%%####$ #$$$ # #"
#
'&(
$++
,
,
,
(
(
)
$ %
! ""###' %%"### %#"
#'
&
,
)&$%%
!"# ""##0#' %%"#
##
&
(,(,.
&
,
'"$
!#$$$#$$#%
&
.
,
,
'""%
!%$' ""
#$
&
&
$#"+$+$#"+%+&.
,,,,$""
!##'""'##$"''$#####
#%
#
&5&&5&
'$+".
,
-.
$$""%
! '''##""%
(.
.
.
'$
!% "$$
#
$ .
,
'%%
!% %% %% #'
..
&
$'
! $ " ##
..&
,)
.$"
!" "'##"%' %% #
# ""&(
,
,.$
!"" ''
#
# ).
,
% %
! ' " '$
%
"$--
,
-,
$
!#%%#$%#$
5&2&
%
!$" ""
# &&&&,
' +'"+&
$#
# %.
/
-
'
!# " $
#
"'"
.
! " # # "
'" .
$'
! " %"''"
# 22,
"'
)
&
)
$
''
!% " %
$#"
# $
$""& $
$$
! #####
# %
&
((
&
&(
5
% !#$$$$%
# # '
''%
$ ! $ #"" ""
''"'++'
)
$
! %%" %%0## %#"
#""
#"
.
,
'$
!% " %
$
(.
.&&,
&
.
.
,
'$
!#$"##
#"$
).
" '%#++ ((
(
(
&
%%
!$%
%
#"%
&
(()
&
'
!%$ ""$'+ "
#"'
"""&
"$$
!# $
# #
#"#
"
.' !%% #"
,)
!$' "#" + %$%
#
#"
"2/ &
)%$
!"% %"""
#" ))
"$%+"+
))&
,.
$"$$
!" ""'## $
&,&,,
,
'%%%
!% " %
$#"#$"##
&/&/
")
,.
-
.-
$ ! #$##"$ "
'
#
"2&)
"%"+
)
)%$"""
!'''##""'''##""
# ,, !%'" %#
#$"
&
$"&'+ &,,
'%%
!%%#"""
#$
--
%
!$# #$$$$ #%
#%
)) )&
,.
'%''%
!%% '''##
#
#'
##
)
&$'$
&
&
,
! $$#
,,
&
$$
! #"#%$
,,
&
$$$"
! "
#$
&
& $+"
,)"
! '$ """
#$
#$
#$ #$$
"5$
"+
(
-
&-
! %"
&
( ( &
%
! $$+%+
&
( ( $
+ &
!%
! $ '$
#$%
#$
#$'
#$#
#%
(
&
%,&" ! %%$+%%$$$
(
" ,+
&
&
"%
! '#
" ,
5)
&
"$
! %%$# " $
%
$
,
,
&&
&"$
!#'%###%'
" %
"$.
&"
! %$
#%
,.
.
((&
,
$
! # # %
,
.#%
.
'%,
.+,!
&
!
$"
! " "'"+#"
#
,
". ".
$#+".
))
$%
!"$ ,
$'5$),
)&
'%%
!%# '$''"#### %#
#"
#"
,
#
#
%
$ %,
.
,&
$"
! $#" "$ """
#% " /
&/.
,
&
& !# +"
#%"
5
&,&
&"
! #$
#%
&&&&
+
&"
! ' #%%%
# #"
#
#%$
(
(")0&,
%
&#
!' $$ + $$ ,.55 "+
'
&,.&
"
! $ %$'+##"$$$+%%'
#$
&&
# #+
&
,-&
-
%
!''''''"'''''''"##
#%'
) &
$
! $ $%$'+%%''
#%#
" . %$
,
.
&!
%
!# %++'
#
)
%
,
!)
! $'# #" #%
&(&(
"%
$+,,
,
%$
! " "#""#
#"
).
%
!'#$""'+ $ ' $%++'+'#$"
)
"%
+
,
$
! "$' % $ "'
#
#'
(
((
$"
,
,
! $$
##
(
"#%) +
5"
,
.
& ! $ #'# $$$+'
#'
(
"#) &"
&
&
! $ '# ++$
#'
&&
/, /,
!" "
"' &$'+&
,.
,)%$
! " "#
#'"
""
%.)&"
! %%#
##
#'
(&&
(,
5(
%
!' "$%
## )
&)&)
"
$"
!## "#'
##"
//
),-
-.
"
!#%'#'##
##
,
,&
,)%
! " $ ' ##$
5
2 .
$
#
! $
##%
.
) )
#$++"&
&
&
.
,!.!
$#
! $$
##
)
)
)
$"
! $ + "+ "
,)
,)
!''#$%
##'
##
.
("" +"&
+,
,$
! %%%
#'#
,.$$# ,
&
.& "
! # %% "+ %% # %% "
#''
)
"$
" ""
''%+&
.
),,
%
! "% " ' + "###''%$ #'
"#&
&,
+
),!
!,
%"
! " $#$#
#'%
.
) &5$
.
&/
)
%
! " %$#'
#'$
(
& $
+&)
5
)&
)" "
! ' "
""
#.&
! $% ' '+ #
#
#' #%
)
##
$"&
.,&
$%$
! "$$ $ "'
#%%
" "
,/
! # + " ""
! # "+
.
,&/,
,)
,,
%$
! "
###
)
&5&5
+
,
,
""
! %" $ +"
5
+"#,
.
, ! %$###
&&
#
&
.
! %'
"' "'
.&,)
,
%'
! " %%%%
"'""'%
,
%
! " %'"%
" "' "'%
'+
',&
,
%
! " " ##$
.
) " ..
,)
%
! "" %" ,
"#"/ %+ #'+"'
,
"
! $ ' %
$ )
#&#&
$+$$+$+
&,-,-
%$ ! "% "
% (
'' ' #"
"%&
"$
! "' %#+%#
(
''
#%
"$
! "' %%##
' 5
"
! $ " "
# ""(( $ +'
&
,
" "
! $$ " + " 5
$$
,/&
#'
! %"''' %%$" "%
" $$$,
((
&.
&
"
! # $$ +$"+$ #%$"#+'# $$ $"
$$% &.
,
.
&"
! ""+""
$ $$ &#,
&%#
! ""%%+%'"$% % $$+
,.
&
&%%
! ""+"++'+ '
$'$
$
.0
5,
.&%
! %%#%%"+% +%$+'+'$+$'+%'+#''#'###
' $'$ %$&
(
((
.5.&
%%
! %%#'' "+%%#'' % '$ '$
# $'$"
,
(
&
5
,,
&
,
.&'%
! %%+%%+
##%'%%%
$ "$
&&
! $ %+ $ ##+ $ "
+ $ '%%%
$"$
,
.&$'
! %"'+ %" '+ %" #%%"%'
$"$ (
,
((,
&& $
! # "#""
" (
"#$
'&/.
,.&
! %$%""+%$%"+%$%"$
(
$ $ #
/
&#%
! $ " + "
$ /
$"$,
,.
&%
! #####
% $"$
$#
,
,
,.&%
! '%$"+ '%$ #
$'$+
&
/,
((
,
&
.
&#
! '#'''
' (
$ $"+
&
&.
,
&
! %$$%$
# ,
$' $ +
/$)&
& ! "$ " "$ "+ +"+$+%
" ."#$ %"#+ %
(
&
%$
! '" " ,.$$$
$
5
.
.
.&-
! ##"$$$
" /
$"$ ' &,
,
((
,
,.&
%
! #'#"#####
"" ,
$$
&% +
((.,
.
&$"
!#"$$
" ,
&
&
%+ ,&
-
,-&
- %$
!# '" $
"$ ..
''++,!,!
,
% #
! " $ %$$$"
"% (&&
,
%&
"$
! %%''"""
" (
$$,
%
%
! %"$$+%%% +%%% + %$ $$+ %'"
"' "+"
,
&
.
"
! $ "+%%$ '
"# "
""
%
!%%%
(
$
"'+&
&
,
! %$$$"+
(&&
.
,
'
! %%%
(&&
"
%&
!'''''#$ " %'%'
&
"%
! % $##
",. "&
,
.(&
& $
! $% ""
$ ,
.#%( ,...
$
! " % (
" " ,
&, ! $"%%"%"+%%"%" #+" +"+"
""
5%&, ! $" "'%$"
' """
"
, ! $" "$" # ""
"
, %
! $"%%
$ ""'
+&+ , ! $"%%$
$ """
"+'&.
,
, ! $" "%'
$ ""%
(
' + &&
,!,
! $"%% $" (
"##, "
.&
&
%
! '"#+'"# "+ + '%%"
$ ,.$$#, %
&.&
&
$
! % $ % $ %'## "
$$ 5
#, #
)
'
! $$$$
$% &
& ."
.
5
&"$
! '%%%
$ '%+&
!
! $ $'"''% $' .
) /
&",
%"'
! "% # $# &
& $
$%
&
!
"
! '% '%%%
% '
$
&
. %
! '' % %$ #"%$
% (
"#"
!# +,
,
&
.
%
!# "
#
% ,
$' !
.
.!
!# %"$%+# %%" %
%" 5
"
.
,"%
! $#
% ##
-
,,&
.- ! " %#"
%$ .
, ,
'"+&+
.,!
!$$ "
! % $$
%% (
&&
$+,
&."
+
&.,!
,
! $$ $ ''
% #'# +
.
00&,5
&,
! %$#'
%' ,##
"%+ +)&,
,
! "$%++"
%# .
#'# $"
.,)%
! %#$#%9%%'% .
##
5
,)&
&
&,
%
! %%'"$$$
##
"&&
.
.,$
! "#''"""+"#'# ##&
&
(.
! %+'
" ## ''#+#
)
,
! +
##"
$
.
,
.&,
%
! + + + + "
$ ##$
&
.
#
! %%$###+#$
% ,
.#%#+
(
"#
! %%'
.
#"# ! %"" #"+"$
' #"#
$&,!!
! '"'"+%"% $+%"% # ##%
+&,
(
.
$
! ' ,## ,
" + ,
,
&&
"#
! "%% #
' ,
.#%#"
&&
,.
#
! %%"$ %
' 5
# #"$#+.,
.
.
"%
! " % '" ,#$#
"
&
5..""
! %%""" #
' .
#"#"
$ +&
,( '
! "+ +"+'
'$ ##+++"
,
&
,
.'
! + +"++$+%+
'% 5
# #
'$+
,
,
)
%
! % #'+
' .
#'#$ #+ +&+.&
.,)
&
.
""
! %#$
'' ##'
"
.
,
,
! "#"##
'# ,
.#%#$
+&
'
! %' ' # .
#'#%
"++
#
! % " # #%#""+
&.
!#"#"#
# #%# "%+&&.
!#"#"#
#" 5
##
" .
-.,-
"'
!#" "$"
# ,
.#%#%
%#+
%'1%'
.
! "+
#$ ,##"
+
/
,-
- $
! # " "%%$
#% ,,
&
/"/
,
"
! " "$
# )
+'.)!
%
! "$$ $ "'
#' )
""
$)
$%"#
! "$ '"' '"'
## "
"++$+%+,
.
%$
!'''''%$
.
) )
",
))
,%%
! ""%%""
.
#'"
..
"
! $ $9 $ .
(""("
& $
! % $#+ +"
" )
&&&&
&
#+
,
'
""&
..
%$
!#%$' #' "$%" /
&/&/
&
-
,--
%
!'' $ 5
# / "+5
.
.!)!
! "'%$
% .
&&
$+.
.&
.
, '
! %# ,,
&
"
"#++",
"#
! %
' "/
#+ "'%&
,
&"
!#'%###%'
# ""("
"
! $$ ""
&
& & $,,
"%
! %%%%%
&
& &'"#
" ! "'''' ""###
/
&&
#+
$
-'
%%
! $ " .
"#'"#&"
.
.
! $'
(
"#%"#,
.
,
%
! $$$" $'#
$ "#'"# &
.%
! %%%%%%%
% $'"#
&
""
.
%
!''#%%%$"1
$'"#%+
,
! '$ '$
' ."#"#
5
,
!
! #""#+$+$+$ +$"
# ,
&&
"+ -
.
-
.
,-,-
%$
! $" ##% "###
,
"#""#
"
".
"
! $" '$ $+" $#" $%$' .
(""2",).
)$$%
! % " " "+ " "
$#"+
'
! $#$$ $#'%+'+
$ '$'"+ '# $$%'$$"$'"
" ##
&* ,.
!''$ #'% +#$$ $ # .
"
!'%$#%+ $ $'$+ $'$
$ .
&&
#
"++ ,-
,-
$"
% .
&5&5
""++.
&.
,
,.
""
! $ %'#""## AUTHORISED MARUTI SUZUKI WORKSHOP (AS ON 01.04.2017)
1127. SAI SERVICE PVT. LTD. (1901-AB-04), GAT NO
2406/1440, VILLAGE- WAGHOLI,TAL- HAVELI,
DIST- PUNE - 412207
PH :020-46403333/31/32.
1136. PARAMOUNT WHEELS PVT. LTD. (3911-39-03),
B-2, MIDC, MIRA ROAD, OFF NH-8, THANE. 401107
PH :022-9004999360.
WAI
1128. CHOWGULE INDUSTRIES PVT. LTD.
(BYC1-BYC-01), GAT NO. 407, A/P
SHENDURJANE, MIDC ROAD, NEAR HOTEL
GANDHARVA, OPP. DHOM LEFT CANAL, TAL –
WAI, DISTT. SATARA - 412803
PH :8805095200, 880519820, 9922992887.
WANI
1129. HIMALAYA CARS (4M01-0I-02), YASH LAWNS,
COLLEGE/NAGPUR ROAD, TALUKA:WANI,
DISTRICT-YAVATMAL, MAHARASHTRA - 445304
PH :07239-228888.
WARDHA
1130. SEVA AUTOMOTIVE LTD. (2002-AC-02), GOPURI
CHOWK, ,OPP. BANK OF INDIA COLONY,
NAGPUR ROAD, WARDHA - 442001
PH :07152-253545/253525.
WARUD
1131. ASPA BANDSONS AUTO (P) LTD (F201-UG-04),
SURVEY NO. 50/3, SETURJANAGHAT ROAD,
TALUKA: WARUD, DIST. AMRAWATI - 444906
PH :07229-232888.
WASHIM
1132. ASPA BANDSONS AUTO (P) LTD (F201-9D-02),
NEAR RAILWAY CROSSING,HIGOLI
ROAD,WASHIM, - 444505
PH :07252-233999.
YAVATMAL
1133. HIMALAYA CARS (4M01-4M-01), OPPOSITE
RAUT PETROL PUMP, DARWHA ROAD,
YAVATMAL, MAHARASHTRA - 445001
PH :07232-249992.
YEOLA
1134. SEVA AUTOMOTIVES PVT LTD (BST1-BST-01),
GAT NO. 65-A, PLOT NO. 41, AHMED
NAGAR-MANMAD ROAD, NEAR TEHSIL OFFICE,
YEOLA, TALUKA – YEOLA, DISTRICT – NASHIK,
MAHARASHTARA. - 423401
PH :0259-266166.
YEWAT
1135. MAHALAXMI AUTOMOTIVES PVT. LTD.
(AZA1-AZA-01), SOLAPUR PUNE NATIONAL
HIGHWAY, SAHAJAPUR, YEWAT, TALUKA:
DAUND, DISTT: PUNE (MAHARASHTRA). 412202
PH :9881254892.
THANE
32
MANIPUR
CHURACHANDPUR
1137. EASTERN MOTORS (BBE1-BBE-01), HMUIA
VENG,TEDDIM ROAD, CHURACHANDPUR,
MANIPUR - 795128
PH :03874235969, 9862555472.
IMPHAL
1138. EASTERN MOTORS (7401-74-01),
CHINGMEIRONG EAST, IMPHAL, MANIPUR
PH :0385-330856, 226816/2056962.
1139. EASTERN MOTORS (7401-74-02), NH,39,
CHINGMEIRONG, WEST, IMPHAL. - 795010
PH :0385-2422152.
THOUBAL
1140. EASTERN MOTORS (BJL1-BJL-01), THOUBAL
ATHOKPAM KHUNOU, NEAR D.C. OFFICE
COMPLEX, THOUBAL, MANIPUR - 795138
PH :3848-9862662225.
MEGHALAYA
JOWAI
1141. RANI MOTORS (3I01-3I-01), LADTHADLABHO,
OPP. PWD OFFICE, JOWAI, DIST - JAINTIA
HILLS, MEGHALAYA - 793150
PH :03652-204025.
KHLIEHRIAT
1142. BANALARI WORLD CARS (8502-PZ-03),
JOWAI-SICHAR ROAD, MEGHALAYA,
KHLIEHRIAT - 793150
PH :3655-9856299493.
MAWNGAP
1143. BANALARI WORLD CARS (CBK1-CBK-01),
LAITPYNTER, SHILLONG NONGTION ROAD,
MAWNGAP, DIST.-EAST KHASI HILLS,
MEGHALAYA. - 793121
PH :9774537902, 9615101743.
NONGPOH
1144. RANI MOTORS (8501-TN-05), NEAR D.T.O.
OFFICE, G.S. ROAD, NONGHPOH, RIBHOI
DISTT. - 793102
PH :03662-977401910/9774012380.
NONGSTOIN
1145. RANI MOTORS (8501-0P-04), OPP.IRANI PETROL
PUMP, NEW NONGSTEIN, DISTRICT-WEST
KHASI HILLS ,MEGHALAYA - 793119
PH :9863022955.
SHILLONG
1146. BANALARI WORLD CARS (8502-85-01), MAWLAI
NONGKWAR, G.S. ROAD, SHILLONG - 793017
PH :364-09436111128/2575045.
1147. RANI MOTORS (8501-85-01), SUNNY HILLS,
GARIKHANA, G.S.ROAD, SHILLONG - 793014
PH :0364-241581.
1148. RANI MOTORS (8501-85-02), MAWBLEI, NH-44,
SHILLONG JOWAI ROAD, MEGHALAYA. - 793021
PH :364-2535189, 2231287.
NAGALAND
DIMAPUR
1149. PROGRESSIVE MOTORS (3201-32-01),
OPPOSITE AIRPORT, N.H.39, DIMAPUR KOHIMA
ROAD, DIMAPUR - 797112
PH :03862-30987, 30992.
KOHIMA
1150. PROGRESSIVE MOTORS (3201-4N-02), NH-39,
NEAR INDIAN OIL PETROL PUMP, KOHIMA, 797001
PH :03862-230987.
ORISSA
1156. ODYSSEY MOTORS PVT. LTD. (BUK1-BUK-01),
KHATA NO. 32, MOUZA – SANJHINIK, SONEPUR
(ALSO KNOWN AS SUBARNAPUR), DISTRICT –
SUBARNPUR, ODISHA - 767017
PH :9439314464.
ANGUL
1157. ODYSSEY MOTORS PVT. LTD. (W101-W1-01),
AT/PO KULAD (NEAR NALCO CPP PLANT),
KANDASAR, NALCO NAGAR, ANGUL (DISTT:
ANGUL). - 759145
PH :06764-221079, 221669.
BALASORE
1158. JYOTE MOTORS PVT LTD (L501-L5-01), PLOT
NO. 276, GANESHWARPUR-NH-5,
POST-JANUGANJ VIA REMUNA, DIST.
-BALASORE - 756019
PH :6782-2302200.
BARGARH
1159. ODYSSEY MOTORS (P) LTD (D401-SJ-04), AT/PO
-BARGARH, NH-6, DISTT.-BARGARH, ORISSA 768028
PH :06646 -246533.
BERHAMPUR
BARIPADA
1151. SKY AUTOMOBILES (E203-E2-02), PLOT NO.
876, WESTERN ROW NH-5, KONISI HATO,
VILLAGE – KONISI, BERHAMPORE, GANJAM,
ODISHA. - 761008
PH :7381266000.
1160. JYOTE MOTORS PVT LTD (L501-RQ-02), PLOT
NO. 90/523/904, SWARUP VILLA, NH-5,
BARIPADA - 757001
PH :6792-211200.
BHUBANESHWAR
1152. JYOTE MOTORS (0402-04-04), PLOT NO. 22 &
23, SECTOR-A, ZONE-D, MANCHESWAR
INDUSTRIAL ESTATE AREA, BHUBANESHWAR. 751010
PH :7064499362.
CHANDIKHOLE
1153. SKY AUTOMOBILES (BXL1-BXL-01), PLOT
NO.285/3, SHANTI MANDAP MOUZA -SUNGUDA,
TEHSIL-DARPANI, PO CHANDIKHOL, DIST.
-JAJPUR, ODISHA, - 755044
PH :9583000001.
JALESWAR
1154. JYOTE MOTORS PVT. LTD. (BXP1-BXP-01),
KHATA NO. 422/744, PLOT NO. 2304 AT P.O. NAYABAZAR, JALESWAR, DIST.- BALASORE,
ODISHA. - 756032
PH :8599019867.
NIMAPARA
1155. NARAYANI MOTORS PVT. LTD. (CFL1-CFL-01),
PLOT NO. 345/1344, GANESH BAZAR,
NIMAPARA, DISTRICT – PURI, ODISHA. - 752106
PH :9583001877.
SUBARNAPUR
BERHAMPUR
1161. SKY AUTOMOBILES (E203-E2-01), PLOT
NO.80/1191 DHARMA NAGAR, MAIN ROAD,
BERHAMPUR - 760002
PH :7381266000.
BHADRAK
1162. JYOTE MOTORS PVT LTD. (IZ01-IZ-01), PLOT
NO. 14/4837, KHATA NO. 1345/1087,
TRISHALPUR, CHARMPA, BHADRAK , ODISHA 756101
PH :9776615001.
BHAVANIPATNA
1163. LEGEND CARS PVT. LTD. (SW01-TB-02), NH-201,
KESINGA ROAD, BHAWANIPATNA - 766001
PH :06670 -233345.
BHUBANESWAR
1164. JYOTE MOTORS PVT LTD (0402-04-01), A-62,
NAYAPALLI,NEAR CRPF SQUARE,
BHUBANESWAR - 751003
PH :0674-2436829.
1165. NARAYANI MOTORS PVT LTD (0403-04-01), 217,
CUTTACK ROAD, JHARPARA, BHUBANESWAR 751006
PH :0674-572872, 873.
%% ,
&
"$+'%%,2
&&.$
!% $# + $## % " $%$
&&.
$
!% $''%
%' ."
&
&
%
!%%$ ""
%# ,
&%% &
$,$"
!% %'%$ ,
&%
"%+",
,$#
!%% "'#
,
&%/$
)
,
,
)
))
$$"#
!% %#$'" .."
)
,
%
!%'$3 "% " &)&)
,
%%+$ #%%
)
.
&
)
%' !%%""$
,
&'
,
)
!%%% $%%%
$ )
$&&
,
)
$'
!#%%$
% )
"#+"$,
$ %#
!%$" $"#
"'
.,2
$
!#$'" ' (
(
&&
)& "
!''#$# #%'
' 22
#+ #,
'+" &
,
&
$ !%$ "" "
'' 55
-)
,
.
.
&
&)&
.$ !#'' #
## .
,$. &
&&$
!% #'$%%#
# &
''
&
,
%#
!%% %%
' &
%'
!%%"$ "$
' &,
#%#%""+
,
%$
!" #""#+# +#"
' &$$
)&.
.,
&&
)&$ %
!%" '""
'" .
&&
,
)
&,
))&
"
!'$' ' )
"%
!'"$'""$'""$
'$ &(
.
"
5&
"
!'" %""%#
'% .
'
"
!'"
'# "$""
.)
&
$$
!' ""$$$%$$
# &&
,5&
&).&)&
%
!% %%''
# 5
.,&&)&
$
!%# '$ # %$ # # &$'$
.&,
)
&
!'#' $"
#" ,
$$
&,
&"$$
!' % % % $
# &&&
.&
&
!'' ""# ' "%
#$ & &$
!% "$"#$
#% &&
,
"++ '+ "
),
.
)
&
!#' "%
# &((
)
(&"
!%" '$#'$"%%
#' & '
$
!''" "''# &
.
)&
!$ %"$ ,
(,
,
,
(,
)&$ !%"#3 $"
&$"
,&
(/,$ %
!%"' % "
" &&
(
/$ !%" '' " & ,
$ !'' '"$
$ &
&
.,&
&,&
)&$ !%" "$
% &)&)
#
!' % %
,
5"
&&$
"$ !' $ %
' ,
5%
)..&&$
)&"$ !' # & .)
%
!'' $% $%$%"# ' &
"",
,
)&
!'$' " % "% '
"&
%
.
)&
!%$"'' %
# ,)"#$
,,
"
!%##$ ''
" &% %#"
.
$
!% ' $$
&% %$
.%)
%
!% $'$$'#'% #%
,
5 5
&
)
-(,
$ !"$ &$' ((
)&$ !%"' $ #"
" "$""$&,
.,)
!' " "$"$
)
!'"#$ $ $ &)&),
)&
-
)),-
-))&""
!'"##
% &&
"
&)
"$
!'"'' " #
"$/"
5
,
)&%
!' '' ''
'' %%'##% "##
/
% % .
"
!%$"#$"$"#$ $"$
&
% % !% $ "
&
% % !% $ "
" &% %% .
.,,
"
!% $"$ $"$
% "% .,"
!%$ "$$'
$ % "% &
!% "'
% .
% '% $ "
!% $$'" $''"
% "% %
&&
.&
,
.
'
!%# $ "%
' .
% '% &
"
!%$# # .
% '% ",
'# ++
+ +
(,&
$%
.,(
/
)&"
!% ' "$$' $$
" % "% &" +$
)&
.,&)
$
!'' %
"" & $
.&
%$
!'' %####$$##
" 5
,
&
.,
)&' "
!#'""#$%#""
"$ &%" $,
.,&
$ !%" ##$ % "% &#"#
&,
&)&"
!%3$$ "% '#''" "#
" & &
)&
$$$
!%$ % "' %'%
!%"% %'
"# % %
!' $ '#
%$#
! $ '%$'#$ "#
%$#
! $ "#
%"
&%
-)&
!' ''$#
" &
.,
,
!''" "%
&%" )'"&
5
,)&
$ %
!%% $ &
,
(
/
!'" $#%#
% &%" (%
.
& !%$'"% '# '"
"$"$&)
,
!' "$$$$%%%##$ '%"
' ,'( *"%)
(
)&
%
!''##$ '#
# "$") .
!
.)&$
!' ""$$$%%
$ ,
.,
,
$
!'% "
$ ,
&
,
$
!'% ""##' '
$ &%" %" $(
)&
!$ " "
$" &%" %""&
(
!$ "%" "%" "%$% $ &%" %"
(
)&
!$ " #$ " #%
$$ &%""%"
))
&
!$ %
$% &%" " .
)&$
!% $ $''
$ "$$ % )&
!' $'%
$' % "5$
&
'
!% ''$$ ''$
$# &
55&&
,
#
!% '" %
% &,,
&,)
)
!% '''
% &55
&
$"
!%$ %%%"
% ,,
!''##$ ' %" 5
' !% "#% % "$/.
&.
,% %
!' ' %$ &
.
)))
.&
&
$$"
!#%%%#'"'%%%
%% & ,
.)& %
!''" "''## #$'###$'$
% & %
,
"
!''% #" %' )
&&-
,,,,
)&"
!#'''$%
%# &&
, (
/
/ !%' '" "
##
.&/,
)&%"
!#''"$#$
2
2
%
&)
.&
" %
!%%$##$
)
& & )
)"$
!$ %%'
" & "& &
.,&&
)"$
!# $$
& "& ( "
)"$
!# $#
'$ &")
&."
!' '%"%#"$#
$ (#(#,
(
&
."
!" "%
'% (
##
&&
&."#
!#"%$%'
' (
## ($'
&.
"#
!#"%$%' % )).&
)""
! '%$# )%$ #$)
&
&
)
"
! #'' #$'
' 5#"5#)
,.
&." ! #% "
# &
%"&
)
&" $ $
!$" "" ' )%$ % %
&"
! #' %
' ( (
&))
"""
!'$'#'$
' (2(2&%'
5&
&
!."
!'"%$###
'" $)$)&)
&)" !$% %$%
' " "
&.)"
!' $"
'' &" +
,
.+
&)
.&)
&."%
!#% $$
'# &,
""
!$$ '"%'%
# )&
&,
""
! #"# # $
,,
&,
"""
!$ ""'
# &
%( "%&,
" ""
! $$
#" ,
)"
,
,""#
! # "$
# .'
.""" %
!'%#%$"$'"
#$ &
,#,#
+ +&
" ! "$ ##
#% &
..
.
)
""
! " " # "
(()
""
!''$#
#' ("
)
""""
! $'
## ,
//,
)
. "'
!#$#%$'
" ("(
,
"
.-
"""
! "# # " &&
,
'
.
'""'
!'$''
" # "
! #% ""''
"" #""
.
(
"" $
! #$$ "
" ")
.
""$$
!$$ " #$
"$ (
()
& ,
"-
.
"
"
!''$$# "% ,
&'9
,,(
)" "
! + + %
" $ #
)
.)
" !$# "' ,
#'
)" !$$""$"% %$
"# "
)" %
! "%$+ % #
" &
"$)
" ""
! " &"
,
.,
&
)" !"$
" ( )" !$ """#$ $
"" ,
%
(
&)
))" %
!####
" +,)" "#
!"$$$%"
"$ "
$ )-" )" ! % "
"% ,
"&
)
.)
" ! "$
" )$$
"%"
(
&
))
"$
!#" "#%"
"' ,
,
%'#+ %% % "
)
&
)
""
!#'#"%%#
"# &
% &)
,,&
)." %
!" "#
" ("( &
,)
))"""
!$# $ " &&
,
$'$&&.
,
)
&-
-))""" '
!'$'##
"
"
"
"
"
)%$ %$
)
"
! # '$'"" $
" )%$ %$
(
((.
.
)
" "
! # % ,
%$"%$" (
.)
" $
! # '$
$ )%$ %$#&'#
&)
" '
!'#
% )%$ %$ +
&
)
" ! #" $%
" )
& /",
.
,,
"$
!%
"#'
" ' (
#",
&..,
."$
!% "" "
" # &
%%"%
&,
" !$"% "" %%#
"" &
% %
&/
+ ,
" $
! "#%
"" &
%%
",&
,
)" !#""$""%
"" &
%%$%
&,
" !%$#'
""" &
%%%
&$
,
)
" $
!%$
"" #'
&
,
,
)""'
!'$'#" ""$ &
,
',"$'
!#%#$'$'
""% &,/&,/
,
"+"'&
&.
)" %'
!#''# '
"" (5(5,
%#+
&))
.
,-"$$
! "#"#"
""' ,
&&&&
,
),,
"$
!#$#%$%$%
""# "
,
#+#' '+'"&,
!$' ' ' #% " )
& &&
!%".
,,&
&
)"$%
!#""#
" &5 / '
&.!)
"""
! #$" "%
"$ &5 5 &.
,,
)
)"""
! #$ " %
"% ",
$)
""$
!##' %"'$%
" )
&,"
/,
,
,"" "
!$ "$$
"$ &
&/&/
,&
,
$"
)" %$#
!#'$#
"% &&&&
,
$#+"""
))
""$
!%%$ '%
"" (
()
&
( &!&
."$
!''$"$%
"$" &
)2)2
,
.&
)" ""
!$ ####% # #
" .
""$$ "
!$$$ '$
"$ ,,&.
,).
)" $
!#$""%#
"% $
""$'
!$# '
"$ $$(%
5
,
,&,)""'"
!''$$$$
"% )%$ )#",
+
)
"%
! #" $% " ,
&&
,",'#
&
'
)""%
!#% %'%'
"$$ ("(
,
.
" !'$'#%"'
"$% ,
$
)
&'"""
!'%#%#"#%
"$ )
&,,
($)
,"" !$ $$$
"' &
&&
)" %$
!#"# "$' # ,"
'&
"
! # #
"# &,&,
-""$$
!##' %"'$%
"$# )&.&.,
-'%+'
,
.
,
)
)"%
!"%
"$ .,
..
)."'
!#'
"% .
&
,
""$
!$ %% $
"%" )%$ '
),
"%#
! #"" # #'#%#
"%$ ,
(#
,
)"
!" '%#%# $ $ "%% ##
""
! #$"
"% # #
&
((
""
! # #$$$
"%' #"# '
)
""
! #$$ "
"%# &#&#%
,,,"
!"$# %# $ " " " $#
" &# ,)
.,,
)
" !"$#$ $" $ $%#
" ),
(
%%+&
,
&
%%$"
! $ % +#'''$""
" &&
+
),
% !# '" +# '$
"" &
$
$+ ,
&
%"'"%
! "'
" &&&&
#'+,,
,
%"
! ##$"'
"$ ))5
'$*#,
%"
!"$%""%%"$%""%
"% & %"
! $$ $$$
" &$+ &
5&,
%#"
! "%$'' "%$#
"' &%
% ! %$' %$'$
"# &
,
%%
! %%" %% "' & #.
&
&
%$'
! ' +'
"' "%
&
%$'
! %"$#% ##
"' " &
% ! %$' %$'
"'" ""+" &,,
,,
%
!"$## #'"
"' "(
$"
%%%
! %" ""+""
"'$ "$
'&&)
&,,%
! "' '% + "' '$ "'% ,
"
"$
&
%$'
!"$+$#%'
"' ,
$,
&
%
!%$##'# %$##'#%
"'' ,)
% "
%%
! %#$$
"'# %#"
!%$'#"##$%$%'' '"
''$'% "%%
"# $$.
"
)
5,,
&
,,%
!%$ $+%$ %
"# "
" )
%##
!%% %+%% %
"# %+/
,
%
! %%#"++$
"#" #
.
&5
%"
!$$$$
"# ,)
"
%"
!"$ ""+$+%
"#$ &
+
)&,,%
! #$'$+'% ' '#
"#% (
'
"
#+ & &,
%$
!"#" +"#"#
"# ),'%
%#.
,
%%
!""$$+'#"###$$
"#' ,)
' # %#%
!#"#% %+# """
"## ,
$).
,
&%
! % "
&
+" )
-
%#
! $ '$'
"+"
,,
%'#
!'$ +#% "" '
"
%
,,,%$%
! %# #%+ %# #% " ' &,,
,,
%
!#'# ###+#'#'
.
"+&-
,,
.
.,,
%
!##$$
$ %
%%
!" $"
% ),'% .
,,
%#$
!"'#'#"###$
,
%
""
#
&
5%$'
!#"""$
' &$,
&
##+ .
"
,
,,
&
%
! " %% " %%%
# &%,
&
%"
! " $'' " $$
&'$+$$
&
%"
! '$$
&
#,)
5
((
&
%$
! $%"#"
&
"
&
%$
! "$"$
" &
""$$$
&&
&
%
! "$ "$ "
&
"'(#
.
&
%"
! "$'
$ &
"
,
&
% ! ""%%
% ),
'+%'+% )
&
&
% #
! $#
),
',)
,
&
%
! "'" ' &
&"
&
%#
! "#%+0"#% # &
&
"#'+,
&
%
! $"
'
%+ &
%"$
!'$#+'$$#
&"%
&
&
% ! ###'%'+#$# "
' ,
&
%
! '$$ +'$$"
" '"
5
&
%
! " +" '
#$
5
)
&
%$
!
$ &
&
"
,
&,
&
%'
!#$
% ),
+#,
&
% ! %#''##
&
&""'
&
%"
! " $
' &$2$2,&
&
%"
! %## $##
# &
2
)(
%"'%$%
! $'"+""
" 2$ &
.
)
%"%'
!" ""#""
" $
&
$
% !$"#'"
" &
&
"+
%"'
! "$%%+"$%% "" &
&
2"
"'
&%"'%
! '$" +" $
%+ &
,
%" !%#' """#+#' """%
" &&$ &
,
,%" "
!#$ $$"+#%
$
" &&&&
,)
),,
&
% #
! "$%+"$$
"$ ),&/&/
("
% + 5-
,
% !'#"###$$+'#"#'$"# &&
'#+#
,
%" ! %%'$$'#+'$$ "% #+#
%"%#"
!"%## "+## #
" 22
,
%"$#
!" % "' ""+"&&
,
%"
! '"
"
"# %) &
&
,%"$
!% $
+ & 5$ ",
%""
!$%$ " ' " '%
&,,(
$ #+
&
%"#
!" %+% +%"
$ &
.
"
,
% '$
!%" "
% 22"
&
,%"$
!#$%##$$$+' #"'
"%#+ &,&,
,&,
)% $
!"$ $%%%$
' & &
(
% $'
!$ $' $ $
# & ##
,% $$
!$ "'$+$+$ $ $ ,
.
% $%
!$ %'''''
$ $ %,
&&
% $"
!$ %'''''#
$ & % '+$&
,
% $
!$ "'
$" ,
/
$
,
% $'
! '#
$ $+
!
&
%"%"#
! "## $$ %
%#
!"%"$ ""+"$ "%
$% &
%
#
/,,
%"
! $ '$$
$ $ $
"&&
)
,
,,
% #
!%$ " " "%"+'#" """ $' &
&
55
+
,,
%"
! '%"$"$ $# &
&
55"+ +
,,%"
! '%"$$ % 2 ""&&
&
,
%"%
! ## "+#$##$$$
% $
,
-
%"%"#
! #
%
% &
"$)
(
%"
! ""$"""$"
%" &5/&5/
#+-
%"%'
!##"%"
% "$2
''+
"$&&
% !"""%+"%
%$ &""
% "
! $#"" %% "$$ ,
% "
!" %$$%%+%
% & $"
+" )% % $
!$%" % #'
%' &
&
&)&)
!+&
,,
,,%"
! ' "
%# & "" %"%#
! %%#''%###
" + &
)
%"%$
! + ""%$##
(
%+ "&
,
,%"% !#'"#
&&
+$&,,
/,
,
%""
! '" %
" &5&5
" +
.,
((
,,
% $%
!%"% """
'$""'
&
&
&&
$$
",
-%"'-
%"'
!
%+
"%
' ,
..
'&).
(
%%
!#$$$$
' ,)
$
,,,
% ! %% '''
' ,)
$
' # $ % '
'+$'+%"
,,,,
% !##"$#
'" )"
)
((
%
!"%% $ $
$ ,
/
5% 5%" 5
,
% % "
!$% " '
' &.2&.2
$+%&
,
,-
,,-
,,% #
!%$ $ $# '#" '''
% ),&&
$+
.
&,
% $
!%$%'"
),
,$
"(
! "###
' )
%"
!"% " # &5&5
"+$
&
-,
,% '
!%"% $ $
'$ &))
+ +" + +$
+$ +$&
% ' $
!%"# % '% &
52 .,
,
%"
! '' ' # +"% %
' %5"
$
',
,,
,
%%%
!$ #"#
'' """
%
,
% "$
!% "+#$##'
'# &#
&
(
%%
! "$%'%"$%
# ,
)
%%
! " $+ " %
# & " " +
((
% !" % %"
# & " "",
&% $
!" $$$ $%
#" "$ "
'+ $
% #
!" ""%#'"$$$%
# "$ ""&5
% !" $+$"
#$ &%"%
$+&
% '
! "" +"" #% &22 +",
% %
! $ $ +
$"
# ((
++&
-
,%"$"
!## "
#' &52&52
"+.,
,,
,
% !'$ "
## &)&)
#+&%,
&
%"$'
! #$ $ %%#.
&
%" !%%$ ""#
$ &$222 %+
%$%
!% $$#
$ &&&
$%
)
-
%%
!" % %"" ""
$" &&
!"+%"+
&
.
&$
!'" ##'$"'
$ &&&&
),
/&$" !'%"' ' ! %+ %+ $$ $ &(%").
&&
&.
$%%#
!'$###$ %
$% &&
+-
-
$
!## '## '
$ )
.& $%&
,
&&
$ $
!'$%'#%##
$' &&" )
,-
$"
!#'#' $# ' "%+&
.
&
&
!#''% %"
$ * "$$&
&$"
!%$%%$%$
$ #
,
&
$'
!$%
$ # !%$ ,,&
$
!" $ $
$" ,
"&
.)&
)
&$'
!""$""
$ ,
" +
&
,
&$"#
! #" $$ ,
"
%#+$+ +
,(
&$"%
! ""$%
$% ,
"$
%#+# &
&
$
! "" "#"#
$ ''
&&$"
!%
$' '%
/&
&$ !%% '%'''%'%%" $# "
"
&$'
! "$%"
$ ''"'
'
(&
&$
! $ $
# &$%
! %###
%"&
&&$"
!"'"$"'"%"##
$ " %"
&&
&$%
! %%$""
$ %"%
",,
%+(+"
,&$"%
!$$""#$$%%
$ $ %"&
.,,
&&$'
!%$$
$ % &.
&
$
! %
$ $
,,&
.
&$'
!##'$'%%#####
$ ' ,
"'
+ '$+
&,
,&
$%
!#$#$#'
$ # % '"#++&&
&$$#
!'''%$ "# "'''
$" %"
'+
'$,
5
&$%
!##%#'
$" %"
"$+
)&&
$""
!%$$
$" %")
$
!
5
&
$#
!#''$ %$$$
$"" ,
'
""+
&$%
!%%#'$$$$#'
$
$" #"
"$+"$+,
)
&$'#
!## '## '
$"$ )&
"$&
&2-
&
.
&$"
!%'%%%%#'"$$$%
$"% )&
+"%
" "#
,&
&$'
!#'"$$$%
$" ,
' +
&
&
'$
"# (
-,-
-
&$#
!#%
$"' #
"+$
"
&
.
'$
(
5.)
&$'
!#"$
$"# & &"&
&
$ "
!%%'
$ ' $(
:5:
&
$$
!' " %%""
$ ,
"#
"$$""+#&,
,,,!
&$
! "" "
$ '
"""
&$'
!#"""%"
$ ,,
""#&
)
$%%
!'%##$# ""#"
$$ ,5,5
+%&!
,$"
!' $$%%++''+##
$% %%
'%""+&
&)
,
$$
!'' "
$ %%$
'%"+'&
,
$$
!'''''%$
$' 3
3
% ' .
(
.
,$"
!' $# & &
,
&
,
-
$' %
!'%'"'''####$
$$ %"&
.
&
&$ '
!'"% $$$
$$ )
..
&
&
$
!'$ $%#'%%$$ $" %
$ %+
,&
,
)$$" !' '''%$
$$ ..
##"
,
,&
$' !'%'#'##"##
$$" ((
-
-
&-
$$
!## '## '
$$ $'
!'%' "##'#"##
$$$ % "
&
$%
!'"## $ "
$$% $++
&
/&$" "
!'% " '
$$ &
&
"$%)
5
+)
-
-$$
!'$$%#''$ $$#''$ $$' &&$% - $#+&
-,
$$ #
!' ''''%$$
$$# % %% %+ &
,
%-
,$ !#''$ '$$$
$% $
'# +++$
,
$ !'$$ '###"%"
$% ,%,%
&
$$
!$$#
$% (,%%,%
""
&
.
&$
!% #$'$'
$%" ,%%
'"'+"+&
&$%
! #%
$% %",%
%+&
.
&&
&
&&
$%
!##'$$$ $ $%$ ,
,%$,%
&&$#
! ""$ #'"$%
$%% ,%',%
%+%'.,
.
&
$ $
! $ $
$% (,%%,% +&'+-
,
-2&
&
$%' )
..
$(
2
&&
$ %
!'$''#%## $%# 55
"&
(
,
$ "
!'%##%%"'''## '## '
$ #+-
-,
$ "
!$'''%%
##'$ $
$ ((
+" +"+ +#
$
%
$
(
,&
$
$' )
(
&## '#
!#"% "$# $ &&
$&
$"+
.$%%"
!#$#"'
$" &&
" #"+ -
,&
,&-
$
!'%## "#'
$ )
.2.2
#,
.$#"
!'$"#$ '%% $$ $ $ .$%
!' % ""$#
$% $ $"
(
,
.
$%
!' $ ""###$# ""#"
$ &&
$&
&,
#/&,
$
!'$##%%"'''
$' )
%#%#
##"
!"' "$ $# )
%#%#$$'&+
##"
!"' " #"% "$# $' )
%#%#%,
'"
)-,)
&
##'
!"'#"% $$#
$' )
%#"
## $
!"' "#$$"
$'" )
.)
##%
!"' %+# $ $' ,"","
"''
,""
!' $##"$'
$'$ %%'%%'&+&
!$% $"'' $"'' $'% %%"%%
&$.
&
' $
!$% $" $
$' %%"%% ) ' !$% " #$
$'' %%"%%"
%&
' !$% " ## $'# %%"%%
%+ $"),/
, '" "
!#'"#'#
$# %%$%%
,
"' "'%"'"''
. ' !#%##$" $"$+%
$# ,%%%%%
, ' !'#$""'#
$# %%%%$
,
' !$% $ " #%##$
$#" ,%%%%% ,
.).
' !$% $# ,%%%%%"+" &)
&
&
., ' !$% '#$#%%
$#$ , '",
,& # %
!'#"
$#% . '
&
,
,
&,&&,
! $
$# /&%'&% "'"#
!##"$ #$' "$'%
$#' &%&%
&
!$$ $## # # %
& !$" %"%" "%"%
% #" #
)
& !$" #'"'"$
% #" #"$ +"%
,)& % ," -" ,
)! #
!$"%' $
%" ,
2)2)
,
% !# "$"$'
% ,$,$&
/ %
!$% " $"'
%$ ,$,$"-
&--
/ %"'
!#'"' # "
%% ,
&&&&
,
$"$"$" $""
&-
& " !'#$#'
% "$/$,
.
& '
!'%'%%
%' &."$
!$
%,&&
&,
&,,&,
. % !#'"'$#%#% '"
%# ,$& )
& !#'"' #
% 5&5&
&
& !$ %" " % '",",,
.
& !#'"# #'%'
% &.
"$%",
.
.&)&&, $
!#'"'$#%
%" )
'"
,
,& $%
!#'"$'#
% $% $%
& "
!$'$$##
%$ $% $%"&
&
5&
&
"
!$'$' $$# %% ,
$%$%
,
&,)
& "$
!$''$%'
% . %&$
)
& !$$ '% #
%' ' &
!#'"'"%%% %# )
'"%"
(
&)
%
!" %
% ,,
&
&&'
&2
&
- # !'#$%$ '#
% $% (
&.
&" "
!#'"'#'%
%
,
$'$ ,
%
&,
&
!$" "$
% " $ $%,&
&
"
!#$''$%
% ,,
&
55/
.
& ! $
% $ &5,5,
//(
.
& !$ $ % % .%%
"
!$$%'3$'% % 55 $
!#'"#'#
% ' ,
%%,,&
,
. %
!$%'' $ #
% # . ($ ),
.
(/&
!$ '"#"""
%" '",
,(,& #% $
!#'"# #'%'
%" ,&2&2,
"+"),
(&-
'"
!'#$%"
%" , ' ((,
( %
!'#"
%"" ((%,)
),
(
/&
'" "
!$% #%#""$
%" ,,
&
55),
) "$
!#'#%#" #
%"$ &$#'"$#
&
&"
/&
!####'####" %"% ,
&$#'$#
&
,
/&
! "# % %" ,$# $#
+#
"
/& ! %"" %###
%"' $#$#" ,
/&
! "$' ""%" '
%"# $#$# %
/&
! #"''"""##%%%
% .
$#$$#
#%)
/&
/& !$"" %$%
% &'","
,&,
&&/
/ """
!$ "%"%
% . (/),
&
! ""$#'
%" . , "
! %"##%
% . %
&
, "
!$$"##%
%$ . #
,
" #
!# "$
%% %"
"%
! $""## $%$% $%##''$
"# $#
% ,22
,
"
!'#"# "$""
%' %%
/& $
!1
"" "
%# 22
,),
.
!## ##%
%$ 22
%#%$&5&
,.
!%$'$
%$ &%"
!##"$$
%$ &.
55
,
(,,
.
)
'
!%"'# $ %#%#% '"'
%$" ,,)
&
%%,,&,
!#$$#$ %
%$ &%%"% +
) '
!""'
%$$ , '$
"
,&,) # $
!'#"
%$% , ' '#+%&)&
, '
!$ #$#
%$ , ' ' ,
, '
!$ "#
%$' '" ''+$)&
.,
, '"
!$ "#'''""
%$# '" ' %
,, '
!$ %#$%
%% & '% '&
(//, '
!$ %%
%% '" '$''&
,
(
(/), '
!$ "%%
%% & '% '$+%
&,.,
,, '
!'""%$
%%" )
,& !### "#'"'% %% &)/&)/
,.
-).,.
- '"
!$$%%
%%$ . " %%
.
,, ! % $'"++$
%%% &%%)")
'
!#$#%$
%% ,
("'"%+"&
&
,
.
!$ ""%#
%%' ""
,(/&
,
. $
!$ "$#"$# "$'%#
%%# "" &/,
.
%%
!$ "#' $'%"
% ""
",),
.
% !$ 33"%++''%
% &.
"$"+%,
,
. %
!$ "#$
% ," " (/&
,
. $
!$ "$"
%" ," ""
(/&
,
.
%%
!$ "'"'%
% ," "&,
,,
&,
. %$
!##'$
%$ "%"
%
,
,
.,
,
. %
!##''
%% "%""
,
. %$
!#'"#$%
% &.
"$" ,
. % !#'"'$#%
%' "%"
+$,
,
,
.
%
!$ $ #"%%%##' #
%# &.
"$"$
%'&)
&,
. %
!$#' $#'"'$# #
%' &&
,
.
)
!%%#%%%%
%' .
5
))))
"""
!$$ "$'""
%' (
(
.
& % "
!$'% $"'#"
%'" &% .,
& '
!$ ' "#$#%$
%' ,
% ,
$
!# "$ $'
%'$ &
&
,
" %+" -&
-,
.
!##''
%'% ''%'
) ,
% '
!$%$ %""+% #
%' 2'''
!$+),
!#$%''
%'' )
'"'
)
$
! '"'
%'# )
'"' $"
! '""$
%# ' '"$,
&&
$
! %%'' #
%# ' '"
$
! % ' %$''#
%# )
'"'$
,
$
!#$%'""#'"$'#
%#" )
'"'%
,
,
)
,
$
! $$' $$#
%# &
''-&,
(
$
!$%
%#$ %, %,,
/ "
!#$$#%
%#% ($#" )
$'
! " # #$$
%# &.
&.&.,
$'
),
.
"$
!$#$#%%
%#' ,,
&
&&
$,
& !$# '$ '''' ' %## ,,
&
&&"$,
& !# #
,,
&
&&,
$%#$-
,),
&
!'#$%$
#"#$' ,
&
/(( $
!# "
.22
,
$
!$$ '
" (,
'$"
%"
&
! $'+"
),
' $
#&
! $ $ (' $
%"
! % % ('('
#
'
! $""
(""#
"
! ""
' '+#
"
! # #"" $ # $"$"$
$"# # $$%%%"
# "
! # #"" ($#""
"#
"
!#''%%#'$
& & $
-$
"
!'''$$" #''%
%)
%"
&
"
! $'%$
&
&&
!" "#$
" & '% ,
'$
!#" #""
&
& % !#'"'#'%
$ #", ,
)
&
"
!#'"'$$
% ,
%'-,
-&
-&
% !$''#'"'#'%## ," $
$$
,.
)& #""
!$" #"$
' 55
&,
"
!$# ' "
# ,,
&
&% )
#
!$#$# #$ $
&5,&5,
,
' !#'" $
(,#'#
+&+ "
&&/&
!#$%'%'
" ('$# +%
&&
/&#$
! #+ +"%
($#"#
&&
&
.,&& ! +
$ .
'##"
'++&&
/&
! $""#' """
% ,
&
''# $#$./&
&&/& $
!#'" #' #''###
,,
&
&&&&
""),
(
&&
& "
!$# " " ' ..
)&
&,,
.
&& !$'$ # 55
)& !#$'"%
" . . )
!$' """ ""##
" &
5)5),,
3
.
,
%
!"#' $ $ "
" 55 $',
&
(
&
,
&!
(
/& '" "
!#'"#'#$1#
"" 2% ,
.
) %
!#% '
" ,,)
&
,
..$%
(/&& '
!$"% % "$ ,,
&
,
,
,
&
),&&)
),.&
%
!'#$#'$#
"% ," %&
,
.
.
$3
!& #
!#$""'"'
" ."' ,
%,,
.&
!$$ '"% '" '
"' & '%,
&,,
..
#'
!$$"#'"#' $
"# ''' %$"+ &
!$ $%##$ "%
&'"'
&"'+ )
!$ "%"%
' '
!$ $#%' $#%#
' '"
)
'
)&
!#'"'"%%% " )%"2
.&.)
,
)
%"%
!#%"#%'#$
)%"'$
,,
&. %"%
!## '' $ ,,
&
,
#%+ -&
-
&/, % !#'" ' $%
% ,,
&
"(",
., % $ "
!$#%$33 """
$$#'+ !"$ $"""" ' (
.$%$
,
',
&.
'
! # '
# $ $"+
,
'
!"$ $"#$$% $#% %#
$ $ $ $+ ))
,
'
!"$ " +"+
$ $ "
(
." '
!" $$ $ )%")%
)$,
. %""#
!#%"#%'#$
$" )%")% ,&
. %""#
!#%"#%'#$
% ,,
&&
%
!"% ""'
$ ,&
&
% %$+%
. #
!"""%%" " %" ,,
&
",&
%"$"
!$# "
$$ ,,
&
" &/
,
"
!# #' $
% ,,
&
'+$ '+%
,
)
, % $
!'# "$
$% ,,
&
55!,
,&
)
"
(
&
,
, % "'
!'#'"
$ ,&
&
% ""
&,
.
., #
!'$$##'$## '' $' )%""
% $
!#%"#%'#$
$# 55
(
,
,
%"%$
!$#% " $
% (
.%
5)
,
, # !"$ " "'
% ,&
&
",
,
.
&,
,
. %%
!"" " %% %% %
%$ ,&
&
%
!"% $ $ "
%% $ $
'. #
!"% ""
% .
&/
&/
&
&
&
,
.&"% !"$%#'%""""'
%' &,
(%(%
""
!" ""+"+ ""#'##" # $
%# &,
") &
,"
&& !"' %"
&
&%2 $%,
"
/
+
&,.& !" $%%%
.
5/"5/
$ $"
/,,
&
!,
/
%)
-
.
& $
!' &
&
&).$
%&
.)&.
.& %$
!##""$$$"#
" ,,,
&&
.,
,.
&$
!'$''"
&
&5"
,
&
" '
!" ## ##
$ &
&
1
&!&,.&
!##""$$$"#
% .
(
,
",&)
&
&
&&
!&&
!"%" $ $ $ &
2 2
"%+&
)
&,&
.&" "$
!#'#$$
' &&
,,&
&,
,.
.
&
!'""$$"$+' '"
# &,
""" &..&
"
!""##" #$
' &
&
!&,!&
,
.& $
!"
##""$$$"#
' &
&
-
-,
-.&
!#"#"%'#%"$""#%%#
' &
&"
&&
&
.&
!" $$ '" .
&./&./,,,
&/(
"
&.&"%
!"$' $'$%"$$#
' &,
"%$
))
"
!"$# ""$"#$#
'' &
&
&&&&
%$
!" '%' "# ""$ '# &
&55
&,
)
."
!""%%"$ '+'+%
# .
55
).&"$
!"$% $$$ $%%'#$$"# # &
&
&&
"'",
)"#%.
)&
).& $
!'%' ###""$$$"#
# &,
././,
,&
,
1!,
&..&"#
!##" $'"
#" &
))
,
.
$
!)
, "
!"" $' "#+ $' '$ .
(
,
"/
(&." "
!"" $# ""$ # &
&)
""',
'%+ #
/-,1
1-
,..&
$
! $' '#
'% &
&
.
.& !##""$$$"#
#$ &
&
&&)
,.& "
!"
$$$"
' &
&
&2&2)
",
"
"'1
1-
&
/-
&
..& $%
!##""$$$"#''$
#% %'% $+
,,
,
!"" $%'" % '%$%' $%'" $
# %%
"
,
,"#
!"" ' ' "+'
+' % #' .0%$%
&
%#
!"" '""#
## %%
+
,
!""" '$"+'+%+ +$' #'%%
' %% '
,
,%%
!"" #"$$ #"##"
' .
%%
) '&
!
,,
,$'
!""%%%$$$$+ $ "$#
' &
&
%#% "),
,
,"#
!""##"'$ +#'"'#
'" % %%+ ,
,
,%
!"""""
' %% % )
,
,.&$
!""' '"
'$ %%)
"
/)
!
,
##
!' '"
'% .0%$%" + ,
,''
!"" '$'$ "
' % % "$
&
,
,.&$#
!'$'$'#$'$
'' %%%#
&
&&&
,
,$
!""%#%%#%'%##' '"
'# &
&5 '
/
&,),
#,
.
.
, !" "$'
' &
&5)&5)
#+&
&
(&
)
#
!#'"" %$
' &
&
/&.
)
!!.
& %"%
!##""$$$"#
' &
&%#%&
&,
.
,
.&"
!""%##$""+ '
' ),.''
&"" "
!"$ $''' %%"#
'" .
&,
) .&
" "
!' $
' .
(
,
%. ,,
"#
!" $ '$ &
&&.&&.!
(($
/3
"#
! "'
!'$' $'""%#""
'% &,
(%, &
&&
"
!"% $#$$+# ""$"$"
' &,
"""
" '
!"$" $%$""$$
'' &,
""
&. "
!"$" $%'$# 0##" #"
'# ,
" " ""
,
"
!"$" $$"#+ +"
' &
&&&&&
&
!
.& "
!""%%"$$%%"$'$#%$
/
&&
,.
.&
!#'"%' ' " &
& &&
1!
&%!
..
&"%
!'""%"
!
!
!
!
"#
$
"
%
!
!
%%
&
''
(($
"
&
! "
!
!
!!
"
((
!
#
#)!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
)
"
-
%%
&
'
!
"#
!
$#$
"
%%
#
%
)
"$#
!
"
"
%
#
%
%
!
!
!
"
#!
#
$!
!
"
#
-
*$
*!#
#
*"
$$
#"
$$
!
$
"#
$
#&
)$
!
&#
"
%$
#
&%#
"
&%#
!
!
"
"#
)
!
!
!
"
"
+
*
%
%
!
!
!
*
"
"'
#
!
-
$
#
%
"%
#%
!
!
!
"#
/
("
)
+ + !
$%
"#
#
!
$
$
$
%'
!
"#
*!
#!
#$
%
%'
!
!
"
$(
+
#$&
!
0
$
$
#
+ )
"
!
!
-
$"
""
!
#!
!
"
$
$
!
%!!
"%
!
$
!!
+
$
&
%#
$#%#
*##%
%#
!
!
$
"#
**
%&
$#
)#
#
!
!
!
"
$
+
$$&
!
$"$
..
%
#
(
#
"
"
!
!
*)
"#
!
"
%
%
"%
!
!
!
!
!
"
%%
#
*)
"
#$
"%
!
!
$
"&
"$"
!
!
%
"
&&
%
&
"##
"
!
!
#
"
+
%!!
##%
(
!
*)
"
#,
#
!
"
"#
(
#
#&$
#
!
%#(
"#
#
#
%&
#
!
!
"#
$&
)#
%
$!%
!
$
#
!
#
$#
!
$
*$
+
#
#
#
!
"#
*!
#!
**
$
"#
!
!
!
(
$
$
*!
#!
$
%!!
%
+!
)"
"
$
!
%"
%
!
"$(
*
#
$$
!
!
"$(
*
#
(
-
$
!
!
(
$
*$
""
#
! ++
-
#
!
%'
!!!
!
!
*#
&#
*!
#!
#
#
!
#$&
!
!
%
+
$#
*
!
!
"$
#
#!
+
$#
$#
$#
#
!
#
(
!
"
##
$##%&#''%&#''#
#!
##(
$##%#)#(#%%)''
*
##
##
##(
$##%''%###
%
#%'#%#+
")(
$%%%')))%'))&
MEMO
68PH0-74E
MEMO
68PH0-74E
MEMO
68PH0-74E
MEMO
68PH0-74E
MEMO
68PH0-74E
MEMO
68PH0-74E
MEMO
68PH0-74E
MEMO
68PH0-74E
MEMO
68PH0-74E
MEMO
68PH0-74E
MEMO
68PH0-74E
Download PDF
Similar pages